CORNELL -
UNIVERSITY
LIBRARY

 

FROM

“

C.R.Cameron

 

 

 

 
A PRACTICAL COURSE

SPANISH.

BY

H. M. MONSANTO, AM,

AND

LOUIS A. LANGUELLIER, LLD.,

REVISED BY

FREEMAN M. JOSSELYN

DOCTEUR DE L'UNIVERSITE DE PARIS

NEW YORK - CINCINNATI - CHICAGO
AMERICAN BOOK COMPANY
CopyrieHt, 1875,
By H. M. MONSANTO anv LOUIS A. LANGUELLIER,

CoryricHT, 1903,
By CLEMENCE MONSANTO.

Coryricxt, 1903,
By AMERICAN BOOK COMPANY.
E.P. 6
PREFACE.

 

In preparing the present work it has been the aim of the authors,
while excluding nothing of practical value which has already been
placed before the public, to combine with the best features of the
most approved methods the results of their own experience. While
endeavoring to render this work a valuable assistant in the class-room,
they have sought at the same time to adapt it to the purposes of pri-
vate instruction, and in so doing have availed themselves to a great
extent of the admirable plan presented in Woodbury’s Practical
Course with the German Language. Accordingly the lessons are
arranged in the following order : —

1. THE SuBsects oF THE Lesson.

2. EXAMPLES, accompanied by their nearest English equivalents,
and made to illustrate the grammatical and idiomatic principles which
are involved in the Lessons.

3. VocaBuLaRIEs placed before the Exercises, the masculine and
feminine names being grouped separately, and other parts of speecu
arranged alphabetically for convenience of reference.

4. SpanisH Exercises. The sentences in Spanish require only
the application of the instructions contained in the Lesson, or in the
preceding ones, for their translation into English.

5. Enciish Exercises. The analogous sentences in English are
presented in immediate connection with the preceding ones in Span-
ish. The principles applied in the Spanish Exercises are thus made
a most convenient and effective auxiliary in the still more advanced
and difficult work of translating English into Spanish.

6. GRAMMATICAL AND IpIoMaTIC PRINCIPLES. This division may
be employed by means of the references either in connection with the
preceding instructions, or, when not thus required, may be applied
both as a test of the pupil’s previous deductions, and at the same
time as an appropriate and impressive review.

The rules on pronunciation will, it is hoped, be found as complete
as possible, and the selection of sentences in the Exercises an improve-

3
4 PREFACE.

ment on those of many former methods. The conjugation of all the
irregular verbs in general use will be found at the end of the book,
together with a brief sketch on the formation of the Spanish language,
and also a complete dictionary of all the words used in the different
Exercises,

It will be seen that the book does not contain a Second Part de-
voted to a systematic rearrangement of the grammatical facts con-
tained in the several lessons. Such a Second Part is, we believe,
seldom used by students, and we have been careful, as far as possible,
in the construction of our lessons to insert together all the facts per-
taining to each part of the subject. So the course of our book
corresponds very nearly to that which would be adopted in a system-
atic grammar.

While respectfully presenting this work to the public, the authors
indulge the hope that it may prove a welcome auxiliary to the
acquisition of the Spanish language.

H. M. MONSANTO.
LOUIS A. LANGUELLIER.
New Yoak, July, 1875,

REVISER’S NOTE.

Since the publication of Monsanto and Languellier’s Spanish
Course in 1875, the advance in linguistics, and especially the revision
of Spanish accentuation by the Academy in 1888, make a regulation
necessary. For while there are many Spanish grammars before the
public, the present book aims to make the basic principles of Spanish
grammar familiar to the student by constant practice, and repetition
tn Spanish. To this end the English statements of grammatical facts
have been reduced to the smallest compass compatible with clearness,
while the Spanish examples have been made as numerousas possible.

In the revision, the editor has endeavored to preserve the original
form of the work, only recasting such grammatical statements as
seemed to demand it. His especial care has been to present the
Spanish text in accordance with the latest rules for orthography and
accent —rules which have been treated at some length in the intro-
duction, and which involved a complete recasting of that part of the
work.

F. M. J., Jr.
Mapnrip, June 17, 1902.
CONTENTS.

IntRopucTIon oo, & fw eS
§ 1. Letters and Sounds. — Alphabet ae aay ae
§2. Pronunciation . . . . ee oe ee ee
1. Vowels.
2. Diphthongs . ea Bay Re se ES
8. Triphthongs «2. 1. ww ee
4. Consonants . ...... 2... eee
§ 3. Variations in pronunciation . . . . 1...
§4. Double Letters . .......4
§5. Syllables. 2... 2...
§6. Accent .. . ‘ yoe =
§7. Punctuation . ..... Wrouks arcincoe new eos
§ 8. Capital Letters . oe
§ 9. Exercises in Pronuneiation by. Gs tik cin fo tee BT ds
Lessons :
I. Article, different Forms .......-.

fT.
III.
IV.
Vv.
VI.
VII.
VIII.
1x.
X.
XI.
XII.
XII.
XIV.
XV.
XVI.
XVII.
XVIII.
XIX.
Xx.
XXI.
XXII.

Plural.

Contraction of Preposition with Article BS GeP eo eb
Pronouns .. a ee ee ee ee ee
Verbs ser and estar « & & ie & Se & &
Use of the Prepositions de and pare .

The Negative . . .. * %
Adjectives; Formation of the Henautne eis

Place of Adjectives . . . .

Diminutive and angmentative? Nouns
Adjectives, Comparative and Superlative Relative
Superlative Absolute. Adjectives and Adverbs

Possessive Adjectives . . . . - . ee
Possessive Pronouns . . . . + + + «
Demonstrative Adjectives . . . . + 2. « e
Demonstrative Pronouns . . . . + + s+ + ees
Auxiliary Verb haber . . ia ke ee ey
Auxiliary Verb haber (emtinwed) ee oy ar
Gerund ..... . SS es

Cardinal Numbers ...... -

Ordinal Numbers. . . - + © e+ ee

Pronouns in Simple Tenses

5
XXIII.
XXIV.
XXV.
XXVI.
XXVII.
XXVIII.
XXIX.
XXX.
XXXI.
XXXII.
XXXIITI.
XXXIV,
XXXY.
XXXVI.
XXXVILI.
XXXVIII.
XXXIX,
XL.
XLI.
XLII.
XLII.
XLIV.
XLV.
XLVI.
XLVI.
XLVITI.
a

ur
LIT.
LIII.
LIV.
LV.
LVI.
LVII.
LVITII.
LIX.
LX.
LXI.
LXII.

CONTENTS.

Relative and Interrogative Pronouns . . « « « « +
Auxiliary Verbs, haber, tener . . . . . +s
Idiomatic Uses of tener . . 2. 1. 1 we
Auxiliary Verbs, ser, estar . é ‘

Haber and ser used as Impersonal Verba . i ce Gan ae

The Time of the Day, et. . . 2. 1. 1.

Use of the Article . . .. : ‘
Personal Pronouns with Prepositions and Verbs 3

The Respective Place of Pronouns

Regular Verbs, Present Indicative . ee os oe
Irregular Verbs of the First Conjug., Present Indicative
Irregular Verbs of the Second Conjug., Present Indicative
Irregular Verbs of the Third Conjug., Present Indicative
Tinperfeet Tense, Indicative Mood . . . ‘
The Past Definite or Preterit, and the Past Indefinite
Irregularities of the Preterit . .

The Past Anterior and the Pluperfect (Indicative)

The Future and Future Anterior. . . . . . .
Subjunctive Mood. Present . .....4.4..
Imperative Mood .

Subjunctive Imperfect ena Pluperfect . ‘i

Conditional Mood. . . A ; : ;
Subjunctive Future and Harun Per feet a gon Qo
Infinitive Mood . . fn Te ees

The Infinitive governed by Prepositions a Se
The Gerund and Present ae oo Ge ay dente, ae RS
The Past Participle . . . Be gtceas ee “Ge. 9e

The Past Participle (continued) « 3 OR Se i
The Passive Verb . . . i as : Se a
Reflexive Verbs . . ox ‘ ‘ ‘

Reflexive Verbs (continwed)
Periphrastic Verbs
Impersonal Verbs,
Government of Verbs
Government of Adjectives .
The Adverb .

The Preposition

Defective Verbs ‘i
Agreement of the Verb with ae Subject -
Conjunctions and Interjections

TABLE OF TERMINATIONS OF THE THREE REGULAR Consueattoxs 4
List oF THE PRINCIPAL IRREGULAR VERBS . , . . .
FORMATION OF THE SPANISH LANGUAGE
GENERAL VOCABULARY Se BOS eS

1, Spanish-English . 2. * . 1. 2... ee

2. English-Spanish «2 ¢ « #8 © 6 6 & @% sw w ee %

Pace
129
136
143
149
156
161
165
171
176
180
183
188
193
199
203
209
215
218
223
229
234
241
248
250
258
261
266
271
275
279
286
290
295
299
302
306
312
318
320
323
326
328
370
373
373
386
INDEX.

The heavy-face figures refer to the Lessons, the light-face figures to the Runs; as,

for instance, 3. 1-3 denotes Lesson 3, Rules 1-3, &c.

to, p. or § is given with the figures.

or An, 1.3.
, 3.1. When used with active verbs,
. 3. When not used with an active

verb, 18.4; 20.6; 23.2. When used
with el cual (/a cual, etc. ),23.6. When
used before a following Infinitive, 46.
p. 254, 2. Used after volver, 48. 9
an fine. Used with some Periphrastic
verbs, 54,1-6. Complement of another
Preposition, 59. p. 314, Its use, 59. 1.

Ablative absolute, 49. 5.

Accent, p. 20.

Agoussye case, 22.6; 23. 26;
30. 2; 31.1

Active eee. ‘si, 1, 2. Becoming a
Reflexive Verb, 5: i. When becom-
ing an Impersonal Ferd, 55. 2.

Adjectives, repeated before nouns, 1.
4. Plural formed as with nouns, 2. 9.
Formation of the Feminine, 8. 1-5.
Referring to two nouns in the singular,
8.6. Referring to two nouns of differ-
ent genders, 8.7. Used substantively,
8. Place of Adjectives, 9.14. Used
also as nouns, 9.5. Comparative and
Superlative, 11, 12. Government of
euiectives, 57. 1-7. Used as adverbs,

08. 9.

Adonde. See donde.

Adverbs, Comparative and Superlative,
11. 12; 13. 9, Rem. 3. Different
sorts of Adverbs, 58. pp. 308, 309.
Their place, 58. 1. Their formation,
58.2. Used oe or augmen-
tatively, 58. 8.

Ago, its translation, 27. p. 157.

Agreement of the case With its sub-
ae 61.

= Aia’s.

neg

Algo, when used with tener, 25. 3.

Algfin. See alguno.

Alguno (algunos, alone algunas),
4.8; 7.9, and Obs. : 9. 6, Rem. 1.

fh. esté and hay, p. 158.

Alphabet p. 13, § 1.
‘An or A, 1.3.

Andar, ‘when it may be used instead of
ir, 48. 4.

Ante, its use, 59. 2.

Afios, used with tener, 25. 4.

Any, 4. 8.

 

When page or section is referred

Aquel, aquella; este, esta; ese, esa.
Their different meanings, 15,

Aquello, eso and esto, their different
meanings, 15, 16.

aa Definite, 1. Indefinite, 1. 3.

3, em. 2. Not separated from the
Hag formative or Relative Pronoun,
16.8 When omitted, 23.7. Its use,
aos reset used with an infinitive, 46.
13,

Augmentative nouns and adjectives,

Buen. See Bueno.

Aue, 9. 6, Rem. 1.

Can, 4

Cardinal numbers, 20. When end-
ing in og and as, 20.2 When used
with y, 20. 3. When ae instead of
ae ordinal 1 numbers, 21, 4, Obs.; R.

on p. 16, § 3.

Gien. See Ciento.

Ciento, when canny cien, 20. 4.
Used with mil, 20. 8

Collective noun, when put in the sin-
gular or in the plural, 61. 8.

Collective numbers, 21.

Collective partitive, 61. 8.

Como, when governing the Infinitive
mood, 47. 2.

Compound tenses,
Verbs,

Comparative, its formation, 11. 1-9.

Comparative and Superlative,

in Reflexive

, 12.
Compound gerund, 48. 6, 8.
Compound nouns, 4. 5-6.

Con, when used before a following In-
finitive, 46, p. 255, 8; 48. 5, 3, Note.
ola gree of an Adjective, 57. 4.
Its use, 59. 3.

Conditional, 44.

Conjunctions, requiring the Subjunc-
tive mood, 41.5. List of the principal
Conjunctions, 62.

Conmigo, 30. 11.

Conocer, and Saber, 14. 9.

Consigo, 30. 11.

Contigo, 30. 11.

Consonants, p. 15, § 3.

Contents, pp. v, vi.

Could, 44. 17, 2.

Cual, when used wien va 23. 7 e@.
Cual and que, 23.
8 INDEX.

CuAl, Interrogative Pronoun, 23. 11.
Cuando, used with Subjunctive future,

Cuanto (cudnta, ts cudntas), how
translated, 23. 1
Cuyo, its uses, 23. a As an Interroga-
tive Pronoun, 23.1
ua ao suppressed a Reflexive Verbs,
7.

Dative case, 30. 2; 31. 1, 2, 4.

Days of the ‘week, 20.

De, 3. 1, 2; 6. 1-3. Used with the
Definite Article before pronouns, 14.
46. Used with ser, 14.8. Used with
tener, 25. 2. When used before a
following Infinitive, 46. p. 254, 5, 9, 10,
3, 11. Used after a Past Participle,
49. 7. Used with some Periphrastic
Verbs, 54. 1, 5. Preceded by a verb,
56.1, 2. Complement of au Adjective,
57. 1-4, 7. Complement of another
Preposition, 59. p. 314. Its use, 59.4.
Used after a a ad noun, 61. 8.

D6 and ae, § 6, 10

Deber, 18

Defective verbs, 60.

Definite article, 1. 1, 21; 13.5, 7.
Used with de, 14. . Used with
verbs expressing moral or physical
properties, 25.6 and Obs. When used
to sranetits on, 28.3. Its use, 29,

Del, 3.1

De Ta, 3.1.

De las, 3.1.

De los; 3. 1.

Demonstrative adjectives, 15.
1-3. Generally precede the noun, 15
2. Must be repeated before every noun,

3.

Demonstrative pronouns, 16.

Descriptive Tense, 36.

Diminutive nouns and adj ectives,

10.
Diphthongs, p. 14, § 2.2; § 6.5.
Direct ahleot pronouns, 30. 1-12;

1, 1-2; 52.1,

Dizsions of the day, 20. p, 113;

. p. 162,

Doble. See p. 118 (Multiplicative Num-
bers).

Don, 9. 6.

Doifia, 9. 6

Donde, when preceded by 4 (4 donde),
and by en (en donde), 15. 4. Used
as a Relative Pronoun, 23.10. When
governing the Infinitive, 47. 2.
ouble letters, p. 19, § 4.
and y, 18.

an A 1. Used (by euphony) instead of
a,

El de 61 (or de ‘ella, de ellos, de ellas).
ee instead of el suyo, la suya, etc.,

13. 5.

1 (or 1a, los, las, lo) de V., 14. 4.

, 4.6; 13.5.

1'and el p. 20, § 6. 10; 4. 6,

El cual (ta cual, etc.). “When used and
how, 23. 6.

 

Ella, 4.6; 13,5.

Ellas, 4.6; 13.5.

Ello, ‘used instead of im 16. 9.
ere y to a 3o*

Ellos, 4

El suyo, la: bare, al instead of vuestro,
vuestra, 14. 3,

En, used with a gerund, 19. 8 and Obs.
When used before a following Infinitive,
46. p. 254, R. 5. Its use as a Preposi-
tien, 59. 5.

En donde. See Donde.

Hyaliah-Spenish Vocabulary, p.

Cor-

Ese, esa; este, esta; aquel, aquella;
their different meanin, 3,15, 16.
Eso, esto and aque 2 their differ-
ence of meaning, 16. 1
Estar, used with a oe Participle.
18. 1. Used with a gerund, 19. 3.
Not used with ser, ir, venir, 19. 4.
Its gerund often preceding another
erund, 19,9. Used instead of tener,
5. 1, Obs. a, b, c. Its conjugation,

Estar and ser, 5, 1-3. Used instead of
tener, 25.1, Obs. a, b,c. Their con-
jugations, 26.

Este, esta; ese, es2; aquel, eanen ae
their different meanings, 15.1;

Esto, eso, and aquello, their ane
ence of meaning, 16. 1,

Exclamation-point @s P. 2, § 7, 2.

Exclamatory phrases,

Feminine gender, 1.1.

Formation et the Spanish lan-
guage, pp 3 72.

rractiona. nae ah

ruture anterior, 40. 6.

ruture perfect, 43.

future tense. Its formation, 40.

1-4, When used instead of the Impera-

tive, 40.5. Subjunctive future, 43. 1.

Genders, 1. 1 and General Obs.

General ‘Vocabulary, Spanish-Eng-
lish, p. 373. English-Spanish, 386.

Genitive case, 30. 12.

Gerund. See Present Participle.

Government, of Verbs, 56. oe Ad-
jectives, 57. Of Adverbs, 58. 6. Of
Prepositions, 59.

Gran. See Grande.

Grande, 9. 6, Rem. 3 and note.

Haber, iz: 1 2. Cannot be separated
from the principal verb, R.1. Its con-
jugation, 24. Used as Impersonal Verb,
27.1, and translated by ago, there
to be, since, this, there, etc.,
27.2. Expressing an actzon or a state
which still continues, p. 157. Express-
ing measure or distance, p. 157. Used
with que before an puma 27. 3.
Used impersonally, 55. p.

Heese and tener, 1704 e oe Their con-

eo 24.
er de, 18. 2.

Hacer, when used instead of haber,

27.2, Obs. When followed by an In

 
INDEX. 9

finitive, 46. 12. Used impersonally,
55. p. 298.

Hay and allf estd, p. 168.

Hijos mfos! 13. 9.

Holidays, 28. p. 162.

How, exclamatory, rendered by que,

Imperative mood, 4]. 1-7. Used
with pronouns, 41. p. 224, 3, 6. Of
Reflexive Verbs, 52. 7.

Imperative-afirmative, 31. p.177; 41.
1-7. -Negative, 31. p. 177; 41. 5, ¢, 6.

Imperfect, of the Indicative, its for-
mation, 36, p. 199; its use, 36. 1-3.
General Obs. on the Imperfect of the
Indicative, 37.7. Of the Subjunctive,
ag three forms, 43. 1; its use, 43. 2,

5.

Imperfect conditionals, 44. 2.

Impersonal verbs, 55. 1-4. Essen-
tially or Accidentally Impersonal Verbs,
55. 2. Peculiarities of some Imper-
sonal Verbs, 55. 4.

Indefinite article, 1.3. When omit-
ted, 5.4 and Obs.; 29.8. Exceptions,

15.

Indicative mood, Present, 32. 35.
Imperfect, 36. Preterite or Past Defi-
nite, 37. Past Anterior, 39. Pluper-
fect, 39, Future and Future Anterior,

Indirect object, 52.1, 2, 4.

Indirect object pronouns, 30. 1,
2, 9-12; 31. 1-4.

Infinitive mood, 46,47. When used
as a noun, 46. 13; with or without the
Article, 14. Governed by Prepositions,
47.13; by the conjunctions como,
que, the adverb donde, or an Inter-
rogative Pronoun, 2; rendered by the
Present Indicative or the Subjunctive
Mood, 3. When may be used instead of
the Gerund, 48. 3,5, Note. When used
with con, 48. 5, 2, Note.

Infinitive, preceded by que and ha-
ber, 27. 3.

In order to, 46. 6.

Interjections, 62.

Interjectional phrases, 62.

Interrogation-point (é), p. 22, § 7, 1.

Interrogative pronouns, 23, When
governing the Infinitive, 47. 2.

Interrogative sentence, 4, 7.

Ir, not used with estar, 19.4. Used
with an adverb, 35. 7. Used with
por, 35. 7, Obs. Imperfect Indica-
tive, 36. pp. 199, 200. When it may be
used instead of andar, 48.4. When
it may be used instead of estar, 51.7.

Irregular verbs, first conjugation,
33.1-4; second conjugation, 34, 1~10;
third conjugation, 35. 1-9. 2h

Irregular verbs, list of the principal
Irregular Verbs, pp. 328-369.

Irse, 53. p. 288. i :

It, sometimes not rendered in Spanish,
16. 10. Different ways of translating
it, 22. 6.

 

Its, 13. 6.

Jamas, used with no, 7.3. Jamé4s
and nunca, 3-5.

La, 1. 1-2; 13, 4. As a Pronoun in
Simple Tenses, 22. 1-2. In compound
tenses, 22. 3. Joined with the Infini-
tive and Gerund, 22. 4 and p. 124.
Placed after the verb, p. 124. When
translated by it, 22. 6. Used with
una to translate one o’clock, 28. 1.

Las, 2. 1; 13. 4. As a Pronoun in
Simple Tenses, 22.1,2. In Compound
Tenses, 22.3. Joined with the Infini-
tive and Gerund, 22. 4 and p. 124,
Placed after the verb, p. 124. When
translated by them, Used with a
numeral to indicate the time of the day,

Le, used in Simple Tenses, 22.1,2. In
Compound Tenses, 22. 3. Joined with
the Infinitive and Gerund, 22. 4 and
p. 124. Placed after the verb, p. 124.
When translated by it, 22. 6. Used
with a pronoun and V.. or VV., 30. 7.

ae , grammatical translation of ¢o them,

Li, p. 17, § 3.

Lo, 1. 1, 2 and Rem. 1, 2. Used with
Possessive Pronoun, 14.7. As a Pro-
noun in Simple Tenses, 22. 1, 2. In
Compound Tenses, 22. 3. Joined with
the Infinitive and Gerund, 22. 4 and
p- 124. Placed after the verb, p. 124.
Declinable and undeclinable, p. 125;
22.5. When translated by it, 22. 6.

Los, 2. 1; 13, 4. As a Pronoun in
Simple Tenses, 22.1, 2. In Compound
Tenses, 22.3. Joined with the Infini-
tive and Gerund, 22. 4 and p. 124,
Placed after the verb, p. 124. When
translated by them, 22. 6.

Mal. See Malo.

Malo, 9. 6, Rem. 1. 8

Mandar, when followed by an Infinitive,

. 12,

Mas de, 20.7.

Masculine gender, 1.1.

May, 44. 11, 1. 2

Medio (media), used to indicate the
time of the day, 28. 1.

Medio and mitad, 21.7.

Menos, used to indicate the time of the
day, 28. 2.

Menos de, 20. 7.

M{ and mi, p. 20, § 6, 1.

Might, 11, 2, 3.

Might have, 44. 11, 7.

MiL when used in the plural, 20. 5.
Used with ciento, 20. 8.

Mio, 13. 9. i

Mismo, misma, used with a Posses-
sive Pronoun, 14.2. Used with a Dem-
onstrative Pronoun, 16, 5.

Mitad and medio, 21. 7.

Months of the year, 21.

Moods, Indicative, 32-40. Impera
tive, 41. Subjunctive, 42-45, Infint
tive, 46-50.
10 INDEX.

Multiplicative numbers, 21.

Nada used with ni, 7. 6. Meaning not
anything, 7.11, Obs. When used with
tener, 25: 3. :

Nadie used with ni, 7.6. Meaning not
anybody, 7.11, Obs.

Narrative tense, 37.7. :

Negative, 7. Double negative,
7.2. Two negatives after the verb, 7.7.

Neuter article, 1. 1 and Rem. 1, 2.

Neuter gender, 1. 1 and Rem. 1, 2.

Neuter verb, when becoming a Re-
flexive Verb, 52.1. When becoming
Impersonal Verb, 55. 2, 3.

Ni used with jamas, nunca, nada,
nadie, etc., 7. 6. Requiring the
plural, 61, 2.

Ningtn. See ninguno. :
Ninguno (ningunos, ninguna, nin-
gunas), 7. 9 and Obs. ; 9.6, Rem. 1.
No, put before the verb, 7.1. When
omitted, R. 2, Obs., R. 3. Used by
emphasis with an affirmative sentence,
7. 8 and Note. Put at the end of a

sentence, R. 10.

Nos, when becoming no, 30. 8.

Not anybody, 7. 11, Obs.

Not anything, 7.11, Obs. .

Nouns ending in o, a, cion or tion,
tad or dad. See 1. 5, General Obs.
Having no plural, 2. 9. Having no
singular, 2. 9.

Nos and nosotros, 4. 2.

Nosotros and nos, 4. 2.

Numbers. See Cardinal, Ordinal,
Collective, Fractional, and Mul-
tiplicative numbers.

Nunea used with no, 7. 3.

~and jamas, R. 3, Obs.

N, p. 17, § 3.

, when requiring the Plural, 61. 2.
and ti, 18. p. 104.

Object before the subject, 4. 5. Pre-
ceded by a cardinal number, 20. 6.

O'clock, its translation, 28. 1.

On, when translated in Spanish by the
Definite Article, 28. 3.

One, 1.3.

Ordinal numbers, 21. Agree in
gender and number with the noun,
21.1. When used without the Article,
21.4. When used instead of a Car-
dinal Number, 21. 5.

Otro, 16. 4.

Para, 6.3. When used before a follow-
ing Infinitive, 46. p. 254, 6. Its use,
59. 6.

Para siempre used with jamas, 7.5.

Participio absoluto, 30. 3.

Participio de Preterito, 48. 6.

Participio pasivo, 49. 3.

Participios activos, 48. 1.

Participios de presente, 48. 1.

Participle. See Present Parti-
ciple and Past Participle.

Passive verb, 51. 1-7.

Past Anterior, its formation, 39, 1.
Its use, R. 2 and Obs. 1, 2.

Nunca

 

Past Definite. See Preterite.

Past Indefinite, 37.1, 5-7.

Past Participle, ends in Regular Con-
jugation, viz., in ado for the first con-
jugation, and in ido for the second and
third conjugations, 17. 5; 49. 1. Ir-
regular Past Participles, 18. Agrees
with its subject, when accompanied by
estar, 18. 1. Always formed regu-
larly in the Irregular Verbs of first con-
jugation, 33. 3. Irregular Participle,
49. p- 269. Having sometimes an
active meaning, 49. p. 269. Considered
as an Adjective, 49. 2, 4. Invariable
when joined with haber, 49.3. Used
as an abbreviation of the Gerund, 49. 5,
6, and Note. Preceded by a preposi-
tion, 49. 6, and Note. Requiring after
them de or por, 49. 7. Having 4)
active and a passive meaning, ao. 3.
Used as feminine nouns, 49.9. Verbs
having two past participles, one regular
and one irregular. Their different uses,
50. p. 274 and R.1. When invariable,
51.5, 6. Used as adjective governs de
or por, 57. 6. .

Perfect of the subjungtive, 42, 12.

Periphrastic verbs, 54.

Pero and sino, 18. 5.

Personal pronouns, used with prepo-
sitions, 30. 1-3, 9-11. Used with verbs,
ao: co Used with Reflexive Verbs,

. 1, 2.

Plural of nouns, 2.2-9. Of adjectivea, 8,
Used with verbs, 61. 1-3, 6.

Pluperfect, of the Indicative, 39. 3,
and Obs. Of the Subjunctive, 43. 2,
Obs., 6; 44. 9.

Ponerse, 53. 2.

Por, used with ir, 35.7, Obs. Used
with comenzar, empezar, and
acabar, 46. 4. Meaning on account
of or because; meaning instead of,
47. 1. Used after a Past Participle,
49.7. Used after an adjective, 57. 4,
Its use, 59. 7.

Por siempre used with jamAs, 7. 5.

Possessive adjectives, their agree-
ment, 13. 1. Repeated before every
noun, 2. Not used after a noun, 13. 9.

Possessive pronouns, 14. Their
agreement, 14,1. Used emphatically
with mismo, misma, propio, pro-
pia, 14.2. Used with lo, 14. 7.

Postrer. See Postrero.

Postrero, 9.6, Rem. 1; 21, 2.

Potential, 46, 11.

Preface, pp. iii, iv.

Prepositions, 30. 1-3, 7,9, 10. Must
be repeated before every pronoun, 30.
11. Preceding a Past Participle, 49. 6,
and Note. Following a verb, 56. 1, 2.
Following an adjective, 5'7. 1-7. Pre-
ceded by an adverb, 58. 6. Requiring
de after them, 59. p. 314 Requiring
& after them, 59. p. 314.

Prepositional phrases, requiring
de after them, 50. p. 314,
INDEX. 11

Present indicative, 31. 1-5. Used
instead of the Future, 32. 2. Used
instead of the Past Tense, 32. 2. Its
formation in Regular Verbs, 32. 4,5;
in Irregular Verbs of First Conjugation,
33.1, 2,4; in Irregular Verbs of Second
Conjugation, 34, 1-10; in Irregular
Verbs of Third Conjugation, 35. 1-9.
‘When used concurrently with the Pres-
ent Subjunctive, 42. 6,9. May govern
the Conditional, 44. 8. When used
instead of the Present Indicative, 47. 3.

Present Participle, or Gerund,
ends (in Regular Verbs) in ando for
the first conjugation, and in iendo for
the second and third conjugation, 19, 1.
Present Participle of verbs ending in
eer and uir, 19.2. Used with estar,
19. 3. Its use, 19. 5-7. Used with
en, 19. 8, and Obs. Used with the
Present Participle of estar, 19. 9.
Used instead of an adverb, conjunction,
or preposition, 19,10. Always formed
regularly in the Irregular Verbs of
First Conjugation, 33. 3. When used
after another verb, 46. 4 and Note, 8
and Note. Has two forms, the one in
ante or ente and the second in ando
or iendo, 48.1. When used concur-
rently with the Infinitive, 48.3. When
translated in English by the conjunc-
tions as, since, if, and the adverbs
-when, while, whilst, 48. 7, and
by como, luego, que, cuando,
asi que, 7, Note. Its use, 48, 1-8.
When ending in endo, 48. 9. Con-

__ sidered as an adjective, 49. 2.

Present subjunctive, its formation,
42. p. 229. Its use, 42, 1-11. When
used concurrently with the Present
Indicative, 42. 6, 9, or with the Imper-
fect Subjunctive, 43. 3, 4.

Preterite or past definite, its forma-
tion, 37. p. 203. Its use, 37. 1-4, 7.
Its irregularities, 38. 1-5. Used with
the Past Anterior, 39. 2, Obs. 1.
When requiring the subjunctive mood,

44. 9.
Preterito perfecto, 42. 5, a.
Primer. See Primero.
Primero, when becoming primer, 21.
2. When used instead of uno, 21.
Primo, when used instead of primero,

Pronombres inelf{ticos, 30. 1, 2,

46,9; 31.2.

Pronombres indirectos, 30, 1, 2.

Pronouns left out in conjugating a
verb, 4. 6. Their respective places,
31. 1-3. Accompanying Reflexive
Verbs, 52. p. 282; object, 52.5.

Pronunciation, p. 14, §2. Exercises
p. 22, § 8. D ? :

Propio, propia, used with a Possessive

‘onoun, 5

Punctuation, p. 22. § 7.

Que as a Relative Pronoun when used as
a@ subject, 23. 1. When used as an

 

Accusative, 22.2. When accompanied
by el (or Ja, los, las, to), 23.3. Is
never suppressed, 23.4. May precede
the person or object, 23.4, Obs. When
preferable to quien, 23.5, Obs. Used
as an exclamation, 23.12. Used with
haber and an Infinitive, 27.3. Can
never be understood, and must be
repeated before every subordinate verb,
42.4 and Obs. When used with the
Present Indicative, 46,1. When gov-
erning the Infinitive, 47. 2.

Que and cual, 23. 3. 2

Qué, Interrogative Pronoun, 23. 11.

Quedar, when may be used instead of
ser, 51. ‘

Qué de, when used, 23. 13.

Quien, used instead of gue, 16.7. Re-
lating only to persons, 23. 5.

Quién, Interrogative Pronoun, 23, 11.

Quienes. See Quien.

Quitarse, 53. 2.

Bagnrocet or mutual action,

Reflexive verbs, 52. 1-9. Being
conjugated with two Personal Pronouns,
52.1. Essentially Reflexive Verbs and
Accidentally Reflexive Verbs, 52. 2, 8.
Their different meaning, 52.8,9. Verbs
being Reflexive in Spanish and not in
English, 52.3. Being conjugated with
another verb, 52. p. 283 and R. 4. Ex-
pressing a reciprocal or mutual action,
52.6. Referring to parts of the body,
53. p. 288, and R,. 1. Requiring de
after them, 56. 2.

Regular verbs, table of their termina-
tion, p. 328, 329. See Verbs.

Relative pronouns, 23. When re-
qniring the Subjunctive Mood, 42. 9.

S, when suppressed in Reflexive Verbs,
52. 8.

Saber and conocer, 14. 9.

San. See Santo.

Santo, 9. 6, Rem. 2 and Obs.

Se, 31. 3,4. Used with a passive sen-
tence, 51. 3.

S6é and se, p. 20, § 6, 1.

Seasons, 21.

Sefor, 9. 6.

Senora, 9. 6.

Ser, used to express possession, 14. 8.
Used without adjective, is accompanied
by de, 14. 8. Not used with estar,
19.4. Used instead of tener, 25.1,
Obs. a, 5, c. Its conjugation, 26.
Used as Impersonal Verb, 27.1. Im-
perfect Indicative, 36. pp. 199, 200.
Used with Passive Verbs, 51. 1.

Ser and estar, 5. 1-3. Used instead of
tener, 25.1, Obs. a, b,c. Their con-
jugations, 26.

Ser de m4&s edad, 25. 4, Obs.

Should, 44. 11, 2, 4.

Should have, 44. 7.

Should like to, 44. 11, 5. |

Si, when used in the subjunctive (or con-
ditional), 44. 24; 45.1.
12 INDEX.

Singular, when the subject is put in
the singular, 61 4-8.

Sino and pero, 18. 5.

Solamente, when used instead of sino,
18. 6.

Some, 4. 8.
Si and si, oe
set ocltae icsisbulanak p.

13. 3, 6.

Subject’ or nominative, 52. 1.
Bunie subjects are not of the same
peraon, 61. 4. Composed of two In-
finitives, 61. 5.

Subjunctive mood, 42-45. Pres-
ent, 42. Imperfect, 43. Pluperfect,
43. Conditional, 44. Potential, 44.
1. Future, 45. Future Perfect, 45.
When used instead of the Infinitive,
47. 3. Required after some preposi-
tions, 57. 2.

Superlative and comparative, 11,

12.
Puperiaiye absolute, its formation,

ree Rus

uyo, 9%

Syliabies, p. 19, § 5.

TL when used with eask, 23. 7, ce.

Tener, 9.5; 17.1,3. Ita conjugation,
24. Its idiomatic uses, 25. 1, 2-5, 7, 8.

Tener and haber, 17.1. Their con-

jugations, 24,

fener algo malo, 25. 5.

fener mas edad, 25. 4, Obs.

Tener que, 18. 2; 25. 8.

Percer. See Tercero.

Tercero, 9.6, Rem. 1; 21. 2, Obs.

Tercio, when used instead of tercero,

That of, 16. 6.

That which, 16.7

Them, how to translate its 22.6.

The one which, 16. 7.

There to be, how translated, 27.2.

They, sometimes not rendered in Span-
ish, 16. 1

Those of, \6. 6.

Those which, 16. 6.

aie of the day, how indicated, 28.

Sus.

34549484

 

To, meaning in order bey. 46. 6.

To be mone 7 a: 2,0

ede. 27. p.1

To them, how Z translate it, 22. 6.

Transitive verb, 51. 1, 2.

Triphthongs, p. 15, § Z. 3.

Triple. See p. 118 (Multiplicative Num-
bers) and 21. 8.
a, 4.1.

Tuyo, 13. 9.

U and o, 18.

Un. See Uno.

Uno, una, 1. 3; 9. 6, Rem.1. Their
plural, 20. 1. When dropping its o, 1.

 

3; 20.4. Una_used with la to indi-
cate one o’clock,
Usted (or V. ), 4. 3 and ots R.6; 13.
3,4. Used with le, 30.7
Ustedes (VV.), 4.3 and. Note, R. 6;
13. 3,4. Used with le, 30. 7.
Venir, not used with estar, 19. 4
Venir por, 35. 5, Obs., R. 7, Obs.
be Imperfect Indicative, 36. pp. 199,

Verbs » conjugated interrogatively, 4.
4, 5. Conjugated without pronouns,
4. 6. First conjugation ending in ar,
second conjugation in er, third in ir,
17. 4. Present Indicative, 32-35.
Imperfect Indicative, 36. Past Definite
or Preterite, 37. Past Indefinite, 37.
Past Anterior, 39. Pluperfect Indica-
tive,39. Future and Future Anterior,
40. Imperative Mood, 41. Subjunc-
tive Mood, 42-45. Infinitive Mood,
46,47. Gerund or Present Participle,
48. Past Participle, 49, 50. Passive
Verb, 51. Reflexive Verbs, 52, 53.
Periphrastic Verbs, 54. Impersonal
Verbs, 55. Government of Verba, 56.
Requiring no preposition before the
following Infinitive, 46. p. 253. R. 1,
10, 1. Requiring & before the follow.
ing Infinitive, 46. p. 254, R. 3, 10, 2.
Requiring de before the ‘following In-
finitive, 46. p. 254, R. 2, Note, 5 and
Note, 9 and Note, 10, 3,11. Requiring
para before the following Infinitive,
46. p. 254, R. 6. Requiring en before
the following Infinitive, 46. p. 254, R.
7,10, 4. Requiring con before a ‘tol-
lowing Infinitive, 46. p. 255, R. 8, ce 5.
When used before a Gerund, 46. 4 and
Note. Having a different meaning
according to the following preposition,
46. 9 and Note. Verbs having two
Past Participles, one regular, the other
Irregular. Their different use, 50.
p. 274 and R. I. Defective verbs, 60.
Agreement of the verb with its subject,
61. 1-8. Table of Terminations of the
three Regular Verbs, p. 326, 327. List
of the principal Irregular Verbs, pp.
328-369.

Vocabulary, Spanish-English, p. 373.
English-Spanish, p. 386.

Velver a, 48. 9, in fine.

Vos, 4.3 and Note.

Vosotros, a 3 and pene 41.6.

Vowels, p. 1 2,1.

Voz pasiva, ‘af.

RG are vuestra, 13. 3.

i ee

Would, 44.11, 2, 6.

Y¥_and 6,18. When used with Cardinal
Numbers, 20.3. Used to indicate the
time of the day, 28, 2.

Ya, 58. 10.

You, 4. 3 and Note.
PRACTICAL SPANISH COURSE.

INTRODUCTION.

§ 1. Letters and Sounds.
The Alphabet. El Alfabeto.

1. The Spanish alphabet as given by the Spanish Academy
contains twenty-nine letters and combinations of letters.

fete ramus, Promuncin ete Names, Progunciae Teh sam, Preguntas
a2 ah j jota holta r ere avlray
b be bay k ka kak rr erre at'rray
ce ce thay |1 ele adlay |s ese at'ssay
chche chay | ll elle alyay | t te tay

d de day meme ai/may |u U oo

ee ay n ene ai/nay | V ve vay

f efe aifay | ee ainycy | x ekis ay'keys
g ge hay a) oh ye yay

h hacheah'chey| p pe pay : griega eigrecay'ga
ii ee q cu coo z zeta thay'tah

Remark. — The letter w occurs in Spanish, but only in a few foreign
words. This is true also of k. Ex.: Washington, Konigsberga, etc.

2. All these letters are of the feminine gender. Ex.: una 6,
una jota, etc.

3. They are divided, as in English, into vowels and conso-

nants.
13
14 INTRODUCTION.

§ 2. The Pronunciation. La Pronunciacién.

The Spanish language does not present in its pronunziation
the same difficulties as the English language. We may say, in
fact, that Spanish is pronounced as it is written, and written as
it is pronounced, all the letters, with very few exceptions, being
sounded in the words. The following rules on the way of pro-
nouncing the vowels and consonants, together with those refer-
ting to the accentuation of the words, and to diphthongs and
triphthongs, will, we trust, enable the students of the Spanish
language to acquire a correct pronunciation in a comparatively

limited time.
1. Vowels. Vocales.

The vowels are a, e, i, y, 0, u. They are sounded:
a like ain ah: Malaga, papa, bata.
e like a7 in dail: elemento, padre, come.
i like ee in see: mira, libra, ira.
y as a vowel like the Spanish 7: voy, doy, soy.
© like o in no: obra, dorado, mono.
@ like 00 in food: muro, uno, comin.

Nore. — Great care must be used to pronounce the Spanish vowels very
purely, and not to glide them into diphthongs, as are most English vowels.

Remark. — Y is considered a vowel when it stands by itself, as in
y, and; at the end of a word, as in rey, king, or of a syllable immediately
followed by a consonant. But, at the beginning of a syllable, y is gener-
ally considered a consonant, as in ya, already ; yerba, herb.

The custom of using the letter i instead of y is, however, becoming more
general.

2. Diphthongs. Diptongos.

Besides the simple sounds, there are in Spanish compound
sounds, in which the two sounds are distinctly heard in a single
emission of the voice. The sounds of diphthongs are produced
by the rapid utterance of the vowel sounds of which they are
composed.

Spanish vowels are divided into two classes — strong vowels,
a, 0, e€, and weak vowels, i, wu.
CONSONANTS. 15

A combination of a strong and an wnaccented weak vowel, or of a
weak and strong, may form a diphthong, in which the two sounds
are pronounced in one syllable, the weak receiving little stress.

These diphthongs are twelve in number:

ai, ay: aire, hay. ia: diablo.
au: pausa. ua: fragua.
oi, oy: sois, voy. io: precio.
ou: bou. uo: arduo,
ei, ey: veis, ley. ie: cielo.

eu: deuda. ue: duefio.

Nore. — In considering the combinations given in the second column,
they have been included among the diphthongs. But it should be care-
fully noted that the weak vowels i and u when before strong vowels are
really consonants and are to be pronounced as y and w respectively.

If in the above combinations the weak vowel is aceented, no
diphthong is formed :
continuo, continio. hacia, hacia. Jey, lei.
Two weak vowels may form a diplthong if the second be
accented : in: viuda. ui, uy: ruido.
Nore. — If the first be accented, there is no diphthong:
fhiido, Riu.
3. Triphthongs. Triptongos.
There are four triphthongs in Spanish :
iai: precidis, you value.
iei: vaciéis, you may empty.
uai, uay : santigudis, you bless; Paraguay.
uei or uey: averigiiéis, you may search; buey, ox.

4. Consonants. Consonantes.

Many of the consonants sound approximately as in English.

The following are the rules referring to those which differ
materially in the two languages.

B differs somewhat from the English pronunciation. In
making it the lips are not pressed together and the air is
16 INTRODUCTION.

allowed to pass between them without interruption. At the
beginning of a word it is somewhat more like the English Db:
haba, Habana, Cuba, beber, baile.
Remark. —B and V have to-day the same pronunciation in Spain.
C has two sounds :
1. Before the vowels e and i (ce, cz) it has the sound of the
English th in thick, thin, etc. :
cena, cima, decente, recibe, dice.
2. Before the vowels a, 0, and u (ca, co, and cz), and before
consonants, it sounds like k in English :
cola, cabo, cuna, criado, clamor.

CH is a distinct letter, double in figure, but simple in value.
It has the same sound as the English ch in church, chair, chin,

‘i 3 , oe
ete. : macho, mucho, cnupa, rancho, dicha. VO

D is pronounced like the English th in then; somewhat
stronger at the beginning of a word, and weaker at the end:
dado, dedo, hablado, Madrid, atado.

@ has two sounds:

1. Before e and i, it sounds like a strongly pronounced
English A (the German ch in ach).

gente, ingenio, agilidad, general, gengibre.
2. Elsewhere it is pronounced like g in go.
gato, gorro, gloria, grito, digno.

3. To preserve the latter sound of g before e and i the vowel

u (gu) must be inserted before these vowels.
guerra, guia, aguijar, guirlanda, guitarra.

Nore. — In this case the u is silent. When, however, the u is to be
pronounced after the g, and before the letters and i, a dieresis (‘*) must
be placed over the u (ii):

antigiiedad, argiiir, agiiero, magiieto.
H is always mute:

hombre, horca, alharaca, hora, honor.
hueso, huevo, —_—hueco, huerto, —_yihuela,
CONSONANTS. 17

J is pronounced as a guttural before all the vowels, that is to
say, like the Spanish g before e and i:
paja,  jabdn, caja, cajita, Jorge.
Remark. — It will be remarked that this guttural sound is generally
indicated by g before e and i, and by j before a, 0, and u.
LL is liquid, and pronounced as in the English word William:
llaga, calle, lover, caballo, pollo.

Nore. — A pronunciation not infrequently heard is that where I has
the value of English y. Thus calle becomes caye, pollo — poyo, ete. This
is not to be followed.

N has a liquid sound, and is pronounced nearly like gn in
mignonette, or like the gn in French:
sefior, ensefiar, nifio, suefio, afiadir,

Nore. — The mark over the n (~) is called tilde in Spanish.

Q is found only before ue and ui, and has the sound of k

(the wu being silent) :
parque, aqui, querido, despique, queja.

Remark. — Whenever the diphthongs ua, ue, uo are »receded by the
sound of k, and the u is pronounced, the accepted orthography is eu.
Thus : cuadro, cuero, acuoso.

R is trilled more than in English, but with less force between
two vowels or in the middle of a word :

rosa, pintura, lirio, cara, perla.

RR is more strongly trilled than is r:
carro, perro, guerra, cerrajo, ferrocarril.
S has always the hissing sound, like ss in English, as in
assembly :
sabio, famoso, paseo, pesadumbre, Tosa.

§ is never followed by a consonant when commencing a word, as in the
Latin words scientia, Scipio; and, in order to avoid this, the Spanish write
ciencia (suppressing the s) or Escipién (having it preceded by an e).

T varies sensibly from the English pronunciation. The tip
2
18 INTRODUCTION.

of the tongue must be brought well forward, and rest against
the upper teeth :

tonto, torto, chiquito, tirante, titiritero.

V is pronounced like the Spanish B.
velo, valor, voluntad, bravo, ave.

REMARK. — The Spanish Academy now recognizes this pronunciation,
although it disapproves of it.

W has the sound given it in the language from which the
word containing it is taken :

Wagner = Vagner, Washington = Uashington.

X sounds like es or ks in English, as in wax:

' axioma, examinar, reflexion, exagerar, exuberancia.

OpsERVATIONS. — 1. The x had formerly the sound of the Spanish j,
or g before e and i, but according to the modern orthography the x is
replaced by a g or a j whenever it has the guttural sound. Thus, the
following words which were formerly written xefe, xergén, baxeza, baxar,
bam, etc., are written to-day jefe, jergén, bajeza, bajar, bajo, etc.

2. The x at the end of such words as relox, carcax, almaradua, etc.,
which formerly changed the x into j for the plural, as relojes, carcajes, etc.,
is now replaced by a j; and these words are written now reloj, carcaj,
almaraduj, etc.

Nore. — The final j in reloj is silent.

Y at the beginning of a word or syllable is a consonant, and
is more strongly pronounced than in English. It approximates
the sound of 7 as in Joe:

yo, yesca, reyes, arroyo, haya.
' Zis pronounced like the English th in the word thin, or like
tthe Spanish ¢ before e and i. ~This letter precedes the vowels
a, 0, and u (za, zo, and zu) :
zapato, tizon, zumo, zorra, Misioz.

§ 3. Variations in Pronunciation.

The pronunciation indicated above is the Castilian, the
accepted national idiom. Dialectical differences in pronuncia-
tion are not uncommon in Spain itself, and are found regularly
in the Spanish-American countries.
DOUBLE LETTERS. 19

Such variations are :

C before e andi =s: Garcia = Garsta.

Z=S: zozobra = sosobra, Gémez = Gémes.

Intervocalic or final d is generally silent: nada = na(a), com-
prado, comprao.

B + ue is silent: bueno = weno.

Gu +aocr0=W: agua = awa.

S is much weakened or disappears: edmo estdé usted = edémo
eta uté.

Ex + consonant (other than h) = es: excelente = escelente.

Ll =y: pollo = poyo, caballo = cabayo, leno = yeno.

Nore.—In writing j is generally used for g, before e and i: general
becomes jeneral.

These usages are not to be followed by the student desirous
of speaking pure Spanish.

§ 4. Double Letters. Duplicacién de las letras.

The Spanish Academy, conforming to the pronunciation, has
suppressed double consonants when one alone is pronounced.
-CC and nn are the only consonants now doubled, and that only
when both are sounded, as in the words acceso, ennoblecer.

Remark. — Double 1 (27) and double r (rr) are to be considered only as
letters of the alphabet, and not as double consonants.

§ 5. Syllables. Silabas.

There are five rules in Spanish for the division of words into
syllables :
1. Whenever a single consonant is found between two vowels,
it is joined to the vowel which follows it :
a-mor, a-la, flu-xidn, co-fre, mu-iie-ca.
2. The letters ch, I, and rr, because simple in their pronune

ciation, must not be divided :
chi-co, co-che, cez-lle, ca-ba-llo, pe-tro.
20 INTRODUCTION.

3. When two or more consonants stand between vowels, the
last consonant goes with the following vowel. The others are
united with the preceding syllable :

es-pe-rar, abs-te-ner, in-sis-tir, sub-ver-sidn.

Exception. —L and r unite with any preceding consonant except 8,

forming a consonantal diphthong:
a-blan-dar, ins-tru-ir, ca-te-dri-lla, es-tre-me-cer.
OBSERVATION. — When double ¢ and double n occur in a word, one of

these letters is placed in each syllable :
ac-cidn, en-no-ble-ce.

4. In compound words formed from prepositions and other
parts of speech the preposition forms a separate syllable, as in:

ab-ne-ga-cidn, des-a-gra-da-ble, con-ca-vi-dad, sub-ver-siGn.

5. Vowels forming a diphthong or triphthong must not be
separated : gra-cio-so,  guar-dia, _pre-ciais.

§ 6. Accent. Acento.

1. The Spanish word of more than one syllable receives a
greater stress on one of these syllables than on the others. This
is called the tonte accent, and varies, falling generally on any
one of the last three syllables.

2. In writing (or printing) this tonic accent is represented
by the acute accent (’). This sign is used to indicate any
deviation from the accepted rules of Spanish accentuation.

3. These rules are -

All words ending in a vowel or n or § are accented on the

penult: cabo, —cantan, imagen, _vecinos, _ crisis.

All words ending in a consonant (except n or 8) are accented
on the last syllable :
general, sefior, verdad, alcatraz, cantar.
4. Any deviation from the above must have the written

accent : papa, café, rincén, atras, linea.
agil, azicar, alférez, item, alcazar.
Norz. — Patronymics are regularly accented on the penult:
Pérez, Sanchez, Fernandez, Rodriguez, Jiménez,
ACCENTS. 21

5. For the purposes of accentuation a diphthong or a triph-
thong is always considered as one syllable.

tragedia, aire, pausa, arduo, ruido, envainan, precidis.

Thus if the syllable requiring the written accent be a diph-
thong or triphthong, such accent must be placed upon the
accented vowel — the strong vowel in combinations of a strong
and weak, or the second in combinations of two weak :

después, piélago, — precidis, Caucaso.
Otherwise there is no diphthong, and each vowel represents a
syllable :
Garcia, serfan, reir, leido, rio, fidido, continio, Riu

6. The addition of the plural signs does not change the tonic

accent of a word :

mujer, mujeres, empleo, empleos. mascara, mascaras,
accién, acciones,  canapé, canapés.

Excerrion. — Régimen becomes regimenes, and cardcter, caracteres.

7. Monosyllabic preterit forms are always accented :.
di, ful, fué, rid, vi, vid.

8. When, in the conjugation of verbs, certain forms (gener-
ally the preterit) bear the written accent, this is preserved, even
though the addition of personal pronouns would bring them
under the regular rule:

fuime, ridge, casdse, pareciéme, habianse.
The addition of one or more pronouns to a regularly accented

form (and which in consequence bears no written accent) requires
the insertion of such accent to indicate the new pronunciation :

gustibaume, exhortdéronme, dandomelo, cémanselos.
9. The preposition 4 and the conjunctions 6, 6, Wi, are ac-
cented arbitrarily.

10. The written accent is used to distinguish two words
having the same form. A list follows giving some of the prin-
cipal cases :
22, INTRODUCTION.

dé (subj. of dar), give.
di (pret. of dar), gave.
bajo, J descend.

cémo, J eat.

él, he, him.

hé, behold.

mi, me.

mas, more.

sé, I know ; be thou.
si, yes; one’s self.
sdlo, only.

son, sound.

sdbre, exceeds (verb),
suéfio, I dream.

té, tea.

tu, thou.

uno, tina, wnite (verb).

de, of.

di (imperat. of decir), say.
bajo, low.

como, as.

el, the.

he, Z have.

mi, my.

mas, but.

se, one’s self.

si, 7.

solo, alone.

son, are.

sobre, over (prep).
sueno, dream (noun).
te, thee.

tu, thy.

uno, una, 4, one.

11. The written accent is marked on demonstrative adjec

tives used as substantives :

éste, ésta, this one.
ése, ésa, that one.
aquél, aquélla, that one.

este, this,
ese, that.
aquel, aquella, that.

Nores.—1. The neuter forms esto, eso, aquello, are never accented.

2. The plural of the above pronouns is also accented in accordance with

the usage in the singular:

éstos, aquéllos, ctiyos.
éstas, aquéllas, cuiyas.

ésos, cudntos, cuales.
ésas, cudntas, quiénes.

12. The written accent is marked on pronouns and adverbs
used interrogatively or emphatically, even in indirect questions.

eémo, how ?

cual, which?

cuan, how!

cuando, when ?

cudnto, cuanta, how much?!
ctiyo, whose ?

donde, where ?

qué, what?!

quién, who?! whom?!

como, as.

cual, which.

cuan, as.

cuando, when.

cuanto, cnanta, as much,
cuyo, whose.

donde, where.

que, what, which.

quien, who, whom.
PUNCTUATION. 23

13. Aun is unaccented when coming before, or used without,

a verb: Aun no ha llegado.

It is accented after a verb:
No ha llegado atin.

§ 7. Punctuation. Puntuacién.

1. Punctuation is in Spanish the same as in English. How-
ever, as it often happens in the Spanish language, that punctua-
tion alone indicates the interrogative sense of the sentence, and
that, if the period be long, the reader is informed too late of the
interrogation, the Spanish make use of a reversed sign of inter-
rogation (4) at the beginning of the sentence, besides the regular
sign (?) at the end of the same:

4Seran perdidos tantos ejemplares Are all those examples and expe

y escarmientos como presencia-
mos cada dia para persuadirte 4
mudar de vida y entrar en la
senda del honor y de la virtud ?

riences which we daily see, and
which ought to persuade you to
change your life and enter the
path of honor and virtue, to be
lost on you?

2. The same rule is observed with regard to the exclamation-
point, and an inverted sign(;) is placed at the beginning of an

exclamative sentence :

jCuanta debid ser la confusidn y
el sentimiento de los que creyen-
do encontrar el oro 4 montones,
no encontraron sino hambre, pe-
nalidades y peligros!

§ 8. Capital Letters.

What must have been the confusion
and regrets of those who thought
they would find gold in large
quantities, and met only hunger,
sufferings, and dangers !

Letras maytsculas.

The use of capital letters is the same in Spanish as in English,

with the following exceptions :

1. No adjective of nationality occurring in the middle of a
phrase can begin with a capital letter unless used substantively :

El ejército francés.

Una Francesa.
24 INTRODUCTION.

2. Yo is always written with a small letter, except at the

beginning of a sentence :
Mi hermano y yo.

3. The names of months and days are written in small
letters.
§ 9. Exercises in Pronunciation.

El Universo.
L.

Con el nombre de universo se designa cuanto existe en el mundo
entero, es decir, el sol, las estrellas, la tierra, cuanto nuestra vista
alsanza en las profundidades del aire, y cuanto hay todavia mas alla
de lo que podemos ver. Por mas pequefios que seamos, y por mds
débil que nuestra vista sea, podemos admirar una parte de este in-
menso espectdculo. El sol, en medio de esos numerosos globos que
brillan, en toda la béveda celeste, es entre todas las obras de Dios la
que se presenta con mayor lucimiento y majestad, es una eterna lum-
brera colocada en el centro del mundo para esparcir la luz por todas
partes, y 4 una distancia que no nos es posible determinar. Es como
el rey de los astros.

Il.

El sol, que nos parece tan pequefio, 4 causa de la suma distancia
suya, es, segun los astronomos, mil y cuatrocientas veces mayor que
la tierra.

Su figura es la de un globo; y el calor y la luz que él esparce en el
nniverso nos dan 4 conocer que su materia es el fuego mismo 6 que
esta inflamada de continuo. Le vemos parecer todas las mafianas en
el oriente, elevarse en el cielo hasta medio dia, bajar después y desa-
parecer del horizonte por el occidente. El sol no muda de sitio, y
permanece en el centro del mundo para dar luz 4 cuanto le rodea. Se
han notado ciertas manchas sobre este cuerpo tan reluciente, y se ha
descubierto que él giraba sobre si mismo, como giraria una bala atra-
vesada con un asador. Estas manchas se descubren desde luego en
una estremidad de este astro, se adelantan, se ven después en la otra
estremidad, y desaparecen finalmente por detrds para volver 4 parecer
de nuevo de alli 4 algiin tiempo. Se ha observado que para volver
al punto de que ellas partieron, le son necesarios veinte y siete dias,
tiempo necesario al sol por-sonsiguiente para dar una vuelta completa
EXERCISES IN PRONUNCIATION. 28

“sobre el eje suyo. Se vahia que el sol dista de nosotros treinta y
cuatro millones trescientas cincuenta y siete mil cuatrocientas y
ochenta leguas.

TIl.

Se distinguen estos tan numerosos astros en estrellas fijas, porque
no las vemos mudar de lugar, y en planetas 6 estrellas errantes, porque
giran en mayor 6 menor tiempo alrededor del sol. Se presume que
las estrellas fijas son unos globos luminosos semejantes al sol, y que
dan luz 4 varios mundos muy remotos para que nuestra vista pueda
alcanzarlos 4 ver. Si las estrellas nos parecen mds pequefias que el
astro que nos dispensa el dia, nace de que ellas estan infinitamente
mas apartadas de nosotros. Juzgad de su magnitud é inmensa dis-
tancia por la que esta mds inmediata 4 la tierra, y que se lama Sirio:
se cree que esta estrella fija dista de nosotros cuatrocientas mil veces
mas que el sol, y que su didmetro 6 anchura es de treinta y tres millo-
nes de leguas.

Los planetas son en numero de siete y se diferencian de las estrellas
fijas, 4 causa de que giran alrededor del sol, y no tienen Juz de si
mismos: aquélla con que brillan, les viene del sol. Se presume
que estos inmensos globos son, al modo de la tierra, unos mundos
habitados,

IV.

La tierra es redonda como una bola. Sus montafias y valles, que
nos parecen tan considerables, pueden compararse, cuando mas, con
las desigualdades que se ven en la cdscara de una naranja, y que no
impiden que este fruto tenga una figura redonda.

Ella gira sobre si misma como una bola que esté atravesada con un
asador de hierro. Este movimiento, que se llama rotacidn, le propor-
ciona alternativamente el dia y la noche; es decir, que la parte que
esté vuelta hacia el sol goza de la luz, mientras que la parte opuesta
estd en la obscuridad. Pero, como la tierra da esta vuelta sobre si
misma en veinte y cuatro horas, resulta de esto, que ella tiene en
este espacio de tiempo el dia y Ja noche.

La tierra, ademas de este movimiento de todos las dias, tiene otro
que se ejecuta en un afio; ella da una vuelta inmensa alrededor del
sol. Hste ultimo movimiento produce las diferentes estaciones del
aiio.
26 LESSON 1.

Leccion I. Lesson I. .

ARTICLES, DIFFERUNT FORMS.

El, ; Un,
La, ;the a, an, one.
Una,
Lo,
Ejemplos. Examples.
El hombre tiene el libro. The man has the book.
La mujer tiene la mesa. The woman has the table,
4 Quién tiene la pluma ? Who has the pen ?
E] padre tiene un caballo. The father has a horse.
La madre tiene una casa. The mother has a house.
El general es prudente. The general is prudent.
La sefiora es amable. The lady is amiable.
Vocabulario. Vocabulary.
El amigo, the friend. El nifio, the child. Es, is,
El caballo, the horse. El panadero, the baker. | Luisa, Louisa.
El caballero, the gentleman. | El tio, the uncle. Mi, my.
El dinero, the money. | La casa, the house. Muy, very.
El hermano, the brother. La hermana, the sister. | Pobre, poor.
El hijo, the son. La hija, the daughter. Quien, who, whom.
El jardin, the garden. La llave, the key. Tiene, has.
E) libro, the book. Carlos, Charles. Y, and.

Exercise 1.

1. El nifio tiene un libro. 2. Carlos es mi hermano. 3. Luisa es
mihermana. 4. ; Quién tiene la Nave? 5. Mi amigo tiene la Nave
y lapluma. 6. El caballo es grande. 7. Mi tio es pobre. 8. La
casa es grande. 9. El panadero tiene un hijo y una hija. 10. Mi
amigo tiene una casa y un jardin. 11. El jardin es muy grande,
12. El caballero tiene el dinero,
ARTICLES, DIFFERENT FORMS. 27

Exercise 2.

1. My house is very large. 2. My brother has a horse. 3. The
gentleman has a house. 4. The baker is my friend. 5. The general
is very poor. 6. Charles has my pen. 7. My table is very large.
8. My uncle is very prudent. 9. The daughter has a house, and the
son has a garden. 10. The woman is very amiable. 11. My brother
isachild. 12. The book is very large.

Gramatica. Grammar.

1, There are three genders in the Spanish language: the
masculine, the feminine, and the neuter.

The definite article has in the singular a distinct form for
each gender: masculine el; feminine, la; neuter, lo:

El padre, the father. La madre, the mother. Lo bueno, the good.

REMARKS, —1. The neuter gender is only applicable to adjectives
(ndimeros adjetivos) taken in an unlimited or indefinite sense, as: lo bueno,
the good or what is good ; lo peor, the worst or what is worst; ete.

This NEUTER GENDER, which has no plural, is therefore never applicd
to persons or things, but only to adjectives taken substantively, and to sub-
stantives taken adjectively : Todo era grande en San Luis, lo rey, lo santo;
lo capitén, everything was great in St. Lowis (Louis 1X.), the king, the
saint, the captain, —~

2. The neuter article is not placed indifferently before all adjectives
taken substantively. Thus, in the following sentences: El malo seré
castigado, the wicked shall be punished ; El azul de este paiio es demasia-
do oscuro, the blue of this cloth is too dark, —we could not make use of
the neuter article lo, because those adjectives are taken substantively and
are sufficiently determinate. It is evident, in fact, that in the first sen-
tence, the word hombre, man, is understood before malo, wicked ; and
in the second sentence, the word color, color, before azul, blue.

2. Although the article el belongs only to the masculine gen-
der, it may be placed, for the sake of euphony, before feminine
nouns beginning with an accented a: el agua, the water; el
alma, the soul; el ala, the wing; el dguila, the eagle; el ave,
the bird. It must be observed, however, that this change of
article is only admitted in the singular, and that we must say in
the plural las aguas, las almas. Jas alas, etc.
28 LESSON 1.

Adjectives accompanying the singular of such nouns must be
placed in the feminine: el agua es fria, the water ts cold ; ete.

The same rules are to be observed in reference to words begin-
ning with an h followed by an accented a, as: el hacha es
pesada, the axe is heavy ; las hachas, the axes ; etc.

Nouns like América, America; abeja, bee; alegria, joy; habitacién,
habitation ; etc., take the feminine article la, because the first a is not
accented: La América, la habitacién, etc.

8. The indefinite article a, an, or the numeral one, is ren-
dered by un before a masculine noun (the o of uno being dropped
before a noun), and by una before a feminine noun:

Un hermano, a brother. Una hermana, a sister.
Un libro, a book. Una mesa, a table.

Nore. — The indefinite article is not used before a word in the predi-
cate expressing condition, quality, or character :

Soy Americano, Lam an American,
Es negociante. He is a trader.
Son generales, They are generals..

4, Adjectives should always be repeated before the nouns
they qualify :
El padre y la madre. The father and (the) mother.

La casa y el jardin. The house and (the) garden.
El buen lapiz y la buena pluma. The good pencil and (the good) pen.

Nore. — Some writers do not always observe this rule.
GENERAL OBSERVATIONS ON THE GENDERS.
5. Nouns denoting men, or their rank, titles, and professions
are masculine, irrespective of ending:
El papa, the pope. El profeta, the prophet.
El cura, the priest. E] alguacil, the constable.
Those denoting women or their condition are feminine:
La reina, the queen. La emperatriz, the empress.
6. The gender of nouns may often be known by their termi-
nations (except as above) :
1. Nouns ending in 0 are masculine :
Except mano, Aand ; nao, vessel ; seo, church. pees
PLURAL, 29

2. Nouns ending in a are generally feminine:
Except dia, day; mapa, map.

Excerrions.— Those ending in -a derived from the Greek neuter, as
clima, climate ; idioma, idiom; poema, poem; dilema, dilemma; diploma,
diploma ; dogma, dogma ; etc.

3. Nouns ending in -d, -idn, -umbre, -ie are feminine:

La puridad, the purity. La cuestidn, the question.
La libertad, the liberty. La nacidén, the nation.
La virtud, the virtue. La serie, the series.

La lumbre, the fire.

GENERAL RULE For Latin Scuotars. — Nouns derived from the Latin
generally preserve in Spanish the same gender they have in Latin, except
that those which are neuter in Latin are masculine in Spanish.

4. Compound nouns generally take the gender of the second
word if the same is in the singular. Thus, the words aguamiel,
honey and water, contrahaz, wrong side, are feminine; whilst
archilaud, @ kind of lute, and portafusil, gunbelt, are masculine.

5. Compound words of which the second word is in the.
plural are generally masculine, even if the second word is femi-
nine, as cortaplumas, penknife ; mondadientes, toothpick ; saca-
botas, bootjack ; etc.

OBSERVATION ON OTHER TERMINATIONS. — Nouns having other termi-
nations are subject to so many exceptions that it is impossible to establish
satisfactory rules in regard to them.

Thus, mar, sea, is of both genders, but words compounded with mar
are always feminine, as bajamar, low tide; pleamar, high tide. Mar,
joined to a proper noun, should be in the masculine, as el mar Baltico, the
Baltic sea, etc.

Leccion II. Lesson II.
PLURAL.
Los, plural of el, ; th
Las, plural of la, ;
Ejemplos. Examples.

El caballo es grande. The horse is large.
Los caballos son grandes. The horses are large,
80

Enrique tiene un libro.
Maria tiene dos libros.

Mi tio tiene tres casas.

El general tiene cuatro caballos,
Las sefioras son amables.
Los nifios tienen dos plumas.
El general es rico.

Los generales son ricos.

El reloj? es hermoso.

Los relojes son hermosos.

E] Inglés es bueno.

Los Ingleses son buenos.

El paraguas es grande.

Los paraguas son grandes.

El juez es justo.

Los jueces son justos.

Vocabulario.

El abanico, the fan.

El Americano, the American.
El centavo, the cent.

El cuarto, the room.

El Francés, the Frenchman.
El Inglés, the Englishman.
El lapiz, the pencil.

El muchacho, the boy.

El oro, the gold.

El pajaro, the bird.

E) perro, the dog.

El sombrero, the hat.

El teatro, the theater.

La ciudad, the city.

La muchacha, the girl.

LESSON

 

2.

Henry has a book.

Mary has two books.

My unele has three houses.
The general has four horses.
The ladies are amiable.

The children have two pens.
The general is rich.

The generals are rich.

The watch is fine.

The watches are fine.

The Englishman is good.
The Englishmen are good.
The umbrella is large.

The umbrellas are large.
The judge is just.

The judges are just.

Vocabulary.

Cuatro, four.

De, of, from.

Dos, two.

Enrique, Henry.
Hermoso, handsome, fine.
Industrioso, industrious.
Joven, young.

Juan, John.

Negro, black.

Pequeiio. small, little.
Son, are.

Tienen, ave.

Tres, three.

Vigilante, watchful,
Ya, already.

Exercise 3.

1. Carlos y Enrique son los amigos de mi hermano. 2. El general
tiene tres hermosos caballos. 3, Los sombreros son negros. 4. Los
muchachos tienen dos centavos. 5. Las sefioras tienen un abanico.
6. Los Franceses y los Ingleses son amigos. 7. Los pdjaros son her-
mosos. 8. La sefiora tiene dos hijos y tres hijas. 9. Mi amigo tiene
dos hermanas. 10. Los Americanos son industriosos. 11. Los dos

 

1 The tinal consonant is not pronounced,
PLURAL. 31

amigos son pobres. 12. Las tres muchachas son amables. 13. Los
perros son vigilantes. 14. Los lapices son de oro. 15. 4 Quign tiene
los libros? 16, Juan tiene los libros y las plumas. 17. Las hijas
de mi amigo son jovenes. 18. Los cuartos de la casa son pequeiios.
19. Las hijas de mi tio son ya g grandes. 20. Los veatros de la ciudad -
son hermosos.

Exercise 4.

1. The two horses are black. 2. The brothers of my friend are
young. 3. The two gentlemen are English. 4. Henry has two hand-
some dogs. 5. The friends of my brother are very poor. 6. The city
has three theaters. 7. Charles and John are friends. 8. The Ameri-
can has two brothers and three sisters. 9. My uncle has four houses.
10. The two Frenchmen are very amiable. 11. The fans of the ladies
are very fine. 12, The English have handsome horses. 13. The houses
of the city are very large. 14. The generals are very prudent. 15. The
hats are black. 16. The boys have three pencils. 17. John and Henry
are small. 18. The rooms of my house are large. 19. The bakers
are poor. 20. Charles has two pencils.

Gramatica. Grammar.

1, The plural of the article el is los, and that of the article
la is las.

2. Nouns ending in an unaccented vowel form their plural
by adding s:

El hermano, the brother ; La hermana, the sister.
Los hermanos, the brothers ; Las hermanas, the sisters.
3. Nouns ending in accented e, 0, u (also pie), add s:
El café, the coffee ; Los cafés, the coffees.
El pie, the foot ; Los pies, the feet.
El fricandd, the fricandeau ; Los fricandds, the fricandeaus.
E] tisu, the tissue ; Los tists, the tissues.

4, Nouns ending in a consonant, in y, or in accented a, i,
form their plural by adding es;

El general, the general ; Los generales, the generals.
La mujer, the woman ; Las mujeres, the women.

El aleli, the gilliflower ; Los alelies, the gilliflowers.
El albala, the certificate ; Los albalaes, the certificates.
El rey, the king ; Los reyes, the kings.

Pap4, papa ; mam4, mamma ; sofé, sofa, take s for the plural.
32 LESSON 2.

5. Nouns ending in 8, of which the last syllable is unaccented,

remain unchanged.
Those which have the last syllable accented add es:

El lunes, the Monday ; Los lunes, the Mondays.

La hipdtesis, the hypothesis ; Las hipdtesis, the hypotheses (pl.).
El Francés, the Frenchman ; Los Franceses, the Frenchmen.

El Inglés, the Englishman ; Los Ingleses, the Englishmen.

El dios, the god ; Los dioses, the gods.

6, Nouns ending in z change this letter into ec, and add es
for the plural :
El juez, the judge ; Los jueces, the judges.
La luz, the light ; Las luces, the lights,
OBSERVATION. — Except in patronymics :

Pérez, los Pérez. Jiménez, los Jiménez.

7. Proper nouns follow the same rules as common nouns:
Los Cervantes y los Mendozas, The Cervantes and Mendozas.

8. Generally only the second part of a compound noun is put
in the plural :

El ferrocarril, the railway ; Los ferrocarriles, the ratlways.

9. Adjectives, as will be seen hereafter, agree in gender and
number with the nouns which they qualify.
The plural of adjectives is formed like the plural of nouns:

El muchacho es bueno, The boy is good.
Los muchachos son buenos, The boys are good.

10. In Spanish, as well as in English, there are nouns which
are only used in the singular, and others which have no singular,
as: albricias, presents; angarillas, cruet stands ; viveres, pro-
visions, etc.

Nor, — There are a few words which have or have not any singular
according to their meaning, as esposas, handcuffs ; which 1s not the plural
of esposa, wife ; grillos, trons ; which is not the plural of grillo, cricket ;
and a few others.
CONTRACTION OF PREPOSITION WITH ARTICLE. 33

Leceion III.

Lesson III.

CONTRACTION OF PREPOSITION WITH ARTICLE.

De, of, from.

Del, masc. sing,

De la, fem. sing. | of the,
De los, mase. pl. | from the.
De las, fem. pl.

Declinacién.
Masculine Singular.

El hombre, the man.
Del hombre, of or from the man.
Al hombre, to or at the man.

Feminine Singular.

La mujer, the woman.
De la mujer, of or from the woman.
A la mujer, ¢o or at the woman.

Ejemplos.

Ei sombrero del muchacho es nuevo.
La hermana de mi amigo es pobre.
El padre de Juan es rico.

A, to, at.

Al, masc. sing.

Ala, fem. sing. | to the,
A los, masc. pl. | at the.
A las, fem. pl.

Declension.

Masculine Plural.

Los hombres, the men.
De los hombres, of or from the men.
A los hombres, to or at the men,

Feminine Plural.

Las mujeres, the women.
De las mujeres, of or from the women,
A las mujeres, to or at the women.

Examples.
The boy’s hat is new.
My friend’s sister is poor.
John’s father is rich.

Los libros de los muchachos son buenos. The boys’ books are good.

Las puertas de las casas son grandes.
Carlos sale de la casa.

El cazador viene del bosque.

La lluvia viene de las nubes.

El rico da dinero al pobre.

La madre escribe 4 la hija.

El general habla 4 los soldados.
La sefiora habla 4 las muchachas.
El hombre llama 4 la puerta.

Juan habla del hombre y de la mujer.
Enrique escribe al padre y 4 la madre.

The doors of the houses are large.
Charles comes out of the house.
The hunter comes from the wood.
The rain comes from the clouds.
ee rich man gives money to the
poor man.
The mother writes to the daughter.
The general speaks to the soldiers.
The lady speaks to the girls,
The man knocks at the door.
John speaks of the man and woman.
Henry writes to the father and
mother.
34 LESSON 38.

Vocabulario. Vocabulary.
El drbol, the tree. La carne, the meat.
El bosque, the wood. La cereza, the cherry.
El buque, the vessel, the ship. La cocinera, the cook.
El carnicero, the butcher. La madre, the mother.
El carpintero, the carpenter. La manzana, the apple,
El cazador, the hunter. Con, with.
El comerciante, the merchant. Da, gives.
El consejo, the advice. Duice, sweet,
El dependiente, the clerk. Escribe, writes.
El dinero, the money. Habil, skildful.
El habitante, the inhabitant. Nuevo, new.
El médico, the physician, Rico, rich.
El Norte, the North. Sale, goes owt or comes out,
El padre, the father. Verde, green.
El principe, the prince. Viene, comes.

 

Exercise 5.

1. El médico del principe es mi hermano. 2. La sefiora de la casa
esmi hermana. 3. La madre da un consejo 4 la hija. 4. ; Quién tiene
el libro de Carlos? 5. El hijo del panadero tiene el libro-y la pluma
de Carlos. 6. ; Quién tiene la llave de la casa? 7. Mi padre tiene la
llave de la casa y del jardin. 8. La casa del padre de Juan es muy
grande. 9. Los habitantes de la ciudad son industriosos. 10. El
Inglés es el padre de las muchachas. 11. Los caballos de los:Fran-
ceses son hermosos, 12. El cazador sale del bosque con los pertvs.
13. Los hermanos del general son pobres. 14. El dependiente escribe
al comerciante. 15. Los muchachos del Francés tienen manzanas.
16. Las cerezas del jardin son dulces. 17. El carnicero vende la carne
4 las cocineras. 18. El buque viene del Norte. 19. Los Americanos
son amigos de los Franceses. 20. La hija del carpintero escribe 4 las
amigas de mi madre. 21. La madre del carpintero es cocinera en la
casa del comerciante. 22. La madre del médico da dinero al carni-
cero. 23. Los buques de los Americanos son nuevos. 24, El padre
del principe es rico. 25. El dependiente da cerezas 4 mi hijo.
26. ; Quién da dinero al carpintero? 27. El comerciante da di-
nero al hermano del carpintero. 28. Las manzanas del Norte son
dulces.
CONTRACTION OF PREPOSITION WITH ARTICLE. 35

Exercise 6.

1. Charles’s brother is my father’s clerk. 2. Louisa writes to
my father and mother. 3. The horses of the Englishmen are large.
4, The apples of the garden are sweet. 5. Henry writes to the two
friends. 6. The dog comes [out] of the garden. 17%. The sons of the
physicians are clerks. 8. The generals of the prince are very prudent.
9. The horses of the general are black. 10. Who gives money to the
sons of the Frenchman? 11. My father gives money to the sons and
{to the) daughters of the Frenchman and of the Englishman. 12. The
trees of the forest are green. 13. The merchants of the city are very
rich. ~14. The ship of Charles’s father is new. 15. The sailors
of the vessel are skillful. 16. My friend’s sisters are very young
17. My uncle has the key of the houses. 18. Charles and Henry are
the friends of the two Americans. 19. Who has the fans of the
ladies? 20. Louisa’s sisters have the fans. 21. The advice of the
physician to the merchant is good. 22. The carpenter is the brother
of the butcher. 23. The mother gives money to the cook for (para)
the butcher. 24. The dog of the hunter is good. 25. The brothers
of the clerk are rich.

Gramatica. Grammar.

1. Of the, from the, are rendered in Spanish in the masculine
singular by del (instead of de el), while to the, at the, also in
the masculine singular, are rendered by al (instead of 4 el):

El libro del muchacho, The boy's book (the book of the boy).
El general habla al soldado, The general speaks to the soldier.

2, Nouns undergo in Spanish no change of form in the pos-
sessive case, possession being indicated by placing the name of
the object possessed before de, of ; and the name of the possessor
after it:

El libre de Carlos, Charles's book (the book of Charles).
La pluma de la muchacha, The girl’s pen (the pen of the girl).

La casa del hijo del mé- = The physician’s son’s house (the house of the
dico, son of the physician).
36

Leccion IV.

LESSON 4.

Lesson IV.

PRONOUNS.

Verb, tener, to have.

PERSONAL PRONOUNS.

Yo, Z Nosotros, nosotras, nos, we.
Tu, thou. Vosotros, vosotras, vos (usted,! ustedes‘), you.
El, he. Ellos, they, masc.
Ella, she. Ellas, they, fem.
Present Tense of tener, to have.

Affirmatively. Interrogatively.
Yo tengo, T have. 4 Tengo yo? have I?
Tu tienes, thow hast. j Tienes tu ? hast thou?
El tiene, he has. . j Tiene él? has he?
Ella tiene, she has. gj Tiene ella? has she?
Usted tiene, you have, i Tiene usted ? have you?

Nosotros tenemos, we have.

Vosotros tenéis, you have.

Ellos tienen, they (masc.) have.

Ellas tienen, they (fem.) have.

Ustedes tienen, you have.
Hjemplos.

4 Tiene el hombre dinero ? ;
3 Tiene dinero el hombre ?
E] tiene dinero y crédito.

i Qué tiene V.?

Tengo oro y plata.

4 Qué tiene la mujer ?

Ella tiene manzanas y peras.
4 Qué tienen VV. ?

4 Tenemos nosotros? have we?

jTenéis vosotros? have you?

4 Tienen ellos? have they (masc.) ?

3 Tienen ellas ? have they (fem.) ¥

jTienen ustedes? have you?
Examples.

Has the man mouey ?

He has money and credit.
What have you ?

I have gold and silver.
What has the woman ?
She has apples and pears.
What have you ?

 

1 Usted, sing., ustedes, pl., were abbreviated in the following way: V™-
V4. or V4- (for the singular), and V™s. Vmds. or Vas. (for the plural) ; but
at present usted is represented by V., and ustedes by VV.
PRONOUNS. 37

Tenemes pan y queso. We have bread and cheese.

j Tienen fusiles los soldados ?: Have the soldiers any guns ?
Tienen. fasiles y sables. They have guns and sabers.
4 Tengo yo vino? Have I any wine ?

Y. tiene poco vino. You have little wine.

i Quién tiene las plumas ? Who has the pens ?

Las muchachas tienen las plumas, The girls have the pens.

Interrogative Form used Affirmatively.

Tiene V. un hermoso caballo. You have a fine horse.
Tienen los Ingleses muchos buques. The English have many ships,
Tiene la sefiora dos hijos. The lady has two sons,
Tiene Carlos un lapiz y una pluma. Charles has a pencil and a pen.
Vocabulario. Vocabulary.
El amigo, the friend. La mesa, the table. Mucho, a, much.
El crédito, the credit. La pera, the pear. Muchos, as, many.
El fusil, the gun. La plata, the silver. No, no.
El hombre, the man. Algo, something, anything. Pero, but.
El pan, the bread. Aqui, here. Poca, adv., Zittle.
El pollo, the chicken. Bueno, good. Qué, what.
El queso, the cheese. Con, with. Seiior, sir, Mr.
E) sable, the saber. En, in. Si, yes,
El vino, the wine. Hoy, to-day.. Sobre, on, upon.

Exercise 7.

1. 4 Tiene V. algo sobre la mesa? 2. Si, sefior, tengo un libro
sobre la mesa. 3. § Tiene carne el carnicero? 4, Tiene carne y po-
Hos. 5. ; Tiene el Inglés una casa en la cindad? 6. El tiene dos casas
aqui. 7. 4 Tienen VV. muchodinero? 8. Tenemos poco dinero, pero
mucho crédito. 9. 4 Qué tiene la hija del panadero? 10. Ella tiene
manzanas y peras. 11. ; Qué tienen los muchachos? 12. Tienen
cerezas. 13, ;A quién escribe Carlos? 14. El escribe 4 mi amigo.
15. 4 Habla V. 4 los muchachos? 16. No, sefior, mi hermano habla
4 los muchachos y 4 las muchachas. 17. 4 Con quién sale V.?
18. Con mi padre y mi madre. 19. ; Tiene el general un hijo ?
20. El tiene un hijo y dos hijas. 21. Los comerciantes tienen
buenos dependientes. 22. ; Qué da V. al pobre hombre? 23. Pan
y dinero. 24. Los cazadores tienen buenos perros. 25. 4 Tienea
buenos fusiles? 26. Si, tienen.
38 LESSON 4.

Exercise 8.

1. Have the generals good horses? 2. They have very good
horses. 3. Has the Englishman much money? 4. He has very little.
5. Have the merchants much wine? 6. They have very little wine.
7. Are you Charles's friend? 8. No, Charles is my brother's friend.
9. Have you (any) chickens to-day? 10. Yes, sir, we have chickens
and meat. 11. The English have many ships, and the French
have many soldiers. 12. My brother has a horse, and I have a dog.
13. We have a very fine theater in the city. 14. Has my brother
(any) books on the table? 15. Yes, sir, he has books, pens, and
pencils on the table. 16. Do you go out to-day? 17. No, sir, but my
brother goes out with my sister. 18. What do you give to Charles?
19. A handsome hat. 20. The baker’s sons have a room in my house.
21. To whom do you write? 22. To Henry’s brother. 23. We
have two dogs in the garden. 24, Have the children a book?
25. They have two.

Gramatica. Grammar.

1, The pronoun tu, thou, is used more frequently in Spanish
than in English. It indicates familiarity, affection, intimacy,
and is therefore frequently used among relations, intimate friends,
and older persons when addressing children, ete. :

4 Qué tienes tu, Juanito ? What have you, Johnny ?

2, We is rendered in Spanish by nos and nosotros, mase. ;
nosotras, fem.; but nos is used in the nominative case only by
sovereigns, dignitaries, and tribunals in Church and State, in
their official capacity :

Nos, D. N., Obispo de N... We, D. N., Bishop of N...
Nos los Inquisitores. . . We the Inquisitors. . .
Nore. — In the usual style, nosotros, masc., nosotras, fem., is always used.

8. You is rendered in Spanish by vos, vosotros, masc., voso-
tras, fem. ; and also by usted (or V.) for the singular of both
genders, and ustedes (or VV.) for the plural.

Vos is used only in elevated style, or when addressing the

Deity, saints, kings, and sovereigns when the title of Majesty
is omitted :
PRONOUNS. 39

De vos espero alivio, Seiior, From ‘thee I expect relief, O Lord.
A vos elevo mis suplicas, Rey y To thee I raise my prayers, King and
Seftor, Lord.

Vos, Sefior, podéis remediar mi Thou, O Lord, canst relieve my misery.
desgracia,

Vosotros is used by orators and speakers when addressing
their auditors.

Usted (V. or Vd.) in the singular, and ustedes (VV., Vs.,
or Vds.) in the plural is the only form of direct address that a
stranger is likely to use. It is the universal conversational
expression, since vosotros is never used, and tii marks a decided
intimacy.

Usted is a contraction of vuestra merced, your grace, and
requires the verb to be in the third person singular, as ustedes
requires the third person plural :

Usted tiene, you (sing.) have. Ustedes tienen, you (plur.) have.
Usted es, you (sing.) are. Ustedes son, you (plur.) are.
Usted da, you (sing.) give. Ustedes dan, you (plur.) give.

Nore. — We use, in fact, the same form of expressing ourselves in Eng-
lish when we say, speaking to a judge, an archbishop, etc.: Your Honor
knows... 3 your Grace is... ; etc. instead of the plain and usual: You
know... 3 youare...; ete

4, Verbs are conjugated interrogatively by placing the verb
before its subject. This takes place in all cases of interrogation,
as is the case with to have, to be, to will, etc. :

i Tengo yo? Have I?

i Tiene el hombre ? Has the man?

i Sabe el padre ? Does the father know (lit. knows the father) ?
j Van los muchachos ? Do the boys go?

4 Qué dice la sefiora ? What does the lady say ?

i Qué decian los hombres ? What did the men say ?
j Sabe V. cuando viene mi Do you know when my father comes (lit.
padre ? when comes my father) ?

5. In interrogative sentences it is considered an elegant way
of expressing one’s self, to place the object before the subject
when the latter is not a pronoun :
40 LESSON 4.

i Tiene dinero el hombre ? Has the man any money?
i Es bueno el vino ? Is the wine good ?

6, Each person of the verb having generally in Spanish, as
in Latin, a different termination, the accompanying pronouns
may be and are generally left out in conversation, and even in
the conjugation, when the sentence is otherwise sufficiently clear.

| But usted and ustedes should not be left out, however, as they
accompany the verb in the third person singular and third per-
son plural, as well as él, he; ella, she ; and ellos (masc.), ellas
(fem.), they, and as their omission might create confusion :

Tengo, J have. Tenemos, we have.
Tienes, thou hast. Tienen, they have.
Sale, he or she goes out. Salen, they go out.

OBsERVATION. — In interrogative sentences it is also better to preserve
the pronouns.

7, As a sentence may be construed in different ways in Span-
ish, as will be seen hereafter, the interrogative form may often
be found in affirmative sentences:

Tiene V. razdn, You are right.
Es V. muy bueno, You are very kind.
Habla V. muy bien, You speak very well.
8. Some or any before nouns is generally not expressed in
Spanish :
i Tiene V. vino? Have you (any) wine?
No tenemos queso, We have n’t (any) cheese.

OBSERVATION. — When some or any stands alone, alguno, alguna,
algunos, algunas is used:

Tengo alguno, I hawe some (vino).
Tiene algunas, He has some (peras).
VERBS SER AND ESTAR, 41

Leccion VY.

Lesson V.

Verbs ser and estar, to be.

Present Tense of ser, to be.

Affirmatively.
Yo soy, Iam.
Tu eres, thou art.
El es, he ts.
Ella es, she ts.
Usted es, you are.

Nosotros somos, we are.

Vosotros sois, you are.

Ellos son, they (masc.) are.

Ellas son, they (fem.) are.

Ustedes son, you are.
Ejemplos.

La vida es corta.

Somos mortales,

Mi padre es médico.

Mis hermanos son pintores.
Carlos es bueno.

Juan y Enrique son malos,
El profesor es muy docto.
V. es muy alto.

Los muchaches son pequeiios,
Maria es mi hermana.

La madre es vieja.

El padre es ciego.

La muchacha es bonita,

La leche es blancal.

El plomo es pesado,

El reloj es de oro.

Los candeleros son de plata.
El dinero es mio.

Interrogatively.
i Soy yo? am I?
ij Eres tu? art thow?
ij Es él? ts he?
i Es ella? ts she?
i Es usted ? are you?

4 Somos nosotros? are we?

iSois vosotros? are you?

4 Son ellos ? are they (masc.) 4
i Son ellas ? are they (fem.) ?
4 Son ustedes ? are you?

Examples.

Life is short.

We are mortal.

My father is a physician.

My brothers are painters.
Charles is good.

John and Henry are bad.
The professor is very learned.
You are very tall.

The boys are small,

Mary is my sister.

The mother is old.

The father is blind.

The girl is pretty.

Milk is white.

Lead is heavy.

The watch is of gold.

The candlesticks are of silver.
The money is mine.

 

1 See L. 8.
42

La casa es del médico.

Este vino es de Espafia.

La flor es para mi hermana,

La maquina es para copiar cartas.

i Quién es V. ?

El amor de Dios es el principio de
la sabiduria.

Present Tense

Affirmatively.
Yo estoy, Tam.
Tu estas, thou art.
El esté, he ts.
Ella esta, she is.
Usted esta, you are.
Nosotros estamos, we are.
Vosotros estais, you are,

they (masc.) are.
they (fem.) are.
you are.

Ellos estan,
Ellas estan,
Ustedes estan,

Ejemplos.

Mi hermana esté triste.

Yo estoy muy contento.

El café esta frio.

La carne esta asada.

Los muchachos estan en la calle.
Mi amigo esta en Paris.

Carlos esta enfermo.

i Dénde esta mi sombrero ?

El sombrero esta de moda,

LESSON 5.

The house belongs to the physician.

This wine is from Spain.

The flower is for my sister.

The machine is to copy letters.

Who are you ?

The love of God is the beginning
of wisdom.

of estar, to be.

Interrogatively.
i Estoy yo? am I?
i Estas tu ? art thou ?
i Esta él ? ts he?

i Esta ella? is she?

j Esta usted ? are you?
i Estamos nosotros? are we?
i Estais vosotros? are you?

are they (masc.) ?
are they (fem.) ?
are you?

i Estan ellos ?
i Estan ellas ?
j Estan ustedes ?

Examples.

My sister is sad.

I am very pleased.

The coffee is cold.

The meat is roasted.

The boys are in the street,
My friend is in Paris.
Charles is sick.

Where is my hat ?

The hat is in the fashion.

Ser and estar compared.

Ser bueno, to be good.

Ser malo, to be bad (wicked).
Ser vivo, to be lively.

Ser cansado, to be tiresome.

Estar bueno, to be well (in health),
Estar malo, to be <1 (sick).

Estar vivo, to be alive.

Estar cansado, to be tired,
VERBS SER AND ESTAR. 43

Vocabulario. Vocabulary.
E) abogado, the lawyer. | Bueno, good, well. Lejos, far.
El campo, the country. | Cerrado, closed, shut. Londres, London.
La calle, the street. Contento, picased, satisfied. | Malo, bad, iil.
La puerta, the door. Donde, where. Nadie, nobody, no one.
Agrio, sour. Gracias, thank you. Triste, sad.
Ahora, now, Joven, young. iSabe V.? do you know?

Exercise 9.

1. Los dos hermanos de Carlos estén ahora en Paris, 2. ; Quién
es V.! 3. Soy el hijo del médico. 4. 4 Dénde estén los libros?
5. Estan sobre la mesa en mi cuarto. 6. ; Es V. médico? 7. No,
sefor, soy abogado. 8. , Es bueno el vino? 9. Estéagrio. 10. Las
muchachas estén en el jardin, y los muchachos est4n en la calle.
11. La hija del panadero es muy joven. 12. Juan y Maria estin en
la casa del general. 13. Mi casa esta muy lejos de aqui. 14. Los dos
médicos son Franceses. 15. ; Es V. Americano? 16. No, sefior, soy
Inglés. 17. ; Hs V.de Londres? 18. Si, sefior, soy de Londres, y
mi padre es de Liverpool. 19. Los dos hijos del carpintero estan muy
malos. 20. ; Donde esté Juan? 21. Estécon mihermano. 22. El
café es bueno, pero esta frio. 23. ; Estaén VV. contentos? 24. Esta-
mos muy contentos ahora. 25. ; Quién est4é en micuarto? 26. Nadie,
el cuarto esté cerrado. 27. La hija del general es muy amable.
28. ;Con quién esté mi madre? 29. Ella est4 con mis (my) dos
hermanas. 30. Los cazadores estan en el bosque.

Exercise 10.

1. Do you know where the book is (where is the book)? 2. The
book is on the table. 3. Where is the father now? 4. He is in
London. 5. Is he well? 6. He is very well, thank you. 7. Are
the Americans and the English friends? 8. They are friends now.
9. Who are you? 10. I am Charles’s friend. 11. Where is he?
12, He is in the country. 13. The two sons of the physician are
small, but they are very bad. 14. Hereismy book. 15. Is the cheese
good? 16. The cheese and the bread are very good. 17. Is the baker
an American? 18. No, sir, he is a Frenchman. 19. The two
hunters are brothers. 20. Are you pleased here? 21. Yes, we have
money, and we are pleased. 22. My brother’s friend is a lawyer.
44 LESSON 5.

23. Who is at the door? 24. A boy with apples. 25. John and
Henry are in the city. 26. Where are the chickens? 27. The
chickens are now in the garden. 28. The wine is sour and bad.
29. Who is sad? 30. Nobody is sad here.

Gramatica. Grammar.

1, Although the two Spanish verbs ser and estar are both
rendered in English by the verb to be, they cannot be used
indifferently one for the other; each has its distinct meaning.

Ser is used when the attribute of the subject is inherent,
essential, or lasting, while estar is to be used when the attribute
is only accidental or temporary.

The usage will be shown in the following examples:

Es general, He is a general.

Es profesor, He is a professor.

Es bonita, She is pretty.

Son grandes, They are tall.

La miel es dulce, Honey is sweet.

Es tarde, dt is late.

Esta bueno, He is well.

E] agua esta caliente, The water is warm,
Estamos de priesa, We are in a hurry.
El nifio es feo, The child is homely.
E] nifio esté cansado, The child is tired.

La muchacha es buena, The girl ts good.

La muchacha esta buena, The girl ts well.

La mujer es alegre, The woman is of a jolly nature.
La mujer esta alegre, The woman feels jolly,

Norte. — Position, even though permanent, is indicated by estar (which
here has its original Latin meaning, stare = to stand).

Est& en Francia, He ts in France.
Mi casa esta en el campo, My house is in the country.
Madrid esté en Espafia, Madrid is in Spain.

Note 2.— A predicate noun requires ser.
VERBS DE AND PARA.

45

2, Ser is used to express possession, origin, destination, apt-
ness, in combination with certain prepositions :

Este jardin es de mi tio,
Este vino es de Francia,
El libro es para V.,

El noes para trabajar,

This garden is my wnele’s,
This wine is from France.
The book is for you.

He is not fit to work.

3. Estar is used to express occupation, intention, or willing-
ness, and futurity, in combination with certain prepositions :

Hoy estoy de guardia,
Yo estoy para salir,
La casa esta por acabar,

Lecci6n VI.

To-day I am on duty.
LT intend to go out.
The house is not yet finished,

Lesson VI.

USE OF THE PREPOSITIONS DE AND PARA.

Ejemplos.

Pablo tiene un reloj de oro. i

Tenemos dos mesas de marmol.
j Tienen VV. plumas de acero ?
Tenemos plumas de oro y de acero.
Adolfo tiene un chaleco de seda.
El médico tiene una casa de madera.
Los muchachos tienen un tintero

de piomo. }
Tenemos una maquina de lavar.
Compafiia de Relojes de Nueva York.
Carruages de primera clase.
Una bomba de vapor.
Agua de Florida.
Un maestro de escuela.
Una maquina de coser.

Mevas para comedor. }

Examples.

Paul has « gold watch (a watch of
gold).

We have two marble tables.

Have you any steel pens ?

We have gold and steel pens.

Adolphus has a silk waistcoat.

The physician has a wooden house.

The boys have a leaden inkstand.

We have a washing machine.

New York Watch Company.

First-class carriages.

A fire engine.

Florida water.

A schoolmaster.

A sewing machine.

Dining room tables (tables for din-
ing rooms).
46 LESSON 6.

Tinte para el pelo.
Polvos para insectos.
Efectos para marineros.

Vocabulario.
El algod6n, the cotton.
EI almacén, the store.
El arce, the maple.
El azticar, the sugar.
El billar, the billiard.
El cuchillo, the knife.

El extinguidor, the extingwisher.
El fabricante, the manufacturer.

El fuego, the fire.

El hierro, the tron.

El instrumento, the instrument.
El joyero, the jeweler.

El pedazo, the piece.

El plomo, the dead.

El tiempo, the time.

El tintero, the inkstand,

El vapor, the steam.

El vidrio,! the glass.

 

Hair dye (dye for the hair).
Insect powders (powder for insects).
Sailors’ goods (goods for sailors).

Vocabulary.

La caja, the safe, the box.
La caiia,? the cane.
La caoba, the mahogany.
La cerveza, the beer.
La hacienda, the estate.
La seda, the silk.
Alli, there.
Célebre, selebrated.
Champaiia, Champagne.
Desde, since.
Escribo, I write.
Para, for.
iQuiere V.2 Will you have? Do

you wish ?
Quiero, J wish, I will have.
Seiior, sir.
Sefiora, madam, Mrs,
Vende, sedis.

Exercise 11.

1. , Qué vino tiene V. en la casa? 2. Tengo vino de Champafia.
3. Las plumas de acero de Spéncer son muy célebres. 4. Tenemos
una caja de hierro en el almacén. 5. Tenemos también ‘un extingui-
dor de fuego. 6. ; Tienen VV. una mesa de billar? 7. Tenemos dos.
8. Mi hermano vende instrumentos para joyeros- 9. ; Y qué vende
V.? 10. Soy fabricante de mesas para comedor. 11. Mi hermano
es dependiente en la Compafifa de Manhattan. 12. ; Tienen VV. una
maquina de vapor en la hacienda? 13. Si, sefior, tenemos una desde

mucho tiempo (a long time).

14. 4 Quiere V. un paraguas de seda

6 dealgodén? 15. Quiero uno de seda. 16. El padre de Enrique
tiene una casa de campo. 17. Mi hermana tiene un traje de seda.

18. Tenemos una mesa de caoba.

20. Quiero azucar de arce.

19. 4 Quiere V. aztcar de cafia ?

 

1 Vidrio, g/ass, refers only to the substance called glass, while vaso is

used for a glass to drink from.

2 Caiia, cane, does not refer to a walking stick, which is un bastén,
DE AND PARA. 47

Exercise 12.

1. What will you have? 2. I wish a piece of bread. 3. Do you
write with a gold pen? 4. No, sir, I write with a steel pen. 5. In
what company are you (a) clerk? 6. In the New York Watch Com-
pany. 7. What does your (su) brother sell? 8. He sells silk hats,
9. Have you a glass inkstand? 10, No, sir, I have a leaden ink-
stand. 11. What knife will you have? 12. I wish a butcher's knife.
13. What hat has Henry? 14. He has a hunter’s hat. 15. Does the
merchant sell wine? 16, He sells wine and beer. 17. With whom
are the hunters in the wood? 18. They are there with the young
soldier. 19, Have the ladies a fan? 20, They have two fans,

Gramatica. Grammar.

1. The material of which a thing ts made is indicated by the
preposition de, of, from, between the name of the thing and that
of the material :

Un sombrero de seda, A silk hat (lit. a hat of sith).
Un reloj de oro, A gold watch (a watch of gold).

2, The word representing the nature, species, locality or qual-
ity of a thing, which in English is placed first, comes second in
Spanish, and is joined to the first noun by de, of, from:

Un traje de verano, A summer dress.
Agua de lluvia, Rain water.

Vino de Burdeos, Bordeaux wine, claret.
Caita de azucar, Sugar cane.

3. The word representing a particular use, appendage, pur-
pose, physical or moral property, place where things are kept,
etc., comes second in Spanish, and is generally joined to the first
noun by the prepositions para, for ; or de, of, from:

Maquina para gas, Gas machine.
Jaulas para pajaros, Bird cages.
Estante para sombreros, Hat stand.

Maquinas de coser, Sewing machines.
LESSON 7.

Lecci6n VII. Lesson VII.

THE NEGATIVE,

No tener, not to have.

Negatively.

Yo no tengo (no tengo),
TU no tienes,

El no tiene,

Ella no tiene,

Usted no tiene,
Nosotros no tenemos,
Vosotros no tenéis,
Ellos no tienen,

Ellas no tienen,
Ustedes no tienen,

I have not.

thou hast not.

he has not.

she has not.

you have not.

we have not.

you have not.

they (masc.) have not,
they (fem.) have not.
you have not.

Negatively and Interrogatively.

4 No tengo yo?

4 No tienes tu ?

4 No tiene 41?

i No tiene ella?

i No tiene usted ?

4 No tenemos nosotros ?
4 No tenéis vosotros ?
4No tienen ellos ?

i No tienen ellas ?

3 No tienen ustedes ?

have I not ?

hast thou not ?

has he not ?

has she not ?

have you not ?

have we not?

have you not ?

have they (masc.) not ?
have they (fem.) not ?
have you not ?
THE NEGATIVE. 49

Ser and eatar, to be.

Negatively.
Yo no soy, i
Yo no estoy, DOE
etc. ete.

Negatively and Interrogatively.
4 No soy yo?
i No estoy yo?

} am I not?
etc, etc.

Negative with

Jaméa, never, ever.

Nada, nothing, not anything.
Nadie, nobody, not anybody.
Ni, neither, nor.

Yo no tengo nada, or nada tengo. {

Yo no quiero ninguno, or ninguno
quiero.

El no est jamds en casa, or jamds }
esta él en casa.

El no tiene nunca dinero, or nun- ;
ca tiene él dinero.

No sale nadie, or nadie sale.

No tengo ni pan ni queso, or ni
pan ni queso tengo. }

Ejemplos.

i Es pobre el hombre ?

No es pobre, es rico.

i No tiene V. dinero ?

Ni dinero ni crédito tengo.
i No quiere V. pan?

Nada quiero hoy.

i No sale mi padre hoy ?
fil no sale.

Luisa no es amable.

i Vende sombreros el comerciante ?
£1 no vende ningunos.

i Qué tiene V. en la caja ?
Nada tengo.

Nadie sahe la leccidn.
Isabel no es dichosa.

Ni libros ni plumas tengo.

Ninguno, (sing.) pe one, none, ne,
Ningunos, (pl.)
Nunca, never.

not any.

I have nothing ; I don’t have any-
thing.

I don’t wish any.
He is never at home.

He never has any money.
Nobody goes out.

I have neither bread nor cheese,

Examples.

Is the man poor ?

He is not poor, he is rich.

Have you no money ?

I have neither money nor credit.
Don’t you wish any bread ?

I don’t wish anything to-day.
Does not my father go out to-day ?
He does not go out.

Louisa is not amiable.

Does the merchant sell hats ?
He does not sell any.

What have you in the box ?

I have nothing.

Nobody knows the lesson.
Isabel is not happy.

T have neither books nor pens.
50 LESSON 7.

Vocabulario. Vocabulary.
El aceite, the oil. Compra V. ? do you buy ? Nunca, never.
La lampara, the lamp. Compro, J buy. aPorqué? why?
La leccié6n, the lesson. Esto, this, this thing. Porque, because.
La luz, the light. Jamas, never, ever. 4 Sabe V.? do you
Abajo, downstairs. Listo, ready. know ?

Alguno, some, any, some | Nada, nothing, not anything. | Yo 36, I know.
one, any one, somebody, | Nadie, nobody, not anybody. | Sin, without.
anybody. Ni, neither, nor. Todavia, yet.

Aquello, that, that thing. | Ninguno, not any, none, no. | Vendo, J sell.

Exercise 13.

1, 4 Tiene V. dinero hoy? 2. Tengo dinero, pero no tengo pan en
la casa. 3. 4; Esté malo el muchacho? 4, No esta malo hoy, esta
muy bueno. 5. 4 Esté aqui el panadero? 6. El panadero no esta
aqui, pero el carnicero esté aqui. 7. Es V. el amigo de Carlos?
8. No, sefior, soy el amigo de Enrique. 9. 4 Quiere V. un pedazo de
pan con queso? 10. Quiero pan, pero sin queso. 11. 4 Quiere V. el
dinero? 12. Todavia no. 13.4 Déndeesté Juan? 14. No estd aqui,
esté abajo. 15. j No esté la casa del general en la calle de Madrid ?
16. El general no tiene casa aqui. 17. 4 Quiere V. esto 6 aquello?
18. Quiero esto, pero no aquello. 19. 4 Tienen pan los muchachos ?
20. Tienen pan, pero no tienen carne. 21. ; Notiene V. oro? 22. No
tengo oro, pero tengo plata. 23. 4 Porqué no esta V. en el jardin
con los muchachos? 24, Porque no quiero. 25. 4 Es rico el médico?
26. No es rico, pero tiene una casa en Nueva York. 27. 4 Porqué
no tiene V. luz en el cuarto? 28. Porque no tengo aceite para,
mi lampara. 29. ; Compra V. vino 6 cerveza? 30. No compro ni
vino ni cerveza; no compro nada. 31. Nunca sabe V. la leccidn.
_ 32. 4 Tiene alguno mi libro? 33. Nadie tiene el libro.

Exercise 14.

1. Have you a silk umbrella? 2. I have:‘two umbrellas, but not
of silk. 3. Are you a physician? 4. No, sir, I am a merchant.
5. Have you not a store in Broadway? 6. No, sir, my store is not in
Broadway. 7. Are you not ready? 8. No, sir, not yet. 9. The
Frenchman and the Englishman are not friends. 10. Have the sol-
diers any guns? 11. They have no guns, but they have sabers,
THE NEGATIVE. 51

12. The wine is not good; do you know why? 13. I don’t know
why. 14, Have youa theater in the city? 15. We have no theater yet.
16. Who is in the garden? 17. Nobody is in the garden. 18.-Have
you anything for my brother? 19. I have nothing to-day. 20, Has
Jobn any friends? 21. He has neither friends nor money. 22. Do
you know the lesson to-day? 23. Nobody knows the lesson.
24, Why not? 25. Because we are sick. 26. Are the boys in the
room? 27. The boys are not in the room, but the girls are there.
28. What do you sell to Henry? 29. I don’t sell anything to any-
body. 30. The trees of the garden are not green. 31. Is Charles
with any one in the room? 32. No, sir, with no one.

Gramatica. Grammar.

1. In negative sentences, no is placed before the verb:

Yo no tengo, I have not.

j No quiere él? Does he not wish ?

i No han llegado? Have they not arrived?
El no quiere, He does not wish.

2, The Spaniards use a double negative to render the nega-
tion stronger:
No quiero nada, I wish for nothing. I don't wish anything.

No tengo ninguno, I have none.
No le hablo nunca, I never speak to him.

OBSERVATION. — The adverb no is, however, omitted when we place
another negative before the verb, or when the verb is not expressed (a :
literary construction) :

Nada quiero. Ninguno tengo. Nadie.

3. Jamas and nunca have the same meaning in the nega-
tive, and are generally placed at the beginning of the sentence,
without the adverb no:

Jamas vi tal cosa or nunca vi tal cosa, I never saw such @ thing.

4, Jamas is often used with siempre, ever, and nunca, never,
$o strengthen them:
52 LESSON 7.

Nunca jams lo dire, I shall never tell it.
Por siempre jamés me acordaré I shall remember him for ever and
de él, ever.

Norz, — Jam4s, when not accompanied by no, and not at the beginning
of the sentence, means ever :

§ Ha visto V. jamas tal cosa? Have you ever seen such a thing?
5, Nadie, no one, and nada, nothing, are used with the nega-

tive meaning either before the verb, after it in combination with
no, or when used alone :

Nadie veo, I see no one. I don’t see anybody.
i No ve V. nada? Do you see nothing? Don’t you see anything.
Nada, Nothing.

Nore. — Nadie, nada, jam4s (also ninguno and nunea) are used in the
positive sense after verbs when a negative idea is implied :

i Ha visto V. nada ? Did you see anything ?
i Yo hablar a nadie ! I speak to anybody !
Sin ver 4 nadie, Without seeing anybody.

6, Although no is used to form the negative, it is sometimes
used redundantly in positive sentences:

Mejor es el trabajo que no la ociosidad, § Labor is preferable to idleness.
No partiré hasta que no llegue V. I shall not leave until you come.

7. Ninguno (ninguna, ningunos, ningunas) may be used
alone, or with a noun. In the former case it means none, no
one, ete., in the latter, no (not any).

No tengo ninguno, Thave n't any

Ninguno tengo,
Have you no book ?

. 2 gta Mee?
4 No tiene V. ningun libro { ‘Hament yoibuny Book}

OBSERVATION. — When a noun is expressed, ninguno may be omitted:

No tengo dinero, I have n't any money.
No tiene libros, He hasn't any books.

Nore. —Ninguno drops the last letter before « masculine singular
noun,
No quiere ningun dinero, He doesn’t want any money,
ADJECTIVES. FORMATION OF THE FEMININE. 53

8. No, connected with a pronoun, an adverb, and even with
other parts of speech, is generally placed last, when used with-
out a verb:

Yo no, not I. Asi no, not so.
Eso no, not that. Todavia no, not yet.
Hoy no, not to-day.

9, Alguno (alguna, algunos, algunas), meaning some, any,
some one, any one, somebody, anybody, drops the last letter (like
ninguno)' before a masculine noun in the singular, and may
either come in the sentence or be omitted:

Tiene V. algtin dinero? or t

i Tiene V. dinero? Have you any money?

OBSERVATION. —The student should be careful never to translate not
anything by no algo, nor not anybody by no algwno, —a mistake wnich
is very common among beginners. Nada, nadie, or ninguno must be used
in these cases,

Leccion VIII. Lesson VIII.
ADJECTIVES. FORMATION OF THE FEMININE,
Ejemplos. Examples.

El muchacho es bueno. The boy is good.

La muchacha es buena. The girl is good.

El caballo es hermoso. The horse is fine.

La casa es hermosa. The house is fine.

E] hijo es feo. The son is ugly.

La hija es bonita. The daughter is pretty.
El caballero es Francés. The gentleman is French.
La sefiora es Inglesa. The lady is English.
Antonio es holgazan. Anthony is lazy.
Cristina es holgazana. Christina is lazy.
José es trabajador. Joseph is industrious.
Juana es trabajadora. Jane is industrious.

=

1 Ningdn and algdn then require the written accent as the stress falls
on the last syllable.
54 LESSON 8.

El padre es grave. The father is grave.
La madre es alegre. The mother is lively.
El azucar es dulce. The sugar is sweet.
La yerba es verde. The grass is green.
E] trabajo es facil. The work is easy.
La flor es azul. The flower is blue.
Fernando es joven. Ferdinand is young.
Julia es cortés, Julia is polite.

Agreement of Adjectives.

i Es Guillermo bueno 6 malo ? Is William good or bad ?

4 Es Isabel buena 6 mala? Is Isabel good or bad ?

El tio y el padre son viejos. The uncle and the father are old.
La tia y la madre son viejas. The aunt and the mother are old.
E] tio y la tia son ricos. The uncle and aunt are rich,

Adjectives used Substantively.

El pobre. The poor man.

E] pobre viejo. The poor old man.

La pobre vieja. The poor old woman.

Un ciego. — Una ciega. A blind man. — A blind woman.

E] sabio es prudente. The wise man is prudent.

El grande. — La grande. The large one (masc.). — The large one (fem.),
Vocabulario. Vocabulary.

El café, the coffee. La mujer, the woman, wife. | Facil, easy.

El conde, the count. La prima, the cousin, f. Feliz, happy.

El criado, the servant, m. | La reina, the queen. Feo, ugly, homely.

El primo, the cousin, m. La torre, the tower. Fiel, faithful.

El rey, the king. Agradable, agreeable. Infeliz, unhappy.

El té, the tea. Alegre, lively. Orgulloso, proud.

El trabajo, the work. Aleman, German. Sabio, wise.

El traje, the dress. Alto, high, tall. ~~ Sordo, deaf.

La condesa, the countess. Bonito, pretty. Timido, timid.

La criada, the servant girl. | Ciego, blind. Valiente, brave.

La isla, the island. Dificil, dificult. Viejo, old.

La legumbre, the vegetable. | Enfermo, sick, ill. Tonto, stupid.

Exercise 15.

1. El hijo de Juan es muy tonto. 2. Las dos hijas del panadero
son muy bonitas. 3. El padre del comerciante es todavia muy joven. -
ADJECTIVES. FORMATION OF THE FEMININE. 55

4. Los soldados del principe son muy valientes. 5. Mi leccién es
muy dificil. 6. El primo y la prima son feos. 7. La mujer (wife)
de Pedro es sorda. 8. El pobre viejo esté malo. 9. 4 Qué pedazo
quiere V.?— Quiero el grande. 10. Las dos sefioras son Alemanas.
11. Los caballos de mi tio son negros. 12. La torre es muy alta.
13. El conde es orgulloso, pero la condesa es muy amable. 14. El her-
mano de Luisa es muy feliz. 15. Las dos muchachas son hermanas.
16. , Cuantos criados tiene V.?_ 17. Tengo dos criados y tres criadas.
18. Mi hermana tiene un hermoso traje de seda. 19. El rey de la
isla es viejo, pero la reina es joven. 20. El general tiene una her-
mosa casa en el campo. 21. j Es bueno el café? 22. El café es bueno,
pero el té es malo. 23. ; Qué vende la mujer? 24, Vende buenas
manzanas. 25. 4 Porqué esta V. triste? 26. Porque mi padre esté
enfermo. 27. La cindad es pequefia, pero muy agradable. 28. El
perro es fiel. 29. ; Estan VV. contentas, sefioras? 30. Estamos muy
contentas ahora. 31. Las cerezas no son dulces.

Exercise 16.

1, Are the horses good? 2. They are good, but small. 3. Have
you (plur.) flowers in the two gardens? 4, We have flowers in the
little one, and vegetables in the large one. 5. Why are you so sad,
madam? 6. Because the children are sick. 7, The French women
are lively and amiable. 8. The houses of New York are high.
9. The English women are handsome. 10. The general’s sister is
happy, but his (su) brother is unhappy. 11. The father, mother, and
children are sick. 12. The houses of the city are large. 13. Are
the two ladies American? 14. No, sir, they areGerman. 15. Is the
woman blind? 16. She is deaf. 17. Is the baker’s daughter pretty ?
18. She is very homely, but very amiable. 19. My work is easy, but
my brother’s work is very difficult. 20. Louisa and Mary are cousins.
21. Mary is very lively, but Louisa is very timid. 22. Charles’s
father is wise and prudent. 23. Henry’s brother is very rich, but he
is not proud. 24. Julia and Mary are the good friends of my sister.
25. Have you (plur.) wine in the house? 26, We have no wine, but
we have very good beer.
aay

56 LESSON 8.

Gramatica. Grammar.

1. Adjectives agree in Spanish, as in almost all other lan-
guages, in gender and number with the noun which they
qualify.

Adjectives ending in 0 form their feminine by changing 0
into a, as:

Bueno (m.), buena (f.), good ; Malo (m.), mala (f.), bad;
Alto (m.), alta (7), high; etc.

The same rule applies to nouns having a feminine:

Un panadero, a baker ; una panadera, a (female) baker, or a baker’s wife.
Un criado, a (male) servant ; una criada, a (female) servant.

Un tio, an uncle; una tia, an aunt.

Mi primo, my (male) cousin ; mi prima, my (female) cousin.

Mi hermano, my brother ; mi hermana, my sister.

Un viudo, a widower ; una viuda, a widow.

Un cocinero, a (male) cook ; una cocinera, a (female) cook.

OBSERVATIONS. — Augmentatives and diminutives ending in ete or ote
also change the last letter into a for the feminine :

Regordete (m.), regordeta (7f.), small and stout ;

Altote (m.), altota (f.), very tall ; etc.
2. Adjectives ending in -an and -on add an a for the feminine:
Holgazdn, m., idle ; holgazana, /. Harén, m., azy ; harona, /.
Exceptions. — Ruin, contemptible ; comin, common ; and all adjectives

ending in en, as joven, young ; remain unchanged.

8. Adjectives referring to the nationality and ending with a
consonant add a for the feminine:

Frances, m., French ; francesa, f.
Inglés, m., English ; inglesa, /.

Alemén, m., German; alemana, /.
Irlandés, m., Irish ; irlandesa, /.
Espaiiol,m., Spanish ; espafiola, f.

Nortz. — Among the adjectives of this last class, some are found that
terminate in a, and do not undergo any change in the feminine, as persa,
Persian ; moscovita, Muscovite ; etc,
ADJECTIVES. FORMATION OF THE FEMININE. 57

4, Adjectives ending in or also add a for the feminine:

Trabajador, m., industrious, diligent ; trabajadora, /.
Traidor, m., treacherous ; traidora, /.

Nort. — Comparatives in or do not change: la mayor parte, the greater
part, La puerta interior, the inner door.

3, Those adjectives which end in the masculine with any

other letter do not change in the feminine : wT

Un hombre cortés, a polite man ; una mujer cortés, a polite woman.
Un hombre grave, @ grave man ; una materia grave, a grave matter.
El trabajo es facil, the work is easy ; la cosa es facil, the thing is easy.

6. When an adjective relates to two or more nouns in the
singular, it must be put in the plural :
E] padre y el hijo son buenos, The father and son are good.
7, An adjective qualifying two or more nouns of different
genders is put in the masculine plural :
El padre y la madre son ricos, The father and mother are rich.

OBSERVATION. — When, however, the adjective stands near a feminine
noun in the plural it must agree with the feminine noun, but such con-
structions must be avoided as much as possible, and it is preferable to
qualify each noun by an adjective having a corresponding meaning, or
select an adjective having but one termination for both genders :

Los caudales y Ja hacienda eran The capital and the property were

grandes, large.

E] general tiene un valor mara- The general has (a) wonderful brav-
villoso y una constancia por- ery and persistence (is wonder-
tentosa, fully brave and persistent).

8.,. Adjectives are often used substantively either in the sin-
gular or plural :

El bueno y el malo, The good and the bad one.
Los ricos y los pobres, The rich and the poor.
58 LESSON 9.

Leccion IX.

PLACE OF

Ejemplos.

Lesson IX.

ADJECTIVES.

fHxamples.

Adjectives preceding the Noun.

Mateo es un buen muchacho.
Carolina es una hermosa muchacha.
i Qué excelente vino!

i Donde esta la joven Agata?

Tengo un bonito libro.

El pulpero tiene dulce miel.

Mi amigo tiene un gran caballo.
Domingo es mi grande amigo.

Matthew is a good boy.

Caroline is a handsome girl,
What an excellent wine !

Where is young Agatha?

I have a pretty book.

The grocer has sweet honey.

My friend has a famous horse, m.
Dominic is my great (good) friend,

Adjectives following the Noun.

Tonemos un caballo blanco.
Tengo un libro francés.
Aprendo la lengua espaiiola.
Tengo una mesa redonda.

El juez es un hombre justo.
Vivo en la calle nueva.
Pedro es un hombre viejo.
Octavio es un muchacho feo.

We have a white horse.

I have a French book.

I learn the Spanish language.
I have a round table.

The judge is a just man.

I live in the new street.
Peter is an old man.
Octavius is a homely boy.

El comerciante es un hombre muy rico. The merchant is a very rich man.

Vocabulario.

El animal, the animal.
El buque, the ship, the vessel.
El capitan, the captain.
El diseipulo, the pupil.
El oficial, the officer.

EI paiio, the cloth.

El puerto, the port.

El rfo, the river.

El sastre, the tailor.

El tomo, the volume.
La escuela, the school.

Vocabulary.

Blanco, white.

Buenos dias, good morning, good day.
Colorado, red.

Dichoso, happy.

Era, was.

Excelente, excellent.
Espaiiol, Spanish, Spaniard.
Inglaterra, England.
Inteligente, intelligent.
Mismo, same.

Obediente, obedient,
PLACE OF ADJECTIVES. 69

La historia, the history. Primero, first.
La rosa, the rose. Ruso, Russian.
La vaca, the cow. Si, i.
Azul, blue. Util, useful.

0, or.

Exercise 17.

1. ; Tienen ustedes una vaca? 2. Si, tenemos una vaca negra y
blanca. 3. El perro es un animal fiel y util. 4. Don Juan es un
hombre muy amable. 5. Los dos nifios estén enfermos, la pobre
madre esta muy triste. 6. La sefiora con el traje negro es la hermaua
del oficial inglés. 7. 4 Quiere V. pan blanco 6 pan negro? 8. No qui-
ero pan. 9. El hijo del general es un joven inteligente. 10. 3 Sabe
V. si el comerciante tiene pafio azul? 11. El no tiene pafio azul,
pero tiene excelente pafio negro. 12. 4 Tiene V.el primer tomo de la
Historia de Inglaterra? 13. Tengo los dos primeros tomos. 14. El
hermano de Maria es muy rico, tiene dos casas grandes y hermosas
en la calle nueva. 15. 4 Dénde esté el buque ruso? 16. Esté en
el puerto nuevo. 17. 4 Buenos dias, sefiora, dénde esté la criada?
18. Esté en el cuarto grande. 19. , Quién es el primer discipulo de
la escuela? 20. Yo no sé quién es el primero. 21. El sastre tiene
un hijo ciego. 22. El capitén es un buen soldado. 23. El padre de
Enrique es dichoso, porque tiene un hijo obediente. 24. Napoledn
era un gran general. 25. ; Dénde esté el Rio Colorado? 26. Yo
no sé,

Exercise 18.

1. The English drink (beben) beer, good wine, and excellent tea.
2. We have good friends in the city. 3. Mary’s mother is already an
old woman. 4. The general is a prudent soldier. 5. The two Eng-
lish captains have large ships. 6. We have white roses in the gar-
den. 7. The children are sick because they eat (comen) green apples.
8. Louisa’s mother is an unhappy woman. 9. The butcher has good
meat to-day. 10. Have you French or English money? 11. We
have neither French nor English money, we have American gold.
12. The lesson of to-day is a difficult lesson. 13. Paris is a large city.
14. The count is a proud man, but the countess is an amiable lady.
15. The island of Cuba is a fine island. 16. Do you sell French
wines? 17. I sell French and Spanish wines. 18. My uncle has a
fine estate in Cuba. 19. The sons and daughters of the merchant are
60 LESSON 0.

small, 20, Who fs the tall gentloman inthe garden?) 2. Tho gen-
Homan with the white hat is ay unele, 22. Are you the brother of
the Russiun captain? 33. No, sit, bam tho cousin of the Gorman
captain, 2 Has the captain a new ship? 26. No, sir, he has the
same old ship,

Gramitica, Grammar.

IT, Adjectives in Spanish, as in’ Mrench, ara placed either
hoforo the noun whieh they qualify, or atber it Dut not in sneh
aw way as to leave their position to the discretion of the spoaker
or writer, Thoir normal position in aster the noun, bub this may
bo modified by usage or euphony.  ‘Thorofore no absolute rales
ean be given. As a matter of ouphony ib will bo nobioed that a
long adjootive ofion follows a short noun, and a short adjective
precodos a long non:

KI orden admirable, The wonderful arrangement,
Liv rangia ensefiunza, The out-afatate fustruction,

Tho following rules may, however, bo followed in most eases,
2 Adjectives gonorally placed before tho noun are:

1. Tho numeral adjectives when accompanied by the artiole :
HL primor tomo, (ie first voli, Tn boreora enun, Hie ifed hose,

2. Adjoctives oxprossing a quality portaining to the very
nature of the noun whieh they quality:

Un podoroso emperador, af powerful emporors
Un rico banquere, vt orich bunker,
Duloo miol, Nivect honey,
Amargn adolfa, Rittey oleander,

Norn, — Should wo svy miel duloo, adolfa amarga, tt might {mply that
there exist honey and olownder of a difforont taste,

8. Adjectives whon used figuratively :

Wn dolioiono viaje, A daligh(ful journey.
Una negra aceldn, A dark dood,
PLACE OF ADJECTIVES. 61

4. Adjectives used emphatically or in exclamatory sentences:

| Admirable accidén ! Admirable action !

3. In most other cases adjectives are placed after the noun.
They are more specially so:

1. When the adjective denotes color, nationality, shape, and
taste :

Un caballo blanco, « white horse. Un libro inglés, an English book.
Una mesa redonda, a round table. Vino agrio, sour wine.

2. When the adjective has the form of the past participle of

a verb:
Una ventana cerrada, A closed window.

Una puerta abierta, An open door.
3. When the adjective may be used substantively :

Un hombre justo, ) ; Un hombre malvado,

a Stato, } A just man. Un sadioada: \ 4 wicked man.

4, When the adjective does not express a special or essential
property pertaining to the noun:

Una calle ancha, A broad street,
Un hombre feo, An ugly man.
Una casa vieja, An old house.

5. When two or more adjectives qualify the same noun, it is
preferable to place them after the noun:

Es un hombre sabio, justo y pode- He is a wise, just, and powerful
TO80, man,

4, Certain adjectives have different meanings according to
their place before or after the noun :
Una cierta cosa, A certain thing.
Una cosa cierta, A sure thing.

Un pobre hombre, 4 poor man (poor in wits).
Un hombre pobre, A poor man (poor in money),

5. The Spaniards use the same word to designate Englishmar.
and English, Frenchman and French, Spaniard and Spanish,
62 LESSON 9.

etc.; but they write the word with a capital letter when used
substantively, aad with a small letter in other cases :

Un Espaiol, a Spaniard ; un libro espaiiol, a Spanish book.
Un Inglés, an Englishman; un buque inglés, an English ship.

6. The Spaniards use instead of Mr. and Mrs., Don, m., and
Doijia, f., before Christian names, and el Seiior, m., la Sefiora, f,
before family names:

Don Juan, Mr. John. El Sefior Hernandez, Mr. Hernandez.
Dota Maria, Mrs. Mary. La Sefiora Smith, Mrs. Smith.
E] S D* Carlos Marty, Mr. Charles Marty.

REMARKS ON CERTAIN ADJECTIVES. —1. Alguno, any one, anybody,
some one, somebody ; bueno, good ; malo, bad, ii ; ninguno, none, no one,
nobody ; postrero, last ; primero, first ; tercero, third; uno, a, an, one;
drop the o before a masculine noun in the singular :

Buen amo, good master. El primer hombre, the first man.
Ningun libro, no book. Un habil médico, a skillful physician ; ete.

But if they come after the noun they preserve the o :
Un hombre malo, a bad man. Libro tercero, third book ; etc.

The 0 is also preserved whenever the noun referring to the adjective is
not expressed :

Es bueno, He is good.
El primero de codos, The first of all.
Uno ce estos sefiores, One of these gentlemen ; etc.

2. Santo, saint, drops the last syllable before proper names of saints :
San Pedro, St. Peter ; San Juan, St. John ; etc.

OxssERVATION. — If the name of the saint begins with To or Do, the full
form is used :
Santo Domingo, St. Dominic ; Santo Tomas, St. Thomas.

However, when speaking of the island of St. Thomas, we say, la isla de
San Tomas.
DIMINUTIVE AND AUGMENTATIVE NOUNS.

63

3. Grande drops the last syllable before a noun beginning with a
consonant, whenever it means great in merit or qualities, celebrated or

Samous :

Una gran mujer,
. Un gran pocta,
Un gran caballo,

A distinguished woman.
A great poet.
An excellent or famous horse.

Nore. — If the noun begins with a vowel or an h, grande or gran may

be used indiscriminately.

Grande preserves the last syllable if it only expresses extent or dimension,
and is then placed preferably after the noun:

Una casa grande, a large house.
El teatro grande de Burdeos es
un gran teatro,

Leccion X.

Un campo grande, a large field.
The large theater in Bordeaux is @

splendid theater.

Lesson X.

DIMINUTIVE AND AUGMENTATIVE NOUNS.

Bjemplos.

Juanito tiene un perrito.

{ Qué bonita casita !

4 Donde esta mi hermanita ?

Esta con la mujercita.

El caballito de mi hermanito es un
bonito animalito.

Dos lamparitas ardjan en el cuar-
tito.

Hay pececitos en el rio.

El pobrecito esta malo.

El hombrecillo quiere dinero.

Yo no quiero ese perrillo.

Mi mesa es muy chiquita.

Tenemos un jardincito en el cam-
po.

El sehorito y la sefiorita estan
aqui.

Enrique es un muchachén y su

’ padre un hombronazo.

La hermana de Pedro es una mu- i

jerona.

Examples.

Johnny has a little dog.

What a pretty little house !

Where is my little sister ?

She is with the little woman.

My little brother’s little horse is a
pretty little animal.

Two small lamps were burning in the
little room.

There are little fishes in the river.

The poor little fellow is sick.

The miserable little man wants money.

I don’t wish that ugly little dog.

My table is very small.

We have a little garden in the coun-
try.

The young gentleman and the young
lady are here.

Henry is a big fat boy and his father
a big strong man.

Peter’s sister is a big stout woman.

;
64 LESSON 10.

Vocabulario. Vocabulary.
El autor, the author. La especulacién, the speculation.
El bastonazo, the blow (with a stick).| La flor, the flower.
El gusto, the pleasure. La legua, the league.
El ladrén, the thief. La mano, the hand.
El pajaro, the bird. La pelea, the fight.
El patio, the yard. La pieza, the piece.
El picaro, the rogue. La pufialada, the stab (with a poniard),
El pueblo, the town, village. Aqui, here.
El ricachén, the very rich man. Arriba, upstairs.
El talento, the talent. Chiquito, Zittle.
Los contornos, the suburbs. Ignorante, ignorant.
La boca, the mouth. Solo, alone.
La callejuela, the Jane. Su, his, her.
La cara, the face. Todo, all.
La cruz, the cross. Vive, lives,

 

Exercise 19.

1. La hermanita de Carlos esté mala. 2. ; Qué tiene el muchachito?
3. El no tiene nada. 4, El comerciante tiene una casita de campo en
los contornos de la ciudad. 5. 4 Dénde esta Juanito? 6. Esta en el
jardin con su amiguito. 7. 4 Dénde estan las dos sefioritas? 8. Estan
en el cuartito arriba, 9. 4 Estaba V. (were you) solo en el cuarto?
10. Si, sefior, yo estaba (was) solito. 11. ; Quién es el hombrecito?
12. Es el hermano de Luisita. 13. Maria tiene una crucecita de oro.
14. Los arboles del jardin son todavia chiquititos. 15. El amigo de
Enrique es un picarén. 16. Y Enrique es un ladronzuelo. 17. El
perro recibid (received) dos bastonazos. 18. Mi amigo recibié dos
pufialadas en la pelea. 19. El general es un hombrachén. 20. Los
dos jovencitos son primos. 21. Tenemos tres pajaritos en el jardin.
22. ; Quiere V. un pedazito de carne? 23. Si, sefior, con mucho
gusto. 24. Pedro vive en una callejuela de la ciudad. 25. 4 Porqué
no compra el ricachén una casa grande? 26. Porque tiene todo su
dinero en grandes especulaciones. 27. La hermana del panadero es
una mujercilla muy fea. 28. Los pollitos estén en el patio.

Exercise 20.

1. The little boy and the little girl are sick. 2. The little tailor
is very ignorant. 3. The brothers Ramirez have two small houses in
the city. 4. Who isin the little garden? 5. Louisa and my little
DIMINUTIVE AND AUGMENTATIVE NOUNS. 65

friend. 6. The merchant’s sons have two small horses. 7. The little
child has a pretty little face. 8. There are (hay) many birds on (en)
the small island. 9. With whom were you in Paris? 10. With my
little brother. 11. Charles has an ugly little dog. 12. The general’s
brother is a very rich man. 13. Little John and little Louisa are in
the country now (desde) two days. 14. Here isa pretty little book
for you. 15. What a pretty little flower! 16. Is Henry an author?
17. Yes, but a miserable author without talent. 18. Mary has a
pretty little mouth and pretty little hands. 19. Julia is a pretty
young lady. 20. The baker is a big stout man, but his sister is a
very small woman. 21. My aunt has a very, very small dog. 22. The
banker’s children are yet very small. 23. Where do you live now ?
24. In a very pretty little town not far from here. 25. Charles re-
ceived (recihid) a short letter from his friend. 26. The captain of the
small vessel is an ugly little man. 27. Have you a table in your
room? 28. Yes, sir, I have a very small table.

Gramatica. Grammar.

1, The Spanish language abounds in diminutives and aug-
mentatives. ‘

2. The diminutives serve to decrease or soften the significa-
tion of the word from which they are derived.

Those most in use end in ico, illo, cillo, ito, cito, uelo, zuelo,
and ejo, for the masculine, as: hombrecico, hombrecillo, hom-
brecito, hombrezuelo, little man; and in ica, illa, cilla, ita,
cita, zuela, eta, eja, for the feminine, as: mujercilla, mujer-
cita, mujercica, mujerzuela, little woman ; etc.

1. Diminutives ending in uelo always denote contempt or
trony.

2. Diminutives ending in illo and cillo often express contempt,
pity, or ugliness ; while those in ito generally express affection.
gentleness, or beauty:

Mujercilla, Contemptible Uttle woman.
Pobrecillo, Poor little fellow.

Hijito mio, My dear little son.
Pobrecito, Poor good little fellow.

5
66 LESSON 10.

Norx. — Some Spanish words have the termination of the diminutive,
without being diminutive, as:

Acerico, needle cushion. Anzuelo, fishhook, etc.

3. The diminutives ito, ita, may be used with different parts
of speech to give a special expression to the words:

Vengo solito, I come quite alone.
4, Diminutives in ete, ejo, etc., are comparatively little used,

3. The augmentatives serve to increase the signification of the
words from which they are derived. They end in 6n, achon,
azo, onazo, or ote for the masculine; and in ona, aza, onaza, or
ota for the feminine, as:

Hombrén, hombrachén, hombronazo (from hombre, man), big, strong man.

Grandén, grandote, grandazo, grandonazo (from grande, large), very large.
Mujerona, mujeraza, mujeronaza (from mujer, woman), large, strong woman.

1. There are many words, however, ending in azo, which
express an action, motion, or result, and are, therefore, not
augmentatives :

Fusil, rifle, gun ; fusilazo, @ shot from a rifle.
Pistola, pistol ; pistoletazo, a shot from a pistol,
Cahon, gun ; cafionazo, a shot from a gun.

2. Words which express @ blow struck with a blunt instrument
or object also end in azo, as bastonazo or garrotazo, blow with a
stick; while those expressing a wound made by a sharp instru-
ment or weapon end in ada, as:

Puifialada, stab with a dagger ; lanzada, a wound from a lance ; etc.

Exceptions. — Hacha, ax ; machete, cutlass ; and sable, saber ; form,
however, hachazo, machetazo, and sablazo.

4, Formation or Diminutives anp AuGMENTATIVES. — 1.
Words ending in 0 or a drop the last letter and add ito, ita:
ico, ica; illo, illa; according to their gender:

Herman-ito, herman-ico, herman-illo, dittle brother ; from hermano, brother,
Cas-ita, cas-ioa, cas-illa, little house ; from casa, house,
DIMINUTIVE AND AUGMENTATIVE NOUNS. 67

 

Norz. — Words ending in go. besides dropping the 0, insert a u after
the g to preserve the hard sound of this letter :

Uu amigo, @ friend ; un amiguito, a@ little friend.

Those ending in co change the ¢ into qu, also to preserve the hard sound
at thee:
Un barco, @ ship ; un barquito, @ dittle ship.

A few words ending in 0 and a, after dropping the last letter, add, how-
ever, the termination ecico, ecillo, etc. :

Un huevo, an egg; un huevecillo, @ small egg.
Una mano, ahand ; una manecita, a@ small hand.

2. Monosyllables ending with a consonant form their dimin-
utive by adding ecito, ecico, ecillo, or ezuelo:

Una flor, a flower ; una florecita, a little flower.

Una cruz, @ cross ; una crucecita, a little cross.
Un pez, a fish ; un pececito, a little fish.
Un rey, a king ; un reyezuelo, a king (with a small kingdom).

Nore. — Observe that cruz and pez change the z into ¢.
3. Words of two or more syllables ending with a consonant
form their diminutive by adding ito, ico, illo, ejo:
Un papel, @ pazer ; un papelito, a small paper.
Un reloj, a watch ; un relojito, a small watch.
4, Words of two syllables ending with an e, and those of
several syllables ending with an n or a2, add cito, cico, cillo,
or zuelo:

Un sastre, @ tailor ; un sastrecillo, @ Zittle tatlor.

Una nube, a cloud ; una nubecilla, a@ little cloud.

Un capitan, a captain ; un capitancillo, @ Jittle captain.

Un autor, an author ; uh autorzuelo, an insignificant author.
Una mujer, @ woman ; una mujercita, a little woman.

Exceptions. —Juanito, from Juan, John ; voleanejo, from volcan, vo/-
cano ; and all words ending in in, form an exception to this rule, the
latter adding ito, etc. Thus:

Mardin, garden; — ruin, worthless ;
Rocin, jade ; serafin, seraph ;
form in the Diminutive jardinito, rocinito, ruinito, and gerafinito. Jar.
dincito is, however, often used. Ms
68 “LESSON 10.

5. Diminutives may be yet decreased in the following way:

From chico, small: chiquillo or chiquito, chiquitillo, chiquitito, chiqué
tuelo, chiquitilluelo, chiquitillito, chiquirritin, chiquirritito, chiquirritillo,
chiquirrituelo, etc.

The English would say in such cases, very, very small.

Even augmentatives may be decreased in the same way:

Picarén, big rogue ; picaronzillo or picaronzuelo, Jittle rogue ; etc.

6. Many diminutives as well as augmentatives drop or pre-
serve the letter i in the diphthong ie:

Un ciego, a blind man; un cieguecillo, or ceguecillo, a little blind man.
Un diente, @ tooth ; un dientecillo or dentecillo, @ small tooth.
Una piedra, @ stone ; una piedrezuela or pedrezuela, a small stone.

7. Other words change the diphthong ue into 0 or remain
unchanged :

Un buey, an ox; un bueyecillo or buyecillo, a small ox.
Un hueso, @ bone ; un huesecillo or osecillo, a small bone.

8. There are words in Spanish with diminutive and augmen-
tative terminations, which may have been used formerly as such,
but which at present have a determined signification :

Matson, bravo, cutthroat. Islilla, side.
Cegato, shortsighted. Peluquin, wig.
Espadin, sword of the state ; etc., etc.

9. Augmentatives are formed by adding the terminations given

in Rule 2 to the word, when the same ends with a consonant :

Leén, dion ; leonazo, big lion ; etc.

When the words end, however, with a vowel, the latter is
dropped before adding the given termination :

- Gigante, giant ; gigantazo, large giant.
Libro, book ; librote, Zarge book.

General Osservations. — The words pequefio, small, and
grande, large, may be used at all times with the noun, but in
many cases they would not answer to the genius of the Spanish
language, which would require the diminutive or augmentative,
This is specially the case with the diminutives,
ADJECTIVES. COMPARATIVE AND SUPERLATIVE RELATIVE. 69

The pronunciation of diminutives or augmentatives is gen-
erally different from that of the word from which they are de-
rived, and the written accent of the primitive word is left out in
the derived word, as:

Arbol, tree; arbolito, small tree.
Pajaro, bird ; pajarito, smaill bird ; ete.

5. Verb tener, to have.

The verb tener is often rendered in English by to be some
thing the matter :

i Qué tiene V. ? What is the matter with you ?
Yo no tengo nada, Nothing is the matter with me.

 

Leceién XI. Lesson XI.

ADJECTIVES. COMPARATIVE AND SUPERLATIVE RELATIVE.
Adjectives compared regularly :

Positive, Comparative. Superlative.

Hermoso, m. aie mas hermoso, oe el mas hermoso, t the hand
Hermosa, f. § some; mas hermosa, ) somer; la mas hermosa, $ somest.

Prudente, m. pms prudente, t more el mas prudente, i the most

Prudente, f. b ’ mas prudente, § prudent;la mas prudente, $ prident.

Rico, m. . 2. mas rico, ; . _ elmas rico, bile

Rica, f. j rich mas rica, richer; la mas rica, richest.

Utiles, pl. useful ; masitiles, more useful; los masttiles,m. ; the most
las mas utiles, f. § useful.

Facil, n. easy 5 mas facil, easter ; lo mas facil, the easiest thing

Adjectives compared trregularly:
Bueno, good ; mejor, better ; éptimo, best.
Malo, bad ; peor, worse ; pésimo, worst. ‘

Grande, great, large; mayor, greater, larger; maximo, greatest, largest.
70 LESSON 11.

Pequeiio, smali ; menor, Jess, smaller; minimo, smallest,
Bajo, low ; , inferior, Zower ; infimo, lowest.
Alto, high ; superior, higher ; supremo, highest.
Adverbs:
Bien, well ; mejor, better ; lo mejor, the best.
Mal, bad, badly; peor, worse ; lo peor, the worst.
Poco, little ; menos, dess ; lo menos, the least.
Mucho, much ; mas, more ; lo mas, the most.

Comparative of Inferiority :

Dane et, nara ; imenics ura, tess hard; el ends ith, b ihe least hard.
Dura, f. menos dura, la menos dura, :
Fuertes, pl. strong ; menos fuertes, dess strong ; los menos fuertes, m. ) the least
las menos fuertes, f. } strong.
Bien, weld ; menos bien, Jess well ; Jo menos bien, the least well.
menos...que..., less or fewer...than...
No tanto, m...como... not so much no tantos, m....como... | not so many
No tanta, f....como... 1 ASo, no tantas, f.....como...) — ...as...
no tan...como..., not s0...a8...

Comparative of Equality :

Tanto, m....como .. tantos, m....como... t

b as much...

  

Tanta, /.....como... tantas, 7.....como...
tan.. como..., QS...08...5 80 ..S8....
Cuanto mas............ tanto mas.....
Cuantos mas........... tantos mds...
Cuanta mds .. ..tanta mas..... EEE: AB TO
Cuantas mas........... tantas mas....
Cuanto menos......... tanto menos... the Jess...the less...
Cuanto mas............ tanto menos... the more...the less...
Cuanto menos......... tanto mas...... the less...the more...
Hjemplos. Examples.

Carlos es rico, Juan es mas rico ; pero Charles is rich, John is richer ;
Enrique es el mas rico de los tres but Henry is the richest of the
hermanos. three brothers.

Luisa es mas joven que Maria. Louisa is younger than Mary,

Nueva York es mas grande que Paris. New York is larger than Paris.

Juan habla bien, pero su hermano John speaks well, but his brother
habla mejor. speaks better.
ADJECTIVES. COMPARATIVE AND SUPERLATIVE RELATIVE. 71

Soy mds viejo que V.

Julia es la menos bonita de las her-
manas.

Tenemos menos dinero que él.

No tengo tanto tiempo como V.

Ellas no tienen tantas amigas como
nosotras.

Yo no hablo tan bien como V.

El médico no es tan viejo como el
abogado.

Soy tan alto como V.

Tengo tantas plumas como lapices.

Cuanto mas virtuosos son los hombres,
tanto mas felices son.

Cuanto mas sale, tanto menos estu-
dia.

Cuantos mas amigos tenga V. tanto
mas poderoso sera.

Vocabulario.

El amo, the master.

El banquero, the banker.

El mérito, the merit.

El regimiento, the regiment.
La clase, the class.

La saerte, the luck.

La escuela, the school.

La fruta, the fruit.

La parte, the part.

Atento, attentive.
Deme V., give me.
Dulce, sweet.
Eduardo, Edward.
Estudioso, studious.
Felipe, Philip.
Fresco, cool.

Frio, cold.

Fuerte, strong.

I am older than you.

Julia is the least pretty of the
sisters.

We have less money than he.

I have not as much time as you.

They have not so many friends
as we.

I do not speak as well as you.

The physician is not so old as
the lawyer.

Tam as tall as you.

I have as many pens as pencils.

The more virtuous men are, the
happier they are.

The more he goes out the less he
learns.

The more friends you have the
more powerful you will be.

Vocabulary.

Gana, earns.
Gasta, spends.
Habla, speaks.
Otro, other.
Pasado, past, last.
Soberbio, haughty.
Temprano, carly.
Tonto, foolish,
Todo, ali.

Exercise 21.

1. Carlos es mas rico y Felipe mds pobre que Juan.
3. El amo no tiene tantos amigos como el

4. El hermano es tan habil como la hermana, y la madre no

mas joven que la hija.
criado.

2. El hijo es

menos que el padre. 5. El tiene més suerte que mérito. 6. El prin-
cipe no es tan soberbio como el conde. 7. El comerciante no tiene
tanto dinero como el banquero, pero tiene mds amigos que éste
(the latter). 8. Mi hermano es mas estudioso y més atento que yo.
72 LESSON 11.

9. ; Tiene V. un buen cuarto? 10. Tengo el cuarto més frio en la
casa. 11. Tenemos la casa més grande de la ciudad. 12. Maria es
mas amable que Luisa. 13. Julia es menos atenta que mi hermana.
14. Mi amigo tiene la casa mds hermosa de la calle. 15. Déme V.
algo mejor. 16. No tengo nada mejor. 17. Eduardo es mds peque-
fio que su hermano, pero es més fuerte que él. 18. Marfa es la mejor
amiga de mi hermana. 19. Carlos y Enrique son los mas grandes,
pero los menos atentos de la clase. 20. Cuanto menos dinero gana,
tanto mas gasta. 21. ; Es la hija tan grande como el padre? 22. Es
menos grande que el padre, pero es mas grande que la madre. 23. La
hija no es tan amable como la madre. 24. Las manzanas no son
menos dulces que las peras. 25. El hermano de Felipe es el hombre
mis rico de la ciudad. 26. 4 Habla V. espafiol tan bien como su her-
mano? 27. El habla mejor que yo.

Exercise 22.

1. The more money he earns the less he spends. 2. Charles is a
bad boy, but Henry is the worst boy in the school. 3. The son is as
rich as the father; he has four houses in the best part of the city.
4. Is Edward attentive? 5. He is more attentive than the other
boys. 6. Are you well now? 7. I am better in the country than in
the city. 8. My mother is not so old as my aunt. 9. Philip is the
youngest officer of the regiment. 10. He is not less brave than the
old officers. 11. I have as many books as my brother. 12. The
small room is cooler than the large one. 13. The green apples are
not so sweet as the others. 14, We have not so much fruit this (este)
year as last year. 15. Henry, Peter, and John are three good boys,
but John is the best of all. 16. The dog is the most faithful of all
animals. 17. Is your daughter young? 18. She is younger than
my son. 19. Have you any flowers in the garden? 20. We have
the most beautiful flowers in the city. 21. The new theater is much
larger than the old theater. 22. The French baker has the best bread
here. 23. Will you have a piece of bread? 24. Give me the small-
est piece. 25. We are less rich than the English, but we are as
happy as they. 26. Do you go out earlier than I? 27. Yes, much
earlier. 28. Here is the largest house in the city.
ADJECTIVES. COMPARATIVE AND SUPERLATIVE RELATIVE. 73

Gramatica. Grammar.

1. The comparative is usually formed in Spanish by means
of adverbs, and not, as in many cases in English, by a change of
termination :

V. es mas rico que yo, You are richer than I.

2, The comparative of superiority is formed by placing mds,
more, before the positive, and que, than, after it:

Es mas habil que su hermano, He ts more skillful than his brother.
El tiene mas libros que yo, He has more books than I.

3. The comparative of inferiority is formed by placing menos,
less, fewer, before the positive, and que, than, after it:

Es menos prudente que V., He ts less prudent than you.
Tengo menos libros que V., I have fewer books than you.

Norte. — De is used in place of que before numerals. Quiero mas de
once naranjas, I want more than eleven oranges.

1. If the comparison refers, however, to a verb different from
the first one, de lo que takes the place of que:

El tiene menos dinero de lo que V. cree, He has less money than you
think.

2. If the comparison depends on a noun, del que (de la que,
de los que, de las que) is used in place of que, varying with the
gender of the noun:

Tenfa mas soldados de los que creia, He had more soldiers than he

thought.

3. If the comparative of inferiority is expressed by no...tanto
(or tanta, tantos, tantas), or by no...tan, then the second part
of the comparative is rendered by como:
74 LESSON 11.

El no tiene tanto dinero como V., He has not so much money as you.
Ellos no tienen tanta plata como nosotros, They have not as much silver as we.
El no es tan joven como yo, He is not so young as I am.

4, The comparative of equality is expressed by tanto (or
tanta, tantos, tantas, according to the gender and number of
the noun) and como, as; or by tan...como with an adjective
or an adverb:

E] hijo es tan docto como el padre, The son is as learned as the father.

El obra con tanta prudencia como He acts with as much prudence as
valor, couraye.

1. Not less than is always translated by no...menos que... :

Yo no trabajo menos que V., I do not work less than you.

2. In regard to verbs, as much as is rendered either by tanto
como or by tanto cuanto:

Pago tanto como or tanto cuanto vale, 1 pay as much as it is worth.

OxsERVATION. — From the above examples it will be seen that menos is
always invariable, whilst tanto and cuanto agree in gender and number
with the noun to which they refer.

Cuanto, the same as tanto, drops the last syllable before an adjective or
adverb and becomes cuan.

5. When several nouns or adjectives follow each other, it is
sufficient to use the words mas, menos, tan, or tanto before the
first adjective only:

Enrique es mas joven, timido y cré- Henry is younger, more timid, and
dulo que su hermano, more credulous than his brother.

Nors. —It would not be a mistake, however, to repeat the adverb be-
fore every adjective in order to give more expression to the sentence.

6. The superlative relative which generally ends in English
in est is rendered in Spanish by the adverbs mas or menos joined
to the positive and accompanied by the definite article, a posses-
sive adjective, or a personal pronoun :

E] mas hermoso libro or t
E) libro mds hermoso,

E] muchacho menos obediente, The least obedient boy.
Su mas interesante obra, His most interesting work.

The handsomest book.

‘
ADJECTIVES. COMPARATIVE AND SUPERLATIVE RELATIVE. 75

OBsERVATION. — The superlative relative of those adjectives which are
placed before the noun may come in the superlative before or after the
noun:

El mas bonito muchacho ™

El muchacho mas bonito, He grein Oey).

But in the case of those adjectives which are placed after the noun, the
superlative must also come dast :

El clima mas frio, The coldest climate,

7, When the superlative relative is an adverb modifying the
verb, it is expressed by the adverbs mas or menos without the
definite article:

i Que estrella luce mds ? Which star shines the most ?
Yo creo que Venus luce mas, I think Venus shines the most.

OxssERVATION, — These superlative relatives do not properly belong to
the Spanish language, although they are always considered as comparatives,
and they require a cultivated ear to be used correctly.

8. The comparatives of the adjectives bueno, good; malo,
bad; grande, large; pequeiio, little, small; bajo, low; alto,
high ; which is irregular, may also be formed regularly by means
of the adverb mas, more :

Bueno, good ; mas bueno, better.
Grande, large ; mas grande, darger.

OpseRVATION. — When speaking, however, of the differences of ages of
two persons, mayor and menor must be used :

La hija mayor, the eldest daughter ; el hijo menor, the youngest son.

Inferior and menor are never used when speaking of physical sizo, that
is, of the volume or size of the objects.

9, Cuanto mas...tanto..., the more...the...; cuanto ménos...
tanto..., the less...the..., used adjectively, must agree in gender
and number with the noun to which they refer:

Cuantas mas reflexiones hace, tan- The more he reflects (he makes reflec-
tas mas faltas comete, tions), the more mistakes he makes,

Nors. — Instead of cuanto mds..., mientras mds may be used,
Pequefio, small ; pequehisim-o, m., a, f. or

LESSON 12,

Leccion XII. Lesson XII.

SUPERLATIVE ABSOLUTE. ADJECTIVES AND ADVERBS.

Formation of the Superlative Absolute.

small
Inuy pequeii-o, m., a, f., t very re si

Prudente, prudent ; prudentisimo, very prudent.
Feliz, happy ; felicisimo, very happy.
Cortés, polite ; cortesisimo, very polite.

Adjectives ending in co and go:

Rico, rich ; riquisimo, very rich.
Vago, vague ; vaguisimo, very vague.

Adjectives ending in ble:

Amable, amiable ; amabilisimo, or muy amable, very amiable.
Afable. affable ; afabilisimo, or muy afable, very affable.

Adjectives ending in iente :

Ardiente, ardent ; ardentisimo, very ardent.
Ferviente, fervent ; ferventisimo, very fervent.
Luciente, shining ; lucentisimo, very shining.
Valiente, brave ; valentisimo, very brave.

Adjectives ending in io:

Limpio, clean ; limpisimo, very clean,
Sucio, dirty ; sucisimo, very dirty.

Irregular Superlatives.

Acre, bitter ; acérrimo, very bitter,

Amigo, friendly ; amicisimo, very friendly.

Antiguo, ancient ; antiquisimo, very ancient.

Aspero, harsh ; asperisimo or aspérrimo, very harsh,

Benéfico, benevolent ; beneficentisimo, very benevolent.
ADJECTIVES.

Bueno, good ;
Célebre, celebrated ;
Fiel, faithful ;
Fuerte, strong ;
Integro, upright ;
Libre, free ;
Magnifico, magnificent ;
Misero, miserable ;
Pobre, poor ;
Sagrado, sacred ;
Salubre, healthy ;
Sabio, wise ;
Venéfico, poisonous ;

SUPERLATIVE ABSOLUTE.

77

bonisimo, very good.

celebérrimo, very celebrated.
fidelisimo, very faithful.
fortisimo, very strong.
integérrimo, very upright.
libérrimo, very free.
magnificentisimo, very magnificent.
misérrimo, very miserable.
paupérrimo, pobrisimo, very poor.
sacratisimo, very sacred.
salubérrimo, very healthy.
sapientisimo, very wise.
veneficentisimo, very poisonous.

Adverbs.

Dulcemente, sweetly ;
Sabiamente, wisely ;
Amablemente, amiably ;

Hjemplos.

Pedro es rico, pero Juan es riquisimo.
Paris es una ciudad muy hermosa.
El comerciante es honradisimo.
La madre de Maria es viejisima.
La torre es altisima.

El maestro es sapientisimo.

El caballero es cortesisimo.

El general es prudentisimo.

La sefiora es hermosisima.

Es segurisimo.

El camino es larguisimo.

El clima es friisimo.

Luisa es amabilisima.

Mi hermana dibuja hermosisimamente.

&) obra prudentisimamente.

Vocabulario.

El amor, the love.

El camino, the road.

El clima, the climate.

El comportamiento, the behavior,

dulcisimamente, very or most sweetly.
muy sabiamente, very wisely.
amabilisimamente, most amiably.

Examples.

Peter is rich, but John is very rich
Paris is a very handsome city.
The merchant is very honest.
Mary’s mother is very old.

The tower is very high.

The teacher is very wise.

The gentleman is very polite.
The general is very prudent.

The lady is very handsome.

It is very sure.

The road is very long.

The climate is very cold.

Louisa is very amiable.

My sister draws most beautifully.
He acts very prudently.

Vocabulary.

Contento, satisfied.
Femenil, effeminate.
Filial, filial.
Gloriosamente, gloriously.
78 LESSON 12.

El leén, the lion. Honrado, honest.

El maestro, the teacher. Inteligente, intelligent.
El pozo, the well. Interesante, interesting.
La acci6n, the action. Largo, dong.

La aldea, the village. Lejos, far.

La comedia, the comedy. Paternal, paternal.

La hormiga, the ant. Pio, pious.

La iglesia, the church. Profundo, deep.

La Nuvia, the rain. Sabiamente, wisely.
Afable, affable. Salubre, healthy.
Agrio, sour. Sucio, dirty.

Benéfico, benevolent. Valiente, brave.

Comin, ordinary, low.

Exercise 23.

1. Los dos hermanos del general son riquisimos, pero el general es
muy pobre. 2. La torre de la izlesia es alt{fsima. 3. Luisa y Maria
son amabilfsimas. 4. Los caminos estan malfsimos desde la Iluvia.
5. El oficial es un valentisiino soldado. 6. El clima de la isla es
salubérrimo. 7. El hombrecito tiene una casa grandisima. 8. La
hermana de Juan es hermosisima. 9. Las comedias de Moratin son
muy hermosas. 10. Sdcrates era sapientisimo, 11. Las primas de
Enrique son muy pias. 12. Las calles de la ciudad son Jarguisimas.
13. El panadero tiene una hija muy bonita. 14. Las hormigas son
pequefiisimas. 15. Juanesmuy femenil. 16. El maestro habla muy
sabiamente. 17. Su (his) amor es muy filial, 18. El principe es muy
benéfico. 19. El vino del comerciante no es bueno; esté muy agrio.
20. Los habitantes de la aldea son muy industriosos y muy afables.
21. El padre y la madre de Pedro son viejisimos. 22. Las dos sefioras
son muy jovenes. 23. El soldado murié (died) muy gloriosamente.
24, Su comportamiento es muy comun. 25. El monumento es
antiquisimo.

Exercise 24.

1. The merchant is a very honest man. 2. My father is very
benevolent. 3. My brother’s friends are very poor. 4. His action is
very paternal. 5. His love is very filial. 6. The banker’s house is
very large. 7. New York is a very rich city. 8. The physician has
very good sons. 9. The climate of the island is very cold. 10. The
lion is very strong. 11. Henry’s sister is very amiable, but his cousin
ADJECTIVES. SUPERLATIVE ABSOLUTE. 79

Cem.) is more affable. 12. The apples are very sweet. 13. The
rooms in (de) the house are very small. 14. The river is very deep.
15. The trees in the (del) garden are very green. 16. The two boys
are very sick. 17. We have now a very good servant. 18. The water
in the well is very cold. 19. Mary’s brothers are very intelligent.
20. Iam very happy to-day. 21. The two Frenchmen are very far
from here. 22. The soldiers of the general are very brave. 23. The
streets are now very dirty. 24. My book is very interesting.

Gramatica. Grammar.

1. The superlative absolute is either formed by placing the
adverb muy, very, before the positive, or by adding to the same
the termination isimo (isima, isimos, isimas, according to the
gender and number of the noun to which the adjective refers) if
it ends with a consonant.

If the positive ends with a vowel, however, this last letter is
dropped and the same terminations added :

Grande, large ; muy grande, or grandisimo, very large.
Cortés, polite ; muy cortés, or cortesisimo, very polite.

2, Adjectives ending in co and go form their superlative in
quisimo and guisimo to preserve the hard sound of ¢ and g,
which they have in the positive :

Rico, rich ; riquisimo, very rich.
Vago, vague ; vaguisimo, very vague.

3. Adjectives ending in ble change this last syllable into
bilisimo :

Amable, amiable ; amabilisimo, very amiable.
Afable, affable ; afabilisimo, very affable.

4, Adjectives ending in iente drop the i in the superlative,

and change the termination iente into entisimo:
Ardiente, ardent ; ardentisimo, very ardent.
Valiente, brave ; valentisimo, very brave.

5, Adjectives ending in io drop these two letters to avoid the

repetition of the i, and add isimo:

Limpio, clean ; limpisimo, very clean,
80 LESSON 12.

Exorrrions. — The adjectives frio, cold, and pio, pious, make, hew-
ever, friisimo and pifsimo in the superlative.

6. The superlative absolute of adverbs ending in mente is
also formed by placing the adverb muy, very, before them, or by
changing the termination emente or amente into isimamente '

Dulcemente, sweetly ; dulcisimamente, very or most sweetly.
Amablemente, amiably ; amabilisimamente, very or most amiably.

7. It must be observed that the superlative formed with the
termination isimo is stronger than that formed with the adverb
muy, very. Riquisimo expresses, therefore, a higher degree
than muy rico, very rich. Elegance requires also the termina-
tion isimo instead of the adverb muy when the superlative is
preceded by the indefinite article un, uno, una. Therefore, es
un valentisimo soldado, he is a very brave soldier, is preferable
to es un muy valiente soldado.

8. Certain adjectives and adverbs do not admit of the termi-
nation of the superlative. This is more especially the case with
those ending with 1, i, n, and a few with r, as:

Paternal, paternal ; maternal, maternal ; filial, filial; femenil, effemi-
nate; igual, equal ; varonil, manly; turqui, dark blue; ruin, low; co-
mun, ordinary.

In case of doubt the student will, therefore, adopt preferably
the adverb, muy.

9. Some adjectives form their superlative most irregularly,
as is seen by the list given above.
POSSESSIVE ADJECTIVES.

Leccion XIII.

PREPOSITIVE.
Singular.

Masculine,

Mi,

Tu,

Su,

Nuestro, nuestra,

Feminine,

Vuestro, vuestra, su,
Su,

POSTPOSITIVE.

Mio, Inia,

Tuyo, tuya,

Suyo, suya,

Nuestro, nuestra,
Vuestro, vuestra,
Suyo, suya,

Ejemplos.
Mi padre es bueno.
Mi madre es buena.
Tu hermano es pequefio.
Tu hermana es pequeiia.
Su hermano es alto.
Su hermana es alta.
Nuestro tio es bueno.
Nuestra tia es buena.
Su amigo es joven.
Su amigo de V. es joven.
El amigo de V. es joven.
Su casa es grande. i
Su casa de ellos es grande.
Mis amigos son felices.
Sus hermanos son ricos.
Sus libros estan aqui.
Sus libros de V. estan aqui.
Los libros de V. estan aqui.

81

Lesson XIII.

POSSESSIVE ADJECTIVES.

Plural.
Masculine. Feminine.
mis; my.
tus ; thy.
sus; his, her, tts.
nuestros, nuestras ; our.
vuestros, vuestras, sus; your.
8USs; their, your.
mios, mias ; my.
tuyos, tuyas; thy.
suyos, suyas ; his, her, tts.
nuestros, nuestras; our.
vuestros, vuestras; your,
BUyOS, suyas ; their, your.
Examples.
My father is good.
My mother is good.

Thy brother is small.

Thy sister is small.
His or her brother is tall.
His or her sister is tall. ,
Our uncle is good.
Our aunt is good.

Your friend is young.

Their house is large.

My friends are happy.
His (her or their) brothers are rieh.

Your books are here.
82 LESSON 13.

Mi hermano y mi hermana son jo- )
venes. ;

Su tio, su tia, y sus primos estan
malos.

Aqui esta uno de mis amigos.

Ii] perro esta con su amo.

El arbol pierde sus hojas.

Déme V. Ja mano.
£1 tiene su sombrero en Ja mano.
El soldado ha perdido e7 brazo.

My brother and sister are young,

His (or her) uncle, aunt, and cons-
ins are sick.

Here is one of my friends.

The dog is with its master.

The tree loses its leaves.

Give me your hand.
He has his hat in Azs hand.
The soldier has lost his arm.

Su, his, her, your, their.

Su libro or el libro de él.

Su libro or el libro de ella.

Su (or el) libro de V., sing.

Su (or el) libro de VV., pil.

Su (or el) libro de ellos, mase.

Su (or el) libro de ellas, fem. }

Sus libros or los libros de él,
ete. etc.

Adiés, padre mio.
Si, madre mia.

No, hijo mio.

Son amigos nuestros.
Son enemigos suyos.
Un amigo mio.

Un criado nuestro.
Un amigo suyo.

Vocabulario.
El bastén, the cane.
El bollo, the cake.
El condiscipulo, the fellow-scholar.
El discipulo, the scholar, pupil.
El ejemplo, the example.
El! marido, the husband.
El padrino, the godfather.
El papel, the paper. ;
El privilegio, the privilege.
La familia, the family.
La leche, the milk.
La libertad, the liberty.

His book.
Her book.

Your book.

Their book.

His books,
etc.

Good-by, father.

Yes, mother.

No, my son.

They are our friends,
They are his enemies.
A friend of mine.

A servant of ours.

A friend of his.

Vocabulary.
La madrina, the godmother.
La pizarra, the slate.
La propiedad, the property.
La rienda, the bridle.
La silla, the saddle.
Al contrario, on the contrary.
Caliente, warm.
En casa. at home.
Ma4s, more.
Sagrado, sacred.
Siguen, follow.
También, too, also,
POSSESSIVE ADJECTIVES. 83

Exercise 25.

1. Mi hermano y mi hermana estan en casa. 2. Mis padres (par-
ents) estan en el jardin. 3. Nuestras casas son hermosas. 4. , Quién
tiene mi papel, mi pluma y mis lapices? 5. No tenemos ni el papel,
nila pluma ni los lapicesde V. 6. La mujer de nuestro médico es
la hermana de mi banquero. 7. j Tienen los discfpulos sus libros?
8. Tienen sus libros y sus pizarras. 9. El marido de mi prima esté en
Paris. 10. j Buenos dias, tia, donde estan mis primos? 11. Estén en
el jardin. 12. 4 Donde estas, hijo mio? 13. Estoy aquf en el cuarto.
14. Mi amigo es pobre, pero un hermano suyo es muy rico. 15. Nues-
tro tfo quiere comprar la casade mi amigo. 16. ; Donde esté su padre
de V. ahora? 17. Yo no sé dénde esté. 18. Los sombreros de VV.
son muy pequefios. 19. Nuestro cuarto est4 caliente. 20. Las casas.
de ellos son muy grandes. 21. ; Es V.miamigo? 22. St, sefior, soy
el amigo de V. y de toda su familia. 23. Los primos de Juan son los
condiscfpulos de mi hermano. 24. j; Quién quiere un pedazo de mi
bollo? 25. Yo, déme V.un pedacito. 26. ; Qué tiene V. en la mano
27. Tengo un bastoncito. 28. Los hijos siguen el ejemplo de su
padre. 29, Nuestra libertad, nuestra propiedad y nuestros privilegios
son sagrados. 30. Adids, amigo mio.

Exercise 26.

1. Where is your cousin (f.)? 2. She is with herhusband. 3. Where
isyourslate? 4. Myslateisonthe table. 5. Who is your godfather?
6. Mr. Harris is my godfather, and his sister is my godmother.
7. Who is in your father’s room? 8. A friend of his. 9. Give me
your hand, my friend. 10. Is Henry the friend of your brothers ?
11. He is their friend. 12. Is your physician tall or little? 13. Our
physician is very tall. 14. Who is upstairs in our room? 15. No-
body is in your room, but some one is in your brother's room.
16. With whom are your children? 17. They are with their mother.
18. Is your father at home? 19. He is in his store (tienda). 20, Are
the little boys with their aunt? 21. They are with their uncle and
aunt. 22. My sister’s friend (f.) is very amiable, and her brothers too.
23. Our physician is already an old man. 24. Will you have more
milk in your coffee? 25. On the contrary, give me more coffee.
26. Who isin the garden? 27. My father and mother. 28. Have
you the saddle of my horse? 29. 3 have its bridle, but not its saddle.
84 LESSON 13.

Gramatica. Grammar.

1, Possessive adjectives do not agree in gender and number
with the antecedent or possessor, as in English, but with the
object possessed. Every possessive adjective must, therefore,
agree in gender and number with the noun to which it refers.

Mi libro, my book. Nuestra mesa, our table. Mis amigos, my friends.

2, The possessive adjective must be repeated with every
noun, unless it refers to the same person or object:
Mi padre, mi madre, y mi hermana My father, mother, and sister are

estan malos, sick.
Sefior mio y amigo, Sir and friend.

8. The possessive adjective vuestro, masc. sing., vuestra,
fem. sing., vuestros, mase. pl., vuestras, fem. pl., your, is only
used in the elevated style, or when addressing the divinity, the
saints, or persons in elevated situation :

Principe, imploro vuestro amparo, Prince, I implore your protection.

In place of vuestro the Spaniards use in the usual style the
possessive adjective su, which also means his, her, their. Vues-
tro may, in fact, be compared with the personal pronoun voso-
tros, instead of which we use usted, sing., and ustedes, pi., with
the verb in the third person singular or plural. In the same
way, instead of vuestro, the Spaniards use the possessive adjec-
tive in the third person singular or plural.

Su sombrero, your hat, is therefore used instead of vuestro
sombrero; but as it might also be translated by Ais hat, her hat,
their hat, the expression de V. is added after the noun, and we
would therefore have to say su sombrero de V._ This addition
of de V., or de VV. may, however, be left out when the sense
of the sentence sufficiently indicates to what person su refers:

i Tiene V. su sombrero ? Have you your hat?

Remark. — The omission of de usted when addressing respectable per
sons is, however, considered vulgar and impolite.

 
POSSESSIVE ADJECTIVES. 85

4. Instead of su or sus, el, la, los, or las may be used with
de usted, de ustedes :

El libro de V., your book. La mesa de V., your table,
Los libros de V., your books. Las mesas de V., your tables.

5. In order te avoid the ambiguity which might arise from
the use of su and sus, the definite article is used with de él, de
ella, de ellos, de ellas:

El libro de él, his book. La casa de ellos, their (m.) house,
El libro de ella, her book. La casa de ellas, their (f.) house.

6, The possessive its must be rendered by su or sus accord-
ing to the number of the following noun:

Mi padre tiene un hermoso caballo, My father has wu pretty horse, its
su color es negro, color is black.
El arbol pierde sus hojas, The tree loses its leaves.

7, The definite article is substituted in Spanish for the pos-
sessive adjective whenever the sense of the sentence sufficiently
indicates who the possessor is. This is more especially the case,
when parts of the body are mentioned :

Tengo algo en el ojo, I have something in my eye. .
Que tiene V. en da mano, What have you (got) in your hand.

8. Whenever addressing a relative or friend, the Spaniards
use the noun alone, as in English, or with the possessive after
the same:

Buenos dias, padre (or padre mio), Good morning, father.
Hijo (or hijo mio), ven aqui, Son, come here.

9, The possessive adjectives mi, tu, su, etc., when coming
after the noun are replaced by mio, tuyo, suyo, mase. sing. ;
mios, tuyos, suyos, masc. pl.; mia, tuya, suya, fem. sing. ;
mias, tuyas, suyas, fem. pl.:

j Padre mio! my father ! Madre mia, my mother ; etc.

‘These adjectives are placed after the noun:

1. In the vocative: ;hijos mios! my sons! If, however, an
adjective or a participle precedes the noun, both forms may be

used :
Mi querido padre or querido padre mio, My dear father,
386 LESSON 14.

2. When an article precedes the noun:
El caballo tuyo es mayor que el mio, Thy (your) horse is larger than mine,
Un criado mio or uno de mis criados, A servant of mine.

3. When an adverb precedes the noun:

Tan amigos nuestros se mostraron, They showed theinselves so much our
Sriends.

 

Leccién XIV. Lesson XIV.
POSSESSIVE PRONOUNS.

Singular, Plural.
Masculine. Feminine. Masculine. Feminine.

El mio, la mia, losmios, lasmias, mine, my own.
Eltuyo, latuya, lostuyos, lastuyas, thine, thy own.
Elsuyo, lasuya, lossuyos, lassuyas, Avs, hers, its.
El nuestro, lanuestra, losnuestros, lasnuestras, ours, our own.
El vuestro, la vuestra, los vuestros, lasvuestras, )

YOurs, YOUT OW
Elsuyo, lasuya, lossuyos,  lassuyas, J
Elsuyo, lasuya, lossuyos, lassuyas, theirs, their own.

El de él, la de él, los de él, las de él, his.
El de ella, la de ella, los de ella, las de ella, hers.
Eide nosotros, lade nosotros, losde nosotros, las de nosotros, owrs.
Elde usted, ladeusted, losdeusted, lasdeusted,!
Fl de ustedes, la de ustedes, los de ustedes, las de ustedes,”
Eldeellos, ladeellos, losdeellos, las de ellos,
Eldeellas, ladeellas, losdeellas, las deellas,

your

3
‘ theirs.

 

Declension.
Masculine Singular. Feminine Singular.
El mio, mine; la mia, mine.
Del mio, of mine; de la mia, of mine.
Al mio, to mine ; 4lamia, to mine.
1 Singular. ? Plural. 3 Masculine. * Feminine.

+

Mir

 
POSSESSIVE PRONOUNS. 87

Masculine Plural.
Los mios, mine ;
De los mios, of mine;
A los mios,

Erc.,

to mine ;
etc.,

Ejemplos.

Mi padre y el tuyo son amigos.

Tu hermano y el mio estan aqui.

Tengo el libro de V. y el mio.

Mi lapiz y el de V. son de oro.

Su amigo de V. y el nuestro son altos.

Su caballo de V. y el de ellos son
negros,

Mi casa y la suya (la de él) son
nuevas.

Su pluma (la pluma de él) y la
nuestra son de acero.

Mis libros y los suyos son hermosos.

Nuestros amigos y los de V. estan
en Francia.

Nuestras sillas y las de ellos son de
caoba.

j Tiene él mi lapiz? — Tiene el suyo.

j Tiene ella mi libro?— Tiene el
suyo.

i Tiene V. mi pluma?— Tengo la
mia,

iTiene ella su aguja?—Tiene la
suya.

Hablo de mi padre y del suyo (del
de V.).

Escribo 4 mi madre y a la de V.

¥1 habla de mis hermanos y de los
suyos.

Escribimos 4 nuestros amigos y 4
los de ellos.

Quiero lo mio.

Cada uno quiere lo suyo.

Feminine Plural.

las mias, mine.

de las mias, of mine.

alas mias, to mine.
ETC., ete.

Examples.

My father and thine are friends.
Thy brother and mine are here.
I have your book and mine,

My pencil and yours are of gold.
Your friend and ours are tall.
Your horse and theirs are black.

My house and his are new.
His pen and ours are of steel.

My books and his are handsome.
Our friends and yours are in France.

Our chairs and theirs are of ma-
hogany.

Has he my pencil ?— He has his
own.

Has she my book ?— She has her
own.

Have you my pen?—TI have
mine.

Has she her needle ?— She has
her own.

I speak of my father and of yours.

I write to my mother and to yours.

He speaks of my brothers and of
his.

We write to our friends and to
theirs.

I wish for what is mine.

Every one wishes for what is his.
88 LESSON 14.

Vocabulario. Vocabulary.
E] baile, the bail. 4Conoce V.? Do you know? are you
El cocinero, the cook. acquainted with.
El guante, the glove. Conozco, J know,I am acquainted with.
El maestro, the teacher. 4 De quién? whose?
El profesor, the professor. , Escribe V.? do you write?
La eseritura, the writing. Escribo, J write.

La familia, the family. [where. | , Habla V.? do you speak?
En alguna parte, somewhere, any-| Hablo, J speak.

A lo menos, at least. Magnifico, splendid.
Alto, tall. Otra cosa, something else.
Como, how. Que, which.

Exercise 27.

1. 4 Tiene V. mi libro? 2. No, seiior,notengoelde V. 3. ; Como
son los caballos? 4. El mio es negro, y el de él es blanco. 5. Los
hermanos de V. son altos, y los mios son pequeiios. 6. Los Ingleses
Ticos tienen cocineros franceses, los de ellos no son tan buenos.
7. La familia de su madre de V. es rica, pero la familia de la mia
es pobre. 8. 4 Conoce V. los jardines de los Ingleses? 9. Conozco
sus jardines y sus casas. 10. Nuestros jardines son hermosos, pero
los de ellos son magnificos. 11. ; Habla V. de mi casa? 12. No
hablo de la suya, hablo de la mia. 13. j Quiere V. un pedazo de
bollo? 14. Si, déme V. un pedazo del suyo. 15. ; Para quién son
las manzanas, para su hermano de V. 6 parael mio? 16. Las man-
zanas son para el mio, tengo otra cosa para el de V. 17. ; Escribe V.
4 mis amigos? 18. Escribo 4 los mios, 4 los de V., y 4 los de él.
19. 4 Quién tiene nuestros libros? 20. El profesor tiene los de V. y
los nuestros. 21, La hermana de V. es joven, y la mfa también.
22. La madre de V., y la de él estan en el jardin. 23. ; Tiene V. mi
lapiz? 24. No, sefior, tengo el mio, el de V. esta sobre la mesa.
25. Don Carlos Marty es mi maestro de escritura, quién es el de V.?
26. Es también el mio. 27. Enrique es el amigo de V., pero no es el
mio. 28. 4 De quién es la casa? 29, La casa pequefia es mia, y la
grande es de mi hermana. 30. La casa es pequefia, pero 4 lo menos
es mia.

Exercise 28.

1. Who has my piece of cake? 2. I have mine, put not yours,
3. Where are your gloves? 4. Mine are here; where are yours}

 
POSSESSIVE PRONOUNS. 89

5. Mine are somewhere in the room. 6. Do you wish the large or
the small hat? 7. I wish mine. 8. Have I your hat? 9. No, you
have your own. 10. You have no inkstand, will you have mine?
11. No, thank you, I don’t wish yours, 12. Is your house large?
13. Our house is very large. 14. My book is French, yours is
English, and his is German. 15. Do you speak of our friends?
16. I speak of yours and of mine. 17. Who is in our room?
18. Your brother is in yours, and my sister is in mine. 19. Mr.
Smith’s children (hijos) are taller than ours. 20. My brother’s house
is large, but mine is larger. 21. The large book is mine, and the
small one is his. 22. Which pens are the better, yours or mine?
23. Mine are the best. 24. My sister and yours are at (en) the ball.
25. Is the slate yours? 26. The slate is mine, but the pencil is not
mine. 27. Do you write to your father? 28. I write to mine and to
yours. 29. Have you two tables in your room? 30. I have one
table in my room, but my brother has three tables in his. 31. Are
thetables his? 32. Two are his, and one is mine. 33. All the books
are ours.

Gramatica. Grammar.

1. The possessive pronouns, like the possessive adjectives,
agree in gender and number with the object possessed, and not,
asin English, with the possessor.

Mi hermano y el suyo, My brother and his (or hers).
Mi madre y la suya, My mother and his (or hers).
Mis libros y los suyos, My books and his (or hers).

Nuestras amigas y las suyas, My/friends (fem.) and his (or hers).

{ 2. More expression can be given to these pronouns by adding
to them the words mismo, masc., misma, fem., very same; and
propio, masc., propia, fem., own:

El mio mismo, My own.
La suya misma, His (her your) own.
El suyo propio, His (her or your) own.

8, Instead of ef wuestro, la vuestra, los vuestros, las vuestras,
the Spaniards use el suyo, m. s., la suya, f. s., which really
90 LESSON 14.

mean Ais or hers, when the meaning of the sentence is suffi.
ciently clear:

Hablo de mi padre y del suyo, I speak of my father and of yours.
Quiero mi pluma, y la suya, I want my pen and yours.

4, When, however, the sentence is not sufficiently clear, el
(la, los, las, lo) de V. is used for yours:

Mi libro y el de V., My book and yours, sing.
Micasaylade VV., My house and yours, pl.

5. In the same way, if we wish to indicate clearly the differ-
ence between his, hers, or theirs, we use el de él, el de ella, el
de ellos, and el de ellas, instead of el suyo, la suya, etc. +
Aqui esta mi casa y alla esta lade § Here is my house and there is

ellos, theirs.
La mesa es de él, The table is his.

6. The definite article may also be used with the preposition
de before nosotros, etc., instead of el nuestro, la nuestra, etc. :

Los libros de ellos y los de nosotros, Their books and ours.

7. The possessive pronouns are also used with the neuter
article lo, and mean the property of, what belongs to, etc.:
Thine and mine (tuum et meum).
Lo tuyo y lo mio, Thy property and mine.
What belongs to thee and to me.

8, The verb ser, to be, with or without the adjective mio, m.,
mia, f.; tuyo, m., tuya, f; suyo, m., suya, f; and nuestro,
m., nuestra, f., is frequently used to express possession. When
used without the adjective, it is accompanied by the preposi-
tion de:

El libre ¢s mio, The book is mine.
La casa es suya, The house ts his (hers or yours),
El caballo es nuestro, The horse is ours.

El libro es de mi hermano, The book ts my brother's.

9. yConoce V.? (from conocer), and ysabe V.? (from saber)
both mean do you know? but conocer means rather to know by
DEMONSTRATIVE ADJECTIVES. 91
the senses, while saber means more properly to know by the
mind, to be versed in. Conocer, besides, is applied to persons
and things, while saber is said only of things, and may precede
another verb:

I know the man.

Do you know my house ?

Do you know your lesson ?

Do you know how to read ?

I know the English language.

Yo conozco al hombre,
i Conoce V. mi casa ?

i Sabe V. su leccidn ?

i Sabe V. leer ?
Conozco or sé el inglés,

Leccion XV. Lesson XY.

DEMONSTRATIVE ADJECTIVES.

Singular. Plural.

Masculine. Feminine. Masculine. Feminine.
Este, _ esta, this ; estos, estas, these.
Ese, esa, that; esos, esas, those.
Aquel, aquella, that; aquellos, aquellas, those,

Ejemplos. Examples.

This man is rich.

This woman is young.

That book and that pen are mine.
That soldier is brave.

That woman is poor.

These men are rich,

These women are young,

Those boys are young.

Este hombre es rico.

Esta mujer es joven.

Ese libro y esa pluma son mios.
Aquel soldado es valiente.
Aquella mujer es pobre.

Estos hombres son ricos.

Estas mujeres son jévenes.
Aquellos muchachos son jovenes.

Adverbs and Adjectives of Quantity.

Cuanto, m., cuanta, f., how much.

Poco, m., poca, f., little.

Tanto, n., tanta, f., so much, as much.

Mucho, m., mucha, f., much.

Demasiado, m., demasiada, f., too
much, too.

Unos cuantos, algunos, some.

Bastante, s., bastantes, pl., enough.

Cuantos, m., cuantas, f., how many.

Pocos, m., pocas, f., few. [many.

Tantos, m., tantas, f., so many, as

Muchos, m., muchas, f., many.

Demasiados, m., demasiadas, f., too
many, too.

Unos pocos, a few.

 

1 See page 106, 3.
92 LESSON 16.

Vocabulario. Vocabulary.
El bail, the trunk. | La experiencia, the experience. | Ahi, there.
El clavel, the pink. | La fiesta, the holy day. Londres, London.
El pais, the country.| La ropa, the clothes. 1 VaV.? are you going!
La carta, the letter. | A casa, to the house. Voy, J am going.

Exercise 29.

1. ,Quién es esta sefiora? 2. Esta sefiora es mi madre, y este
caballero es mi padre. 3. ; A dénde va V. esta mafiana? 4, Voy 4
casa de mi primo. 5. 4 Quiere V. esta rosa 6 aquel clavel? 6. No
quiero ninguna flor. 7. Este muchachito es mi hermano, y esta
muchachita es mi hermana. 8. El general es el padre de estos mu-
chachos. 9. 4 Son bonitas aquellas sefioritas? 10. Son jovenes, pero
no son muy bonitas. 11. , Habla francés aquel hombre? 12. Habla
inglés, pero no habla francés. 13. Ese Inglés es el amigo de aquel
Francés. 14. Aquel oficial es hermano de esta sefiora. 15. El capi-
tan de este buque es joven, pero tiene mucha experiencia. 16. j Es
pobre esta mujer? 17. Esta mujer es pobre, pero aquella mujer
es rica. 18. ;Son franceses esos muchachos? 19. Son alemanes.
20. ; Qué tiene V. en aquellos bales? 21. Tengo todos mis libros
en el pequefio baul, y mi ropa en el grande. 22. ; Son para V.
estas cartas? 23. No, sefior, son para mi padre. 24. ; Quién vive
en esa casa? 25. El padre de esos muchachos vive ahi. 26. Este
hombre es el padre de aquellos muchachos, y esta mujer es la madre
de aquellas muchachas. 27. Esta sefiora es de Paris, y su prima de
Londres.

Exercise 30.

1. Is this book yours? 2. This book is mine, but that book is my
brother’s. 3. Who is that little boy? 4. He is (the) son of that
lady. 5. This gentleman and that lady are French. 6. Are you the
brother of these ladies? 7. Iam their cousin. 8. Give me a piece
of that cake. 9. That cake isnot mine. 10. This book and pencil
are for your brother. 11. This house is higher than that church.
12. Where are you going this afternoon? 13. I don’t know yet.
14. These flowers are very beautiful. 15. Are these two gentlemen
brothers? 16. They are not brothers, they are friends. 17. Do you
know that country? 18, I know all those countries, 19. Is this
gentleman the husband of that lady? 20. No, he is her brother.
DEMONSTRATIVE ADJECTIVES. 93

21. This house is too small for us. 22. How many children has that
man? 23. He has three or four. 24. Have you money enough
(enough money)? 25. I have not much, but I have enough.
26. Have you much money? 27. I have very little. 28. You
speak too much.

Gramatica. Grammar.

1. Este, m., esta, f., designate the person or object nearer to
the speaker; ese, m., esa, f., the person or object nearer to
the person spoken to ; while aquel, m., aquella, f, designate the
person or object equally distant and quite remote from the
speaker and the person who is addressed :

Este hombre. — Ese libro. — Aquel This man. — That book. — That

lapiz. pencil.
Esta mujer. — Esa pluma. — Aquella This woman. — That pen. — That
cosa. thing.

The same rule is applicable to the plural of these demonstra-
tive adjectives:
Estos hombres. — Esos libros. — Aquellos These men. — Those books. —

lapices. Those pencils.
Estas mujeres. — Esas plumas. — Aquellas These women.— These pens.—
cosas. Those things.

2, Although the demonstrative adjectives precede the nouns,
they are placed sometimes after them to express contempt,
anger, or irony:

Al picaro ese le haré yo castigar, I wiil have this rogue punished.

3. The demonstrative adjective must be repeated before
every noun:

Este hombre, esta mujer y este muchacho This man, woman, and child
estan malos, are sick.

4. Donde, where, is preceded by the preposition 4 when the
verb expresses motion, and by en when it expresses position or
situation. A donde and en donde correspond in fact to the
English whither and wherein:

i & dénde va V. ? Where are you going to?
j En donde esta V.? Where are you?
94 ‘LESSON 16.

Leccion XVI. Lesson XVI.
DEMONSTRATIVE PRONOUNS.
Singular. Plural.
Masculine. Masculine.
Este, this one, the latter ; éstos, these, the latter.
Ese, that one; ésos, those.

Aquél, that one, the former;  aqueéllos, those, the former.

Feminine. Feminine.
Esta, this one, the latter ; éstas, these, the latter.
Esa, that one ; ésas, those.

Aquélla, that one, the former; aquéllas, those, the former,

Neuter.
Esto, this (this thing).
Eso, ,
Aquello, that (that thing).

Bl, 1a, los, las, lo, as Pronouns.

El de, — la de, That of.

Los de, — las de, Those of.

El or la de hierro, The tron one (that of iron).
Los or las de oro, The gold ones (those of gold).

El or la que yo tengo, | The one I have (that which I have).
Los or las que yo tengo, Those I have (those which I have).

El que, la que, los que, las que, lo que.

E] que esta aqui, The one who is here (he who is here).
La que esta alli, The one who is there (she who is there).
Los que dicen eso, Those who say that (they who say that).
Las que hablan, Those (fem.) who speak (they (fem.) who speak).
Lo que yo tengo, What I have (that which I have}.
Es bueno, it is good. Son buenos, they are good.
Es muy hermoso, it is very pretty. Son muy hermosos, they are very prettu.
Es mi libro, it is my book. Son mios, they are mine.

4 Qué es? what is it? j Esta listo ? is tt ready ?
DEMONSTRATIVE PRONOUNS. 95

Ejemplos.

Mi lapiz y el de mi hermano.
Mis lapices y los de mi hermano,
Mi pluma y la de mi hermana.
Mis plumas y las de mi hermana,
Mis libros y los de mi amigo.

Mis casas y las de mi hermano.

Este es grande, aquél es pequeiio,
mM. sing.

Esta es grande, aquélla es pequefia,
J. sing.

Estos son buenos, aquéllos son ma-
los, m. pl.

Estas son buenas, aquéllas son ma-
las, f. pl.

Esto es mio, aquello es suyo.

{Qué libro quiere V.?— Este 6
aquél.

{Qué pluma quiere V.?— Esta 6
aquélla.

i Qué libros quiere V.? — Estos 6
aquéllos.

i; Qué plumas quiere V.?— Estas
6 aqueéllas,

i Qué quiere V. ? — Eso.

3 Qué cuchillo vende V. ?— El de
hierro.

; Qué casas compra V. ?— Las de
madera.

Esto es bueno, aquello es malo.

Déme V. eso.

Lo que tengo es bueno. es

‘ixamples.

My pencil and my brother's (that of
my brother).

My pencils and my brother’s (those
of my brother).

My pen and my sister’s (that of my
sister).

My pens and my sister’s (those of
my sister).

My books and my friend’s (those of
my friend).

My houses and my brother’s (those
of my brother),

This one is large, that one is small.
This one is large, that one is small.
These are good, those are bad.
These are good, those are bad.

This (thing) is mine, that (thing) is
his.

What (which) book will you have ?
— This one or that one.

What (which) pen will you have ?
— This one or that one.

What (which) books will you have ?
— These or those.

What (which) pens will you have?
— These or those.

What will you have ?— That.

What knife do you sell ?— The iron
one.

What houses do you buy ?— The
wooden ones.

This is good, that is bad.

Give me that.

What I have is good. ’
96 LESSON 16.

i Qué es eso ? What is that ?
i Quién es ?— Soy yo. Who is it ?— It is I.
i Quién habla? — Es ella. Who speaks ? — It is she.
El es Inglés. He is English.
Ellas son Francesas. They ( fem.) are French.
Su hermano es sastre. His brother is a tailor.
i V. tiene dinero, no es verdad ? You have money, have you not ?
i El esté malo, no es verdad ? He is sick, is he not ?
iV. habla inglés, no es verdad ? You speak English, do you not ?
i V. quiere comprar la casa, no es You wish to buy the house, do you
verdad ? not?
i V. puede venir, no es verdad ? You can come, can you not ?
i V. salid, no es verdad ? You went out, did you not ?
Vocabulario. Vocabulary.
El bail, the trunk. De este modo, in this way.
El papel, the paper. Demasiado, too, too much, too many.
El paquete, the package. Dice, says. ,
El pulpero, the grocer. 3 Hace V.? do you do?
El vaso, the glass. Julio, Julius.
La plata, the silver. Limpio, clean.
Las tijeras, the scissors. Por supuesto, of course.

Ayer, yesterday.

Exercise 31.

1. 4 Tiene V. mis tijeras? 2. Tengo lasdesu hermana. 3. 4 Quiere
V. este pedazo de pan 6 aquél? 4. Déme V.ése. 5. ; Donde estan
mis libros? 6. Los de V. estén en mi cuarto, pero los desu hermano
estan aqui. 7. 4 Quiere V. el reloj de oro 6 el de plata? 8. Quiero
el de oro, por supuesto. 9. Carlos y Eduardo ya tienen sus baules, el
de Carlos es muy grande, pero el de Eduardo es demasiado pequefio.
10. Déme V. otra pluma, la que tengo es muy mala. 11. El que dice
eso, es un hombre malo. 12. 4 Tiene V. la pluma de Enrique?
13. Tengo lade Julio, 14. Aqui estd el libro de mi hermano y el
m{o ; éste es mds bonito que aquél. 15. Las manzanas de hoy son
mejores que las de ayer. 16. ; Quiere V. este vaso daquél? 17. Déme
Y. el que V. tiene; el que estd alli no est4 limpio. 18. ; Sabe V. lo
que tengo? 19. Yosé muy bien lo que V. tiene. 20. i Qué quiere
V. aqui? 21. Yo quiero lo que es mfo. 22. ; Qué eseso? 23, Es
DEMONSTRATIVE PRONOUNS. 97

un pedazo de papel. 24. Estos dos hombres son hermanos, el que
tiene el sombrero negro habla francés. 25. ; Quién esté 4 la puerta?
26. Es un muchacho con un paquete. 27. ; Es un paquete grande?
28. No, es un paquete muy pequefio. 29. ; Es aquello para V.? 30.
No, es para mi hermano.

Exercise 32.

1. I have two pencils: this one is for you and that one for your
sister. 2. These gentlemen are French, and those are English; the
latter are rich, but the former are poor. 3. Are the apples good ?
4. Those of our grocer are very good. 5. Is this package for you?
6. No; not this one, but that one. 7. What pen will you have?
8. Give me the gold one. 9. My house is small, but my brother’s is
much smaller. 10. Give me that. 11. I want this, but not that.
12. Is this well ? 13. This is well, but that is not so well. 14. Are
those gentlemen English? 15. They are French. 16. Who isat the
door? is it Edward? 17. No, sir, itis Henry. 18. What is that?
19. It is a little box. 20. For whom is that? 21. It is for your
brother. 22. Is it good? 23. It is not good. 24. How do you do
that? 25. In this way ; it is very easy. 26. Do you speak English
or French? 27. I speak English, but not French. 28. Who is the
man at the door? 29. It is nota man, it is a woman. 30. Will
you have this or that? 31. I don’t wish anything. 32. Who is it?
33. It is I.

Gramatica. Grammar.

1, In the foregoing lesson the difference between este, ese,
and aquel has been sufficiently explained. The same rule (L.
15, R. 1) is applicable to the neuter esto, eso, and aquello, that
is to say, that esto refers to the object nearer to the speaker ;
eso to the object nearer to the person spoken to, and aquello
the object equally distant from the speaker and the person who
is addressed :

Esto es bueno, eso es malo; This (thing) ts good, that one is bad; but
pero aquello es peor, that one there 18 worse,

2, When there are two objects in the sentence to which ref:
38 LESSON 16.

erence is to be made, aquel is used for the first one mentioned,
and este for the last mentioned.

The same rule is applicable to the feminine, the plural, and
the neuter :

Carlos era grande, Federico ambi- Charles was great, Frederic ambi-
cioso; éste (Federico) valiente, tious; the latter brave, the former
aquél (Carlos) poderoso, powerful.

8. Esto is also used when referring to something which the
speaker has already mentioned; and eso when referring to
something mentioned by the person who is addressed :

Esto que yo digo, es cierto, What I say is certain.
Eso que V. dice, no es verdad, What you say is not true.

4, When a fourth object is referred to, the adjective otro,

other, is added to the adjective, or to the pronoun :
Aquel otro libro, That other book.
Aquel otro, That other one.

5. The word mismo is often added to the demonstrative

pronouns to call attention more especially to them:
Este mismo, This very or same one.
Aquél mismo, That very or same one.

6, That of is rendered by el de or la de, and those of by Jos
de or las de, according to the gender of the noun referred to.
The English formation of the possessive does not exist in
Spanish :

Mi libro y el de mi amigo, My book and my friend's.
Nuestra casa y la de nuestros amigos, Our house and our friends’.
Mis amigos y los de V. My friends and yours.

Sus libros de V. y los de Juan, Your books and John’s,

7. That which, the one which, are rendered by el que or la
gue, and those which, by Jos que or las que.

Quien, who, may be used instead of que at the beginning of a
sentence when speaking of a person :
El que or él quien habla mal de He who (whoever) speaks ill of his

su prdjimo, no seré admitido neighbor shall not be admitted in
en mi casa, my house.
AUXILIARY VERB HABER. 98

8, The article and the demonstrative or relative pronoun
should never be separated in Spanish, and when this separation
takes place in English a different construction must be adopted :

Yerran los que dicen eso, Those are mistaken who say that.

9, Ello is often used for eso, and corresponds also to the
pronoun it:

Hablamos de ello, We speak of it.

10. The pronoun it and its corresponding they for the
plural, when the subjects of a sentence, are generally suppressed
in Spanish :

Es bueno, it is good ; Son bnenos, they are good,
Esta aqui, i is here ; Estan alli, they are there.

Leccion XVII. Lesson XVII.
AUXILIARY VERB HABER, to have.
Yo he, T have.
Tu has, thou hast.
El ha, he has,
Ella ha, she has.
V. ha, you have,
Nosotros hemos, we have.
Vosotros habéis, you have.
Ellos (m.) han, they have.
Ellas (f.) han, theu have.
VV. han, you have.

Regular Verbs.
Verbs of the 1st Conjugation, ending in ar:

Hablar, hablado, to speak, spoken.
Cortar, cortado, to cut, cut.
Tomar, tomado, to take, taken.
Comprar, comprado, to buy, bought.

Verbs of the 2d Conjugation, ending in er:

Comer, comido, to eat, eaten.
Beber, bebido, to drink, drunk.
Vender, vendido, to sell, sold.

Temer, temido, to fear, feared.
100

LESSON 17.

Verbs of the 3d Conjugation, ending om ir:

Recibir, recibido,
Subir, subido,
Partir, partido,

Ejemplos.

j A quién ha hablado V. ?

He hablado 4 este hombre.

Mi hermano ha vendido su casa.
Los muchachos han comido el pan.
; Han recibido VV. dinero ?
Hemos recibido un poco.

j Donde ha estado V. ?

He estado en la casa.

4 Quién ha tomado mi sombrero ?
Nadie ha tomado su sombrero.
Hemos sido muy felices.

4 Quién ha salido ?

Nadie ha salido,

No he comprado nada.

He dado un pedazo de pan al pobre.

Vocabulario,

El caj6n, the drawer.

El campo, the country.
El pais, the country.+

El] paiiuelo, the handkerchief.
El duro, the dollar.

El tiempo, the time.

La cosa, the thing.

Las mereancias, the goods.
La sopa, the soup.
Aprender, to learn.
Castigar, to punish.

Dar, to give.
Desobediente, disobedient.

to receive, received.
to ascend, to go up ; ascended, gone up,
to divide, divided.

Examples.

To whom have you spoken ?

I have spoken to this man.

My brother has sold his house.

The boys have eaten the bread.

Have you received any money ?

We have received a little.

Where have you been ?

I have been in the house.

Who has taken my hat ?

Nobody has taken your hat.

We have been very happy.

Who has gone out ?

Nobody has gone out.

I have not bought anything.

I have given a piece of bread to the
poor man.

Vocabulary.

Estar, to be.
Europa, Zurope.
Hallar, to find.
Malo, unwell.
Otro, another.
Perder, to lose.
Porque, because,
Salir, to go out.
Ser, to be.

Tener, to have.
Todo el mundo, everybody.
Varios, as, several.
Vivir, to live.

 

1 Campo refers to the country contrasted with the city, while pais means

a tract of land inhabited by a nation.
AUXILIARY VERB HABER. 101

Exercise 33.

1. Los muchachos han comido todas las manzanas del jardin.
2. ; Ha dado V. el café al caballero? 3. No, sefiora, pero he dado
el té 4a sefiora. 4. ; Ha comprado V. una mesa? 5. Si, sefior, he
comprado una mesa de caoba. 6. ; En dénde ha hallado V. esto?
7. En nuestro jardin. 8. j Quién ha tomado dinero de mi cajén?
9. Su hermano de V. ha tomado dinero y papeles. 10. ; Qué sopa han
tenido VV.? 11. Hemos tenido una sopa muy buena. 12. j Qué
han comprado VV. hoy? 13. Hemos comprado muchisimas cosas.
14. ; Qué ha perdido su hermanade V.? 15. Ha perdido su pafiuelo.
16. ,; Haa comprado VV. manzanas? 17. No, sefior, hemos com-
prado peras, 18. ; Ha recibido V. algo de su padre? 19. He reci-
bido varias cosas. 20. ; Ha estado V. malo? 21. Si, sefior, he
estado bastante malo. 22. 4 Quién ha estado en la casa? 23. Nadie
ha estado en la casa, pero alguno ha estado en el jardin. 24. 4 Por-
qué no ha comprado V. la casa del médico, V. que es tan rico?
25. Nunca he sido rico. 26. ; Ha aprendido V.su leccién? 27. To-
davia no, no he tenido tiempo. 28. 4, De quién ha hablado V.?
29. He hablado de mis buenos amigos. 30. Mi hermano ha vendido
su caballo, pero ha comprado otro mds grande.

Exercise 34.

1. The soldier has given an apple to the child. 2. My sister has
received two letters from Paris. 3. The children have been in the
garden with their little friends. 4. Have the boys eaten the cheese ?
5. They have eaten the bread. 6. Has the general bought a house?
7. He has bought a house in our street. 8. Have you had any
money? 9. I have had two dollars. 10. Where have you been,
John? 11. I have been in the country. 12. Have you bought your
silk dress in that large store? 18. I have bought nodress. 14. Who
has been sick at your house? 15. Everybody has been sick.
16. Charles has been disobedient and he has been punished. 17. The
merchant has received many goods from Europe. 18. Have you
found anything in the drawer? 19. I have not found anything in
it (en él). 20. Why has not your brother gone out? 21. Because
he has not been well. 22. Have you brought anything for the chil-
dren? 23. Yes, I have brought something useful for them (ellos).
24, Have you lived in that country? 25. No, sir, I have never been
102 LESSON 17.

in that country. 26. Have you eaten enough, my friend? 27. Yes,
sir, I have eaten and drunk enough. 28. Has your father gone out!
29. He has not gone out yet. 30. The soldiers have received less
bread than meat.

Gramatica. Grammar.

1, The verb to have is rendered in Spanish by two different
verbs, tener and haber.

Tener, of which we have already snoken (L. IV., p. 36), is
ased as an active verb to indicate a material or immaterial pous-
session, and generally means to possess, to hold, as :

Yo tengo dinero, J have money. E] tiene tiempo, he has time.
El tiene un bastén, he has a stick. Tenemos pan, we have bread.

Haber is used as an auxiliary verb preceding the past parti-
ciple as:
He recibido dinero, LZ have received money.

Hemos comido pan, We have caten bread,

Haber cannot be separated from the principal verb as is the
case in English in interrogative sentences. Thus: Have you
given? must be rendered by ;ha dado V.? and has he come?
by 4 ha venido é1?

2. Haber was formerly used as an active verb, and had then
the following Imperative :

He tu, thou shalt have ; habed, you shall have.

It may be used even now in sentences with the infinitive :

Aprovechare cuantos medios yo puedo I will us: all the means I may

haber, have.
El empleé .uanta influencia pudo ha- He used all the influence he could
ber. command (have).

3. The verb tener may be used sometimes as auxiliary, and
the sense of the sentence would be but slightly altered. In
AUXILIARY VERB HABER. 103

this case the participle would have to agree in gender and num-
ber with the noun:

Tengo escritas las cartas, L have the letters (all) written.
Tenemos el dinero contado, We have the money counted.

This way of expressing one’s self ought, however, to be avoided by all
those not perfectly familiar with the language, as it might lead to mistakes
in style.

4, All verbs in Spanish end in ar, er, or ir.

Verbs ending in ar belong to the 1st Conjugation, as :

Amar, to love ; dar, to give ; hablar, to speak.

Verbs ending in er belong to the 2d Conjugation, as:

Comer, to eat ; beber, to drink ; correr, to run; tener, to have.

Verbs ending in ir belong to the 3d Conjugation, as:
Recibir, to receive;  huir, to flee; — dividir, to divide; _ salir, fo go out.
5. All regular verbs of the lst Conjugation end in the past
participle in ado, and those of the 2d and 3d Conjugations in
ido. The same may be said of nearly all the irregular verbs in
the three conjugations : amar, amado; coger, cogido ; atribuir,
atribuido ; etc.

 

Lecci6n XVIII. Lesson XVIII.

VERB HABER, ¢o have (continued.)

Irregular Participles.

Abrir, to open ; abierto, opened.
Cubrir, to cover ; cubierto, covered.
Decir, to say, to tell ; dicho, said, told.
Eseribir, fo write ; escrito, written.
Hacer, to make, to do; hecho, made, done.
Imprimir, to print ; impreso, printed.
Morir, to die; muerto, died.
Poner, to put ; puesto, put.
Solver, to loosen ; suelto, Zoosed.

Ver, to see; visto, seen.

Volver. to return + wuelto, returned.
104 LESSON 18.

Haber de and tener que:

1 Qué he de hacer? i What am I to do?
4 Qué tengo que hacer ?

V. ha de estudiar,
V. tiene que estudiar, {

4 Qué hemos de decir ?

4 Qué tenemos que decir ? }

VV. han de decir Ja verdad,

VV. tienen que decir la verdad, }

Preposition & and Active Verbs:

You must study.
What are we to say?

You must tell the truth.

§ A quién ha visto V. ? Whom have you seen ?
He visto d su padre de V. I hawe seen your father.
Amo 4 mis amigos, I love my friends.

Juan ha perdido é su padre, John has lost his father.
El médico cura a? enfermo, The physician cures the patient.

Pero and sino:

No tengo oro, pero tengo plata, L have not gold, but I have silver.
No tengo oro, sino plata, J have not gold, but silver.

El es joven, pero es muy prudente, He is young, but he is very prudent,
No tenemos hermanos, sino hermanas, We have no brothers, but sisters.

No hablo inglés, sino espaiiol, I don't speak English, but Spanish,
El no habla inglés, pero habla es- He does not speak English, but he
panol, speaks Spanish.
O and , or; ¥ and é, and:

Bl 6 yo, He or I.

Uno ui otro (before 0), One or the other.

Tio y sobrino, Uncle and nephew.

Verano é invierno, } beforei Summer and winter.

Padre é hijo, } or hi, Father and son.

Vocabulario. Vocabulary.

El criado, the servant. La nieve, the snow. Enfermo, 772, sick.
El dueiio, the owner. La tierra, the earth. Escribir, 3. to write.
El maestro, the teacher. La ventana, the window. | Espatia, f., Spain.
El rincén, the corner. Alguien, alguno, some- | Europa, f., Europe.
El teatro, the theater. body, anybody. Francia, f., France.
El viaje, the journey. Asi, thus. Italia, f., Ztaly.
La batalla, the battle. Con, with. Sino, but.
La carta, the letter. Desde, since. Tres, three,

La majiana, the morning. | Dos, two. Viajar, 1. to travel,
AUXILIARY VERB HABER. 105

Exercise 35.

1. 4 Quién ha abierto la ventana? 2. Creo queeselcriado. 3. ;A
quién ha visto V. en el teatro? 4. He visto 4 todos mis amigos.
5. , Quién ha dicho eso? 6. El panadero ha dicho eso 4 mi hermano.
7. ,Cémo ha hecho V. eso? 8. Asi. 9. 3 Ha escrito V. 4su padre?
10. No, sefior, no he escrito todavia 4 nadie. 11. 4 Ha vuelto su
familia del campo? 12. Toda la familia ha vuelto 4 la ciudad desde
tres dias. 13. ; Quién ha muertoenesacasa? 14. Nadie ha muerto,
pero todo el mundo esta enfermo. 15. 4 Dénde ha puesto V. mi bas-
ton? 16. Estéenelrincén. 17. 4 Aquién ha hablado V. en aquella
casa? 18. He hablado al duefio de la casa. 19. ; Ha conocido V. 4
mi padre? 20. He conocido 4 su padre y 4 su madre de V. en Fran-
cia, 21. 4 Han comprado VV. buenas manzanas? 22. Las manzanas
que hemos comprado no son muy buenas. 23. ; Ha visto V. 4 mi
bermana? 24. No he vistod nadie. 25. 4 Qué tiene V. que hacer ?
26. Tengo muchisimo que hacer. 27. 4 Tiene V. oro 6 papel?
28. No tengo oro, pero tengo papel. 29. Este caballero no habla
sino inglés.

Exercise 36.

1. Have you seen anybody in the garden? 2. I have seen Mr.
Rojas and his son, 3. Why have you said that? 4. I have not said
anything, I have not spoken. 5. Isthedoor open? 6. The door and
the window are closed. 7. Have you written to your father? 8 F
have written to my father, mother, and sisters. 9. Who has put my
cane in the other room? 10. I don’t know, no one has been here
since this morning. 11. Has your friend returned from Europe ?
12. He has not returned yet. 13. Is this gentleman your brother?
14. He is not my brother, but my cousin. 15. Where must you go
this afternoon? 16. I have to go out with my father. 17. The gen-
eral has died in the battle. 18. Where have the children been this
morming? 19. They have been in the house. 20. With what have
you written that? 21. I have written all that with a pencil. 22. Do
yoa know what the teacher has said? 23. I know very well what
he has said. 24. Isyour uncle rich? 25. He has been rich, but he
is poor now. 26. Have the children written their letters? 27. They
have written two or three letters. 28. Do you know this gentleman !
99. I know his brother.
W6 LESSUN 18.
Gramatica. Grammar.

1. The past participle agrees in gender and number with its
subject when accompanied by the verbs estar, ser, to be.
It remains invariable when used with the auxiliary haber,

to have.

He comido. — Hemos comido, LT hawe eaten. — We have eaten,
Ellos (o7 ellas) han comido, They have eaten.

La carta esta escrita, The letter ts written.

Las cartas estan escritas, The letters are written.

Los caminos estan cubiertos de nieve, The roads are covered with snow.

2. The verb haber is also used to express obligation, and is
then followed by the preposition de and the Infinitive of the
principal verb. The verb tener followed by que is used in the
same way, and both verbs correspond then to the English verb
must. The active verb deber has also the same meaning:

He de ir 4 la ciudad,
Tengo que ir a la ciudad, I must go to the city.
Debo ir 4 la ciudad,

3. The object of an active verb requires the preposition 4
before it when this object is a person, a rational animal, or a
thing personified :

Veo & un hombre, I see a man.

Vemos al hombre, We see the man.
Conocemos 4 estos caballeros, We know these gentlemen.
j 4 quién conoce V. ? Whom do you know ?

4, The preposition 4, which is not translated in English,
must, however, be left out in Spanish after an active verb and
a person, if by the addition of this preposition the sentence
should not be clearly expressed :

Envio el hijo al padre (not: envio al hijo al I send the son to the

padre), Sather.
Han robado un nifio, They have stolen a child,
Han robado ¢ un nifio would mean They have robbed a child.
Quiero wn criado, és as I want a servant.

Quiero 4 un criado, se sé I love a servant,
GERUND. 107

5. Pero and sino are both rendered by dué. Pero is used
when a verb is expressed in the second part of the sentence,
while sino is used when the first part of the sentence is nega-
tive and no verb is expressed in the second part.

Sino has also the meaning of except, and is used with the
negative :

Hablo francés, pero no hablo inglés, I speak French, but I do not speak

English.
No hablo francés, sino inglés, I don’t speak French, but English.
El no habla sino aleman, He speaks nothing but (except)
German.

6. Solamente, only, but, may be used instead of sino in the
affirmative :
No tengo oro, tengo solamente papel, I have no gold, 1 have only paper
Norz. — Instead of solamente, s6lo may be used.

Leccion XIX. Lesson XIX.

THE GERUND.

lst Conjugation:

Amar; amando, to love; loving.
Hablar; hablando, to speak ; speaking.\
Comprar ; comprando, to buy; buying.
Tomar ; tomando, to take ; taking.

2d Conjugation :

Comer ; comiendo, to eat, to dine ; eating, dining.
Beber ; bebiendo, to drink ; drinking.

Hacer ; haciendo, to do, to make; doing, making.
Perder ; perdiendo, to lose ; losing.

3d Conjugation :

Recibir; recibiendo, to receive ; receiving.
Salir; saliendo, to go out ; going out.
Partir ; partiendo, to divide ; dividing.

Subir ; subiendo, to ascend, to go wp; ascending, going up.
108 LESSON 19.

Verbs in eer and uir:

Leer ; leyendo,
Instruir ; instruyendo,

to read ; reading.
to instruct ; instructing.

Irregular Verbs. ‘

Decir ; diciendo,
Dormir; durmiendo,
Morir; muriendo,
Pedir ; pidiendo,
Poder ; pudiendo,
Sentir ; sintiendo,
Venir ; viniendo,

Ejemplos.

i De qué esta V. hablando ?
Estoy hablando del tiempo.

Los muchachos estan jugando.

4 Qué esta V. haciendo ?

Estoy escribiendo una carta.

i Qué estan diciendo estos hombres ?
No estan hablando.

Mi madre esta durmiendo.

Los nifios vienen llorando.

He estado leyendo todo el dia,
Aprendo estudiando y leyendo.

i Qué estén VV. leyendo ?
Estamos leyendo un libro francés.

Vocabulario.

El albaiil, the mason.
El barco, the vessel.

El capitan, the captain.
El gusto, the pleasure.
El vaso, the glass.

La fonda, the hotel.

La tarde, the afternoon.
La noche, the night.
Abierto, opened.
Alemania, f., Germany.
Almorzar, 1. to breakfast.
Bebo, J drink.

Cantar, 1. to sing.
Concluir, 3. to finish.
Conocer, 2. to know.
Correr, 2. to run.
Estudiar, 1. to study.
Hasta, until.
Importante, important.
Jugar, 1. to play.
Llegar, 1. to arrive.
Llorar, 1. to cry, to weep.
Mandar, 1. to send.

to say, to tell ; saying, telling.

to sleep; sleeping. —

to die ; dying.

to ask for ; asking for.

to be able, can; being able.

to feel, to hear ; feeling, hearing.
to come ; coming.

Examples.

Of what are you speaking ?

I am speaking of the weather.
The boys are playing.

What are you doing ?

I am writing a letter.

What are these men saying ?
They are not speaking.

My mother is sleeping.

The children are coming crying.
Ihave been reading the whole day.
I learn by studying and reading.
What are you reading ?

We are reading a French book.

Vocabulary.

Muchas gracias, J (ot
we) thank you.
Nosotros, us.
Pasar, 1. to pass.
Por, through, by.
Prestar, 1. to lend,
Tarde, late.
Tomar, 1. to take.
Va, goes.
Venir, 3. to come.
Ya, already,
GERUND. 109

Exercise 37.

1. 4 Qué estan haciendo los muchachos en el cuarto? 2. Estén
jugando con sus amiguitos. 3. ; Quién esta cantando en la calle?
4, Una pobre mujer esta cantando. 5. Mi hermano estd leyendo, y
mi hermana esta escribiendo. 6. ; Ha hablado V. al capitdn? 7. Yo
no he hablado 4 nadie, he estado en mi cuarto hasta ahora. 8. ; A
quién ha prestado V. dinero? 9. He prestado dinero 4 su hermano
de V. 10. 4 Sabe V. si el general esta en casa? 11. Esta en su
cuarto, pero esté durmiendo. 12. El muchacho va corriendo por las
calles. 13. ; De qué esté V. hablando? 14. Estoy hablando de una
cosa muy importante. 15. jQuiere V. comer hoy con nosotros?
16. Con mucho gusto. 17. 4 En qué pais ha vivido V.? 18. He
vivido dos afios en Francia, y tres afios en Alemania, 19. j Cudntas
cartas han escrito VV.? 20. Hemos escrito dos 6 tres. 21. 4 Quiere
V. tomar un vaso de vino? 22. Muchas gracias, yo no bebo vino.
23. ; Qué ha dicho el médico? 24. Nosé lo que ha dicho, porque ha
hablado con mi hermano. 25. 4 Porqué esta Norando ese muchacho ?
26. El llora por nada. 27. He estado escribiendo desde esta mafiana,
y todavia no he concluido mis cartas. 28. ; Dénde ha pasado V. la
noche? 29. He pasado la noche en la fonda, no conociendo 4 nadie
aqui. 30. ; Porqué no ha venido V. 4 mi casa? 31. Porque no sabia
(CI did not know) donde V. vivia (lived).

Exercise 38.

1. Where are the children? 2. They are playing in the garden.
3. Have they studied their lessons? 4. They have been studying all
the morning. 5. With whom were you (estaba V.) speaking in the
garden? 6. I was speaking with a French gentleman. 7. Were you
sleeping this afternoon? 8. No, I was writing in my room. 9. Who
is crying in the other room? 10. The little boy is crying. 11. What
is your brother doing now? 12. I don’t know where he is now.
13. Where are you going to? 14. Iam going home. 15. Why have
you eaten my bread? 16. Because I bad (habia) not eaten anything
since this morning. 17. Has your father gone out? 18. No, sir, he
is in the house; he is breakfasting. 19. The masons are building a
splendid house in our street. 20. What was (estaba) that man say-
ing? 21. He was speaking of the weather. 22. Why are you run-
ning? 23. Because it is already late. 24. Have you sent the money

’
11U LESSON 19.

to the tailor? 25. Not yet, I have not received my money. 26. This
poor boy has lost his father and mother. 27. Do you know if the
vessel has arrived? 28. Yes, sir, it has arrived; I have spoken to
the captain. 29. Who has been in my room this moming? 30. Your
brothers and sisters have been here and have opened your room.
31. What is that man asking for? 32. He is asking for money.

Gramatica. Grammar.

1, The gerund ends in Spanish in ando, for the 1st Conju-
gation; and in iendo for the 2d and 3d Conjugations. These
terminations are added to the present of the infinitive after sup-
pressing the terminations ar, er, and ir.

This is the case in regular verbs and also in most of the ir-
regular verbs: the termination never changes, but the radical
part of a few irregular verbs undergoes a slight change :

Hablar, hablando ; to speak, speaking.
Comer, comiendo ; to eat, eating.

Escribir, escribiendo; to write, writing.

Pedir, pidiendo ; to ask for, asking for.

Dormir, durmiendo ; to sleep, sleeping.

2. Verbs ending in eer and wir change the i into y:
Leer, leyendo ; to read, reading.
Instruir, instruyendo; to instruct, instructing.
3. The gerund used with the verb estar, to be, corresponds to
the progressive form in English, and expresses the action of the
verb as continuing and unfinished :

Estoy leyendo, I am reading.

4 Qué esta V. haciendo ? What are you doing ?
Esta lloviendo, It is raining.

El estaba escribiendo, He was writing.

He estado leyendo todo el dia, I have been reading the whole day.

4, The verb estar is not used with the gerund of the verbs
ser, to de; ir, to go; venir, to come. Thus we would not say:
estoy yendo, Jam going, but voy, J go; nor esta viniendo,
he ts coming, but viene, he comes ; etc.
GERUND. lil
5. When other verbs are used as auxiliaries of the gerund,
they sufficiently explain themselves :
El nifio sigue durmiendo, The child continues sleeping.
El viene corriendo, He comes running.
6. The gerund indicates a certain continuation of the action :

Andan entrando y saliendo, They continue coming in and going out.

7. The gerund is also used to express the way in which a
thing happens:

La tos se cura sudando, Coughing ts cured by perspiring.
Se aprende estudiando, One learns by studying.

8. It is also used with the preposition en, in; and refers
then to the action of the other verb :

En acabando ira, When he has finished he will go.

OBSERVATION. — The preposition, may, however, be left out in most
cases, without altering the sense of the sentence.

9, The gerund of the verb estar often precedes that of an-
other verb:

Estando comiendo, recibié la carta, Whilst he was dining he received
the letter.

10. The gerund is used very frequently in Spanish for the
sake of brevity and euphony, and in cases where the English
use adverbs, conjunctions, and prepositions, as: when, as,
while, whilst, since, if, by, etc. :

Habla durmiendo, He talks while he sleeps.
Se aprende leyendo, One learns by reading.
- Siendo asi, no quiero ir, Since it is so, I shall not go.

Dandole yo licencia, saldra, If I give him permission, he will go out.
Viendo que su hermano no When he saw that his brother was not com-
venta, se fué. ing, he went away.
#42

Leccién XX.

CARDINAL

Lesson XX.

NUMBERS.

The Cardinal Numbers are:

Uno, m., una, f.
Dos,

Tres,

Cuatro,

Cinco,

Seis,

Siete,

Ocho,

Nueve,

Diez,

Once,

Doce,

Trece,

Catorce,
Quince,

Diez y seis,!
Diez y siete,
Diez y ocho,
Diez y nueve,
Veinte,

Veinte y uno,
Veinte y dos,
Veinte y tres,
Yeinte y cuatro,
Veinte y cinco,
Veinte y seis,
Veinte y siete,
Veinte y ocho,
Veinte y nueve,
Treinta,
Treinta y uno,
Cuarenta,
Cincuenta,

One.

Two.

Three.

Four.

Five.

Sia.

Seven.

Fight.

Nine.

Ten.

Eleven.
Twelve,
Thirteen.
Fourteen,
Fifteen.
Siateen.
Seventeen.
Highteen.
Nineteen.
Twenty.
Twents-one.
Twenty-two.
Twenty-three.
Twenty-four.
Twenty-five.
Twenty-six.
Twenty-seven.
Twenty-eight.
Twenty-nine.
Thirty.
Thirty-one,
Forty.

Fifty.

 

1 These numbers are also written in one word, as: Dieciseis, veintiuno,

treintaiuno, etc.
CARDINAL NUMBERS.

Sesenta,

Setenta,

Ochenta,

Noventa,

Ciento,!

Ciento y uno,

Ciento y diez,
Doscientos (-as, f.),
Trescientos (-as, /.),
Cuatrocientos (-as, 7.),
Quinientos (-as, 7),
Seiscientos (-as, /.),
Setecientos (-as, 7.),
Ochocientos (-as, 7.),
Novecientos (-as, 7.),
Mil,

Mil y ciento,

Mil y doscientos (-as, 7.),
Dos mil,

Cien! mil,

Doscientos (-as, 7.) mil,
Un millén,

Dos millones,

Cero,

Dias de la semana.

113

Staty.

Seventy.

Eighty.

Ninety.

One hundred.

One hundred and one.
One hundred and ten.
Two hundred.

Three hundred.

Four hundred,

Five hundred.

Six hundred.

Seven hundred.

Bight hundred.

Nine hundred.

One thousand,

One thousand one hundred.
One thousand two hundred.
Two thousand.

One hundred thousand.
Two hundred thousand,
One million.

Two millions.

Zero or cipher.

Days of the week.

Domingo, Sunday. El domingo, On Sunday.
Lunes, Monday. Los lunes, On Mondays.
Martes, Tuesday. El martes por la mafiana, T'uesday morning.
Miércoles, Wednesday. El miércolespor la noche, Wednesday evening.
Jueves, Thursday. El jueves préximo,

Viernes, Friday. ial eves oe viene, } RE TTA,
Sabado, Saturday. El sabado pasado, Last Saturday.

Divisiones del dia. Divisions of the day.

La mafiana, The morning.
El dia, The day.
La tarde, The afternoon.

 

1 Ciento drops the syllable ¢o before a noun. Cien hombres, One hun-

dred men. 8
114 LESSON 20.

La noche,

Maiiana por la maiiana,
Maiiana por la noche,
De dia,

Por la noche, de noche,
Buenos dias,

Buenas tardes,

Buenas noches,

Vocabulario.

El aiio, the year.

El banco, the bank.

El bocoy, the hogshead.

El correo, the post office.
El dia, the day.

El hotel, the hotel.

El mes, the month.

El minuto, the minute.

El saco, the bag.

La biblioteca, the library.
La cabaileria, the cavalry.
La caballeriza, the stable.
La carne de vaca, the beef.
La estacién, the season.
La hora, the hour.

La libra, the pound.

La persona, the person.

La semana, the week.

The evening, the night.
To-morrow morning.
To-morrow evening.

In daytime.

in the evening, at night.
Good morning, good day.
Good afternoon.

Good evening, good night.

Vocabulary.

La tripulaci6n, the crew
Anoche, last night.
Como, about how.
Contar, to cownt.
Contiene, contains.
Convidar, to invite,
Cuando, when.

En casa, at home.

Lo siento, J am sorry for tt.
Mas, more.

Matar, to kill.

4 Puede V. t can you?
Puedo, J can.
Necesitar, to need.
Nosotros, us.

Piublico, public.
Solamente, only.

 

Unos pocos, a few.

Exercise 39.

1. He comprado doscientos bocoyes de aztcar y trescientos sacos de
café. 2. 4 Qué han comprado VV. hoy? 3. Hemos comprado diez
pollos y cincuenta libras de carne de vaca. 4. ; Cudnto dinero ha
recibido V.? 5. He recibido cuatrocientos noventa y nueve duros.
6. 4 Y porqué no quinientos? 7. Porque hemos pagado un duro en
el correo. 8. Un mes tiene veinte y ocho, veinte y nueve, treinta, 6
treinta y un dias. 9. El] dfa tiene veinte y cuatro horas; la hora
tiene sesenta minutos. 10. Un afio tiene trescientos sesenta y cinco,
6 trescientos sesenta y seis dfas. 11. ; Cudndo va V. 4 casa de su her-
mano? 12. Voy los miércoles. 13. El general tenia (had) cincuenta
mil hombres de infanteria y diez mil hombres de caballeria. 14. Esta
CARDINAL NUMBERS. 115

aldea no tiene sino dos calles. 15. El principe tiene mds de cincuenta
caballos en sus caballerizas. 16. ; Cudéndoest4 V.encasa? 17. Estoy
en casa por la mafianay porlanoche. 18. Hemos matado més de veinte
pajaros en el jardin. 19. Una semana tiene siete dias, ciento sesenta
y ocho horas, y diez mil y ochenta minutos. 20. Un afio tiene cin-
cuenta y dos semanas, doce meses, y cuatro estaciones. 21. ; Ha
contado V. todo el dinero? 22. He contado tres mil duros en oro, y
dos mil duros en papel. 23. ; A cudntas personas ha convidado V.
para el domingo? 24. No he convidado todavia 4 nadie. 25. ; Ha
perdido soldados el general? 26. Ha perdido dos mil de sus mejores
soldados. 27. 4 Cudnto dinero quiere V.? 28. Déme V. doscientos
y cincuenta duros. 29. ; Es bastante? 30. Es bastante con los
ochenta duros que ya tengo.

Exercise 40.

1. Our city has now twenty thousand inhabitants ; in 1860, it had
(tenia) only a few houses, and about five hundred inhabitants. 2. The
vessel has a crew of twenty-two men. 3. Charles’s father is one of
the richest men in (de) our town ; he has at least two millions of dol-
lars. 4. Have you bought apples or pears? 5. I bought a hundred
apples, but no pears. 6. Washington was born (nacié) in 1732, and
died (murié) in 1799. 7. Where are you going on Monday next?
8. I don’t know yet. 9. I go to school on Mondays, Tuesdays, Wed-
nesdays, Thursdays, and Fridays ; on Saturdays I go to the country,
and on Sundays to church. 10. Do you work in daytime or in
the evening? 11. I always work in the evening. 12. Can you come
to-morrow morning? 13. No, but I can come to-morrow evening.
14. Have you any money for us? 15. I have twenty-five dollars for
you, and fifty dollars for your brother. 16. It is not enough ; I need
twelve dollars more. 17. I am sorry for it, but I have not one dollar
more. 18. Mr. Felix Ronda has more than twenty houses in the
city. 19. This hotel has more than two hundred rooms. 20. We
have a hotel in our city which (que) contains three hundred. 21. How
many dollars do you need to (para) buy that horse? 22, I need one
hundred and twenty dollars, having already one hundred and eighty
dollars in the bank. 23. My father has given five hundred pounds
of meat to the poor. 24. There are (hay) more than twenty thou-
sand volumes in our Public Library. 25. There were (habia) at least
four thousand persons at (en) the theater last night.
116 LESSON 20.

Gramatica. Grammar.

1. Uno, one, a, an, has for feminine una. Both add 8 in the
plural when used substantively :

Log unos y los otros, m., i The ones and the others
Las unas y las otras, 7., :

2, From dos, two, up to ciento, hundred, the numbers are
plural and common to both genders; but from doscientos, two
hundred, to novecientos, nine hundred, the termination 08 is
changed into as for the feminine :

Tres hombres y cuatro mujeres, Three men and four women.
Doscientos hombres y trescientas Two hundred men and three hundred
mujeres, women.

3. The conjunction y, and, is placed only before the last
number :

Doscientos noventa y ocho, Two hundred and ninety-eight.

4, Ciento drops the last syllable before a noun. [In the
same way no drops also the 0 before a noun. ]

Cien hombres y cien mujeres, One hundred men and one hundred women,
Veinte y un muchachos, Twenty-one boys.

5, Although mil, one thousand, has neither gender nor num-
ber, it may be used in certain cases in the plural, as in English,
and is then a noun:

Este hombre ha gastado muchos miles, This man has spent many thousands.

6. The preposition 4 is left out after an active verb when the
object of the sentence is preceded by a cardinal number:

He visto veinte hombres (not 4 veinte hombres), I have seen twenty men.

7. More than, less than, are rendered in Spanish by mas de,
and menos de before a cardinal number:

Mas de cien duros, More than a hundred dollars.
Menos de tres dias, Less than three days.

8. Eleven hundred, twelve hundred, thirteen hundred, etc.,

cannot be expressed as in English, but must be translated:
Mil y ciento, One thousand one hundred.
Mil y doscientos, One thousand two hundred.
Mil y trescientos, One thousand three hundred,
ORDINAL NUMBERS.

Leecion XXI.

117

Lesson XXI.

ORDINAL NUMBERS.

Primero (primo),
Segundo,
Tercero,

Cuarto,

Quinto,

Sexto (sesto),
Séptimo (sétimo),
Octavo,

Noveno or nono,
Décimo,
Undécimo,
Duodécimo,
Décimo tercio,!
Décimo cuarto,
Décimo quinto,
Décimo sesto,
Décimo séptimo,
Décimo octavo,
Décimo nono,
Vigésimo,
Vigésimo primo,
Vigésimo segundo,
Vigésimo tercero,
Trigésimo,
Cuadragésimo,
Quincuagésimo,
Sexagésimo,
Septuagésimo,
Octogésimo,
Nonagésimo,
Centésimo,
Centésimo primo,
Centésimo undécimo,
Ducentésimo,

First.

Second.

Third.

Fourth.

Fifth.

Stath.

Seventh.
Eighth.

Ninth.

Tenth.
Eleventh.
Twelfth.
Thirteenth.
Fourteenth.
Fifteenth.
Siuteenth,
Seventeenth.
Eighteenth.
Nineteenth.
Twentieth.
Twenty-first.
Twenty-second.
Twenty-third.
Thirtieth.
Fortieth.
Fiftieth.
Sixtieth,
Seventieth.
Hightieth.
Ninetieth.
Hundredth.
Hundred and first.
Hundred and eleventh.
Two hundredth..

 

1 These numbers are also written in one word, as décimotercio, déci-
mocuarto, etc.
118 LESSON 21.

Trecentésimo,
Cuadragentésimo,
Quingentésimo,
Seiscentésimo,
Septengentésimo,
Octogentésimo,
Nonagentésimo,
Milésimo,

Dos milésimo,
Diez milésimo,
Millonésimo,

Niimeros fraccionarios.

La mitad, The half. Un décimo, One tenth.
Un medio, One half. Un onzavo, One eleventh,
Uno y medio, t Un dozavo, One twelfth.
Una y media, Chae ae eet Un trezavo, One thirteenth.
Un tercio, One third. Dos catorzavos, Two fourteenths,
Dos tercios, Two thirds. Ocho quinzavos, Light fifteenths.
Un cuarto, One fourth. Un dieziseisavo, One siateenth.
Tres cuartos, Three fourths. Un diezisietavo, One seventeenth.
Un quinto, One fifth. ete. ete,
Un sexto, One sixth. Un veintavo, One twentieth.
Un séptimo, One seventh. Once treintavos, Eleven thirtieths.
Un octavo, or . Un centavo, or
Un ochavo } Caachi Un centésimo, One aAV ea
Un noveno, One ninth. Un milesimo, One thousandth.
Collective Numbers.
Un par, A pair. Una quincena, Fifteen.
Una docena, A dozen. Una sesentena, Sixty.
Multiplicative Numbers.

Simple, Single. Séxtuplo, Siafold,
Doble, Double. Séptuplo, Sevenfold.
Triple, Treble. etuplo, Eightfold.
Cuadruplo or cuadruple, Quadruple. Décuplo, Tenfold.
Quintuplo or quintuple, Fivefold. Céntuplo, A hundredfold.

Una vez, once.
Dos veces, twice.
Tres veces, three times,

Three hundredth.
Four hundredth.
Five hundredth.
Six hundredth.
Seven hundredth.
Eight hundredth.
Nine hundredth.
Thousandth.
Two thousandth.
Ten thousandth.
Millionth.

Fractional numbers.

Esta vez, this time.
Aquella vez, that time.
Todas las veces, every time,
ORDINAL NUMBERS.

Varias veces, several times.
Algunas veces, sometimes.

La primera vez, the first time.
La Ultima vez, the last time.

Meses del aio.

Enero, January.
Febrero, February.
Marzo, March.
Abril, April.
Mayo, May.
Junio, June.

Las estaciones.

La primavera, the spring.
El verano or el estio, the summer.

Ejemplos.

iA cuantos estamos ?

j A cémo estamos (hoy) ?

4 Qué dia del mes tenemos ?

Hoy es el primero.

Maiana es el cinco.

Estamos 4 dos de Febrero.

Nact el quince de Mayo.

E] vapor sale el diez de este mes.

i Qué tomo tiene V. ?
Tengo el primer tomo.
Enrique es el quinto en la clase.

Vocabulario.

El almuerzo, the breakfast.
El capitulo, the chapter.

El cuaderno, the copybook.

El emperador, the emperor.
El huevo, the egg.

El ingenio, the genius.

El jam6n, the ham.

£l pavo, the turkey.

4l periédico, the newspaper.

El vapor, the steamer.
La onza, the ounce.
La parte, the part.
Asi, therefore.

Cada, each.

Comer, fo eat.

Corto, short.

Cuando, when,

Dar, to give.

119

Cada vez, each time.
Muchas veces, many times,
Otra vez, another time.

La préxima vez, neat time.

Months of the year.

Julio, July.
Agosto, August.
Setiembre, September.
Octubre, October.
Noviembre, November.
Diciembre, December.

The seasons.

El otoiio, the autumn, the fall.
El invierno, the winter.

Examples.

What day of the month is it ?

To-day is the first.

To-morrow is the fifth.

It is the second of February.

I was born on the fifteenth of May.

The steamer leaves on the tenth of
this month.

Which volume have you?

I have the first volume.

Henry is the fifth in the class,

Vocabulary.

Después de, after.
Leer, to read.
Pedro, Peter.
Pertenece, belongs,
Raro, rare.
Busia, Russia.
Sale, Zeaves.
Siempre, always.
Viene, comes.
120 LESSON 21.

Exercise 41.

1. Febrero es el segundo mes del afio, 2. Enrique y Eduardo eon
los dos primeros discipulos de la clase. 3. ; Cuando ha escrito V. 4
su padre? 4. He escrito la primera vez el tres de enero de mil ocho-
cientos sesenta y cinco, y la segunda vez en el mes de mayo del mismo
afio, 5. ; Ha dado V. libros 4 los muchachos de la primera clase?
6. He dado libros y cuadernos 4 los de la segunda clase. 7. El mes
de julio tiene tantos dias como el mes de agosto. 8. 4 Cuando ha
recibido V. sus cartas? 9. He recibido una el dos de abril, y Ja otra
el cinco de setiembre. 10. Hemos tenido mucha lluvia el treinta de
octubre. 11. 4Qué pan han comprado VV.? 12. Hemos comprado
cinco libras y media de pan francés. 13. Cada soldado ha recibido
media libra de carne. 14, Estaremos (we shall be) en nuestra casa
nueva el primero de mayo préximo. 15. El muchachito ha dado la
mitad de su almuerzo al pobre. 16. He comprado una docena de
pollos, y mi hermano ha comprado media docena de pavos. 17. ;A
cudntos estamos? 18. Estamos 4 once 6 doce. 19. Carlos Quinto
fué (was) un gran emperador. 20. ; Cuantas veces ha sido V. el pri-
mero en su clase? 21. He sido dos veces el primero ; tres veces, el
segundo; y cuarto veces, el tercero. 22. ; No ha sido V. nunca el
ultimo? 23. No, sefior, mi primo es siempre el ultimo. 24. ; Qué
mes viene después del mes de abril? 25. El mes de mayo, por
supuesto. 26. 3 Hs frio el invierno en este pafs? 27. El invierno es
frio, pero corto.

Exercise 42.

1. Have you read the newspaper of the first of December? 2 No,
but I read that of the thirtieth of November. 3. My brother will be
(estaré) here in July or (in) August. 4. What day of the month is
it? 5. It is the thirteenth. 6. One half and one third are (hacen)
five sixths. 7. This poor woman is sick for the third time this
month. 8. The Seventh Regiment is a fine regiment. 9. How many
chapters have you read? 10. I have read the first two (two first).
11. December is the last month of the year. 12. That child is in his
sixth year. 13. Have you been sick here? 14. I have been very
sick the first month, but I am very well now. 15. A half ounce is
the thirty-second part of a pound ; therefore, eight ounces are the
half, and four ounces the fourth part of a pound. 16. One third of
ORDINAL NUMBERS. 121

the money belongs to the father; one sixth, to the children ; and one
half, to the mother. 17. I have bought a dozen hams and sixty eggs.
18, Peter the First, emperor of Russia, had (tenta) a rare genius.
19. When does the steamer leave? 20. It leaves on the twenty-third
of this month. 21. How many times have you been in Paris? 22. I
have been once in Paris, and twice in London. 23. Has your father
bought another horse? 24. He bought three horses. 25. When are
you going to the country? 26. I goin the month of June. 27. Give
me the half of your bread. 28. I cannot, I have eaten all the bread.
29. Where is your house? 30. My house is the seventh house after
the church.

Gramatica. Grammar.

1, Ordinal numbers are considered as adjectives, and agree
in gender and number with the noun to which they refer:

Este muchacho es el primero, This boy is the first.
Estas muchachas son las primeras, These girls are the first.
La quinta avenida, The fifth avenue.

2, Primero, first, tercero, third, and postrero, last, drop the
0 in the singular when they precede a masculine noun, or its
adjective :
El primer hombre, The first man.
El postrer discipulo, The last scholar,
El tercer buen emperador, The third good emperor.

3. Primo is used instead of primero, after another ordinal
number:
Vigésimo primo, Twenty-first.
4, Ordinal numbers are used in Spanish as in English after
the names of sovereigns, but without the article:

Fernando segundo, Ferdinand the Second,
Felipe cuarto, Philip the Fourth.

OBSERVATION. — The Spaniards generally use, as being shorter, the car-
dinal numbers after the names of sovereigns when their order of succession

exceeds ten. Thus, they prefer to say :

Luis Catorce, Louis the Fourteenth. Carlos Doce, Charles the Twelfth,
122 LESSON 22.

5. After the number eleven the cardinal or ordinal numbers
may be used with equal propriety to indicate the divisions of a
book or other works:

Capitulo quince or décimo quinto, Fifteenth chapter.
Pagina veinte or vigésima, Twentieth page.

6. In Spanish the cardinal numbers are used by abbreviation
before the names of months. Primero, first, forms, however, an
exception, and must be used instead of uno:

El primero de enero, The first of January.
El cinco 6 seis de mayo, The fifth or sixth of May.

7. Mitad is synonymous with medio, half; but medio is an
adjective, while mitad is a noun.

Medio and the other fractions take the feminine form when
speaking of libra, pound, vara, yard, etc., even if these nouns
are not expressed :

Media libra de azticar, A half pound of sugar.
Una cuarta de arroz, A quarter pound of rice.
Media vara de patio, Half a yard of cloth.

Tres cuartas de muselina, Three fourths of a yard of muslin.

8. While the names of months regularly begin with small
letters, there is much variation in this usage.

Leccion XXII. Lesson XXII.
LO, LE, LA, LO8, LAS, AS PRONOUNS IN SIMPLE TENSES.
Yo lo (or la) tengo, LT have it.

Tu lo (or la) tienes, thou hast it.

El lo (or la) tiene, he has tt.

Ella lo (or la) tiene, she has it.

Nosotros lo (or la) tenemos, we have it.
Vosotros lo (or la) tenéis, you have it.

Ellos lo (or la) tienen, they (masc.) have it.

Ellas lo (or la) tienen, they (fem.) have tt.
PRONOUNS IN SIMPLE TENSES, 1235

Yo no lo (or la) tengo,

Tu no lo (or la) tienes,

El no lo (or la) tiene,

Ella no lo (or la) tiene,
Nosotros no lo (or la) tenemos,
Vosotros no lo (or la) tenéis,
Ellos no lo (or la) tienen,
Ellas no lo (or la) tienen,

i Lo (or la) tengo yo?
etc.

i No lo (or la) tengo yo?
ete.

Yo los (or las) tengo,

Ti los (or las) tienes,

£1 los (or las) tiene,

Ella los (or las) tiene,
Nosotros los (or las) tenemos,
Vosotros los (or las) tenéis,
Ellos los (or las) tienen,
Ellas los (or las) tienen,

Yo no los (or las) tengo,

Tu no los (or las) tienes,

El no los (or las) tiene,

Ella no los (or las) tiene,
Nosotros no los (or las) tenemos,
Vosotros no los (or las) tenéis,
Ellos no los (or las) tienen,
Ellas no los (or las) tienen,

i Los (or las) tengo yo?
ete.

i No los (or las) tengo yo?
etc.

I hawe it not.

thou hast it not

he has tt not.

she has it not.

we have it not.

you have it not,

they (masc.) have tt not.
they (fem.) have it not.

have I tt?
ele.

have I it not?
ete.

I have them.

thou hast them.

he has them.

she has them.

we have them.

you have them.

they (masc.) have them.
they (fem.) have them.

I have them not.

thou hast them not,

he has them not.

she has them not.

we have them not.

you have them not.

they (masc.) have them not.
they (fem.) have them not,

have I them?
ele,

hawe I them not ¢
ete.

Lo, le, la, 10s, las, as Pronouns in Compound Tenses,

Yo lo (or la) he tenido,
etc.

ZT hawe had it.
ote.
124

i Lo (or la) he tenido yo ?
etc.

Yo no lo (or la) he tenido,
etc.

4. No lo (or la) he tenido yo?
etc.

Yo los (or las) he tenido,
ete.

Yo no los (or las) he tenido,
ete,

i Los (or las) he tenido yo?
etc.

i No los (or las) he tenido yo?
ete.

LESSON 22.

have I had it?
etc.

LT have not had tt.
etc.

have I not had it?
ete.

LT have had them.
ete.

I have not had them.
etc.

have I had them?
ete.

have I not had them?
ete.

Lo, le, la, los, las, joined with the Infinitive and the Gerund,

Tenerlo, tenerla,
Tenerlos, tenerlas,
Teniéndolo, teniéndola,
Teniéndolos, teniéndolas,

to have it.
to have them.
having tt.
having them.

Lo, le, la, los, las, placed after the Verb.

Téngolo, téngola,
Téngolos, téngolas,

Ejemplos.

{ Quién tiene mi libro ?

Yo lo tengo.

i Ha visto V. mi lapiz ?

Lo he visto.

i Tiene V. mis plumas ?

Las tengo.

i Ha tenido V. mis plumas ?
Las he tenido.

i Vende V. su casa ?

La vendo.

i Quién ha tomado mis papeles ?

LT have it.
LT have them.

Examples,

Who has my book ?

I have it.

Have you seen my pencil ?
I have seen it.

Have you my pens?

I have them.

Have you had my pens ?

I have had them.

Do you sell your house ?

I sell it.

Who has taken my papers?
PRONOUNS IN SIMPLE TENSES. 125

Nadie los ha tomado.

i Lo tiene su amigo de V.?
El no lo tiene.

i Los tienen sus amigos ?
Ellos no los tienen.

4 Lo tiene la setiora ?

Ella no lo tiene,

i Los tienen las seftoritas ?
Ellas no los tienen.

i Quién los tiene ?

Nadie los tiene.

j A quién lo da V.?

Lo doy 4 mi amigo.

j Lo sabe V. ?

Lo sé.

Tomelo V.

No lo tome V.

Nobody has taken them.
Has your friend it?

He has it not.

Have your friends them ?
They have them not.

Has the lady it?

She has it not.

Have the young ladies them ?
They have them not.
Who has them ?

Nobody has them.

To whom do you give it ?
I give it to my friend,

Do you know it ?

I know it.

Take it.

Do not take it ?

Lo, Declinable and Undeclinable.

j Esta V. mala, sefiora ?
Lo estoy.

j Es V. la enferma?

La soy.

j Estan VV. satisfechos ?
Lo estamos.

2 Son VV. los hijos del Sefior Pable ?

Los somos.
j Son VV. las hijas de Maria?
Las somos,

Vocabulario.

El armario, the closet.

El botén, the button.

El zapato, the shoe.

El zapatero, the shoemaker.
La bodega, the cellar.

La cama, the bed.

La cocina, the kitchen.

La gallina, the fowl, the chicken.
La lavandera, the washerwoman.

La maiiana, the morning.
La sdébana, the sheet.
Aun, even.

Are you sick, madam ?

I am (so).

Are you the patient ( fem.) ?

I am (she).

Are you pleased ?

We are (so).

Are you the sons of Mr. Paul?
We are (they).

Are you the daughters of Mary!
We are (they).

Vocabulary.

Ausente, absent.

Bien, well.

Donde, where.
Demasiado, too, too much.
Necesitar, to need.
No...m4s, no...more.
Tampoco, not either, neither.
Tarde, late.

Traer, to bring.

1 Ve V.? do you see?

Veo, J see.

iVende V. 1? do you sell?
126 LESSON 22.

Exercise 43.

1. 4 Carlos, tiene V. mis botones de oro? 2. Yo no los tengo; su
hermano de V. los tiene. 3. 4 Porqué los ha tomado él? 4. Yono
lo sé. 5. 4 Eduardo, sabe V. su leccién? 6. Yono lasé muy bien.
7. 4 Ha visto V. el caballo de mi tio? 8. 4 Qué caballo? 9. Su ca-
ballo blanco. 10. Lo he visto esta mafiana. 11. 4 Tiene su hermanc
todavia su casa? 12. No la tiene mds; la ha vendido, 13. 4 He
tenido V. milibro? 14. No lo he tenido; V.1lo ha tenido V. mismo
15. 4 Tiene su hermana de V- mis cuadernos? 16. Si, ella los tient
ensucuarto. 17. , Donde tienen VV. sus gallinas? 18. Las tenemos
en el patio. 19. 4 No las tienen VV. enel jardin? 20. No, no las
tenemos alli desde que tenemos flores y legumbres. 21. 4 Quién tiene
sus zapatosde V.? 22. El zapatero lostiene. 23. ; Tiene él tambien
los mfos? 24. El no los tiene. 25. ; Quién los tiene? 26. Yo no sé
quién los tiene. 27. Nadie los tiene, estan en el cuartito. 28. ; Tiene
V.mis plumas? 29. Las he tenido, pero no las tengoahora. 30. ; Las
tiene su hermano? 31. No las tiene tampoco. 32. 4 Ha visto V. &
Carlos? 33. Le he visto en el jardin. 34. 4 Ha trafdo la lavandera
la ropa? 35. Todavia no. 36. ; Porqué no la ha trafdo? 37. Por-
que la ha recibido demasiado tarde. 38. ; Hsté V. malo? 39. Lo
estoy siempre. 40. j Hstén VV. malos? 41. Lo estamos,

Exercise 44,

1. Has the cook the vegetables? 2. She has them. 3. Has she
(got) them in the kitchen? 4. No, sir, she has them in the closet.
5. Where have you your wine? 6. We haveit in thecellar. 7. The
sheets are on the bed. 8. Yes, madam, I know it. 9. Have you
my knife? 10. I have it not. 11. Has your brother it? 12. Yes,
sir, he has it. 13. Do you sell your house? 14. I do not sell it.
15. Where is the little boy? 16. He isin the garden. 17. Do you
see my hat? 18. I don’t see it. 19. Are yousick? 20. Iam (so).
21. Have you had my book? 22. I have had it this morning, but I
do ngt have it now. 23. Have you found your copybook? 24, I
have found it in your room. 25. Do you wish it? 26. I don’t wish
it. 27. Where have you bought this sugar? 28. I have bought it at
(en) your store. 29. Have you seen my father? 30. I have seen
him this morning. 31. Have you the money to-day? 32. No, sir,
I have it not. 33. Do you see those men? 34. Yes, sir, I see them.
PRONOUNS IN SIMPLE TENSES. 127

385. Is your sister abseut ? 36. She is not (so), she is in my mother’s
room. 37. Why have you taken my books? 38. I have not taken
them; I have not even seen them. 39. If you want my book, take
it, 40, I don’t want it. 41. Do you need this piece of paper?
42. Yes, I need it ; do not take it.

Gramatica. Grammar.

1. Lo, le, masc., la, fem., meaning ¢t, him, her, or so, and los,
masc., las, fem., meaning them, they, are generally placed before
the verb, except in the ¢mperative affirmative, the infinitive, and
the gerund.

In these three cases the pronouns are placed after the verb
and joined to it so as to form one word:

Yo lo tengo, I have tt.

El lo dice, He says so.

Los compramos, We buy them.

4 Quién los quiere ? Vho wants them.

Yo no los quiero, L don’t wish them.

Yo le vendo mi caballo, I sell him (or her) my horse.
Ella lo sahe, She knows it.

i Esta él malo? Is he sick ?

Lo esta, He is.

Témelo V., Take tt.

No lo tome V., Do not take tt.

Véndala V., Sell it (fem.).

Traigalos V., Bring them.

Délas V., Give them (fem.).

No las dé V., Do not give them.
Sabiéndolo, lo haré, Knowing it, I will do it.
Vendiéndolo, tendré dinero, By selling it, I will have money.
No quiero verlo, I do not wish to see tt.

No puedo hacerlo, I cannot do it.

Sé decirlo, I know how to say it.

2. The same pronouns may also be placed after the verb,
forming one word with it. But, in this case, the personal pro-
noun must be left out.

This way of expressing one’s self, although rarely used in
ee

avi

128 LESSON 22,

conversation, is considered elegant in writing, and is, therefore,
often used by good writers:

Téngolo, LT have tt.

Didlo 4 su hermano, He gave it to his brother.
Vendidlas ayer, He sold them (fem.) yesterday.
Comprélos todos, He bought them all.

Vile ayer, I saw him yesterday.

Nors. — This order is more often found in connection with the imper-
fect and past definite tenses, especially when these come at the beginning
of the phrase.

8. These pronouns, when used with compound tenses, are
placed before the auxiliary:

Yo lo he tenido, T have had it.
Los hemos visto, We have seen them.
£1 lo ha comprado, He has bought it.

4, In sentences containing an infinitive besides the principal
verb, the same pronouns may be placed either after the infini-
tive or before the principal verb. The better usage is, however,
to put the pronoun with the verb with which it belongs:

Yo quiero comprarlo or
Yo lo quiero comprar,
I ha querido venderlo or
El lo ha querido vender,

i I wish to buy tt.
} He has wished to sell tt.

5. Lo remains invariable when it can be translated by so,
either expressed or understood :
i Es V. viuda ?— Lo soy, Are you a widow? I am (so).
i Estan VV. enfermos?—Loestamos, Are you sick?—We are (so).
i Podemos entrar ?— VV. lo pueden, May we come in ?— You may (do so).
But lo takes the gender and number of the noun which it repre-
sents, when the noun is used in a determinate sense, i.e. When
accompanied by the article, or a possessive or demonstrative
adjective :

j Es V. la viuda ?— La soy, Are you the widow? I am (she).
i Son VV. los hijos de Manuel ? — Are you the sons of Manuel ? —We
Los somos, are (they).

6. Observations on lo, le, and la.

Opinions are divided about the rendering of the pronoun it, when refer-
ring to a magculine moun. and used as direct object.
RELATIVE AND INTERROGATIVE PRONOUNS. 129

Some grammarians do not admit that lo should be used when referring
to a noun, and are in favor of le. According to them we should say :

{ Tiene V. el libro ?— Si, yo le tengo, Have you the book ?— Yes, I have it.
Lo should be used only when referring to the complement of a verb, as:
j Sabe V. que su hermano esté aqui ? Do you know that your brother is
— Si, yo lo sé, here? — Yes, I know it.
This opinion is opposed by others, who consider le as the dative case,
either masculine or feminine, and, therefore, use lo for ¢¢ or him.
Yo lo veo, T see it
Yo le vendo mi caballo, I sell him (or her) my horse.

We have adopted the last rule, which appears to us to have most fol-
lowers, but would add, that in presence of conflicting opinions, we consider
that either le or lo may be used with equal propriety. A statement often
made is: that le is used for persons and lo for things.

According to the rule laid down by us, los, las must be used in the
accusative case for them ; and les in the dative case for to them. We find,
however, la and las used in the dative feminine instead of Ze and des by
classic authors, but the Academia Espafiola does not approve of this

 

Leccion XXIII. Lesson XXIII.

RELATIVE AND INTERROGATIVE PRONOUNS.
Relative.
Que, who, whom, which, that.
Quien, sing., quienes, pl., who, whom, whoever, whomsoever,
he who.
El cual or cual, who, which, that which, which ones.
Cuyo, m.s., cuya, f.s., cuyos, m. pl, cuyas, f. pl., whose, of

which.
Cual declined.
Singular. Plural.
Masculine. Feminine. Masculine. Feminine.
El cual, la cual, los cuales, las cuales, who, whom,

which, which one, which ones.

Del cual, delacual, de los cuales, de las cuales, of whom,
from whom, whose, of which one, of which ones.

Aicual, 4lacual, 4loscuales, 4 las cuales, to whom,

to which, to which one, to which ones.
9
130

LESSON 23.

Interrogative.

Quién? Quiénes? who?
Qué? what? which?

Ejemplos.

El caballero que vive aqui, es Francés.

El hombre 4 quien hablo es pobre.

i De quién habla V. ?

El libro que él tiene, es mio.

4 Qué quiere V. ?

i Qué bonito es !

Pedro es el que lo ha dicho.

He encontrado 4 Pedro, el cual me
dié una carta.

Este es el hombre al cual V. debe
dinero.

Yo sé cual es la causa de esto.

4 Cual de los dos habla mejor ?

El hombre, cuyo hijo esta aqui.

La casa, cuyas ventanas vemos.

; A cual de mis amigos ha dado V.
el libro ?

i De quién (or cttyo) es este perro ?

i De quién (or ctyas) son estas tijeras ?

i Quién es esa mujer ?

4 Quiénes son aquellos hombres ?

Vocabulario.

El padrino, the godfather. | Debe, owes.
El puente, the bridge.
La fruta, the fruit.

La prima, the cousin (f.).

Dicho, said.

Deseamos, we wish.

Dormir, 8. to sleep.

Cudl? Cudles? which ? which one?
Ciiyo? Criya? Ciiyos? Ciiyas? whose?

Examples.

The gentleman who lives here is a
Frenchman.

The man to whom I speak is poor.

Of whom do you speak ?

The book which he has is mine.

What do you wish?

How pretty it is!

Peter is the one who said it.

I met Peter, who gave me a letter.

This is the man to whom you owe
money.

I know what is the cause of this.

Which of the two speaks better ?

The man whose son is here.

The house of which we see the
windows.

To which of my friends have you
given the book ?

Whose dog is this ?

Whose scissors are these ?

Who is that woman ?

Who are these men ?

Vocabulary.
Muri6, died (preter. ).
Necesito, 7 need.
Pagar, 1. to pay.
Parecen, seem.

La tia, the aunt. Enseiia, teaches. Probablemente, probably.
La vida, the life. Gana, carns. Puesto, put.

Aqui, here. Hablan, they speak. Rie, laughs.

Bien, good. Hecho, done. Sabe, knows.

Canta, sings. Inteligente, intelligent.| Tan, so.

Contento, pleased. Loco, insane. Trabaja, works.
Cortado, cut. Llora, weeps. Viajar, 1. to travel.
Dado, given. Muerto, died (past part).| Visto, seen.
RELATIVE AND INTERROGATIVE PRONOUNS. 131

Exercise 45.

1. Juan es un hombre que sabe mucho. 2. Es una cosa de que
hablan mucho. 3. Mi hermano, mi tia y mis primas que han venido
ayer, estdn en mi casa. 4. He visto al muchacho que V. ensefia.
5. Eles quien ha dicho esto. 6. He estado en el campo, lo que me
ha hecho mucho bien. 7. Me ha pagado, con lo que estoy contento.
8. He visto 4 Pedro, el cual me ha dicho muchas cosas. 9. Estos
hombres parecen locos: cual (one) llora, cual canta y cual rie.
10. Estas frutas son tales cuales (such as) las deseamos. 11. El es
4 quien V. debe la vida. 12. El hombre, cuya mujer ha muerto, esté
muy triste. 13. El que no trabaja, no ganadinero. 14, He estado en
la casa en la cual he visto 4 su padre de V. 15. Veo la casa cuyas
ventanas son tan grandes. 16. El comerciante cuya familia esta aqui,
esmuy rico. 17. ; A cudl de mis amigos ha dado V. el libro? 18. No
lo he dada 4 ninguno. 19. La casa que tiene mi padre es muy
grande. 20. Aqui esté el cuarto en el cual muriéd. 21. 4 Con qué ha
hecho V. esto? 22. Con un ldpiz. 23. 4 Tiene V. lo que V. necesita ?
24. Si, sefior, tengo todo lo que necesito. 25. La casa que V. tiene,
es mas pequefia que la que yo tengo.

Exercise 46.

1. The gentleman to whom you have written has not received your
letter. 2. Is it you who have written this letter? 3. It is I
4, Here is the knife with which I have cut the bread. 5. I have
found an umbrella, it is probably the one vou have lost. 6. Here is
the book of which you have spoken. 7. The bridge on which we are
is the largest in the city. 8. The trunk in which T have put my
clothes is not large enough (enough large) for me. 9. How intelligent
that child is (is that child)! 10, The house which you have is not
as large as the house which your brother has. 11. The gentleman
whose sister you have seen is a friend of my father. 12. Have you
all that you want? 13. No, I want many things yet. 14. The month
in which we are is the coldest of the year. 15. The boy for (para)
whom I have bought this book is sick. 16. Have you seen the trunk
with which I have been traveling ? 17. No, where is it? 18. It is
in the room in which I slept. 19. The gentleman of whom I received
this book is my godfather. 20. Whose apples are these? 21. They
are mine. 22. Which horse have you bought? 23. I bought the one
you saw yesterday. 24. Here are all the books which we have.
132 LESSON 23.

25. Your brother is in the room. 26. In which one? 27. In the
large one. 28. Of what are you speaking? 29. I am speaking of
many things. 30. We are speaking of my aunt.

Gramatica. Grammar.

1, Que, as a subject or nominative, is used for persons as
well as for things, and may refer to several nouns of different
number and gender:

Es un hombre que sabe mucho, He is a man who knows much.
Es una cosa de que hablan mucho, It is a thing of which they speak a
great deal.
Su hermano, sus tias y sus hermanas His brother, his aunts, and his
que han venido ayer, se van hoy, sisters, who came yesterday, are

going away to-day.
2, Que, relating to an accusative, does not require the prepo-
sition d, even when referring to a person:
He visto al nifio que V. ensefia (not T have seen the child that you

4 que V. ensefia), teach.

3. The relative que is accompanied by the article el, la, los,
las, lo, according to gender and number.
_a, To avoid ambiguity when the relative is separated from
the noun:

Pidié la libertad de su hijo, la que He begged for the liberty of his son,
consiguid, and obtained it (lit. which he ob-
tained).

6. When the relative que serves to complete the action of
the verb:

Pedro es el que lo ha dicho, Peter is the one who said so.

e. When the relative que refers to a whole sentence:
He estado en el campo, loquemeha J have been in the country, which
hecho mucho bien, has done me much good.
d. When the relative is accompanied by a preposition and
refers to a thing:

Me ha pagado, con lo que estoy He has paid me, and I am pleased with
contento, Ut (lit. with which Iam pleased).
RELATIVE AND INTERROGATIVE PRONOUNS. 133

4, Que is never suppressed like its corresponding English
pronoun, but must be repeated before every verb that fol-
lows it:

La casa que tenemos, The house (which) we have.

El libro que él tiene, Lhe book (which) he has.

El caballo que yo vendi y que volvi The horse which I have sold and
4 comprar, bought again.

OxsERVaTION. — In a relative clause (after que) there is usually inver-
sion of the subject:

La cancién que cantaba Maria, The song which Mary sang.
La herida que tenia el soldado, Lhe wound which the soldier had.

§. Quien, quienes, for both genders, relate only to persons:
El es 4 quien debo la vida, It is to him I owe my life.
OBSERVATION. — When the relative pronoun follows immediately the

noun to which it relates, it is preferable to use que, even when referring to
persons. It would be better, therefore, to say :

Este es el hombre gue me did el libro,
instead of
Quien me did el libro, This is the man who gave me the book,
But we must say:

Este es el hombre 4 quien V. debe This is the man to whom you owe
la vida, your life,

since quien must be used with a preposition in speaking of people. |

6. The relatives el cual, la cual, lo cual, los cuales, las
cuales, have but one termination for the different genders, and
relate as well to persons as to things. In the accusative they
take the preposition 4 when they relate to persons :

He encontrado 4 Pedro con su mujer, I met Peter with his wife, and he
el cual me ha contado muchas co- (who) told me many things.
sas.

Este es el hombre al cual V. debe This is the man to whom you must
entregar la carta, deliver the letter.
134 LESSON 23.

Y. The article is omitted:

a, When the relative is separated from the noun by a verb
and completes the action of another verb:
La prisién le habia abierto los ojos, The prison had opened his eyes, and

y conocio cual era Ja verdadera he knew which was the real cause
causa de su desgracia. — PADRE of his misfortunes.
DE Ista.

é. When the pronoun may be used as partitive:

Estos hombres parecen locos: cual These men appear to be insame : one

llora, cual canta, y cual rie, weeps, another sings and still an-
other laughs.
Es dificil decir cual de los dos canta It is difficult to say which of the two
mejor. sings better.

e. Cual is also used instead of the comparative, with tal,
both words agreeing in number with the noun:

Estas frutas son éales las deseamos, or i These frutts are just os we wish
Estas frutas son cuales las deseamos, them. :

8, Cuyo takes the gender and number of the noun which it
precedes :

La amiga cuyo hermano esta enfermo, The friend whose brother is sick,

El hombre cuya mujer ha muerto, The man whose wife has died.

El principe cuyos caballos hemos The prince whose horses we have
visto, seen.

Cicerén, de cuyo grande orador he Cicero, the great orator, whose
lefdo las obras, works I have read.

9. Que and cual may in many cases be used with equal pro-
priety when accompanied by prepositions:
He estado en la casa en que (or en LT have been in the house in which

la cual) murid, (where) he died.
Este es el cuchillo con que (or con This is the knife with which he
el cual) maté la gallina, killed the hen.

10. Donde is used also in Spanish, when the relative which
may be replaced in English by the adverb where :

He estado en el pueblo en donde era Ihawe been in the village where the
la feria, Jair was.
RELATIVE AND INTERROGATIVE PRONOUNS. 135

11, The relative pronouns que, cual, quien, cuyo are also
used as interrogative pronouns (qué, cual, quién, ciiyo, taking
then an accent), and mean:

 

Qué, which, what. Quién, who, whom.
Cual, which, which one. Cuyo, whose.
Examples.
iA cudl de mis amigos hadado V. To which of my friends have you
el libro? given the book ?
i Qué profesidn tiene V. ? What is your profession ?
4 Cual es su mérito ? What (which) is his merit ?
4 Cudles sun sus amigos ? Which are his friends ?
4 Qué hay en la mesa? What is there on the table?
i De quién habla V. ? Of whom do you speak ?
i Quién es aquél ? Who is that ?
i Quiénes son aquellos hombres ? Who are those men?
§ Quién es esa mujer ? Who is that woman?
A quién escribes esa carta ? To whom do you write that letter ?
OBSERVATION. — The expressions :
4 Cayo es este perro ? Whose dog is this?
j Cuyas son estas tijeras ? Whose are these scissors ?

although of frequent use, are hardly correct, and it is preferable to use de
quién, etc., as 4de quién es este perro? ; de quién son estas tijeras ? etc.

12. Qué is also used as an exclamation corresponding to the
English how:
i Qué bonito es eso ! How pretty that is!
1 Qué feliz es V. ! How happy you are!
13. Qué de may also be used for cudnto, cudnta, cudntos,
cudntas, how much! how many:

i Qué de cosas or cudntas cosas podria How many things I could say /
decir !
136

LESSON 24.

Leccién XXIV. Lesson XXIV.
VERBOS AUXILIARES, AUXILIARY VERBS.
Haber, fo have.

MODO INFINITIVO, INFINITIVE MOOD.

Haber, to have.
Haber habido, to have had.
Gerundio, gerund.
Habiendo, having.
Habiendo habido, having had.
Participio pasivo, past participle.
Habido, haa.

TIEMPOS SIMPLES, Simple Tenses.
MODO INDICATIVO, INDICATIVE MOOD.

Presente, present.

Yo he, I have.

Tu has, thou hast.

El ha, he has.

Ella ha, she has,

Nosotros hemos, we have.

Vosotros habéis, you have.

Ellos han, they (masc.) have.

Ellas han, they (fem.) have.
Imperfecto, imperfect.

Habia, Lhad (Iwas having, I used to have}

Habias, thou hadst.

Habia, he had or she had.

Habiamos, we had.

Habiais, you had.

Aabian, they had.

Preterito perfecto definido, preterit.

Aube, I had (did have).

Hubiste, thou hadst.

Hubo, he had.

Hubimos, we had.

Hubisteis, you had.

Hubieron, they had.
AUXILIARY VERBS. 137

Futuro, future.

Habré, I shall or will have.
Habras, thou shalt or wilt have.
Habra, he shall or will have.
Habremos, we shall or will have.
Habréis, you shall or will have.
Habran, they shall or will have.

Condicional, conditional.
Habria, I should (or would) have.
Habrias, thou shouldst have.
Habria, he should have.
Habriamos, we shouid have.
Habriais, you should have.
Habrian, they should have.

MODO SUBJUNTIVO,

SUBJUNCTIVE MOOD.

Presente, present.

Haya,
Hayas,
Haya,
Hayamos,
Hayiais,
Hayan,

I may have.

thou mayest have.
he may have.

we may have.
you may have.
they may have.

Imperfecto, imperfect.

Hubiera, hubiese ;

Hubieras, hubieses ;
Hubiera, hubiese ;
Hubiéramos, hubiésemos ;
Hubierais, hubieseis 5
Hubieran, hubiesen ;

I (might, could, would, or) should
have.

thou shouldst have.

he should have.

we should have.

you should have.

they should have.

Futuro, future.

(Cuando or Si) Hubiere, (when or if) Z shall or will have.

Hubieres,
Hubiere,
Hubiéremos,
Hubiereis,
Hubieren,

thow shalt or wilt have.
he shall or will have.
we shall or will have.
you shall or will have,
they shall or will have.
138

LESSON 24.

TrzmMros comPpurstos, Compound Tenses.

MODO INDICATIVO,

INDICATIVE MOOD.
Perfecto, perfect.

He habido, I have had.
Has habido, thou hast had,
Ha habido, he has had.
Hemos habido, we have had.
Habéis habido, you have had.
Han habido, they have had,
Pluscuamperfecto, pluperfect.
Habia habido, T had had.
Habias habido, thou hadst had.
Habia habido, he had had.
Habiamos habido we had had.
Habiais habido, you had had.
Habian habido, they had had.
Preterito anterior, past anterior.
Hube habido, Thad had.
Hubiste habido, thou hadst had
Hubo habido, he had had.
Hubimos habido, we had had.
Hubisteis habido, you had had.
Hubieron habido, they had had.
Futuro anterior, future anterior.
Habré habido, I shall or will have had.
Habras habido, thou: shalt or wilt have had,
Habra habido, he shall or will have had.
Habremos habido, we shall or will have had.
Habréis habido, you shall or will have had.
Habran habido, they shall or will have had.
Condicional anterior, conditional anterior.
Habria habido, I should (or would) have hat
Habrias habido, thou shouldst have had.
Habria habido, he should have had.
Habriamos habido, we should have had.
Habriais habido, you should have had.
Habrian habido, they should have had.
AUXILIARY VERBS. 139

MODO SUBJUNTIVO,

SUBJUNCTIVE MOOD.

Perfecto, perfect.

Haya habido,
Hayas habido,
Haya habido,
Hayamos habido,
Hayais habido,
Hayan habido,

I may have had.

thou mayest have had.
he may have had.

we may have had.
you may have had.
they may have had.

Pluscuamperfecto, pluperfect.

Hubiera, or hubiese habido,
Hubieras, or hubieses habido,
Hubiera, or hubiese habido,
Hubiéramos, or hubiésemos habido,
Hubierais, or hubieseis habido,

Hubieran, or hubiesen habisdo,

I might, could, should or would
have had.

thou mightest, couldst, shouidst or
wouldst have had.

he might, could, should or would
have had. ;

we might, could, should or would
have had.

you might, could, should or would
have had.

they might, could, should or would
have had.

Futuro, future.

(Si) Hubiere habido,
Hubieres habido,
Hubiere habido,
Hubiéremos habido,
Hubiereis habido,
Hubieren habido,

Nore. — The imperative of haber is extremely rare.

(if) I shall or will have had.

thou shalt or wilt have had.

he shall or will have had.

we shall or will have had.

you shall or will have had.

they shall or will have had,

The forms are

he, and habed.
Tener, to have.
MODO INFINITIVO, INFINITIVE MOOD.
Tener, to have.
Haber tenido, to have had.
Gerundio, gerund.
Teniendo, hawng.
Habiendo tenido, having had.
140

Tengo,
Tienes,

Tiene,

LESSON 24.

Participio pasivo, past participle.

Tenido,

had.

TIEMPOS SIMPLES, Simple Tenses.

MODO INDICATIVO,
Presente, present.

I have.

he has.

Tenia,
Tenias,
Tenia,
Teniamos,
Teniais,
Tenian,

thou hast.

INDICATIVE MOOD.

Tenemos, we have.
Tenéis, you have.
Tienen, they have.

Imperfecto, imperfect.

Thad (I was having, I used to have).
thow hadst.

he had.

we had.

you had.

they had.

Preterito perfecto definido, preterite,

Ture,
Tuviste,
Tuvo,
Tuvimos,
Tuvisteis,
Tuvieron,

Tendré,
Tendras,
Tendra,
Tendremos,
Tendréis,
Tendran,

LI had (did have),
thou hadst.

he had.

we had.

you had,

they had.

Futuro, future.

I shall or will have.
thou shalt or wilt have,
he shall or will have.
we shall or will have,
you shall or will have.
they shall or will have.

Condicional, conditional.

Tendria,
Tendrias,
Tendria,
Tendriamos,
Tendriais,
Tendrian,

Ten tu,
Tened..

I should (or would) have.
thou shouldst have.

he should have.

we should have.

you should have,

they should have,

Imperativo, imperative.

have (have thou).
have (have you).
AUXILIARY VERBS. 141

MODO SUBJUNTIVO,

SUBJUNCTIVE MOOD.

Presente, present.

Tenga,
Tengas,
Tenga,
Tengamos,
Tengais,
Tengan,

I may have.

thou mayest have.
he may have.

we may have.
you may have.
they may have.

Imperfecto, imperfect.

Tuviera, tuviese ;
Tuvieras, tuvieses ;

I (might, could, would or) should have.
thou shouldst have.

Tuviera, tuviese ; he should have.

Tuviéramos, tuviésemos ; we should have.

Tuvierais, tuvieseis ; you should have.

Tuvieran, tuviesen ; they should have.

Futuro, future.
(Cuando or Si) Tuviere, (when or if) I shall or will have.

Tuvieres, thou shalt or wilt have.
Tuviere, he shall or will have.
Tuviéremos, we shall or will have.
Tuviereis, you shall or will have.
Tuvieren, they shall or will have.

TIEMPOS COMPUESTOS, Compound Tenses.

MODO INDICATIVO,

INDICATIVE MOOD.

Perfecto, perfect.

He tenido, LT have had,
etc. ele.
Pluscuamperfecto, pluperfect.
Habia tenido, I had had,
etc. etc.

Preterito anterior, past anterior.

Hube tenido,
etc.

I had had,
ele.

Futuro anterior, future anterior.

Habré tenido,
ete.

L shall or will have had,
ete.
142 LESSON 24.

MODO SUBJUNTIVO, SUBJUNCTIVE MOOD.
Perfecto, perfect.
Haya tenido, I may have had,
etc. etc.
Pluscuamperfecto, pluperfect.
Hubiera, or hubiese tenido, I might, could, should or would have had,

etc. ete.
Futuro, future.
(Si) Hubiere tenido, (if) I shall or will have had,
etc. ete.
Vocabulario. Vocabulary.
El buey, the ox. La vez, the time. Hacer, 2. to make, to do.
El valor, the courage. Acabar, 1. fo finish. Heredar, 1. to inherit,
La esperanza, the hope. | Almorzar, 1.to breakfast.| Llegar, 1. to arrive.
La fortuna, the fortune. | Bastante, enough. Mismo, same.
La hacienda, the estate. Dejar, 1. to leave. Oir, 3. to hear.
La noche, the night. Escrito, written. Tener, 2. to hold,tohave.
La paciencia, the patience.| Eso, that. Todavia, yet.
La suerte, the sate. Guardar, 1. to keep. | Visto, seen.

Exercise 47.

1, Tengo un hermano en Paris. 2. ; Han recibido VV. cartas hoy ?
3. Sf, sefior, hemos recibido una carta de nuestro padre. 4. ; Ha visto
V. al Presidente? 5. Le he visto varias veces. 6. ; Cudndo tendré
V. dinero? 7. Tendré cien duros mafiana. 8. j Qué tenia su her-
mano en su cuarto? 9. No tenia nada. 10. Tenga V. paciencia,
amigo mio. 11. ; Quién tendré el valor de (to) hacer es0? 12. Todos
tendremos ese valor. 18. ;Tenian los muchachos sus libros esta
mafiana? 14. No los tenian. 15. ; Cudndo habra acabado V.?
16. Habré acabadoen una hora, 17. ;Tenian VV. amigos en aquella
ciudad + 18. Teniamos varios. 19. ; Quién ha heredado de la for-
tuna del general? 20. El general no ha dejado ninguna. 21. ; Ten-
drén VV. libros franceses el mes que viene (neat month)? 22. Ya
tenemos muchos libros franceses é ingleses. 23. i Porqué no habia
escrito V. 4 su padre? 24. Porque yo habia escrito 4 mi hermano.
25. ; Habfa hablado V. 4 este hombre? 26. Yo le habia hablado dos
6 tres veces. 27. ; Ha almorzado todo el mundo? 28. El caballero
alemAn no ha almorzado todavia. 29. ; Con qué dinero ha comprado
V. esto? 30. Con ninguno, no lo he pagado todavia. 31. ; Tendria
IDIOMATIC USE OF TENER. 143

V. el valor de salir solo? 32. No, yo no tendriaese valor. 33. ; Tiene
V. las aves de la casa? 34. Las tendré esta tarde. 35. ; Ha visto
V. al sefior Palacio? 36. Le he visto en su almacén. 37. El padre
de Carlos ha perdido toda su fortuna. 38. Si V. no es prudente, V.
tendré la misma suerte. 39. ; Ha hallado V. algo? 40. He hallado
una Ilave de reloj. 41. Es mia.

Exercise 48.

1. Why have you not spoken to the gentleman? 2. I have not
seen him. 3. Shall you have finished your work this evening? 4. I
shall have finished it in two hours. 5. Had (¢mperf.) you many
horses when you were (estaba) in the country? 6. I had four, and
my brother had five. 7. Have patience, my friend, you will have
the money to-morrow. 8. Have you money enough for the voyage ?
9. I have not much, but I have enough. 10. Had you lost all
hope? 11. I had lost all my money; and, with my money, all hope.
12. The mother has given good advice to her daughter. 13. We had
bought many oxen for our estate. 14. How long have you been in
that country? 15. I have been there five years. 16. Have you
written all your letters? 17. No, sir, I have not had time. 18. Has
your brother written his? 19. He has not written them either.
20. Have the children gone to (@ la) school? 21. No, madam, they
are breakfasting. 22. Has your father sold his houses? 23. He has
sold the large one, and he has kept the small one. 24. Do you know
if the gentleman has gone out? 25. He had gone out when I was
upstairs. 26. What did you hold (tenia) in your hand? 27. I
held (tenia) the key of the garden. 28. Have you spoken to your
tather about (de) that? 29. Not yet, my father is not in (en Ja)
town. 30. I have heard that the vessel has arrived.

Leccion XXV. Lesson XX¥.
IDIOMATIC USES OF TENER.
Tener calor, to be warm.
Tener frio, to be cold.
Tener hambre, to be hungry.
Tener sed, to be thirsty.

Tener suefio, to be sleepy.
144 LESSON

Tener vergiienza,

Tener miedo,

Tener gana,

Tener razon,

No tener razén, }

Estar errado, t

Hacer mal,

Tener algo,

No tener nada,

Tener diez afios,

Tener los ojos negros.
Tener diez pies de largo,
Tener diez pies de ancho,

Tener diez pies de profundo,

Tener cier pies de alto,
Tener las manos frias,
Tener algo que hacer,
Tener los ojos malos,
Tener el dedo malo,

Ejemplos.

j Tiene V. calor ?

No tengo calor, tengo frio.

3 Quién tiene hambre ?

Tenemos hambre y sed.

4 Tenia V. vergiienza ?

Si, sefior, yo tenia vergiienza,
Teniamos sueiio.

Tendrémos frio en el cuarto.

El clima de aquel pais es muy frio.

El cuarto esté frio.

4. No tiene V. vergiienza ?
Tengo vergiienza de hablar.

4 Quién tiene suefio ?

Todos tenemos suefio.

i De quién tiene V. miedo?
Tengo miedo de este hombre.
jTiene V. gana de salir ?

No tengo gana.

4 Quién tiene razdn ?

Yo tengo razén y V. esté errado,

25.

to be ashamed.
to be afraid.

to have a mind.
to be right.

to be wrong.

to have something the matter,
to have nothing the matter.
to be ten years old.

to have black eyes.

to be ten feet long.

to be ten feet wide.

to be ten feet deep.

to be a hundred feet high.
to have cold hands.

to have something to do.

to have sore eyes.

to have a sore finger.

Examples.

Are you warm ?

I am not warm, I am cold.

Who is hungry ?

We are hungry and thirsty.

Were you ashamed ? :

Yes, sir, I was ashamed.

We were sleepy.

We shall be cold in the room.

The climate of that country zs very
cold.

The room ¢s cold.

Are you not ashamed ?

I am ashamed to speak.

Who is sleepy ?

We are all sleepy.

Of whom are you afraid ?

T am afraid of this man.

Have you 2 mind to go out ?

I have no mind (to go out),

Who is right ?

I am right and you are wrong,
IDIOMATIC USE OF TENER.

iTengo yo razén de comprar esta
casa ?

V. hace mal de comprarla.

§ Qué tiene V., amigo mio ?

Nada tengo.

1 Qué tiene é1?

f) no tiene nada.

i Qué edad tiene V. ?

j Cuantos afios tiene V. ? t

Tengo veinte aiios.

4 Qué edad tenia él?

Tenia cincuenta afios.

Mi hermano tendra maiiana diez y
ocho aiios.

Esta sefiora tiene los ojos azules.

La mesa tiene seis pies de largo.

3 Tiene V. las manos frias ?

Tengo las manos y los pies frios.

i Qué tiene V. que hacer ?

Tengo que escribir dos cartas.

Vocabulario.

El bosque, the wood.
El comedor, the dining room.

El dolor de cabeza, the headache.

El gusto, the pleasure.
El ojo, the eye.

El pelo, the hair.

El pie, the foot.

La cerveza, the beer.

La conducta, the conduct.
La edad, the age.

La noche, the night.

Asi, so.

145
Am I right in buying that house ?

You are wrong in buying it.

What is the matter with you, my
friend ?

Nothing is the matter with me.

What is the matter with him ?

Nothing is the matter with him.

How old are you?

I am twenty.

How old was he?

He was fifty.

My brother will be eighteen to-
morrow.

This lady has blue eyes.

The table is six feet long.

Are your hands cold ?

My hands and feet are cold.

What have you to do?

I have two letters to write.

Vocabulary.

Azul, blue.

Bailar, 1. to dance.

Bailo, J dance.

Bajar, 1. to come down.
Buenas noches, good night.
Conmigo, with me.

Decir, 3. to tell, to say.
Llorar, 1. to cry, to weep.
Rubio, fair, blond.
Trabajar, 1. to work.
Venir, 3. to come.
Ya no, no longer.

‘

Exercise 49.

1. Tenfamos frfo en nuestro cuarto y hemos bajado aquf. 2. 4 Tiene
V. miedo del perro? 3. No, sefior, no tengo miedo de él (him).
4. ; Tiene hambre el muchacho? 5. No tiene hambre ; tiene suefio.
6, Siempre tiene hambre. 7. El tiempo esta frio hoy. 8. 4 De quién
146 LESSON 26.

tiene V. miedo? 9. No tengo miedo de nadie. 10. 5 Quién tiene
razon, su hermana 6 V.? 11. Esella que est4errada. 12. ; No tiene
V. vergiienza de bailar 4 (at) suedad? 13. Yo no bailo desde mucho
tiempo. 14, ; Tiene V. gana de ir al teatro esta noche? 15. Si,
si V. quiere venir conmigo. 16. Con mucho gusto, 17. ; Tiene V.
hambre todavia? 18. Yo no tengo hambre, pero tengo todavia sed ;
tiene V. vino en la casa? 19. No tengo vino, pero tengo cerveza.
20. Los muchachos estén en el bosque, no tienen ellos miedo?
21. Estén con los criados de su padre. 22. 4 Qué tienes, Julia?
23. Tengo dolor de cabeza. 24. Esta casa tiene sesenta pies de alto,
no es asi? 25. Tiene 4 lo menos ochenta pies. 26. ; Qué edad tiene
ese muchacho? 27. Tendré seis afios en un mes. 28. ; Tiene V. las
manos frias? 29. No tengo las manos frias, pero tengo los pies frios.
30. Emilio tiene los ojos negros y el pelo rubio. 31. ; Tiene V. algo
que hacer? 32. Tengo que acabar mis cartas. 33. 4 Porqué ha llo-
rado V.? 34. No he llorado, tengo los ojos malos. 35. Y yo también.

Exercise 50.

1. Who is wrong? 2. Nobody is wrong. 3. Have you a mind to
go to the ball? 4. Yes, I have a mind to go. 5. Have you time to
(de) write a letter for (para) my brother? 6. I have no time now,
but I shall have time this evening. 7. Is not your brother ashamed
of his conduct? 8. He is ashamed of nothing. 9. You have no
money, and you have not the courage to (de) work. 10. You are
wrong to say that, I have worked five days this week. 11. I havea
mind to write to my father. 12. I have already written to mine.
13. What is the matter with you to-day? 14. Nothing is the matter
with me. 15. What has your brother to do? 16. He has a great
deal (muchtsimo) to do. 17. How old is he now? 18. He is twenty-
five. 19, Is anything the matter with your sister? 20. She has a
headache. 21. Is Clara pretty? 22. She is very pretty; she has blue
eyes and black hair. 23. How old were you at (en) that time?
24. I was five years old. 25. Are your feet cold? 26. My feet are
always cold. 27. Is your dining room very large? 28. It is thirty
feet long and twenty feet wide. 29. What is the matter with that
child? 30. I don’t know what (Jo que) is the matter with him.
31. Of what were you afraid? 32. We were not afraid, but the ladies
were afraid. 33. Good night, I am going (me voy) home, I have
never been so (tanto) sleepy.
IDIOMATIC USE OF TENER. 147
Gramatica. Grammar.

1, The verb tener, ¢o have, is used in Spanish instead of the
verb to be, with the words calor, warm, warmth, heat, frio, cold,
hambre, hunger, sed, thirst, sueiio, sleep, vergiienza, shame,
miedo, fear, razon, right, etc., used substantively, so that in
order to express: I am warm, he is thirsty, we are ashamed,
etc., the Spaniards say: I have heat, he has thirst, we have
shame, etc. It follows, therefore, that the verb to‘be has to be
rendered in Spanish by the corresponding tenses of the verb
tener, to have:

Tengo hambre, I am hungry.

Tenia or tuve hambre, I was hungry.

Tendré hambre, I shall be hungry.
Tendria hambre, I would be hungry.

Que yo tenga hambre, That I may be hungry.
Que yo tuviese hambre, That I might be hungry.
He tenido hambre, etc., I hawe been hungry, ete.

OBSERVATION. — a. The verbs ser or estar, to be, are, however, used in
Spanish with the word frfo, cold, when the English verb is not used in the
sense of to feel, to experience. Thus, we should not say: el hielo tiene
frto, but el hielo es frio, ice ts cold ; nor el dia tiene frio, but el dia esté
frio, the day is cold.

Instead of calor, the Spaniards use in the same cases the adjectives
caliente, célido, etc. La sopa esté caliente (and not la sopa tiene calor),
the soup is warm.

b. The adjectives hambriento, hungry, famished, sediento, thirsty, dry,
vergonzoso ashamed, bashful, miedoso, timid, timorous, afraid, are used
as in English with the verb to be, estar or ser :

Estamos hambrientos, We are famished.
£1 es miedoso, He is afraid.

2, Tener vergiienza, tener miedo, tener razén, tener gana,
etc., require the preposition de to follow them when coming
before a verb:

Tengo gana de escribir, I have a mind to write.

Tenemos miedo de salir, We are afraid to go out.
V. tiene razén de hacer eso, You are right to do that.
148 LESSON 26.

OpsERVATION. — The Spaniards have no equivalent for to be wrong, and
are therefore obliged to use :

No tener razén, Not to be right.
Estar errado, To be mistaken.
Hacer mal, To do wrong.

3. The verb tener is used idiomatically in Spanish with the
words algo, something, anything, and nada, nothing, not any-
thing ; aud, when thus connected, it has often the meaning of
to be something the matter with, to ail:

3 Qué tiene V. ? What is the matter with you?
Tengo algo, Something ts the matter with me,
nes Is anything the matter with him?
atone chelge# j Does anything ail him ?

El no tiene nada, Nothing is the matter with him.

4. The verb tener is also used in Spanish to express the age;
and, in inquiring about the age of a person, they say :
i Qué edad tiene... ? What age has... ?
4 Cudntos aiios tiene...? How many years has...?
The word aiios, yeur's, must not be left out either in the ques-
tion or in the answer, unless expressed in the first part of the
sentence ;

4 Cudntos afios tiene V. ? How old are you?
Tengo veinte afios y mi hermano diez JI am twenty and my brother
y ocho, eighteen.

OBSERVATION. —Tener mds edad, ser de mds edad is used for older,
when comparing the age of persons who are not really old:

Este nifio tiene mas edad que aquél, This child is older than that one.

5. Tener algo malo means to have a pain, a sore, or ache
somewhere, and is used in Spanish with the definite article:
Tengo el ojo malo, I have a sore eye,
Tenemos los pies malos, We have sore feet.
#1 tiene la rodilla mala, He has a sore knee,
6. The definite article is also used before verbs expressing
moral or physical properties:

Tiene los ojos azules, He has blue eyes,
Tienen los pies grandes, They have large fest,
AUXILIARY VERBS, 149

OBSERVATION. — The same article is used in the singular, when speak-
ing of several persons, if the property spoken of is single in each person:
El tiene la nariz larga, He has a long nose.
Ellos tienen la nariz larga, They have long noses.

7. In speaking of the dimensions or size of objects, the
Spanish use the verb tener, to have:
Este arbol tiene cien pies de alto, This tree is a hundred feet high.
La calle tiene cincuenta pies de ancho, The street is fifty feet wide.

8. The verb tener is used before an infinitive with the con-
junction que when obligation or necessity is expressed :
Tengo que escribir cartas, I have letters to write,

Tenemos que salir, We have to go out.
Leccion XXVI. Lesson XXVI.
VERBOS AUXILIARES. AUXILIARY VERBS.
Ser, to be.

MODO INFINITIVO, INFINITIVE MOOD.
Ser, to be.
Haber sido, to have been.
Gerundio, gerund.
Siendo, being.
Habiendo sido, having been,

Participio pasivo, past participle.
Sido, been.
Tiempos SIMPLES, Simple Tenses.

Presente, present.

Soy, lam.

Eres, thou art.

Es, he (or she) és,
Somos, we are.

Sois, you are.

Son, they are.
£50

Era,
Eras,
Era,
Eramos,
Erais,
Eran,

Imperfecto, imperfect.

I was (I used to be).
thou wast.

he was.

we were.

you were.

they were.

Preterito perfecto definido, preterite.

Ful,
Fuiste,
Fué,
Fuimos,
Fuisteis,
Fueron,

Seré,
Seras,
Sera,
Seremos,
Seréis,
Seran,

Seria,
Serias,
Seria,
Seriamos,
Seriais,
Serian,

Sé tu,
Sed,

MODO SUBJUNTIVO,

Sea,
Seas,
Sea,
Seamos,
Seais,
Sean,

I was.
thou wast.
he was.
we were.
you were.

they were.

Futuro, future.

I shall or will be.
thou shalt or wilt be.
he shall oy will be.
we shall or will be.
you shall or will be.
they shall or will be.

Condicional, conditional.

I should (or would) be.
thou shouldst be.

he should be.

we should be.

you should be.

they should be.

Imperativo, imperative.

be (be thou).
be (be you).

SUBJUNCTIVE MOOD.
Presente, present.

I may be.

thou mayest be.
he may be.

we may be.
you may be.
they may be.
AUXILIARY VERBS. 151

Imperfecto, .. ¢mperfect.

Fuera, fuese ; I (might, could, would, or).should be.
Fueras, fueses ; thou shouldst be.

Fuera, fuese ; he should be.

Fuéramos, fuésemos ; we should be.

Fuerais, fueseis ; you should be,

Fueran, fuesen ; they should be.

Futuro, futwre.
(Cuando or Si) Fuere, (when or if) Z shal? or will be.

Fueres, thou shalt or wilt be.
Fuere, he shall or will be.
Fuéremos, we shall or will be.
Fuereis, you shall or will be.
Fueren, they shall or will be.

Tiempos ComMPuEsTos, Compound Tenses.
MODO INDICATIVO, INDICATIVE MOOD.

Perfecto, perfect.
He sido, I hawe been.
etc. etc.
Pluscuamperfecto, pluperfect.
Habia sido, I had been.
etc. etc.
Preterito anterior, past anterior.
Hube sido, I had been.
etc. ete.
Futuro anterior, future anterior.

Habré sido, I shall or will have been.
etc. etc.

MODO SUBJUNTIVO, SUBJUNCTIVE MOOD.

Perfecto, perfect.

Haya sido, I may have been.
etc. ote.
152 LESKON 26.

Pluscuamperfecto pluperfect.
Hubiera, or hubiese sido, I might, could, would, or should have been,
etc. etc.

Futuro, future.

(St) Hubiere sido, (if) Z shal? or will have been.
etc. ete.

Estar, to be.

MODO INFINITIVO, INFINITIVE MOOD.

Estar, to be.

Haber estado, to have been.
Gerundio, gerund.

Estando, being.

Habiendo estado, having been.

Participio pasivo, past participle.

Estado, been.
TIEMPOS SIMPLES, Simple Tenses.
MODO INDICATIVO, INDICATIVE MOOD.

Presente, present.

Yo estoy, Iam.

Tu estas, thou art.
El or ella esta, he or she is.
Nosotros estamos, we are.
Vosotros estais, you are.
Ellos or ellas estan, they are.

Imperfecto, imperfect.

Estaba, I was (I used to be).
Estabas, thou wast.

Estaba, he or she was.
Estabamos, we were.

Estabais, you were.

Estaban, they were.
AUXILIARY VERBS. 153

Preterito perfecto definido, preterite.

Estuve, I was.
Estuviste, thou wast.
Estuvo, he was.
Estuvimos, we were.
Estuvisteis, you were.
Estuvieron, they were.
Futuro, future.
Estaré, I shall or will be.
Estaras, thou shalt or wilt be.
Estara, he shall or will be.
Estaremos, we shall or will be.
Estaréis, you shall or will be.
Estaran, they shall or will be.
Condicional, conditional.
Estaria, I should (or would) be.
Estarias, thou shouldst be.
Estaria, he should be,
Estariamos, we should be.
Estariais, you should be.
Estarian, they should be.
Imperativo, imperative.
Esta ti, be (be thou).
Estad, be (be you).

MODO SUBJUNTIVO,

Esté,
Estés,
Esté,
Estemos,
Estéis,
Estén,

Estuviera, estuviese ;

etc.

SUBJUNCTIVE MOOD.

Presente, present.

I may be.

thou mayest be.
he may be.

we may be.
you may be.
they may be.

Imperfecto, imperfect.
I (might, could, would, or) should be.

ete,
154 LESSON 26,

Futuro, future.

(Cuando or Si) Estuviere, (when or if) I shall or wilt be.
thou shalt or wilt be.

Estuvieres,

Estuviere, he shall or will be.
Estuviéremos, we shall or will be.
Estuviereis, you shall or will be.
Estuvieren, they shall ov will be.

TIEMPOS COMPUESTOS, Compound Tenses.
MODO INDICATIVO, INDICATIVE MOOD.

Perfecto, perfect.

He estado, I have been.
etc. ete.

Pluscuamperfecto, pluperfect.

Habia estado, I had been.
etc. ete.

Preterito anterior, past anterior.

Hube estado, I had been.
etc. - ele,

Futuro anterior, future anterior.
Habré estado, T shall or will have been.
etc. etc.

MODO SUBJUNTIVO, SUBJUNCTIVE MOOD.

Perfecto, perfect.
Haya estado, I may have been.
etc. etc.

Pluscuamperfecto, pluperfect.

Hubiera, or hubiese estado, I (might, could, should, or}
would have been.
etc. ete.

Futuro, future.

(Si) Hubiere estado, (if) Z shall or will have been.
ete. ete.
AUXILIARY VERBS, 155

Vocabulario. Vocabulary.
El coarpintero, the carpenter. Francia, f. France.
El enfermo, the patient. Hasta, till, until, as far.
El parque, the park. Herido, wownded.
El precio, the price. Impaciente, impatient.
La batalla, the battle. Ir, 3. to go.
Amado, loved. Mucho tiempo, long time.
Carolina, Caroline. Pero, but.
Comprado, bought. Pocos, few.
Conocido, known. Posible, possible.
Creo, J believe. Pues, for, as.
Demolido, pulled down. Tarde, date.
Excepto, except. Vendido, sold.

Exercise 51.

1, ; Hsté su padre en casa? 2. No estd ahora, pero estar esta
noche. 3. ; Donde estaba V. esta mafiana? 4. Estuve en mi cuarto
todo el tiempo. 5. ; Quién estaba con V.? 6. Mis dos hermanos
estaban conmigo. 7. Esta manzana no es tan buena como las otras,
8. Si V. esté aqui mafiana temprano, tendra V. dinero. 9. 4 Cuéndo
estar4 V. en casa? 10. Estaré temprano esta noche. 11. Seamos
amigos. 12. ; No es V. el amigo de ese hombre? 13. Yo era su
amigo, pero ya nolo soy. 14. ; Estarfa V. contento si su hermana
estuviese (were) aqui? 15. Estaria lo mas contento. 16. V. sera
siempre el mismo, amigo mfo; V. es demasiado impaciente. 17. Lo
sé. 18. ; Donde estaba V. cuando V. era joven? 19. Estuve en
Francia hasta la edad de veinte afios. 20. ; Ha estado V. hoy en la
calle? 21. He estado en la casa todo el dia. 22. ; Quién estar4 en
su casa esta noche? 23. No sé todavia. 24. 4 Estard ahi la sefiorita
Luisa? 25. Si, sefior, y la sefiorita Carolina también. 26. ; Es boni-
ta la sefiorita Carolina? 27. Ha sido muy bonita, pero ya no es
joven. 28. ; Quiere V. ser mi amigo? 29. Seré su amigo, si V. es el
mio. 30. 4 Qué edad tenia V. cuando estaba en Inglaterra? 31. Yo
tenia doce afios, y mi hermano quince. 32. ; Es V. pobre? 33. No
soy ni rico ni pobre. 34. Estos dos hombres eran muy buenos
amigos, pero ahora son enemigos. 35. ; Estaré aqui el carpintero
mafiana? 36. Estard, pero tarde. 37. j Es habil este médico?
38. Lo es. 39. ; Esté V. mala, sefiora? 40. Lo estoy un poco.
41. Este autor todavia no es conocido ; pero lo seré un dfa, pues
tiene mucho talento.
156 LESSON 27.

Exercise 52.

1. Are you sick, my little friend? 2. 1 am not, but my brother is.
3. Is this hat yours or your brother’s? 4. It is neither his nor mine.
5. Are the horses sold? 6. All the horses are sold except one. 7. Is
Charles’s mother old? 8. She is, but she is pretty yet. 9. Are you
the lady of the house? 10. Iam not; I amhersister. 11. Are those
gentlemen friends? 12. They have been, for a long while. 13. Is
your letter written? 14. It will be written very soon. 15. Do you
know if the patient is better? 16. He was (¢mperf.) much better
this morning. 17. Good morning, sir; is your brother at home?
18. I believe that he is, 19. When will you be ready to (para) go
with me? 20. I will be ready in a few minutes. 21. This child is
loved by (de) every body. 22. These books have been bought in
Paris. 23. When will you be the first in your class? 24. I am
always the first. 25. Where were (¢mperf.) you this mornigg? 26. I
was in the park with my two sisters. 27. Is the park far from here?
28. It is not very far. 29. Are those two men friends yet? 30. They
were (¢mperf.) friends, but I don’t know if they are now. 31. The
general was (pret.) wounded in the battle. 32. Three houses have
been pulled down in our street. 33. How is that possible? 34. It
is very possible. 35. The boys were (¢mperf.) playing in the yard
when I was (pret.) at their house. 36. The goods have been sold at
a very good price.

OBsERVATION. — All the rules on the verbs ser and estar, to be, having
been given in Lesson V., we refer the student to the same, and would
recommend a review of the important rules therein contained.

Leccién XXVII. Lesson XXVII.

HABER AND SER USED AS IMPERSONAL VERBS.

Haber, there to be.

Hay, there is, there are, it is.
Hats, there was, there were.
Hubo, : :
Habra, there shall or will be.
Habria, there should or would be.

Hubiera or hubiese, there should or would be.
IMPERSONAL VERBS HABER AND SER 157

Ha habido, there has been, there have been.
Habia habido, there had been.
Habra habido, there shall or will have been.
Habria habido, there should or would have been.
Hubiera or hubiese habido, there should or would have been.
4 Hay? ts there? are there? is it?
: =a : was there? were there ?
4 Ha habido? has (or have) there been ?
No hay, there is not, there are not,
= sa ; there was not, there were not.
No ha habido, there has (or have) not been.
No habia habido, there had not been.
4 Qué hay ? what ts the matter? what ts there?
4 Qué hay de nuevo ? what is the news ?

Ejemplos. Examples.
Hay una carta para V. There is a letter for you.
j Hay pan en la casa? Is there any bread in the house?
No hay. There is none.
i Habia mucho pescado en la plaza? Was there much fish in the market ?
Habia mucho. There was much.
Hay diez mil, There are ten thousand.
i Habra un baile mafiana ? Will there be a ball to-morrow ?
Ha habido uno ayer. There was one yesterday,

Haber translated by aco:

Mi hermano llegé tres dias ha,
Tres dias ha que mi hermano llegé,
Murio mucho tiempo ha, He died a long time ago.

My brother arrived three days ago.

Haber expressing an ACTION, or @ STATE WHICH STILL CONTINUES:
Dos aiios ha que esta malo, He has been sick these two years.
Mucho tiempo ha que estoy aqui, JI have been here a long while.

j Cuanto (tiempo) ha que V. esta
aqui ? How long hawe you been here?

Haber used to express MEASURE OF DISTANCES :

j Cudnto hay de Paris 4 Londres? How far ts it from Paris to London?

No hay lejos, It is not far.

Hay cinco minutos de aqui 4 la It zs five minutes’ walk from here to
iglesia, the church.
158

Hay

LESSON 27.

Ser used IMPERSONALLY :

Es verdad que es pobre,
Es inutil decir eso,
Sera tiempo de ir alld,

It is true that he ts poor.
It is useless to say that.
It will be time to go there.

Hay and alli esta compared:

un hombre 4 la puerta,

Alli esta el hombre que vende pan,

There is a man at the door.

There is the man (pointing out) who

sells bread.

Todos, every:

Todos los dias, every day.

Todos los meses, every month.
Todas las mafianas, every morning.
Todas las tardes, every afternoon.
Todas las noches, every evening.
Todas las semanas, every week.
Todos los aiios, every year.

Todos los Junes, every Monday.

Vocabulario.

El Alem4n, the German.

El baile, the ball.

El conocido, the acquaintance.
El estrangero, the foreigner. |
El ferro carril, the railroad.
El incendio, the conflagration.
El parque, the park.

El periédico, the newspaper.
El duro, the dollar.

Todo el dia, the whole day.
Todo el mes, the whole month.

Toda la maiiana, the whole morning.
Toda la tarde, the whole afternoon.

Toda la noche, the whole night.

Toda la semana, the whole week.

Todo el aio, the whole year.
Todo el mundo, everybody.

Vocabulary.

La semana que viene, next week.

La vez, the time.
Cerea de, nearly.
Esperar, 1. to wait.
Hecho, done.

Iniitil, useless.
Muerto, died.
También, also, too.
Todo, all, everything.

La gente, the people.
La milla, the mile.
La persona, the person.

Exercise 53.

Quiere, wishes.
Uitimo, Zast.
Ver, 2. to see.

1. , Hay cartas para mi (me) hoy? 2. Hay una para V , y dos
3. ; Habfa mucha gente en el baile? 4. Habia
mAs que la ultima vez. 5. , Cudnto hay de aqui 4laciudad? 6. Hay
muy lejos, pero ahora tenemos un ferro carril.
ha que ha muerto el general? 8. Habra un afio mafiana. 9. 4 Quién

para su hermano.

7. 4 Cudnto tiempo

,
IMPERSONAL VERBS HABER AND SER. 159

estaba en el baile? 10. Habfa muchos de nuestros conocidos. 11, Es
inGtil decir eso, todo el mundo lo sabe. 12. ¢ Hay mucho tiempo que
V. esté aqui esperando? 13. Hay 4 lo menos dos horas. 14. g Qué
ha hecho V. todo el tiempo? 15. He leido los periddicos. 16, ; Qué
ha habido en Boston? 17. Ha habido un incendio muy grande.
18. , Cudntos centavos hay en un duro? 19. V. sabe muy bien que
hay cien (centavos). 20. 4 Qué hay de nuevo en la ciudad? 21. No
hay nada de particular. 22. 4 Cudnto hay de Berlin 4 Viena?
23. Hay cerca de cien millas. 24. ; Cudnto tiempo ha que él esté en
América? 25. No sé cudnto tiempo hay.

Exercise 54.

1. Is there any one upstairs? 2. There is nobody upstairs, but
there is somebody downstairs. 3. How long have you been here ?
4. I have been here these three hours. 5. Do you know if there
were (imperf.) any letters for me (mt)? 6. There weré none this
morning. 7. Is there anybody at the door? 8. There is nobody.
9. There are some very pretty birds in the park. 10. Was there
anything for you? 11. There was nothing for me (mt); all was for
my brother. 12. Were there many people at the theater? 13. There
were more than two thousand persons. 14. Are there many foreign-
ers in that country? 15. Yes, there are many Germans, Spaniards,
and Frenchmen. 16. Has your brother arrived? 17. He arrived
(llegé) three days ago. 18. There are many persons (muchos) who
think (prensan) that I am rich, but Iam not. 19. What is the mat-
ter, my friend? 20. I don’t know what the matter is. 21. If you
are a good boy, there will be something for you too. 22. Is there
anything to be done (que hacer)? 23. There is nothing to be done.
24, There will be a great ball at (en) the theater next week.
25. There is one every week. 26. What is the news to-day? 27. I
don’t know (of) anything. 28. There is a man at the door who
wishes to see you (verle & V.).
160 LESSON 27.

Gramatica. Grammar.

1. The verbs haber and ser are often used as impersonal
verbs, and are then only used in the third person singular, even
when referring to a plural :

Hay un hombre 4 la puerta, There is a man at the door.

Hay dos hombres abajo, There are two men downstairs.

Habia alguno arriba, There was somebody upstairs.

Habia mucha gente en el teatro, There were many people at the theater.

Nors. — It will be noticed that the forms of haber are used with a
noun, expressing the idea of there is, etc. Ser may be followed by a noun
or adjective, and expresses the English 7¢ is, etc.:

Es lastima, It is a pity.
Hay mucha gente, There are many people.
2. Haber is used to denote distance :
j Cuanto hay de aqui a la ciudad ? How far is it from here to the city?

Hay dos millas. It is two miles.

3. Haber may be used in expressions of time and can be
translated by ago, since, etc. :

Hemos comprado esta casa dos aiios We bought this house two years
ha, ago.

Mucho tiempo ha que no he visto 4 su I have not seen your brother for
hermano, (since) a long time.

Nors. — In this sense it will be noted that the form of the verb is
ha not hay, and that it follows the expression of time.

OBSERVATION. — The verb hacer, when referring to time, may be used
instead of haber. The former precedes the expression of time.
Compré la casa hace dos meses, f bought the house two months ago.

4, Haber used impersonally governs the infinitive with que,
and not with a preposition.
Hoy hay mucho que hacer, There ts much to do to-day.

Mafiana habra mucho que hacer, There will be much to do to-morrow,
Habia que ir, It was necessary to go.
THE TIME OF THE DAY, ETC. 161

Leccioén XXVIII.

Lesson XXVIII.

THE TIME OF THE DAY, ETC.

Ejemplos.

i Qué hora es ?

Es la una.

Son las dos.

Son las tres.

Son las doce.

Es la una y media.

Son las dos y cuarto,
Son las tres menos cuarto.
Son las doce del dia,

Es mediodia.

Son las doce de la noche.
Es medianoche.

Las cuatro de la mafana,
Las tres de la tarde.

Las siete de la noche.

i A qué hora ?

Ala una,

A Jas dos menos cuarto.
A las dos menos veinte.
Son mas de las cinco.
Son menos de las seis.
Son las siete en punto.
Ya son las diez.

No son todavia las once.

No es mas que la una y media.

Van 4 dar las tres.

Son cerca de las cuatro.
Son las siete dadas.

Las once estan dando.
Han dado las tres.
Faltan algunos minutos.
Eran las tres.

Seran las cuatro.

Examples.

What time is it? What o’clock is it }
It is one o'clock.

It is two o’clock.

It is three o'clock.

It is twelve o’clock.

It is half past one.

It is a quarter past two.

It is a quarter to three.

It is twelve o'clock in the day.
It is noon (midday).

It is twelve o'clock in the night.
It is midnight.

Four o'clock in the morning.
Three o’clock in the afternoon,
Seven o'clock in the evening.
At what o’clock ?

At one o'clock.

At a quarter to two.

At twenty minutes to two,

It is more than five o’clock.

It is less than six o'clock.

It is precisely seven o'clock.
It is already ten o’clock.

It is not yet eleven o'clock.

It is only half past one.

It is going to strike three o’clock.
It is nearly four o’clock.

It is past seven o'clock.

It is striking eleven o’clock,
It has struck three o’clock.

It wants a few minutes.

It was three o’clock.

It will be four o’clock.

11
162

LESSON 28.

Divisions of Time.

Un afio,

Un mes,

Una semana,

Una hora,

Una media hora,

Un cuarto de hora,

Tres cuartos de hora,
Una hora y media,

Un siglo,

Un minuto,

Quince dias,

Un segundo,

Un rato or un momento,
Un instante,

Una hora y cuarto,

El afio que viene (préximo),
El aiio pasado,

La semana que viene,
La semana pasada,

a year.

a month.

a week.

an hour.

half an hour.

a quarter of an hour.
three quarters of an hour.
an hour and a half.

a@ century.

a minute.

a fortnight.

a second.

a moment.

an instant.

an hour and a quarter,
next year.

last year.

next week.

last week.

Divisions of the Day.

El dia,

El amanecer,

La mafiana,

El mediodia,

La tarde,

La noche,

Un dia de trabajo,
La vispera,

La salida del sol,
La puesta del sol,
El anochecer,
Medianoche,

Un dia de fiesta,
Una jornada,

the day.

the dawn, break of day.
the morning.

midday.

the afternoon,

the evening, the night.
a workday.

the eve.

sunrise.

sunset.

nightfall.

midnight.

a holiday.

a day’s work.

Holidays.

El dia de afio nuevo,
El dia de reyes,
El martes de carnestolendas,

New Year's Day.
Twelfth Day.
Shrove Tuesday.
THE TIME OF THE DAY, ETC.

El miércoles de ceniza,

163

Ash Wednesday.

El domingo de ramos, Palm Sunday.
Pascua de resurreccién, Easter.

Dia de todos los santos, All Saints’ Day.
El dia de San Miguel, Michaelmas.
Navidad, Christmas.

La nochebuena, Christmas eve.
La cuaresma, Lent.

La semana santa, Holy week.
Viernes santo, Good Friday.
Pentecostes, Whitsuntide.

Las vacaciones or las fiestas,

Vocabulario.

Vacations, the holidays.

Vocabulary.

Jamds, ever.

Llega, arrives.

iS8ale V. 4 do you go out #
Trabajar, 1. to work.
Volver, 2. to return.
Vuelva V., return.

El concierto, the concert.
El fin, the end.

A menudo, often.

Antes de, before.
Cansado, tired,

Cerca, near.

Cerrado, closed.

iCome V. ? do you dine ?
Comemos, we dine.
Conmigo, with me.
Encontrard, will find.
Entre, between.

Exercise 55.

1. 4 Qué hora es, amigo? 2. Es temprano todavia. 3. ; Son ya las
siete? 4. Todavia no, no son mds de las seis y media. 5. ; A qué
hora estara V. en casa esta noche? 6. Estaré entre las siete y las
ocho. 7. j Esta lejos de aqui la casa de su tio? 8. Esté cerquita.
9. ,; Cudnto tiempo hay que V. esté aqu{? 10. A lo menos tres
cuartos de hora. 11. ; A qué hora sale V. de la escuela? 12. A las
doce en punto. 13. ; Estaran VV. aqui temprano? 14. Estaremos
aqui 4 las siete. 15. ; Puede V. volver en media hora? 16. No,
sefior, no puedo volver. 17. Eran las nueve cuando yo estaba en el
almacén. 18. ; Cudntas vacaciones tendran VV. al fin del afto?
19. Tendremos tres meses. 20. ; A qué hora llega la gente? 21. Todo
el mundo estaré aqui antes de las ocho. 22. Si V. no esté aqui & me-
dianoche, encontrara la puerta cerrada. 23. Estaré aqui 4 las once.
24. ; Cudntas semanas hay todavia antes de la semana santa? 25.
Hay todavia tres semanas, 26. Vuelva V. 4 la una y media 6 4 las
dos. 27. 4 Va V. 4 la iglesia todos los domingos? 28. Voy dos ve-
ces, 29. ;Cudntas horas hay en un dia? 30, Hay veinte y cuatro.
164 LESSON 28.

Exercise 56.

1. What time is it by (por) your watch? 2. It is only ten o’clock
by mine. 3. Were (imperf.) you here last year? 4, No, I was in the
country. 5. How many minutes are there in one hour? 6. There
are sixty. 7. Will you be here at seven o’clock? 8. No, not at
seven, but at half past seven. 9. When will you be ready? 10. In
half an hour. 11. At what time are you going to the concert?
12. At half past eight: will you be there? 13. I shall be there at a
quarter past nine. 14. We have worked until three o’clock in the
morning, and we are very tired. 15. Have you ever seen the rising
of the sun? 16. Very often when I was in the country. 17. What
a beautiful sunset! 18. Is your father in town? 19. He is still in
the country. 20. We have no vacation on (el) New Year’s day.
21. Why not? 22. We never have any on that day. 23, Will you
go out with me? 24. At what time? 25. At a quarter to four.

Gramatica. Grammar.

1, To indicate the hour or the time, the Spaniards do not
use the words o’clock, They use the article la before una (one
o’clock) and las before the other hours :

La una, one o'clock ; Las dos, two o'clock ; etc.

The word hora, hour, being understood, and being feminine,
the adjective half is translated by media, feminine of medio.

2. To express subdivisions of the hour, the latter is divided
into two parts. The first comprises the first half of the hopr to
and including the half hour. These fractions are added to the
hour, and are connected by y:

Son las dos y diez minutos, It ts ten minutes past two.

Son las cuatro y cuarte, Lt is @ quarter past four.

Es la una y veinte y cinco, It ts twenty-five minutes past one,
Son las once y media, It is half past eleven.

The other twenty-nine minutes are subtracted from the fol
lowing hour by menos:

La una menos veinte, Twenty minutes of one.
Son las cinco menos cuarto, Jt ts quarter of Jive.
USE OF THE ARTICLE.

165

3. The preposition on, which in English is placed before
days of the week, days of the month, and a few holidays, is
rendered in Spanish by the definite article :

E] dia de afio nuevo,
El domingo,
Los lunes,

Leccion XXIX.

On New Year's day,
On Sunday.
On Mondays,

Lesson XXIX.

USE OF THE ARTICLE.

The definite article is used in Spanish :

1. Before masculine and feminine geographical names :

La Francia es mas grande que la
Italia,

El Canada esta al Norte de los
Estados Unidos de America,

La Irlanda es una isla,

Los Alpes y los Pirineos son muy
altos,

El Vesuvio es un volcan,

El Danubio es un rio grande,

France is larger than Italy.

Canada ts north of the United
States of America.

Ireland is an island.

The Alps and the Pyrenees are
very high.

Vesuvius is a volcano.

The Danube is a large river.

2. Before names of days and seasons :

E] domingo es un dia de descanso,

El sdbado es el ultimo dia de la
semana,

El invierno es muy frio en este pais,

La semana que viene,

Sunday is a day of rest.

Saturday is the last day of the
week,

Winter is very cold in this country.

Next week.

3. Before abstract nouns, or nouns used in a general sense :

La juventud es imprudente,
La virtud es amable,
La esperanza sostiene al hombre,

Youth is imprudent,
Virtue is amiable,
Hope sustains man.
166

El ono y el plomo son metales,

El blanco y el negro son colores,

El fuego y el agua son elementos,

La geografia es la descripcién de la
tierra,

El azticar es dulce,

La musica y la dansa son hermanas,

El catolicismo y el protestantismo,

El hombre es mortal,

El tiempo es precioso,

Los sombreros redondos son de moda,

LESSON 29.

Gold and lead are metals.

White and black are colors.

Fire and water are elements.

Geography is the description of the
earth.

Sugar is sweet.

Music and dancing are sisters.

Catholicism and Protestantism.

Man is mortal.

Time is precious.

Round hats are in fashion.

4. Before adjectives, or other parts of speech, used sudbstan-

hvely :
Los ricos y los pobres,
El comer y el beber.
El si y el no,
El pro y el contra,
El bien y el mal,

The rich and the poor.
Eating and drinking.
Yes and no.

Pro and con.

Good and evil.

5. Before ¢ctles prefixed to names:

El emperador Don Pedro,
El rey Luis Catorce.

E] principe Poniatowski,
El presidente Lincoln,

El general Washington,
El sefior May,

Emperor Don Pedro.

King Louis the Fourteenth.
Prince Poniatowskt.
President Lincoln.

General Washington.

Mr. May.

6. Before proper names preceded by adjectives :

El pequefio Juan,
La vieja Maria,

Inttle John.
Old Mary.

7. Before nouns specifying guantity or measure :

Tres duros Ja libra,
Un duro Za vara,

Three dollars a pound.
One dollar a yard.

8. Before the four cardinal points :

El Norte,

E] Sur, sud or mediodia,

El Este or Oriente,

El Oeste, Poniente 07 Occidente,

North.
South.

East.
West.
USE OF THE ARTICLE. 167

Countries. Paises.
Europa, Europe. Alemania, Germany.
Asia, Asia, Holanda, Holland.
Africa, Africa, Prusia, Prussia.
América, America. Bélgica, Belgium.
Australia, Australia, Sajonia, Saxony.
Espaiia, Spain. Ungria, Hungary.
Francia, France. Austria, Austria.
Inglaterra, England. Italia, Ttaly.
Turquia, Turkey. Suecia, Sweden.
Grecia, Greece. Suiza, Switzerland,

Cities. Ciudades.
Madrid, Madrid. Lisboa, Lisbon.
Paris, Paris, Estocolmo, Stockholm.
Londres, London. Bruselas, Brussels.

National Names. Nombres de Naciones.
Espanol, Spaniard. Ruso, Russian.
Francés, Frenchman. Austriaco, Austrian.
Inglés, Englishman. Suizo, Swiss.
Holandés, Dutch. Turco, Turk.
Aleman, German. Griego, Greek.
Prusiano, Prussian. Sueco, Swede.

Vocabulario. Vocabulary.
El coronel, the colonel. | La virtud, the virtue. | Ir, 3. to go.

El dibujo, the drawing.
El hierro, the tron.

El invierno, the winter.
El tigre, the tiger.

La caridad, the charity.
La danza, the dancing.
La docena, the dozen.
La fe, the faith.

La musica, the music.
La novela, the novel.
La ocasiOn, the occasion.
La paz, the peace.

Admitido, admitted.
Aprender, 2. to learn.
Aprendido, /earned.
Bajo, under.

Conocido, Known.
Consultado, consulted.
Cuanto, how much.
Durado, lasted.

En casa, at (the house of).
Estudiado, studied.
Estudiamos, we study.
, Estudian VV. ? do you

i Le gusta 4 V.% do you
like ?

Moe gusta, J like, I am
Sond of.

Leido, read.

Peligroso, dangerous.

4 Piensa V.? do you in-
tend ?

Pobre, poor.

Préximo, next.

Servido, served.

Teologal, theological.

La pintura, thepainting.| study? Trasparente, transpa-
La primavera, the spring.| Eterno, efernal. rent.
La tierra, the earth. Feliz, happy.

 

La verdad, the truth.

 

Interesante, interesting.
168 LESSON 29.

Exercise 57.

1, ; Haconocido V. al general Piedras? 2. He conocido 4 su hijo,
el doctor Piedras. 8. ,Cudntas veces ha visto V. al presidente
Grant? 4. Le he visto varias veces en Washington. 5. Este sol-
dado ha servido con el coronel Martin. 6. ; Qué ha aprendido V. en
esta escuela? 7. He aprendido la geografia y la historia. 8. El
pobre Carlos ba muerto en Cuba. 9. La verdad es eterna. 10. La
fortuna es inconstante. 11. Los inviernos son muy frios en este pais.
12. , Quiere V. un pedazo de jamon? 13. No, gracias, no me gusta
el jamén. 14. ; Qué color le gusta 4 V.? 15. Me gusta el azul.
16. ;Ha escrito V. al doctor Nelson? 17. He escrito al profesor
Ventura. 18. ; Es este joven, hijo del abogalo Arroyo? 19. El
sefior Arroyo no tiene hijo. 20. ; Qué estudian VV.? 21. Estu-
diamos el francés y el inglés. 22. , Por cudnto ha vendido V. su
vino? 23. He vendido todo 4 cuatro duros la docena. 24. Londres
es la capital de Inglaterra, 25, Este muchacho tiene los ojos negros,
y su hermana los tiene azules. 26. El comer demasiado es peligroso.
27. El emperador Napoleén Primero murié (died) 4 la edad de cin-
cuenta y dos afios. 28, Los ricos no son siempre mas felices que Jos
pobres. 29. ; Ha leido V. muchas novelas en inglés? 30. Si, sefior,
las novelas inglesas son muy interesantes.

Exercise 58.

1. Glass is transparent. 2. Faith, hope, and charity are the three
theological virtues. 3. Peace has never lasted long on the earth.
4. We were (imperf.) yesterday at Captain Martin’s. 5. Were your
brothers there? 6. Yes, they were there too. 7. Under what generals
have you served? 8. I served (serv) under Generals Grant and Sher-
man. 9. When do you intend to go to Italy? 10. This winter or next
spring. 11. Iron is more useful than gold. 12. Poor little Charles
is sick. 13. Will you have some beef? 14. No, I don’t like beef.
15. Have you seen any tigers in that country? 16. No, never; there
are none, 17. Have you studied history? 18. I have studied history
and geography. 19. Where is your sister now? 20. She isin France.
21. Have you ever been in Europe? 22. Yes, I have been in the
South of Europe. 23. We have consulted Doctor Hener on (ez) this
occasion. 24. Dogs are not admitted in the park. 25. Will you
have some apples, my little friend? 26. Yes, sir; have you any ?
USE OF THE ARTICLE. 169

Gramatica. Grammar.
1, The definite article is placed before a noun used in a
definite or individual sense :
El pobre ha muerto, The poor man has died.
2. The definite article may be used before a whole sentence,
when the latter serves as the subject of another sentence :
Mucho me alegra el que venga V., Iam very glad that you come.
3. When several nouns follow each other, the article is
placed before each one of them.
Cuando la justicia, la fidelidad, el When justice, fidelity, honor, com-

honor, la compasidn, la vergiien- passion, modesty, and all feel-
za, y todos los sentimientos que tngs which can move a generous
pueden mover un corazén gene- heart, ete.

Toso, etc. JOVELLANOS.

Exception. — Nouns closely connected in sense may omit all but the
first article.

4, The definite article is generally used with the name of a
country ; except when the latter is preceded by a preposition :

La Inglaterra tenia posesiones en England used to have possessions in
Francia, France.

OssERVATION. — Countries out of Rurope, and in fact remote countries,
preserve the definite article even when accompanied by prepositions,

5, The detinite article is placed before ¢it/es or other desig-
nations preceding proper names:
El Exmo (excelentisimo) sefior duque de... His Excellency the duke of...

If the word su precedes the honorific designation, the article
is placed before the title:
Su Excelencia, el duque de... His Excellency the duke of...
Exception. — Don and Dofia omit the article, as do titles used in direct
address (the vocative) :

Don Sancho, Dofia Luz
Buenas tardes, sefior Blanco, Good afternoon, Mr. White.

6. The definite article is likewise placed before the names of
a few Italian poets and painters :
El Petrarca, Petrarch. El Ariosto, 4riosto. El Dante, Dante.
170 LESSON 29.

7. In describing the characteristic features of persons or
things, the definite article is also used :

Carlos tiene los ojos negros, Charles has black eyes.
Luis tiene la nariz grande, Lewis has a large nose.

8, A few cities also take the definite article :
La Habana, Havana. La Corufta, Corunna. El Ferol, Ferol.

Exceptions.
The definite article (and in some cases the indefinite article)
is omitted :
1. When the name of the country figures as the place of
origin, or is preceded by a preposition :
He recibido una carta de Francia, I have received a letter from France.

Mi hermano esta en Alemania, My brother is in Germany.
La reina de Inglaterra es viuda, The queen of England is a widow.
Este vino es de Espafia, This wine is from Spain.

2. Before names of countries the capital of which has the
same name as the country itself:

Napoles, Naples. Méjico, Mexico.
3. Before a few locutions, as:
Voy 4 casa—a misa—da_ palacio, IT am going home — to mass — to
etc. the palace, etc.
Voy a casa de mi amigo, I am going to my friend’s house.

4. With a substantive in apposition with a preceding sub-
stantive :

Juan, hermano de Enrique, John, the brother of Henry.

Paris, capital de Francia, Paris, the capital of France.

Alejandro, emperador de Rusia, Alexander, the emperor of Russia.

Hablamos de Pedro, hombre de gran We speak of Peter, a man of great
talento, talent.

5. Before titles of books, headings of chapters, etc. :

Vida de Cervantes, The Life of Cervantes.
Historia de Roma, A History of Rome.
Capitulo tercero, Third Chapter.
PERSONAL PRONOUNS WITH PREPOSITIONS AND VERBS. 171

Leccion XXX. Lesson XXX.

OBJECT PERSONAL PRONOUNS WITH PREPOSITIONS, AND WITH VERBS.

Disjunctive.
With Prepositions.
Mi, me. Nosotros, m., nosotras, f., us.
Ti, thee. Vosotros, m., vosotras, f., V. sing., VV. pl., you.
El, him. Ellos, m. ; han
Ella, her. Ellas, f. ,
Ello, ¢z#.

Si, one’s self, himself, herself, themselves, itself.

Conjunctive,
With Verbs.

Me, me, to me.
Te, thee, to thee.
Le, la, you, to you.

Le, him, her, to him, to her.

Lo, la, le, 7, him, her.

Nos, us, to us.

Os, you, to you.

Les, las, you, to you.
Les, them, to them.
Los, las, them.

Se, one’s self, himself, herself, themselves, itself, each other.

Hjemplos.
Esta carta es para mi.
Yo hablo de él y de ella.
Juan va con nosotros.
Tengo algo para ellos.
Yo hablo de ello.
Cada uno para si.
Pienso en él.

fil me ama y yo le amo.

Yo la veo, pero ella no me ve.

4 Qué le da V. ?— Nada.

§ Qué les da V. ?

Yo les doy dinero.
Yo no quiero verle.
quiere vernos.

E) nos quiere ver. }

Examples.
This letter is for me.
I speak of him and of her.
John goes with us.
I have something for them.
I speak of it.
Every one for himself.
I think of him.

He loves me and I love him.

I see her, but she does not see me.

What do you give him (or her) ?—
Nothing.

What do you give them ?

I give them money.

I do not wish to see him.

He wishes to see us,
172 LESSON 20.

Viéndolos alli, les hablé. Seeing them there, I spoke to them.
i Quiere V. comprarlo ? Will you buy it ?

Yo no quiero comprarlo. I will not buy it.

Démelo. Give it to me.

i Los ha visto V. ? Have you seen them?

No los he visto. T have not seen them.

El no me ha hablado. He has not spoken to me.

Ellos no pueden verse. They cannot see each other.

Yo le veo 4 V. I see you.

Conmigo, with me.
Contigo, with thee.
Consigo, with one's self (himself, herself, itself, or themselves).

Vocabulario. Vocabulary.
Elsombrerero, the hatter.| Dice, says. Irse, 3. to go away.
El tio, the uncle. Dicho, said. zNecesitaV.2doyounced ?
Los vestidos, the clothes.| Doy, I give. Pide, asks for.
Aquf tiene V., here is. | Enviado, sent. Prestar, 1. ¢o lend.
Comido, eaten. Enviar, 1. to send. Salir, 3. to go out.
Cortar, 1. to cut. , Habla V.? sing.) do you| Sin, without.
Dado, given. 4 Hablan VV.2 eed Sin embargo, however.

Debo, J owe. Hallado, found. Visto, seen.

Exercise 59.

1. 4 Quién tiene dinero para mi? 2. Tengo dinero para V., pero no
para su hermano. 3. 4 Para quién es eso? 4. Para V.,si V. quiere.
5. , Va V. al parque con los muchachos (children)? 6. Voy, pero sin
ellos. 7. ,Va V. al teatro con su hermana? 8. Voy conella. 9. 1, Es
el libro para mf 6 para mi hermano? 10. Noes ni para V. ni para
él. 11. ; De quién habla V.? 12. De él y de ella. 13. ; Con quién
hablan VV.? 14. Con ellas. 15. ; Quién era rey de Francia en
1700? 16. Era (t was) Luis Catorce, hijo de Luis Trece. 17, 1 Qué
le da V. 4 este hombre? 18. Le doy algo bueno. 19. ; Conoce V. 4
esta sefiora? 20. La conozco muy bien. 21. ; Los ve V.2 22. Los
veo, pero no les hablo. 23, ; Me ha visto V.? 24. No he visto a V.,
pero he visto 4su padre. 25, ; Cudndo haescrito V.4 sutfo? 26. Le
he escrito esta mafiana. 27. ; Quién le dad V. dinero? 28. Carlos
nos da un duro. 29. ; Ha hallado V. sus libros? 30. Los he hallado
en el cuarto de Pedro. 31. ; Qué quiere V. enviar 4 su amigo ?
32. Quiero enviarle el dinero que me pide. 33. , Ha dicho V. algo &
este hombre? 34. No le he dicho nada,
PERSONAL PRONOUNS WITH PREPOSITIONS AND VERBS. 173

Exercise 60.

4. What does that man tell you? 2. He tells me that he wishes to
speak to you. 3. Has the tailor sent me my clothes? 4. He has not
sent them yet. 5. Have you seen Mrs. Norris? 6. I saw (have
seen) her this morning. 7. Can you lend me twenty dollars? 8. I
lent (have lent) you ten dollars yesterday ; why do you want twenty
dollars now? 9. I owe money to my hatter, and I wish to pay him.
10. I have no money to-day. 11. Will you cut me some bread ?
12. Yes, if you will lend me your knife. 13. To whom have you
written? 14. I have written to him and to her. 15. Give me some-
thing for this poor man. 16. I have given him something already.
17. I have never seen my uncle ; I have written several times to him,
however. 18. To whom will you give this beautiful book? 19. To
him. 20. Have you nothing for her? 21. Yes, I have something
for her too. 22. How do you know that? 23. I know it, because he
has said so. 24. Have you eaten all the apples? 25. Charles has
eaten them. 26. Do you know that gentleman? 27. I don’t know
him very well. 28. Do you speak German? 29. I speak it a little,
but my brother speaks it better than I. 30. Will you go out witn
me? 31. I cannot go out now, I have something to (que) do.
32. Where has your brother bought his handkerchiefs? 33. He has
bought them in Paris. 34. Have you learned your lesson? 35. I
have learned it, but I don’t know it very well.

Gramatica. Grammar.

1. The object personal pronouns are divided into two
classes, the disjunctive and the conjunctive. The former are
used when accompanied by a Spanish preposition :

A mi, to me. Para él, for him.

The conjunctive pronouns are used in close connection with
a verb, and without a Spanish preposition.

Me ama, he loves me. La veo, I see her.

2, The conjunctive pronouns are used as either the direct or
the indirect objects of a verb. Their form, however, is the
same, except for the pronouns of the third person.

Me ama, he loves me. Me habla, he speaks to me,
La veo, I see her. Le doy, I give to him.
174 LESSON 30.

3. Used with an infinitive, an affirmative imperative, or
a gerund, the conjunctive pronouns follow the verb, and are
united with it:
Vino ayer & verme, He came to see me yesterday.
Dadme, give me. Hablandoles, in speaking to them.
Nore. — The third person forms of the present subjunctive when used
as an affirmative imperative come under the above rule :
Délo, give it. Diganlo, let them say tt.

4, Elsewhere the conjunctive pronouns precede the verb,
and are not united to it:
La conozco, J know her. Los ve, he sees them.
Nore. — Instances are not uncommon where this usage is disregarded,
especially in connection with an tmperfect or preterite form of the verb at
the beginning of a phrase:

Sentése, he sat down. Llevéme, he took me away.
Llamabase, he was named.

5. When there are two verbs in the phrase, the pronoun is
better put with the verb to which it logically belongs:

El quiere verme, He wants to see me.

Nors. — There is much divergence in this usage.

6. The conjunctive pronouns are placed before the auxiliary
in compound tenses :

Le he visto, I have seen him.
Lo hemos comprado, We have bought it.

7. The pronoun le generally accompanies the noun in the
third person, and consequently V. and VV. (See p. 36.)

Yo le doy 4 V. (rather than Yo doy 4 V.), T give you.
Yo le doy 4 su hermano, I give (to) your brother.

8. When the pronoun nos is joined with the first person
plural of a verb, the latter drops the s: Unimonos, we unite,
instead of wnimosnos.
PERSONAL PRONOUNS WITH PREPOSITIONS AND VERBS. 175

9. The disjunctive pronouns may be added to the conjunctive
to give more emphasis to the sentence:

A mi me vid, he saw me.

It is more especially the case:
1. When the verb governs more than one object :

Le amo 4 él, 4 su hermano, y 4 su I love him, his brother, and his
hermana, sister.

2. When the object pronouns are emphasized by the word
self or selves :
Te vi 4 ti mismo, I saw thee.
10, When the object precedes the verb, the conjunctive pro-
noun is often redundantly used :

Los mas bellos edificios, los he visto T have seen the finest buildings in

en Italia, Ltaly.
A los Franceses les han costado The wars of the French have cost
mucho sangre sus guerras, them much blood.

11, When mi, ti, si, are governed by the prepo,ition con,
with, they form conmigo, with me; contigo, with thee ; con-
sigo, with himself, herself, ztself, them ; and admit no change for
either gender or number.

12, The preposition must be repeated before every pronoun :
Este dinero es para ti, para él y para This money is for you (thee), for

ella, him, and for her.

13, The genitive case takes the place of the nominative in
exclamations :

| Desdichado de mi! T, unfortunate creature?
176

Leccion XXXI.

LESSON 31.

Lesson XXXI.

THE RESPECTIVE PLACES OF PRONOUNS.

Me lo (le or la), zt to me.
Te lo, zt to thee.

Se lo, zt to him or her.
Nos lo, 2¢ to us.

Os lo, ;

Se lo (4 V.), ha em:

Me los (las), them to me.
Te los, them to thee.

Se los, them to him or her.
Nos los, them to us.

Os los,

Se los (4 V.), ; them to you.

Se lo (4 ellos or ellas), it to

them.

Ejemplos.

El me lo da,

Ella nos lo ha dicho.

4 Quién se lo da a V. ?
ElJos me lo dan,

4 Quiere V. darmelos ?

i Me los quiere V. dar? }
Quiero prestarselos 4 V.

Se los quiero prestar 4 V.
Yo se los doy 4 V.

Yo se lo doy 4 ellos.

Se los (4 ellos or ellas), thew

to them.

Examples.

He gives it to me.
She has said it to us,
Who gives it to you ?
They give it to me.

Will you give them to me ?

I will lend them to you.

I give them to you.
I give it to them.

Imperative affirmative.

Démelos V.
Déselo V.
Préstemelos V.
Présteselo V.
Cémanselos VV.

Give them to me.
Give it to him.
Lend them to me,
Lend it to him,
Eat them.
PLACES OF PRONOUNS. 177

Imperative negative.

No me lo dé V.

No nos lo dé V.

No me los mande V.
No se los mande V.

Vocabulario.

El correo, the mail.

El cortaplumas, the penknife.

El crimen, the crime.
El jardinero, the gardener.
La muiieca, the doll.
yAma V. ? do you love ?
Amo, J love.

Desea, wishes.

De V., give.

Devolver, 2. to return.
Dice, says, tells.

Diga V., say, tell.

Doy, J give.

Guillermo, William.
Hablado, spoken.

 

Do not give it to me.

Do not give it to us.

Do not send them to me.
Do not send them to him.

Vocabulary.

Hay, there is.
Llegado, arrived.
Mandar, 1. to send.
Mande V., send.
Matar, 1. to kill.
Mismo, same.
Necesita, needs.
Perdido, Jost.
Quieren, wish.
Recibido, received.
Robar, 1. to steal, to rob.
Traido, brought.
Traiga V., bring.
Ve, sees.

Vende, sedis,

Exercise 61.

‘1. 4 Quiere V. enviar esta carta 4 su hermano? 2. Yo quiero envidr-
sela. 3. ; Cudndo puede V. envidrsela? 4. Sela puedo enviar mafiana
por la mafiana. 5. 4 Cudndo puede V. escribir 4 su tio? 6. Puedo
escribirle ahora, si V. lo quiere. 7. 4A quién quiere V. dar este
libro? 8. Quiero darselo 4 mi hermanita. 9. ; Quién le ha dado esto
4V.? 10. Guillermo me lo ha dado. 11. 4 Cémo sabe V. que Juan
esté aqui? 12. Mi hermano me lo ha dicho. 13. Si V. tiene mi
libro, démelo. 14. Yo se lo he dado 4 su hermano. 15. Los
muchachos quieren sus libros, déselos V. 16. Se los he dado ya
17. Hay un libro en mi cuarto, trdigamelo V. 18. Este joven
necesita un cortaplumas ; , tiene V. uno? 19. El mio estdé sobre la
12
178 LESSON 81.

mesa; V. puede prestdrselo. 20. Este dinero es para ti, para él, y para
ella. 21. Robar 4 un hombre y matarle son dos crimenes. 22. 4 A
quién ama V.? 23. Le amo 4 él, 4 su hermano, y 4 su hermana.
24. , Puede V. decirme quién es el que ha hecho esto? 25. No puedo
decirselo 4 V.; porque yo mismo no lo sé. 26, No le dé V. nadaa
ese hombre, ya ha estado aqui esta mafiana. 27. No es el mismo.
28. Si V. tiene cartas para mi, mdndemelas V. 4 mi casa. 29. No
puedo mandarselas, porque no tengo nadie con quien mandarlas.
30. La seiiora Castro quiere saber si V. puede darle su dinero hoy.
31. No puedo darselo hoy, porque todavia no lo he recibido. 32. Hay
aqui un hombre que desea verle 4 V. 33. No tengo tiempo ahora,
tengo que escribirle 4 mi hermana. 34. 4 Sabe V. si ha Megado el
correo? 35. Ha llegado esta mafiana.

Exercise 62.

1. Who can give me money for that? 2. Your brother can give you
some; I have none. 3. Who gave (has given) that doll to Mary?
4. Her mother has given it to her. 5. Can you lend me some
money? 6. I can lend you five dollars ; when can you return them
tome? 7. I don’t know yet when I shall be able (podré) to return
them. 8. If you cannot tell me, I cannot lend you anything. 9. What
will you send to your brother? 10. I will send him two letters
which I have received for him. 11. Bring me the book which is on
the little table. 12. What has that man said to you? 13. He has not
said anything to me; he has spoken to my cousin (masc.). 14. Have
you told (to) your friend that his father was (imperf.) here? 15. I
have not seen him yet. 16. Can the gardener send us some flowers ?
17. He can send you some roses if you wish (it). 18. If you see
your sister tell her that I have received some French books. 19. She
knows it already. 20. You do not need your knife now ; lend it to me.
21. I don’t wish to lend it to you. 22. Can I see Mr. Bravo?
23. You cannot see him now. 24. Does our baker sell you any bread ?
25. He does not sell us any. 26. Do you know if the tailor has sent
my coat? 27. He has not sent it yet. 28. What have yon brought
us to-day? 29. I have not brought anything for you, but I have
something for the children. 30. Why don’t you tell (to) your uncle
that you have lost your money? 31. I am afraid to tell it to him.
32. My friend has given me this pencil, and I give it to you.
PLACES OF PRONOUNS. 179

Gramatica. Grammar.

1, When a verb governs two personal pronouns, the indirect
object must precede the direet whenever the latter is a pronoun
of the third person :

El meloda, he gives tt to me. _Damelo, give it to me.
2, If the conjunctive pronouns are in the first and second
person, the direct must precede the indirect:
Réndeteme, Surrender to me.
3. The pronoun se precedes all the other object pronouns,
whether these are placed before or after the verb :

Se me escapd, He escaped from me.
Déselo V., Give it to him.
4, When both pronouns are in the ¢hird person, the indirect
object pronoun, whether singular or plural, is changed into se,
and we say therefore:

Selo, it to him, her, or them. Se los, them to him, her, or them.

To all these pronouns we may add the disjunctive pronouns to
give more expression or precision to the sentence :

Se lo diré 4 él —4 ella — LT will tell it to him — to her — to
a ellos —a ellas, them, masc. — to them, fem.
180 LESSON 82.

Leccion XXXII. Lesson XXXII.

REGULAR VERBS.
Present Tenses of the Indicative Mood.
1st Conjugation. 2d Conjugation. 3d Conjugation.
Habl-ar, to speak. Com-er, to eat. Recib-ir, to receive.
Habl-ando, speaking. Com-iendo, eating. Recib-iendo, receiving.
Habl-ado, spoken. Com-ido, eaten. Recib-ido, received.

Terminations of the Present Idincative.

Habl-o, I speak. Com-o, L eat. Recib-o, I receive.
Habl-as, thow speakest. Com-es,  thoweatest. Recib-es, thou receivest.
Habl-a, he speaks. Com-e, he eats. Recib-e, he receives.
Habl-amos, we speak. Com-emos, we eat. Recib-imos, we receive.
Habl-dis, you speak. Com-éis, youeat.  Recib-is, you recetve.
Habl-an, they speak. Com-en, they eat. Recib-en, they receive.

Vocabulario. Vocabulary.
El agua, f., the water. Aprender, 2.! ¢o learn. | Mandar, 1. to send.
El almacén, the store. Bailar, 1. to dance. Pagar, 1. to pay.
El baile, the ball. Cantar, 1. to sing. Recibir, 3. to receive.
El gusto, the pleasure. Comprender, 2. to un- | Residir, 3. to reside.
El paiio, the cloth. derstand. Tocar, 1. to play on.
Las tijeras, tie scissors. | Deber, 2. to owe. Vender, 2. to sell.
Griego, Greek. Estudiar, 1. to study. Viajar, 1. to travel.
Latin, Latin. Gastar, 1. to spend. Vivir, 3. to live.
Pues, as.

Exercise 63.

1. 4 Quién ha tomado mi libro? 2. Yo no sé quién lo ha tomado.
3. 4 A qué hora comen VV.? 4. Comemos 4 las seis y media los

 

1 The number put after each Spanish verb given in this vocabulary, or
in the following vocabularies, indicates the conjugation to which that verb
belongs.
REGULAR VERBS. 181

dias de la semana; pero los domingos, comemos 4 las dos. 5. ; Dénde
estd su hermano ahora? 6. Estd viajando en Europa. 7. Necesito
zapatos ; donde compra V. los suyos? 8. Compro mis zapatos en
Broadway. 9. 4 Quién vive en aquella casa? 10. El sefior Robinson
vive alli con su familia. 11. ; Toca V. el piano? 12. No toconingin
instrumento, pero canto un poco. 13. ;Cantan también sus her-
manas? 14, Ellas cantan muy bien. 15. 4 Con qué cortan VV. este
pafio? 16. Lo cortamos con las tijeras grandes. 17. ; Cuando recibe
V. su dinero? 18. Lo recibo todos los meses, y asi pago lo que
debo. 19. ; Quiere V. beber algo? 20. No, gracias, he bebido ya.
21. ; Cudndo llega su padre? 22. Nosé, él no ha escrito. 23. ; Va
V. al baile esta noche? 24, No, sefior, yo nunca bailo. 25. ; Quiere
V. comprar libros franceses ? nuestro amigo ha recibido muchisimos.
26. No puedo comprar ninguno ahora, he gastado todo mi dinero el
mes pasado. 27. ; Habla V. francés? 28. Hablo un poco; pero mi
hermano lo habla muy bien, pues ha residido mucho tiempo en
Paris. 29. ; Y dénde vive ahora? 30. El esté en Alemania, donde
esta estudiando el aleman. 31. ; En dénde ha aprendido V. ei
italiano? 32. Yo no hablo italiano, lo comprendo wun poco.
33. ; Quiere V. venderme su caballo negro? 34. Ya lo he vendido,
pero todavia no he recibido el dinero.

Exercise 64.

1. Who lives now in your old house? 2. Nobody lives there now.
3. Does your brother speak Spanish? 4. We all speak (speak all)
Spanish in the family. 5. What do you study in your school? 6. I
study Latin and Greek. 7. Do you know if your friend has received
any money? 8. Yes, he receives his money every Monday. 9. At
what time does your father dine? 10. He dines at six o’clock.
11. Have you bought anything for us? 12. Yes, I have bought
apples and pears for you. 13. What are you eating? 14. I am eat-
ing bread and cheese. 15. And what are you drinking? 16. Tam
drinking water ; I never drink wine or beer. 17. Does your sister
sing? 18. She sings and dances very well. 19. Will you cut mea
piece of bread? 20. With much pleasure ; give me your knife.
21. Here it is, but I don’t know if it cuts well. 22. Have you spent
allyourmoney? 23. Not yet, I have spent only fivedollars, 24, Will
you buy a handsome little dog? 25. I don’t spend my money in
dogs. 26. Do you learn French? 27. We learn French and Italian.
182 LESSON 82.

28. Do you speak Italian well? 29. We don’t speak it, but we
understand it. 30. What do they sell in that store? 31. They sell
sugar, coffee, and tea. 32. Do you receive your wine from France?
33. We receive some from France and some from Germany.

Gramatica. Grammar.

1. The present of the indicative expresses in Spanish, as well
as in the other languages, whatever exists, happens, or is being
done: Yo soy, Zam; tu escribes, thou writest ; Mueve, it cs
raining ; ete.

2. The present of the indicative is also very frequently used
instead of the future tense to express a proximate futurity :

Mi amigo viene al instante, My friend will come in a moment.

Partimos mafiana, We shall leave to-morrow.

3. The same tense is sometimes used instead of the past
tense, especially in a narrative, to give it more animation, and
to place it vividly, as it were, before the reader :

Oye el general que el enemigo ha The general heard (hears) that the

echado el puente, y al punto da enemy had (has) butit the bridge,
la sefial de la pelea, se arma, sube and he immediately gave (gives)
4 caballo y sale al frente de sus orders for the battle, armed (arms)
tropas 4 encontrar los Franceses. himself, mounted (mounts) his
QUINTANA, horse, and sallied (sallies) forth

to meet the French.

4, The root or the stem of the verb is obtained by dropping
the last two letters which form the endings proper to the con-
jugation to which the verb belongs, namely: ar, for the first
conjugation; er, for the second conjugation; and ir, for the
third conjugation.

To this stem are added, to form the present of the indicative
of the regular verbs, and of many irregular verbs, the following
terminations :

For the Ist Conjugation: 0, a8, a, amos, dis, an.

For the 2d Conjugation: 0, es, e, emos, éis, en.
For the 3d Conjugation: 0, es, e, imos, is, en.
IRREGULAR VERBS. 183

5. The present of the indicative of certain regular verbs.

In those verbs ending in the
a. Present infinitive in cer and cir, the ¢ is replaced by az
before o and a to preserve the sound of the consonant in the stem:
Vencer, to conquer. Venzo, I conquer.
Resarcir, to compensate. Resarza, he compensates.
b. Present infinitive in ger and gir, change g into j before 0
and a for the same reason as above :
Coger, to take. Cojo, I take.
Exigir, to exact. Exijo, I exact.
c. Present infinitive in quir, change gu into ¢ before 0 and a:
Delinquir, to offend. Delinco, Z offend.
d. Present infinitive in guir,drop u before 0 and a:
Extinguir, to extinguish. Extingo, I extinguish.
e. Present infinitive in wir (except as above in guir and
quir) insert y when w is accented :

Atribuir, ¢o attribute. Atribuyo, I attribute.
Atribuye, he attributes.
Constituir, to constitute. Constituyo, 7 constitute.

Destruir, to destroy. Destruyo, J destroy.
Distribuir, to distribute. Distribuyo, J distribute.
Huir, to flee. Huyo, J flee.

Argiiir, to argue. Arguyo, J am arguing.

Leecion XXXIII. Lesson XXXIII.

IRREGULAR VERBS OF THE tIst CONJUGATION.

Present Tense of the Indicative Mood.

1. Calentar, fo warm.
Caliento, J warm.

Calientas, thow warmest.

Calienta, he warms.

Calentamos, we warm.
Calentais, you warm.
Calientan, they warm.

2, Empezar, to begin.
Empiezo, I begin.
Empiezas, thou beginnest.
Empieza, he begins.
Empezamos, we begin.
Empezais, you begin.
Empiezan, they begin.
184

LESSON 33.

Principal Irregular Verbs of the 1st conjugation which take an i before

the e and are conjugated like calentar and empezar.

Apretar, to sqyuceze.
Arrendar, to hire.

Asentar, to place.
Atravesar, fo cross.

Cegar, to blind.

Cerrar, to shut.

Comenzar, to commence.
Concertar, to agree.
Confesar, to confess.
Despertar, to awake.
Desterrar, to banish.
Empedrar, ¢o pave.
Encerrar, to lock up.
Encomendar, to recommend.
Enmendar, ¢0 correct.
Enterrar, to bury.
Escarmentar, fo take warning.

8. Almorzar, to breakfast.
Almuerzo, J breakfast.
Almuerzas, thow breakfastest.
Almuerza, he breakfasts.
Almorzamos, we breakfast.
Almorzais, you breakfast.
Almuerzan, they breakfast.

Fregar, to rub.
Gobernar, fo yovern.
Helar, to freeze.
Herrar, to shoe.
Mentar, to mention.
Nogar, to deny.
Nevar, to snow.
Pensar, to think.
Quebrar, to break.
Recomendar, to recommend.
Reventar, to burst.
Segar, to cut down.
Sembrar, ¢o sow.
Sentar, to set.
Temblar, to tremble.
Tentar, to tempt.
Tropezar, to stumble,

4. Contar, to count.
Cuento, J count.
Cuentas, thou countest.
Cuenta, he counts.
Contamos, we count.
Contais, you count.
Cuentan, they count.

Principal Irregular Verbs of the 1st conjugation which change the o into

ue and are conjugated like almorzar and contar.

Acordar, to remind.
Amolar, to grind.
Apostar, to bet.
Aprobar, to approve.
Avergonzar, to shame.
Consolar, éo console.
Desollar, to skin.
Encontrar, to meet.
Forzar, to force.
Afollar, to tread.
Mostrar, to show.
Poblar, to people.

Probar, fo prove.
Renovar, to renew.
Rodar, to roll.
Soldar, to solder.
Soltar, to let loose.
Sonar, to sound.
Sofiar, to dream.
Tostar, to toast.
Trocar, to barter.
Tronar, to thunder.
Volar, to fly.
Volear, to overturn.
IRREGULAR VERBS. 185

5. Dar, to give.
Doy, I give.
Das, thou givest.
Da, he gives.
Damos, we give.
Dais, you give.
Dan, they give.

Vocabulario.

El aire, the air.

El estado, the state.

El labrador, the farmer.
El trabajo, the work.

La cocinera, the cook.

La funci6n, the ceremony.

La ignorancia, the ignorance.

Después, afterwards.
Imposible, impossible.
Temprano, carly.
Ajiadir, 3. to add.
Apostar, 1. fo bet.
Aprobar, 1. fo approve.
Calentar, 1. to warm.
Cerrar, 1. to shut.
Confesar, 1. to confess.
Consolar, 1. to console.

 

6. Jugar, to play.
Juego, I play.
Juegas, thou playest.
Juega, he plays.
Jugamos, we play.
Jugais, you play.
Juegan, they play.

Vocabulary.

Creer, 2. to believe.
Encerrar, 1. to lock up.
Encontrar, 1. to meet.
Enterrar, 1. to bury.
Helar, 1. to freeze.

Ir, 3. to go.

Mostrar, 1. to show.
Pasar, 1. to pass.
Pensar, 1. to think.
Poblar, 1. to people.
Probar, 1, to prove.
Recomendar, 1. to recommend.
Sembrar, 1. to sow.
Sofiar, 1. to dream.
Temblar, 1. to tremble.
Volar, 1. to fly.

Exercise 65.

1. 4 Qué piensa V. de eso? 2. No sé qué pensar. 3. 4A qué hora
almuerzan VV.? 4, Almorzamos 4 las siete de la mafiana. 5. ; Donde
estan los muchachos? 6. Est4n jugando en el jardin. 7. ; Cudnto
dinero da V. 4 este hombre? 8. Yo le doy cien duros. 9. 4 A qué
hora empieza la funcién? 10, Creo que empieza muy temprano.
11. ; Porqué tiembla ese muchacho? 12. Porque tiene miedo.
13. El principe gobierna sus estados con moderacién y justicia.
14, ; Cudnto quiere V. apostar que puedo hacer eso? 15. Yo nunca
apuesto dinero. 16. ,Cémo pasan VV. el tiempo? 17. Almorzamos
temprano, después estudiamos; 4 la una salimos; 4 las seis comemos,
y jugamos hasta las diez. 18. Confieso que no sé nada de eso.
19. , Cémo piensan VV. hacer eso? 20. Pensamos hacerlo ast.
21. Los pajaros pueblan los aires. 22. Apuesto que V. no encuentra
186 LESSON 33.

la casa de mi hermano y que yo encuentro la de su hermano de V.
23. Yo no apruebo lo que V. ha hecho. 24. Esos hombres muestran
mucha ignorancia, 25. Esta mujer encierra todo el dinero que
tiene. 26. 4 Tiene V. algo que afiadir? 27. Si, seiior, le recomiendo
4 V. mis hermanos y hermanas, 28. ; Ha cerrado V. las puertas?
29. La criada las cierra todas las noches. 30. Esté helando.

Exercise 66.

1. I meet your brother every day in our street. 2. Where does
your brother breakfast? 3. He never breakfasts (breakfasts never)
with us. 4. What do you give to the children? 5. I give them
apples and cakes. 6. Why do you not commence your work now!
7, I cannot commence now; I have some letters to write. 8. The
general has been buried this morning. 9. Do you think that your
brother will be here to-night? 10. Idon’t think so. 11. I recom-
mend you to go to-morrow to the house of that lady. 12. Do you
approve the conduct of your brother? 13. I do not approve of it ; it
is impossible to approve it. 14, Do you dream sometimes? 15. I
never dream. 16. What does this prove? 17. It does not prove
anything. 18. You show your ignorance when you speak so. 19. The
birds fly in the air. 20. Who warms my coffee? 21. The cook
warms it. 22. He bets that I cannot do this, and I bet that I can.
23. We give aJl our money to that poorman. 24, That poor woman
cannot console herself (se). 25. Will you play with me? 26. I
never play when I have to study. 27. The farmers sow their fields
in this season. 28. Why do you tremble? 29. I do not tremble;
you tremble yourself. 30. It was freezing.

Gramatica. Grammar.

1, There are in Spanish verbs several kinds of irregularities;
but as they are limited in most cases to certain moods, tenses,
and persons, and almost always occur in the same places, they
have a certain regularity in their ¢rregularity, which facilitates
the task of the student.

It has been shown by the conjugation given above that the
irregularity in the present indicative occurs in the 1st, 2d, and
3d person singular, and the 3d person plural. It will be shown
hereafter in other tenses that the irregularities of verbs ot the
IRREGULAR VERBS. 187

Ist conjugation are the same throughout the whole conjugation
excepting four verbs which will be mentioned in their appro-
priate place.

2, A large number of the Spanish verbs are irregular only
when the vowel of the stem is accented. Consequently when
this change is mastered, they present no further difficulty.

Verbs like calentar and empezar, whose stem vowel is e,
insert i before the e in the 1st, 2d, and 3d persons singular, and
in the 3d person plural of the indicative, while verbs like
almorzar and contar, whose stem vowel is 0, replace the o by
we in the same persons.

Jugar and dar stand alone, no other verbs being conjugated
like them, unless we except estar, éo be, which has in the pres-
ent indicative the same terminations as dar.

3. The gerund and the past participle of the irregular verbs
of the Ist conjugation are formed regularly, as:

Calent-ar, to warm; calent-ando, warming; calent-ado, warmed.
Empez-ar, to begin; | empez-ando, beginning;  empez-ado, begun.
Almorz-ar, to breakfast ; almorz-ando, breakfasting ; almorz-ado, breakfasted,
Cont-ar, tocount; cont-ando, counting;  cont-ado, counted.
D-ar, to give ; d-ando, giving ; d-ado, given.
Jug-ar, to play; jug-ando, playing; jug-ado, played.

4, The verb errar, to err, may be added to the list of the
irregular verbs already given.

This verb inserts an initial y in the same tenses and persons
where calentar, to warm, inserts an 1:

Yerro, Jerr. errar, toerr.
Yerras, thou errest.

Yerra, he errs. err ando, erring.
Erramos, we err.

Errais, you err. err ado, erred.

Yerran, they err.

5, Since the present subjunctive is formed from the first per-
son of the present indicative, the above changes will be found
there as well. The same is true of the imperative, and it is only
in these three tenses that the stem vowel receives the accent.
188

Leccién XXXIV.

LESSON 34.

Lesson XXXIV.

IRREGULAR VERBS OF THE 24 CONJUGATION.

to know.

to be acquainted with.
Conozco, I know,

Conoces, thou knowest.

Conoce, he knows,

Conocemos, we know.

Conocéis, you know.

Conocen, they know.

1. Conocer j

3. Perder, to lose.
Pierdo, I lose,
Pierdes, thou losest.
Pierde, he loses.
Perdemos, we lose.
Perdéis, you lose.
Pierden, they lose.

5. Hacer, to make, to do ;
6. Caer, to fall;

Hago, Z make or do.

Haces, thou makest or doest.
Hace, he makes or does.
Hacemos, we make or do.
Hacéis, you make or do.
Hacen, they make or do,

7. Poner, to put ;

8. Querer, to wish, to be willing ;
Pongo, J put.

Pones, thow puttest.

Pone, he puts.

Ponemos, we put.

Ponéis, you put.

Ponen, they put.

haciendo, making, doing ;
eayendo, falling ;

poniendo, putting ;
queriendo, wishing ;

2. Nacer, to be born.
Nazco, Z am born.
Naces, thou art born.
Nace, he is born.
Nacemos, we are born.
Nacéis, you are born.
Nacen, they are born.

4. Encender, to light.
Enciendo, J light.
Enciendes, thou lightest.
Enciende, he lights.
Encendemos, we light.
Encendéis, you light.
Encienden, they light.

hecho, made, done.
caido, fallen.
Caigo, I fall.

Caes, thou fallest.

Cae, he falls.

Caemos, we fall,

Cagis, you fall,

Caen, they fall.

puesto, put.
querido, wished,
Quiero, I wish, I am willing,
Quieres, thow wishest, etc.

Quiere, he wishes, ete.

Queremos, we wish, ete,

Queréis, you wish, etc.

Quieren, they wish, etc,
IRREGULAR VERBS. 189

9. Saber, to know, to know how to; sabiendo, knowing ; sabido, known.

10. Poder, to be able ;
Sé, J know.
Sabes, thow knowest.
Sabe, he knows.
Sabemos, we know.
Sabéis, you know.
Saben, they know.

11. Cocer, to boii ;

12. Traer, to bring ;
Cuezo, J boil.
Cueces, thou boilest.
Cuece, he boils.
Cocemos, we boil,
Cocéis, you boil.
Cuecen, they boii.

cociendo, boiling ;
trayendo, bringing ;

pudiendo, being able ; podido, been able.

Puedo, Z am able, I can.
Puedes, thow art able, etc.
Puede, he is able, etc.
Podemos, we are able, ete.
Podéis, you are able, etc.
Pueden, they are able, etc.

cocido, boiled.
traido, brought.
Traigo, I bring.

Traes, thow bringest.

Trae, he brings.

Traemos, we bring.

Traéis, you bring.

Traen, they bring.

13. Caber, to be contained ; cabiendo, being contained ; cabido, been contained.
14. Valer, to be worth; valiendo, being worth ; valido, been worth.

Quepo, Z am contained.
Cabes, thou art contained.
Cabe, he is contained.
Cabemos, we are contained.
Cabéis, you are contained.
Caben, they are contained.

15. Ver, to see ;

viendo, seeing ;

Valgo, I am worth.
Vales, thow art worth.
Vale, he is worth.
Valemos, we are worth.
Valéis, you are worth.
Valen, they are worth.

visto, seen.

16. Absolver, to absolve ; absolviendo, absolving; absuelto, absolved.

Veo, I see.
Ves, thow seest.
Ve, he sees.
Vemos, we see.
Veis, you see.
Ven, they see.

17. Volver, to return ;

18. Morder, to bite ;
Vuelvo, J return.
Vuelves, thou returnest.
Vuelve, he returns.
Volvemos, we return.
Volvéis, you return.
Vuelven, they return.

volviendo, returning ;
mordiendo, biting ;

Absuelvo, J absolve.
Absuelves, thou absolvest.
Absuelve, he absolves.
Absolvemos, we absolve.
Absolvéis, you absolve.
Absuelven, they absolve,

vuelto, returned,
mordido, bitten,
Muerdo, J bite.

Muerdes, thow bitest,

Muerde, he bites,

Mordemos, we bite.

Mordéis, you bite.

Muerden, they bite,
190 LESSON 34.

19. Oler, to smell ; oliendo, smelling ; olido, smelt.
Huelo, J smell. Olemos, we smell.
Hueles, thou smellest. Oléis, you smell.
Huele, he smells, Huelen, they smell.

Vocabulario. Vocabulary.
El baiil, the trunk. Generalmente, generally.
El diente, the tooth. Majiana, to-morrow.
El gas, the gas. Pasado mafiana, the day after to-
El negocio, the business. morrow.
El olor, the smeil. Ventajoso, profitable.
El pueblo, the town. Devolver, 2. to return (give back).
El saco, the bag. Disponer, 2. to dispose.
La estrella, the star. Encender, 2. to light.
La luna, the moon. Llover, 2. to rain.
La nuez, the nut. Morder, 2. to bite.
La ropa, the clothes. Perder, 2, to dose.
La tarde, the afternoon. Proponer, 2. to propose.
Algunas veces, sometimes. Traer, 2. to bring.
Alo menos, at least. Valer, 2. to be worth.
Desde, since. Ver, 2. to see.
Durante, during.

 

Exercise 67.

1. ; Sabe V. si el perro muerde? 2. No puede morder, es demasia-
do viejo, y no tiene dientes. 3. ; Cudnto puede valer este reloj?
4. Sies de oro, vale 4lo menos cien duros. 5. ; Ve V.4 menudo 4 la
sefiora Marti? 6. La veo todas las semanas. 7. ; Como hace V. esto?
8. Lo hago asi. 9. ; Pueden VV. hacer esto tan bien como nosotros ?
10. Podemos hacerlo mejor. 11. ; Qué quieren VV.? 12. Queremos
dinero para ir al teatro. 13. V. sabe muy bien que el teatro est&
cerrado. 14. j Qué pone V. en el baul? 15. Pongo mi ropa en el
bal grande, y mis libros en el pequefio. 16. ; Cudndo piensa V.
volver del campo? 17. Vuelvo mafiana 6 pasado mafiana. 18. ; Co-
noce V. 4 este caballero? 19. Le conozco desde muchos ajfios.
20. ; Qué mal olor hay en este cuarto! 21. Yo no huelo nada.
22. ,Ha perdido V. algo? 23. Nunca pierdo nada. 24. ; Qué me
propone V.? 25. Le propongo algo de muy ventajoso para V.
26. ; Sabe V. lo que quieren estos muchachos? 27. Yo no sé lo que
quieren. 28. ; Qué trae V. en aquel saco? 29. Traigo manzanas y
IRREGULAR VERBS. 191

nueces. 30. Durante la noche vemos la luna y las estrellas, 31. , Qué
hacen VV. los domingos por la tarde? 32. Salimos generalmente.
33, j A quién conocen VV. en el pueblo? 34. Conocemos 4 casi todo
el mundo. 35. Mi amigo no sale todavia.

Exercise 68.

1. Will you do this for me? 2. I don’t know how to do it, I have
never learned. 3. Does the dog bite? 4. He barks, but he never
bites. 5. Is that book worth anything? 6. It is not worth any-
thing. 7. Whom do you know here? 8. I do not know anybody.
9. Can you do what Ido? 10. I cannotdo it. 11. At what time do
you light the gas? 12. I light it at six o’clock. 13. Why do you
not return the money to that man? 14. Because I have no money
now. 15. Does it rain? 16. It rains a little. 17. Our brothers
return to-morrow from the city. 18. Can your brother go with me ?
19. He cannot go now, but I can go with you if you wish. 20. Where
do you put your books? 21. Iputtheminthesmallroom. 22. What
do you wish here? 23. I wish to see your father. Where is he?
24. I don’t know where he is. 25. Can you bring me my books to-
morrow? 26. I bring them now in my bag. 27. Do you see Mr.
Brown very often? 28. I see him every Thursday. 29. Do you
know this lady? 30. Yes, I see her sometimes at her house. 31. Of
how much money can you dispose for this business? 32. I can dis-
pose of three hundred dollars, but not of one cent more. 33. Edward
will not come with us because it rains. 34. Do you know that I
wish to be obeyed? 35. I don’t obey any one here.

Gramatica. Grammar.

1, Perder, to Jose, and the following verbs whose stem vowel
is e insert ani before the e in the three persons singular and
also in the 3d person plural of the present of the indicative.

Ascender, to ascend. Entender, to wnderstand.
Atender, to mind. Extender, to spread.
Cerner, to sift. Heder, to smell badly.
Condescender, to condescend. Hender, to split.
Contender, to contend. Reverter, to overflow.
Defender, to defend. Tender, to stretch.
Desatender, to disregard. Trascender, to transcend.
Descender, to descend. Verter, to spill.

Encender, to light. And their compounds.
192 LESSON 34,

Nore. — This irregularity in the accented stem vowel should be com-
pared to that in the first conjugation (p. 187, § 2) and occurs in the same
place.

2. Volver, to return, and the following verbs, change the o
of the radical into ue in the three persons singular, and also in
the 3d person plural of the present of the indicative, like
almorzar, to breakfast, of the 1st conjugation :

Absolver, to absolve. Doler, to ache. Remorder, to sting.
Conmover, to affect. Envolver, to involve. Resolver, to resolve.
Demoler, to demolish. Llover, to rain. Revolver, to revolve.
Desenvolver, to unfold. Moler, to grind. Soler, to be wont.
Devolver, to give back. Morder, to bite. Solver, to doose.
Disolver, to dissolve. Mover, to move. Torcer, to twist.

And other of their compounds.
Note. — Compare note to § 1.

3. Verbs ending in acer, ecer, and ocer like nacer, to be
born, empobrecer, to grow poor, conocer, to /now, insert a Z
before the ¢ in the 1st person singular of the present of the
indicative :

Nazco, I am born ; empobrezco, I grow poor ; conozco, J know.

4, The verbs mecer, ¢o stir, to rock (which is a regular
verb), empecer, to hurt, cocer, to oil (and compounds), yacer,
to lie, and hacer, to make, to do, and its compounds, as des-
hacer, to undo, rehacer, to do over, contrahacer, to imitate,
etc., form an exception to the above rule :

Mezo, J stir ; hago, I make, I do.

5. Cocer, to boil, recocer, to boil again, and escocer, to
smart, differ from the verbs given above ending in acer, ecer,
and ocer ; and instead of inserting a z before the ¢ like conocer,
they change the accented o into ue like volver, to return, and
replace the ¢ by az:

Cuego, TF boi?. Escuezo, I smart.

6. The following verbs have the same irregularity as poner,
to put:

Anteponer, to place before. Deponer, to depose.
Componer, to repair. Descomponer, to discomposs,
IRREGULAR VERBS. 193

Disponer, to dispose. Proponer, to propose.
Exponer, to expose. Reponer, to replace.
Imponer, fo impose. Sobreponer, to place over.
Indisponer, to indispose. Suponer, to suppose.
Oponer, to oppose. Trasponer, to transpose.

Posponer, to postpone.

7, The following verbs are conjugated like traer, to bring:

Abstraer, to abstract. Distraer, to distract. Substraer, } eee
Atraer, to attract. Estraer, to extract. Sustraer, 5
Contraer, to contract. Retraer, to retract.

Detraer, to detract. Retrotraer, to refer to former times.

8, Equivaler, to be equal to, is conjugated like valer, to be
worth.

9, The following verbs are conjugated like tener, to have,
which is also an irregular verb :

Contener, to contain. Mantener, to maintain. Sostener, fo sustain.
Detener, to detain. Obtener, to obtain.
Entretener, ¢o entertain. Retener, to retain.

10. Caber corresponds also to the English verb ¢o contain, to
hold; but in order to use caber in the sense of these verbs, the
English accusative must become the Spanish nominative, while
the preposition en must also be used :

 

En este teatro cabe mds gente que This theatre contains more people
en aquél, than that one.
Lecei6n XXXV. Lesson XXXV.

IRREGULAR VERBS OF THE 3d CONJUGATION.

Present of the Indicative.
1. Conducir, to conduct ; conduciendo, conducting ; conducido, conducted.

2. Lueir, to shine ; luciendo, shining ; lucido, shone.
Conduzco, I conduct. Luzco, I shine.
Conduces, thou conductest. Luces, thou shinest.
Conduce, he conducts. Luce, he shines.
Conducimos, we conduct. Lucimos, we shine.
Conducis, you conduct. Lucis, you shine.

Conduecen, they conduct. Lucen, they shine.
194

3. Sentir, to feel ;

4. Divertir, to amuse ;
Siento, Z feel.
Sientes, thou feelest.
Siente, he feels.
Sentimos, we feel.
Sentis, you feel.
Sienten, they feel.

5. Dormir, to sleep ;

6. Morir, to die ;
Duermo, JZ sleep.
Duermes, chow sleepest.
Duerme, he sleeps.
Dormimos, we sleep.
Dormis, you sleep.
Duermen, ¢hey sleep.

7. Pedir, to ask for ;

8. Medir, to measure ;
Pido, J ask for.
Pides, thou askest for.
Pide, he asks for.
Pedimos, we ask for.
Pedis, you ask for.
Piden, they ask for.

9. Venir, fo come ;

10. Decir, to say, to tell ;
Vengo, [ come.
Vienes, thou comest.
Viene, he comes.
Venimos, we come.
Venis, you come.
Vienen, they come.

i1.
12.

Salir, to go out ;

Ir, to go;

Salgo, I go out.
Sales, chow goest out.
Sale, he goes out.
Salimos, we go owt.
Salis, you go out.
Salen. they go out,

sintiendo, feeling ;
divertiendo, amusing ;

LESSON 35.

sentido, felt.
divertido, amused.
Divierto, I amuse.
Diviertes, thou amusest.
Divierte, he amuses.
Divertimos, we amuse.
Divertis, you amuse.
Divierten, they amuse.

dormido, slept.
muerto, dead,

durmiendo, sleeping ;

muriendo, dying ;
Muero, J die.
Mueres, thow diest.
Muere, he dies.
Morimos, we die.
Moris, you die.
Mueren, they die.

pidiendo, asking for ; pedido, asked for.
midiendo, measuring ; medido, measured.
Mido, Z measure.
Mides, thou measurest.
Mide, he measures.
Medimos, we measure.
Medis, you measure.
Miden, they measure.

viniendo, coming ;

diciendo, saying ;
Digo, J say.
Dices, thow sayest.
Dice, he says.
Decimos, we say.
Decis, you say.
Dicen, they say.

venido, come.
dicho, said,

saliendo, going out ; salido, gone out.

yendo, going ; ido, gone.
Voy, I go.
Vas, thow goest.
Va, he goes.

Vamos, we go.
Vais, you go.
Van, they go.
IRREGULAR VERBS. 195

18. Oifr, to hear ; oyendo, hearing ; oido, heard.
Oigo, I hear. Otmos, we hear.
Oyes, thou hearest. Ois, you hear.
Oye, he hears. Oyen, they hear.
Vocabulario. Vocabulary.
El canto, the singing. Dormir, 3. to sleep.
El cuento, the tale. Esperar, 1. fo wait, to hope.
El estudiante, the student. Ganar, 1. to earn.
La aventura, the adventure. Ir, 3. to go.
Indiferente, indifferent. Mantener, 2. to support.
Por cierto, certainly. Medir, 3. to measure.
Telémaco, Telemachus. Morir, 3. to die.
Aborrecer, 2. to hate. Oir, 3. to hear.
Bendecir, 3. to bless. Pedir, 3. to ask for.
Cantar, 1. to sing. Podrir, 3. to rot.
Complacer, 2. to please. Provenir, 3. to come from (to origt-
Conducir, 3. to conduct, to take. nate).
Desde que, since. Repetir, 3. to repeat.
Divertir, 3. to amuse. Traducir, 3. to translate.

 

Exercise 69.

1. , A qué hora sale V. todos los dias? 2. Salgo generalmente 4
las diez 6 4 las diez y media. 3. 4 Qué dice este hombre? 4, No sé
lo que dice, habla aleman. 5. j Qué libro traducen VV. del francés
al espafiol? 6. Traducimos las aventuras de Telémaco. 7. 4 Va V.
al concierto esta noche? 8. No, sefior, voy al teatro. 9. , Donde
esta Juan? 10. Todavia esté durmiendo. 11. j Oye V. lo que digo?
12. Oigo muy bien, pero no puedo hacer lo que V. quiere, porque
tengo que salir ahora mismo (this very minute). 18. 4 A dénde van
estos muchachos ? 14. Van 4 laescuela. 15. 4 Quiere V. ir por pan?
16. Sf, sefior, quiero ir. 17. Los estudiantes van cantando por las
calles, 18. Todas las manzanas que V. ha comprado, estan podridas.
19. ; Cémo puede V. decir tal cosa? 20. Lo digo porque lo sé.
21. , A dénde conduce V. 4 este muchacho? 22. Le conduzco 4 casa
de su tio. 23. 4 Cudnto pide V. por este caballo? 24. No pido sino
lo que vale. 25. El viejo Andrés nos divierte todas las noches con
sus cuentos. 26. Dice el médico que mueren muchos nifios en este
mes. 27. ; Duerme V.? 28. No, sefior, no duermo, oigo todo lo que
V. dice. 29. ; Ha medido V. el pafio? 30. Voy 4 medirlo ahora.
31. 4 Porqué aborrece V. 4 este hombre? 32. Yo no le aborrezco, él
me es indiferente, 33, ; Porqué no me obedece V.? 34, Yo le
196 LESSON 35.

obedezco & V., y hago todo lo que puedo para complacerle 4 V.
35. Este pobre hombre no puede mantener 4 su familia con lo que
gana. 36. Yo mantengo 4 mis hermanitas desde que mi padre ha
muerto.

Exercise 70.

1. How do you sleep now? 2. I sleep much better, thank you.
3. What does your mother tell your brother? 4. She tells him that
he cannot go out without a hat. 5. Do you hear the music from
here? 6, We hear the music and the singing from our room. 7. What
do you wish to-day? 8. I have come to (¢) see if you need any-
thing. 9. Yes; I need coffee, sugar, and tea. 10. Do you (pl.) go to
(the) church every Sunday? 11. We go twice on (os) Sundays, and
also sometimes in the week. 12. Do you go out to-day? 13. I never
go out when it rains. 14. Why don’t you measure the cloth? 15. I
have measured it already. 16. Who takes your little sister to school?
17. I take her sometimes, but she generally goes (goes generally)
alone. 18. Why don’t you ask that man for your money? 19. He
says that he has no money now, and that I must wait till next month.
20. Will you go for some bread for me? 21. I cannot go now; will
you wait a few minutes? 22. Certainly, you may go in a half hour
if you wish. 23. Are the children still sleeping? 24. Yes, they are
all sleeping yet. 25. Why don’t you tell (to) your tailor that you
cannot pay him now? 26. Who says that I cannot pay him? I can,
but I will not, because he owes money to my brother and will not pay
him. 27. Can you translate this? 28. I don’t translate very well
yet. 29. Will you repeat what he has said? 30. Why don’t you
repeat it yourself? 31. I don’t understand German. 32. Where does
it come from? 33. It comes from the old house. 34. The father
blesses his children. 35. I am going this evening to the city, but I
don’t know yet if my friends can go with me.

Gramatica. Grammar.

1, The following verbs conjugated like sentir, to feel, and
divertir, to amuse, whose stem vowel is e, have in the present
of the indicative the same irregularities as the verb empezar
(p. 187, § 2), to begin, of the 1st conjugation, that is, they
insert an i before the e in the Ist, 2d, and 3d persons singular,
and in the 3d person plural of said tense:
Adherir, to adhere.
Adquirir, to acquire.
Advertir, to notice.

Arrepentirse (reflex.) to repent.

Asentir, to consent.
Conferir, to confer.
Consentir, to consent.
Convertir, to convert.
Deferir, to defer.

IRREGULAR VERBS.

Desmentir, to belie.
Diferir, to differ.
Digerir, to digest.
Disentir, to dissent.
Divertir, to amuse.
Herir, to wound.
Hervir, to boil.
Inferir, to infer.

Ingerir, to interfere.

197

Mentir, to lie.
Pervertir, ¢o pervert.
Preferir, to prefer.
Presentir, to foresee,
Proferir, to utter.
Referir, to refer.
Requerir, ¢o notify.
Sugerir, to suggest.
Trasferir, to move.

OBSERVATION. — The same verbs change the ¢ into aniin the Present
Participle, as ; sintiendo, feeling ; advirtiendo, noticing ; etc.

2, Pedir, to ask for, and medir, to measure, and the follow-
ing verbs whose stem vowel is e, change the e into i in the Ist,
2d, and 3d persons singular, the 3d person plural, and the

gerund:

Ceitir, to gird.
Colegir, to collect.
Competir, to compete.
Concebir, to conceive.
Conseguir, to obtain.
Constrehir, to force.
Corregir, to correct.
Derretir, to melt.
Deservir, to harm.
Despedir, to dismiss.

Elegir, to elect.
Embestir, to attack.
Envestir, to invest.
Expedir, to forward.
Freir, to fry.

Gemir, to groan.
Impedir, to prevent.
Investir, to invest.
Perseguir, to pursue.
Proseguir, to continue.

Regir, to rude.

Reir, to laugh.
Rendir, to surrender.
Refir, to fight, to scold,
Repetir, to repeat,
Seguir, to follow.
Servir, to serve.
Sonreir, to smile.
Teitir, to dye.

Vestir, to dress,

Destefiir, to discolor.

3. Dormir, éo sleep, and morir, to die, change the o of the
stem into ue in the same cases as the verb almorzar (p. 187
§ 2) of the 1st conjugation.

The o is also changed into a U in the gerund:

Durmiendo, sleeping. Muriendo, dying.

4, Verbs ending in ucir, like conducir, to conduct, to take ;
lucir, to shine, etc., have in the present of the indicative the
same irregularity as the verbs of the 2d conjugation ending in
acer, ecer, and ocer (p. 192 § 3), that is, they insert a 2 before
the e in the first person singular of said tense :

Conduzco, I conduct. Luzco, J shine.
198 LESSON 35.

5. The following verbs are conjugated like venir, to come, of
which they are compounds:

Avenir, to happen. Provenir, to originate.
Contravenir, to transgress. Reconvenir, to charge.
Convenir, to agree. Revenirse, to return.
Desconvenir, to disagree. Sobrevenir, to come between.
Desavenir, to disagree. Subvenir, to aid.
Intervenir, to interfere. Supervenir, to supervene

Prevenir, to arrange beforehand.
OBSERVATION. — Venir por means to come for, to fetch.

6. The following compounds of decir have the same irregu-
larities in the present indicative as has the simple verb:

Antedecir, to predict. Interdecir, to interdict.
Bendecir, to bless. Maldecir, to curse.
Contradecir, to contradict. Predecir, to foretell.
Desdecir, to retract. Rebendecir, ¢o bless again.

Entredecir, te prohibit.

7, Although the meaning of ir is to go, this verb accom-
panied by an adverb corresponds also to the verb andar, to
walk :

Voy despacio, I walk slowly. Voy deprisa, I walk quickly.

OBSERVATION. — When accompanied by the preposition por the verb ir
is used instead of buscar, to fetch :

Voy por pan, I go for bread, I fetch bread.

8. The verb asir, to setze, makes asgo in the Ist person sin-
gular of the present of the indicative, but this verb is hardly
ever used, except metaphorically.

9, The verb podrir, fo rot, of which the present of the
indicative is:

Pudro, J rot. Podrimos, we rot.
Pudres, thou rottest. Podris, you rot.
Pudre, he rots. Pudren, they rot.

and the gerund pudriendo, rotting, is hardly ever used except
in the infinitive and the past participle podrido, rotten. The
regular verb pudrir has taken its place in all other cases.
THE IMPERFECT TENSE, INDICATIVE MOOD. 198

Leccidn XXXVI. Lesson XXXVI.

THE IMPERFECT TENSE, INDICATIVE MOOD.

The imperfect indicative is formed by adding the following
terminations to the stem of the verbs :

For the 1st Conjugation: For the 2d and 3d Conjugations:
-aba -ia
-abas -fas
-aba eia
-dbamos -famos
-abais -fais
-aban fan

Nore. — The verbs ser, 2. to be, ver, 2. to see, and ir, 3. to go, are the
only verbs that form an exception to the rule, which refers to all other

regular and irregular verbs.

Habl-aba,
Habl-abas,
Habl-aba,
Habl-dbamos,
Habl-abais,
Habl-aban,

Vend-ia,
Vend-ias,
Vend-ia,
Vend-iamos,
Vend-iais,
Vend-ian,

Ven-ia,
Ven-ias,
Ven-ia,
Ven-famos,
Ven-fais,
Ven-ian,

1st Conjugation.

I spoke or I was speaking.

thou, spokest or thou wast speaking.
he spoke or he was speaking.

we spoke or we were speaking.

you spoke or you were speaking.
they spoke or they were speaking.

2d Conjugation.

I sold or I was selling.

thou soldest or thou wast selling.
he sold or he was selling.

we sold or we were selling.

you sold or you were selling.
they sold or they were selling.

3d Conjugation.

I came or I was coming.

thou camest or thow wast coming.
he came or he was coming.

we came or we were coming.

you came ov you were coming.
they came or they were coming,
200 LESSON 36.

Exceptions.

1. Iba, I went or I was going.
Tbas, thou wentest or thow wast going.
Tha, he went or he was gowg.
Tbamos, we went or we were going.
Ibais, you went or you were going.
Iban, they went or they were going.

2. Veia, I saw or I was seeing.
Veias, thou sawest or thou wast seeing.
Veia, he saw or he was seeing.
Veiamos, we saw or we were seeing.
Veiais, You saw or you were seeing.
Veian, they saw or they were seeing.

3. Era, I was,
Eras, thou wast.
Era, he was.
Eramos, we were,
Erais, you were,
Eran, they were.
Vocabulario. Vocabulary.

El enemigo, the enemy. La fortaleza, the fortress. | Gastar, 1. to spend.
El escritorio, the office. La limonada, the lemonade.| Llamar, 1. to call.

El modo, the way. La luz, the iight. Llegar, 1. to arrive.
El negocio, the business. | La puerta, the door. Mandar, 1. to send.
El oso, the bear. Caro, dear. Mirar, 1. to look at.
El paraguas, the umbrella.| Diferente, different. Ocupar, 1. to occupy.
El tiempo, the time. Creer, 2. to believe. Tocar, 1. to play on.
La elegancia, the elegance. | Entrar, 1. to enter. Vestir, 3. to dress.

Exercise 71.

1. Yo sabfa que su hermano de V. estaba malo la semana pasada,
pero yo crefa que él estaba bueno ahora. 2. j Estaba V. en Francia
enaquel tiempo? 3. St, sefior, yo estaba alli desde dos afios. 4. 5 Qué
hacia V. entonces? 5. Yo estudiaba para ser médico. 6. j Cémo
estaban vestidas las dos sefioras? 7. Estaban vestidas con mucha
elegancia. 8. Yo no sab{a lo que querfan estos hombres. 9. Querian
entrar en la casa para robar. 10. Habldbamos muy bien el francés
cuando éramos jovenes. 11. ; Qué hacia su hermano de V. cuando
IMPERFECT TENSE, INDICATIVE MOOD. 201

estaba en Inglaterra? 12. No hacfa nada, pero gastaba mucho dinero.
13, 4 Cudnto recibia por mes? 14. Mi padre le mandaba doscientos
duros todos los meses. 15. 4 Qué estaban VV. mirando en la calle?
16. Estébamos mirando 4 un hombre que hacia bailar un oso.
17. ; Qué le decia 4 V. aquellasefiora? 18. Me decia que esperaba &
su marido y 4 sus hijos esta noche. 19. ; A quién conocian VV. en
aquella ciudad? 20. No conociamos 4 nadie. 21. ; Qué querian
estos caballeros? 22. Querian verleaé V. 23. Juan queria comprar
mi caballito, pero no tenia bastante dinero. 24. ; A qué hora iba V.
4 casa del médico? 25. Yo iba todas las mafianas 4 las diez y media.
26. ; A quién veia V. en su casa? 27. Yo veia 4 su sefiora y 4 sus
hijos. 28. ; Qué vendia aquella mujer? 29. Ella vend{fa muy buenas
peras. 30. ; A quién daba V. todo su dinero? 31. Yo no lo daba 4
nadie, yo lo prestaba 4 mi primo que hacia muy buenos negocios.
32. Nuestros soldados ocupaban todas las fortalezas del enemigo.
33. 4A qué hora almorzaban VV.? 34. Almorzdbamos muy tem-
prano, pero comiamos muy tarde.

Exercise 72.

1. Who was the man at the door? 2. It was not aman, it was a
little boy. 3. What did he want? 4. He wished to know if Mr.
Charles Marti lived in this house, as (wes) he had a letter for him.
5. Was not the gentleman in his room? 6. He was there this morn-
ing, but he has gone out. 7. Did you not know that my brother had
arrived? 8. Idid not know it. 9. Were you acquainted with Mr.
Arroyo? 10. I knew him very well when he was young. 11. He
was very poor then, but now he is very rich. 12. Why did yon not
wish to buy that house? 13. Because it was too dear, and I had not
money enough. 14. With whom were you in Paris? 15. I was
there with my mother and sisters. 16. Do you know what Charles
was telling me? 17. I could see that he was speaking to you, but I
could not heara word. 18. He was telling me that he knew who
had stolen your umbrella. 19. Where were you going this morning?
20. I was going to my office; I go there now very early. 21. To
whom were you writing this morning? 22. I was writing to all my
friends. 23. Could you see any one in the house? 24. I could see
no one, because there was no light in the room. 25. Who was play-
ing on the piano? 26. My sisters were playing, and my brothers
were singing, 27. Where were you when I was calling you? 28. I
202 LESSON 36.

was in the garden with the children. 29. My friend used to come
every day, but I don’t know where he is now. 30. What did you
drink when you were sick? 31. I drank lemonade.

Gramatica. Grammar.

1. The use of the imperfect, past definite, and past indefi-
nite, which in many cases would have but one form in English,
presents one of the greatest difficulties met by those learning
the Spanish language. The following rules are calculated to
facilitate the task of the student. Practice, reading, and rea-
soning must also be depended upon as the best auxiliaries for
the correct use of the imperfect tense.

1. The imperfect is used to express an action or event which
has already occurred, but which was existing or going on when
another action or event took place:

El estudiaba cuando entraron, He was studying when they entered.

2. This tense is also used to express what was customary or
habitual at a certain past time, and in that case may generally
be rendered in English by prefixing “ used to ”’,to the infinitive
mood, as:

Cuando viviamos en el campo, estu- When we lived (used to live) in
diabamos mucho, the country we studied (used to
study) a great deal.

OBSERVATION. — We should not use the imperfect, however, in speak-
ing of an accidental occurrence :

Sin embargo, una vez, jugamos todo Once, however, we played the whole
el dia, day.

3. The imperfect is also used to describe the qualities of per-
sons or things, and the state, place, or disposition in which they
were in past time.

This tense may, therefore, be called the descriptive tense of

Spanish :
Las muchachas estaban vestidas de The girls were dressed in white, and
blanco, y tentan flores en los ca- had flowers in their hair.

bellos,
THE PAST DEFINITE AND INDEFINITE. 203

Leccion XXXVII.

Lesson XXXVII.

THE PAST DEFINITE OR PRETERIT, AND THE PAST INDEFINITE,

1, The terminations of the past definite are the following

for most verbs :

For the 1st Conjugation. For the 2d and 3d Conjugations.

-6 “i
-aste -iste
6 -i6
-amos -imos
-asteis -isteis
-aron -ieron

lst Conjugation.

Hablar, to speak.
Habl-é, I spoke or I did speak.
Habl-aste, thou spokest or thow didst speak,
Habl-6, he spoke or he did speak.
Habl-amos, we spoke or we did speak.
Habl-asteis, you spoke or you did speak.
Habl-aron, they spoke or they did speak.

Amar, to love. #

Am-6, I loved or I did love.
Am-aste, thou lovedst or thou didst love,
Am-6, he loved or he did love.
Am-amos, we loved or we did love. |
Am-asteis, you loved or you did love.
Am-aron, they loved or they did love,

2d Conjugation.

Vender, to sell.

Vend-i, I sold or I did sell.
Vend-iste, thou soldest or thow didst sell,
Vend-i6, he sold or he did sell.
Vend-imos, we sold or we did sell.

Vend-isteis,
Vend-ieron,

you sold or you did sell.
they sold or they did sell.
204

LESSON 37.

Comer, to eat.

Com-{,
Com-iste,
Com-i6,
Com-imos,
Com-isteis,
Com-ieron,

I ate or I did eat.

thow atest or thou didst eat.
he ate or he did eat.

we ate or we did eat.

you ate or you did eat.
they ate or they did eat.

3d Conjugation.

Recibir, to receive.

Recib-{,
Recib-iste,
Recib-i6,
Recib-imos,
Recib-isteis,
Recib-ieron,

I received or I did receive.

thou receivedst or thow didst recetwve.
he received or he did recetve.

we received or we did receive.

you received or you did receive.
they received or they did receive.

Salir, to go out.

Sal-,
Sal-iste,
Sal-ié6,
Sal-imos,
Sal-isteis,
Sal-ieron,

I went out or I did go out.

thou wentest out or thou didst go out.
he went out or he did go out.

we went out or we did go out.

you went out or you did go out.

they went out or they did go out.

Past Indefinite.

He hablado — vendido — recibido,
etc.,

Has hablado — vendido — recibido,
etc.,

Ha hablado — vendids — recibido,
etc.,

Hemos hablado — vendido — recib-
ido, etc.,

Habéis hablado — vendido — recib-
ido, etc.,

Han hablado — vendido — recibido,
etc.,

I have spoken — sold — received, etc.

thou hast spoken — sold — received,
etc.

he has spoken — sold — received, ete.

we have spoken — sold — received,
etc.

you have spoken — sold — received,
ete.

they have spoken— sold — received,
ete.
HE PAST DEFINITE AND INDEFINITE. 205

Vocabulario. Vocabulary.
El bosque, the wood. Andar, 1. to walk.
El embajador, the ambassador. Asegurar, 1. to assure.
El enemigo, the enemy. Comprender, 2. to understand.
El ladrén, the thief. Derrotar, 1. to defeat.
El lugar, the place. Entrar, 1. ¢o enter.
El veneno, the poison. Esperar, 1. to expect.
La deuda, the debt. Ofrecer, 2. to offer.
La fonda, the hotel. Pelear, 1. to fight.
La posteridad, the posterity. Perder, 2. to lose.
Cansado, tired. Preguntar, 1. to ask.
Colén, Columbus. Presentar, 1. to introduce.
Dios, m., God. Prometer, 2. to promise.
Romano, Roman. Responder, 2. to answer.
Abrir, 3. to open. Salir, 3. to leave, to go out.
Aconsejar, to advise. Vencer, 2. to conquer.

 

Exercise 73.

1. Don Juan me pregunté si V. estaba en su cuarto. 2. 4 Y qué
respondié V.? 3. Respondi que yo no sabja, pero que él pod{a subir
aver. 4. El general presentd los oficiales al principe. 5. Mi padre
vendid su casa al tio de V. 6. 4Sabe V. lo que pagé por ella?
7. Pagd mucho menos de lo que valfa. 8. 4 Cudnto dinero recibieron
VV.? 9. Recibimos como trescientos duros. 10. Dios prometid 4
Abrahan una grande posteridad. 11. 4 Conoce V. 4 este caballero ?
12. Le he conocido en Paris. 138. ; Cuando vid V. 4 Carlito? 14. Le
vi el mes pasado en Boston donde estaba con su padre. 15. 4A qué
hora comieron VV. ayer? 16. Comimos 4 la misma hora que los
otros dias. 17. ; Con quién hablo V. en el escritorio? 18. Hablé
con el dependiente del banquero. 19. , Han escrito VV. sus cartas?
20. Las escribimos anoche ; { sabe V. si ha salido el vapor? 21. Salid
ayer 4 las cuatro de la tarde. 22. 4 Quién bebid el vino? 23. Yo no
sé quién bebié el vino, pero sé muy bien quién comié los bollos,
24. Los enemigos perdieron diez mil hombres en aquella batalla.
25. José (Joseph) me aseguré que él habia pagado todas sus ceudas,
pero yo le respond{ que no lo crefa. 26. Cuando Anibal vid 4 los
embajadores romanos, tomé veneno. 27. El enfermo queria salir
esta mafiana, pero el médico no lo permitid, 28. Los muchachos
abrieron la puerta del jardin y entraron en él. 29. Colén descubrid
la América en el afio 1492. . 30. El pobre Felipe perdié todo su dinero
206 LESSON 37.

en aquella especulacién. 31. Los ladrones entraron en aquella casa
y robaron todo lo que hallaron. 32. Trabajamos muchisimo hoy, y
estamos muy cansados. 33. ;A quién vieron VV. en el teatro’
34. Vimos 4 todos nuestros amigos. 35. Los Romanos vencieron 4
todas las naciones del mundo.

Exercise 74.

1. Why did you not write to your brother? 2. I wrote to him
but he did not answer me. 3. Did you see Mr. Martin? 4. I did
not see him, I was not in the city when he was here. 5. The general
lost the battle, but his soldiers fought with much courage. 6. Have
you studied your lessons? 7. We studied them last night. 8. Did
you go out with your sister when she was here? 9. We went out
every day. 10. Who took my book? 11. Nobody took it ; it is in
the same place yet. 12. Did you receive what you were expecting ?
13. We have not received anything yet. 14. Did you understand
that man? 15. I understood everything, although he spoke French.
16. Did you ever study French? 17. I spoke it very well when I
was younger. 18. Did your brother sell his horses? 19. He sold
two of them, and he sent the other to the country. 20. Why did he
not lend it to you? 21. Because I have a horse myself. 22. Why
did not your sister dance at the ball? 23. Because she was not very
well, and she only stayed (se quedé) half an hour. 24. Does she know
how to dance? 25. She learned all the new dances during the win-
ter. 26. The thieves killed a poor man in the forest. 27. Our
soldiers defeated the enemy and took their principal cities. 28. That
little boy ate too much last night ; and to-day he is sick. 29. My
brother saw your mother when he was in England; did she reside
along time in that country? 30. She resided there for two years.
31. The man killed the dog because he bit his little boy. 32. Where
did you breakfast this morning? 33. I breakfasted in the French
hotel where you saw me last week. 34. Did you drink anything at
his house? 35. He did not offer us anything.

Gramiatica. Grammar.

1. The past definite or preterit and the past indefinite are
used in aJ] those cases of past time where the imperfect cannot
THE PAST DEFINITE AND INDEFINITE. 207

be used. The preterit, however, is used more especially to ex-
press an action which took place but once, and when the time at
which the action took place Aas entirely elapsed.

The preterit is, therefore, especially used in narrative style,
and is also designated as the pretérito histérico:

Pedro el Cruel no respeté las leyes, Peter the Cruel did not respect the

y se porté mal con sus aliados. laws, and acted dishonorably

towards his allies,

2, The preterit may, however, be used when there is con-
cinuation of time; but, in this case, the action must have taken
place at a remote period, and the time must be designated :
Roma fué por mas de dos siglos la Rome was for more than two centu-

sefiora del orbe, ries the mistress of the world.

3. The same tense is also very often used to express cus-
tomary and repeated actions or qualities, when it is intended to
express the time rather than the action. When we say:

Napoledn era (¢mperf.) gran guerrero, Napoleon was a great warrior,

we express the quality, but when we say:
Napoledn fué (preterit) gran guerrero,

we think of the time in which he was living.

4. The preterit may be rendered in English according to
the meaning of the sentence by its corresponding form, or by
the auxiliary did, which has no equivalent in Spanish :

Comimos ayer en su casa, We dined yesterday at his house.
No sali anoche, I did not go out last night.

5. The past indefinite is used to express a past action when
the time at which it took place belongs to a period of time
(day, week, month, year, etc.) not entirely elapsed :

Hoy he estado en la iglesia, I hawe been to church to-day.
No he ido al teatro este aiio, I have not been to the theater this year.

6, The past indefinite is also used to express an action but
lately performed :

He leido los papelas, I have read the papers,
208 LESSON 387.

It is furthermore used to express the successes or merits of a
person when we wish to give more expression to the sentence ;

Napoleon (has) conquered in a short
time Italy and Germany.

Napoleén ha conquistado en poco
tiempo Italia y Alemania,

1. General Observations on the imperfect, preterit, and past
indefinite.

The imperfect can seldom be rendered in English by the past tense which
takes did as an auxiliary except when in interrogative sentences did is
used as an auxiliary to used to, either expressed or understood.

The preterit never corresponds like the imperfect to the English imper-
fect, composed of the auxiliary and the gerund, nor can it be rendered by
a verb preceded by used to.

The three tenses above mentioned offer in their application a certain
difficulty, as they are sometimes obligatory, and sometimes optional ; or, in
other words, their use is sometimes a question of grammar, and sometimes
only @ question of style.

When several sentences concur to the same end, as in the following nar-
rative, it is not always an easy matter to determine whether the student
should use the imperfect or another tense, the preterit for instance, as he
has to take into consideration not only the special shade of meaning of each
verb, but also the general tenor of the other sentences forming the whole of the
narration. As already stated, the imperfect is used as a descriptive tense,
while the preterit is only used as a narrative tense.

All the imperfects of the following Spanish translation are printed in
ttalics.

Era poco mas de mediodia cuando Jt was a little more than midday

entraron los Espafioles en su alo-
jamiento, y hallaron prevenido un
banquete regalado y espléndido
para Cortés y los cabos de su
ejército, con grande abundancia
de bastimentos menos delicados
para el resto de la gente, y mu-
chos Indios de servicio que su-
ministraban los manjares y las
bebidas con igual silencio y pun-
tualidad. Por la tarde vino Mon-

when the Spaniards entered their
lodgings, and found a delicate
and splendid banquet prepared for
Cortes and the captains of his
army, and at the same time a
great abundance of less delicate
provisions for the remainder of
the people, while many Indians,
attending to the service, brought ia
the eatables and beverages with
equal silence and punctuality,
TRREGULARITIES OF THE PRETERIT.

tezuma con la misma pompa y
acompaiiamiento, a visitar 4
Cortés, que, avisado poco antes,
salid 4 recibirle hasta el patio
principal, con todo el obsequio
debido 4 semejante favor. Acom-
paidle hasta la puerta de su
cuarto, donde le hizo una profunda
reverencia, y él pasd 4 tomar su
asiento con despejo y gravedad.
Mand6 luego que acercasen otro 4
Cortés: hizo sefia para que se
apartasen & la pared los caballeros
que andaban cerca de su persona,
y Cortés advirtid lo mismo 4 los
capitanes que le asistian,

Llegaron los intérpretes, y cuando
se preventa Cortés para dar prin-
cipio 4 su oracién, le detuvo Mote-
zuma, dando 4 entender que tenta
gve hablar antes de oir, y se refiere
que discurrié en esta sustancia:

209

Montezuma came in the afternoon
with the same pomp and retinue
to visit Cortes, and the latter hav-
ing been informed of this some time
before, came out to receive him as
Jar as the principal court, with all
the courtesy due to such w favor.
Cortes accompanied him as far
as the door of his room, where he
made a deep bow to him, and
Montezuma passed on and took his
seat with ease and gravity. He
then ordered that they should bring
forward another seat for Cortes,
and made a sign to the nobles who
walked near his person to with-
draw as far as the wall, while
Cortes did the same to the captains
who followed him.

The interpreters then arrived, and as
Cortes was preparing to commence
his discourse, Montezuma stopped
him, giving him to understand
that he had to speak before he
would listen, and it is related that
he spoke thus :

 

Leccion XXXVIII.

Lesson XXXVIII.

IRREGULARITIES OF THE PRETERIT.

1. Tener, 2. to have.
Tuve, I had (did have).
Tuviste, thou hadst.
Tuvo, he had.

Tuvimos, we had.
Tuvisteis, you had.
Tuvieron, they had.

IL

2. Estar, 1. to be,
Estuve, I was.
Estuviste, thou wast,
Estuvo, he was.
Estuvimos, we were.
Estuvisteis, you were.
Estuvieron, they were.
210

3. Hacer, 2. to make, to do.
Hice, I made or I did make.
Hiciste, thou madest.

Hizo, he made.

Hicimos, we made.
Hicisteis, you made.
Hicieron, they made.

5. Poder, 2. to be able.
Pude, I was able or I could.
Pudiste, thou wast able.
Pudo, he was able.
Pudimos, we were able.
Pudisteis, you were able.
Pudieron, they were able.

7. Saber, 2. to know.

Supe, J knew or I did know,
Supiste, chow didst know.
Supo, he knew.

Supimos, we knew.
Supisteis, you knew.
Supieron, they knew.

9. Haber, 2. to have (auxiliary and
impersonal).

Hube, J had (did have).

Hubiste, thow hadst.

Hubo, he had.

Hubimos, we had.

Hubisteis, you had,

Hubieron, they had.

11, Caber, 2, to be contained.
Cupe, Z was contained.
Cupiste, thow wast contained,
Cupo, he was contained.
Cupimos, we were contained.
Cupisteis, you were contained.
Cupieron, éhey were contained.

LESSON 38.

4. Querer, 2. to wish, to be willing.
Quise, I wished or I did wish.
Quisiste, thow wishedst.

Quiso, he wished.

Quisimos, we wished.

Quisisteis, you wished.

Quisieron, they wished,

6. Poner, 2. to put.
Puse, I put or I did put.
Pusiste, thou didst put.
Puso, he put.

Pusimos, we put.
Pusisteis, you put.
Pusieron, they put.

8. Decir, 3. to say, to tell.
Dije, I said or I did say.
Dijiste, chow satdst.

Dijo, he said.

Dijimos, we said.
Dijisteis, you said.
Dijeron, they said,

10. Andar, 1. to walk.

Anduve, I walked or I did walb
Anduviste, thow didst walk.
Anduvo, he walked.
Anduvimos, we walked.
Anduvisteis, you walked.
Anduvieron, they walked.

12. Traer, 2. to bring.

Traje, I brought or I did bring
Trajiste, thou didst bring.
Trajo, he brought.

Trajimos, we brought.
Trajisteis, you brought,
Trajeron, they brought.
IRREGULARITIES OF THE PRETERIT. 211

18. Conducir, 3. to conduct, to take.

Conduje, J conducted or I did conduct.

Condujiste, thow didst conduct.
Condujo, he conducted.
Condujimos, we conducted.
Condujisteis, you conducted.
Condujeron, they conducted.

1. Dar, 1. to give.
Di, I gave.

Diste, thou gavest.
Did, he gave.
Dimos, we gave.
Disteis, you gave.
Dieron, they gave.

1. Sentir, 3. to feel.
Senti, I felt or I did feel.
Sentiste, thou feltest.
Sintid, he felt.
Sentimos, we felt.
Sentisteis, you felt.
Sintieron, they felt.

8. Dormir, 3. to sleep.
Dormi, J slept.

Dormiste, thou didst sleep,
Durmid, he slept.
Dormimos, we slept.
Dormisteis, you slept.
Durmieron, they slept.

14. Venir, 3. to come.
Vine, I came or I did come.
Veniste, thow camest.

Vino, he came.

Venimos, we came.
Venisteis, you came.
Vinieron, they came.

2. Ser, 2. to be, and Ir, fo go.
Fui, J was; I went or I did go.
Fuiste, thow wast ; thou wentest.
Fué, he was ; he went.

Fuimos, we were; we went.
Fuisteis, you were; you went.
Fueron, they were ; they went,

2. Pedir, 3. to ask for.

Pedi, I asked or I did ask for.
Pediste, thou didst ask for.
Pidid, he asked for.

Pedimos, we asked for.
Pedisteis, you asked for.
Pidieron, they asked for.

4. Morir, 3. to die.
Mort, I died or I did die.
Moriste, thou diedst.
Murid, he died.
Morimos, we died.
Moristeis, you died,
Marieron, they aeea.
212 LESSON 38.

Vocabulario. Vocabulary.
El Arabe, the Arab. Hasta, t222, until, as far of
El cartero, the postman. Indomable, indomitable.
El cielo, the heaven. Mismo, very, self.
El huraedn, the kurricane. Ocupado, busy.
El instante, the instant. Rémulo, Romulus.
El Romano, the Roman. Asolar, 1. to devastate.
La muerte, the death. Caer, 2. to fall.
La nacién, the nation. Consolar, 1. to comfort.
Afuera, out. Dejar, 1. to leave.
A pie, on foot. Derribar, 1. to upset.
Cansado, tired. Echar (1.) 4 pique, to founder,
Después, afterwards, then. Nacer, 2, to be born.
Dios, m., God. Presentar, 1. to present.
En seguida, immediately, Sentir, 3. to feel, to regret.
Galileo, Galileo. Someter, 2. to subdue.

 

Exercise 75.

1, 4 Dénde estuvo V. esta mafiana? 2, Estuve todo el tiempo en
micuarto. 3. 4 Durmiéd bienelenfermo? 4. Durmié hasta las cinco
esta mafiana, y después estuvo mejor. 5. En el afio de 1846 hubo en
la Habana un terrible huracan que eché 4 pique muchos barcos, derribé
casas y asolé muchas haciendas, 6. Mi amigo vino con nosotros hasta
la puerta, pero no quiso entrar. 7. Tuvimos muy buen tiempo en
nuestro viaje. 8. ; Porqué no hablé V. con mi padre? 9. No pude
Lablarle, estaba tan ocupado que me dijo que no pod{fa oirme.
10. ; Supieron VV. sus lecciones hoy? 11. Las supimos muy bien.
12. ; Quién le did 4 V. tanto dinero? 13. Pedi cien duros 4 mi padre,
y otros cien duros 4 mi tfo, y me los dieron en seguida. 14. ; Sabe
V. dénde puse mi bastén? 15. V. lo ha dejado en el otro cuarto.
16. j Quién trajo esto aqui? 17. No sé, pero creo que es el hombre
que vino anoche. 18. 4, Ha venido el cartero? 19. En este mismo
instante ; ahi tiene V. las cartas. 20. 4 Quién fué el primer rey de
Roma? 21. Rémulo fué el primero. 22. ; Creyé V. esto? 23. Sf, lo
cref, y todo el mundo lo creyé también. 24. El general murié en la
batalla. 25. ; Estuvo V. anoche en el teatro? 26, No, sefior; estuve
en el concierto. 27. Los hermanos Rodriguez estuvieron aquf ayer,
sentimos muchisimo haber (having) estado afuera. 28. j Oyé V. lo
que dijo este hombre? 29. Oi todo lo que dijo. 30. El caballero
que vino ayer esata todavia durmiendo}; nos dijo que venia muy can:
REGULARITIES OF THE PRETERIT. 213

sado del viaje. 31. Newton nacié en el mismo afioen que muridé
Galileo, 32. ; Porqué no quiso V. ir al parque con los otros cabal-
ieros? 33. Porque no quisieron ir 4 pie. 34. Mi padre vino en este
pais cuando tenia veinte afios. 35. El banquero dié un baile la
semana pasada.

Exercise 76.

1. What did that man tell you? 2. He told me that he had no
money, and that he could not pay you. 3. The Arabs were always
an indomitable nation; the Romans themselves could not subdue
them. 4. Louis X[V. was a great king. 5. He read the letter and
gave it to his father. 6. The general presented his sons to the king.
7. They gave all their money to the poor. 8. My brother went first
to France and then to England. 9, The rain fell for (durante) three
days. 10. He brought a great deal of money, and bought many things
for his friends. 11. He took his friend by the hand and presented
him to his father. 12. God made the heaven and the earth. 13. We
had very bad weather in the country. 14. He put the money on the
table and went out. 15. Several generals died in that battle. 16. We
felt the cold more this year than last year. 17. What did your sister
do when she heard of the death of her best friend? 18. She wept a
great deal, and we could not comfort her. 19. The children went to
the park witb their father. 20. We could not do that, and nobody
in the house could do it. 21. Why could you not write to him?
22. Because I did not know what to write. 23. The boy came and
brought this letter for you. 24. My father gave us money and we
went to the theater. 25. Why did you not come earlier? 26. We
could not come because we were very busy. 27. What did you do in
the city? 28. We bought all the things that we needed. 29. Napo-
leon was a great general. 30. Did you ask him for the money?
31. I only asked him for twenty dollars, and he gave them to me.
32. We were very well received by your family.

Gramatica. Grammar.

1, As seen above, the verbs tener, 2. to have; estar, 1.
to be ; hacer, 2. to make, to do ; querer, 2. to wish, to be willing ;
poder, 2. to be able; poner, 2. to put; saber, 2. to know;
Qecir, 3. to say, to tell; haber, 2. to have (auxiliary and im-
214 LESSON 38,

personal); andar, 1. to walk ; caber, 2. to be contained ; traer,
2. to bring ; conducir, 3. to conduct, to take; and venir, 3. to
come; have the same terminations for the preterit, namely;

-e _—-iste “0 -imos -isteis -ieron,

the accent in the first and third persons singular being on the
stem instead of on the ending.

2, The verb dar, 1. to give, unlike the other verbs of the 1st
conjugation, takes, for the preterit, the terminations of the
regular verbs of the 2d and 3d conjugations, namely :

i -iste -i6 -imos -isteis = -ieron.

3. The verbs ser, 2. to be, and ir, 3. to go, as shown, have
the same preterit, namely :
f-ui f-uiste f-ué f-uimos f-uisteis f-ueron.

4, Verbs like pedir, 3. to ask for; sentir, 3. to feel, to re-
gret, etc., which in the gerund change the e into i (pidiendo,
sintiendo, etc.), change also the same letter in the 3d person
singular and 3d person plural of the preterit (pidid, pidieron;
sintio, sintieron, etc.).

Verbs like dormir, 3. ¢o sleep ; morir, 3. to die; etc., which
in the gerund change the o into u (durmiendo, muriendo,
etc.), change also the same letter in the 3d person singular and
3d person plural of the preterit (durmid, durmieron ; murid,
murieron, etc.).

5. Verbs ending in the infinitive in car, change in the
preterit ¢ into qu before e: tocar, 1. to touch; toqué, I touched
or I did touch; etc.

Verbs ending in gar insert a u before the e in the same
tense: jugar, 1. to play; jugué, J played or I did play ; etc.

Verbs ending in eer change the ¢ of the third person endings
into y beforee: creer, 2. to believe ; ereyeron, they believed ; etc.

Verbs ending in uir change the 7 of the third person endings
into y before e: huir, 3. ¢o flee ; huyeron, they fled ; etc.

OBSERVATION.— The changes above given also take place in other tenses
and, in the two last cases, also before the letters a and o.
THE PAST ANTERIOR AND THE PLUPERFECT. 215

Leeci6n XXXIX.

Lesson XXXIX.

THE PAST ANTERIOR AND THE PLUPERFECT.

Past Anterior.

Hube hablado, J had spoken.
Hubiste hablado, thou hadst spoken.
Hubo hablado, he had spoken.
Hubimos hablado, we had spoken.
Hubisteis hablado, you had spoken.

Pluperfect.

Habia hablado, I had spoken.
Habias hablado, thou hadst spoken.
Habia hablado, he had spoken.
Habiamos hablado, we had spoken.
Habiais hablado, you had spoken.

Hubieron hablado, they had spoken. Habian hablado, they had spoken.

Vocabulario. Vocabulary.

El heredero, the heir. Tan pronto como,

El nombre, the name. Luego que,

El periddico, the newspaper. Asi que, Soe
El vapor, the steamer. Al punto que,

La noticia, the news. Ya, already.

Comer, 2. to dine.
Consultar, 1. to consult.
Contener, 2. to contain.
Entregar, 1. to hand.
Llevar, 1. to take.
Merecer, 2. to deserve.

La palabra, the word.

La urbanidad, the urbanity.
Abierto, opened.

A caballo, on horseback.
Amistoso, friendly.
Apenas, hardly, no sooner.

 

Aun, yet. Montar, 1. to mount.
Cuando, when. Olvidar, 1. to forget.
Después que, a/ter. Pronunciar, 1. to pronownce.
Que, when. Tomar, 1. to take.

Triste, sad. Visitar, 1. to visit.

Exercise 77.

1, ; Qué hizo V. cuando hubo almorzado? 2. Tan pronto como
hube almorzado, volvi 4 mi escritorio. 3. Asi que me hubo visto,
me dié el dinero. 4. Apenas me hubo dicho estas palabras, cuando
salid. 5. Luego que hubo lefdo la carta, montd 4 caballo y salid de
laciudad. 6. 4 Dénde habia olvidado V. su bastén? 7. Yo no habia
olvidado mi bastén, habia olvidado mi paraguas, lo que era peor,
pues comenzé 4 lover muchisimo. 8. Cuando hubo visitado la casa,
dijo que no queria comprarla. 9. Yo habfa salido cuando entraron

los ladrones en mi cuarto. 10. Cuando hubieron abierto la puerta,
216 LESSON 39.

vieron que no habfa nada que robar. 11. Guillermo no habfa apren-
dido su leccién, y habia sido castigado como lo merecia. 12. Después
que hubo visto 4 su amigo, estuvo més satisfecho. 13. 4 Habia re-
cibido su padre lacarta cuando salid? 14. Aun no la habia recibido.
15, Cuando hulo comido, tomé su sombrero y dijo que tenia que
salir. 16, Me entregé el dinero tan pronto como lo hubo recibido.
17. Cuando hubo vendido su casa, compré otra mas grande.
18. Cuando le hube dicho mi nombre, me recibid con la mayor
urbanidad. 19, Al punto que me hubo visto, me saludé muy cor-
tésmente. 20. Me presté el libro asi que le hube dado otro.
21. Después que hubo legado, me escribid una carta muy amistosa,
22. Luego que hubo muerto el general, vendieron los herederos la
casa. 23. Ya habia yo leido la carta cuando llegd mi hermano.
24. ; Habia hablado V. al médico? 25. Si, yo le habia consultade
varias veces.

Exercise 78.

1. When he had said what he had to say, he left (salié de) the
house. 2. As soon as the father had read what the letter of his son
contained, he handed it tome. 3. Hardly had he said that when his
friend entered. 4. What did you do when you had dined? 5, I
went to my friend’s, who took me to the theater. 6, When I had
written my letters I went out. 7. As soon as I had finished my
work I gave it to him. 8. After he had visited the city he returned
to the country. 9. We had hardly breakfasted when we heard the
news. 10. Had you seen my lawyer? 11. I had seen yours and
mine. 12. The children had told me that you had gone out. 13. I
wished to go out, but I had no umbrella and it was raining.
14. When they heard that I had received good news they all came to
(4) seeme. 15, When they had read the newspapers they wrote their
letters. 16. After they had seen our house they wished to buy it,
but my father would not sell it. 17. The steamers had arrived, but
we had not received any letters. 18. The father had died without
seeing (ver) his sons. 19. Why had you opened the door? 20. Be-
cause I was too warm with the door closed. 21. Mr. Martin had not
arrived this morning when I was at his house. 22. Had you not
heard that he was yet in Boston? 23. I had not heard anything.
24. ‘To whom had you spoken? 25. I had spoken to the servants.
THE PAST ANTERIOR AND THE PLUPERFECT. 217

Gramatica. Grammar.

1, The past anterior is formed from the preterit of the
auxiliary haber, to Aave, and the past participle of the verb;
while the pluperfect of the indicative is composed of the imper-
fect indicative of the same auxiliary, and the past participle of
the verb:

Cuando hube reconocido (past ante- When I had perceived my error, I
rior) mi error, me avergonzé de lo was ashamed of what I had
que habia hecho (pluperfect). done.

2. The past anterior generally expresses that an action took
place immediately before another past action or event.

This tense is principally used after one of the conjunctions:
después que, after; luego que, asi que, al momento que, al
punto que, as soon as; apenas, hurdly, scarcely, no sooner.

Después que — asi que — cuando After — as soon as — when he had

hubo comido, salid, dined, he went out.
Se embarcéd luego que hubo recibido He embarked as soon as he had re-
el pasaporte, ceived the passport.

OBsERVATIONS. —1. As seen by the examples given, the verb of the
principal sentence must be in the preterit when the tense of the subordi-
nate sentence is in the anterior.

2. The conjunctions and conjunctive locutions above given do not neces-
sarily require the verb to be put in the past anterior tense; they may be
frequently used with other tenses :

Asi que hemos comido, vamos a pa- —-As soon as we have dined we go and
sear, take a walk.

Apenas tuvo el dinero cuando me He hardly had the money when he
pagé, paid me.

3. The pluperfect marks an action or event not only as past
in itself, but also past with regard to some other past action or
event :

Habfamos pensado que V. vendria We had thought that you would
temprano, come early.

OBSERVATION. — Nearly all the rules given for the imperfect may be
applied to the pluperfect.
218

Leccién XL.

LESSON 40.

Lesson XI.

THE FUTURE AND FUTURE ANTERIOR.

Regular Verbs-

1st Conjugation.

Amar, to love.

Amar-6, I shall or will love.
Amar-4s, thow shalt or wilt love.
Amar-4, he shall or will love.
Amar-emos, we shall or will love.
Amar-éis, you shall or will love.
Amar-dn, they shall or will love.

Hablar, to speak.

Hablar-6, J shall or will speak.
Hablar-ds, thou shalt or wilt speak.
Hablar-4, he shall or will speak.
Hablar-emos, we shall or will speak.
Hablar-éis, you shall or will speak.
Hablar-dn, they shall or will speak.

2d Conjugation.

Comer, fo eat.

Comer-6é, J shall or will eat.
Comer-4s, thou shalt or wilt eat.
Comer-&, he shall or will eat.
Comer-emos, we shall or will eat.
Comer-éis, you shall or will eat.
Comer-4n, they shall or will eat.

Beber, to drink.

Beber-6, I shall or will drink.
Beber-as, thou shalt or wilt drink.
Beber-&, he shall or will drink.
Beber-emos, we shall or will drink.
Beber-6is, you shall or will drink.
Beber-én, they shall or will drink.

3d Conjugation.

Recibir, to receive.
Recibir-6, Z shall or will receive.

Recibir-4s, thow shalt or wilt receive.

Recibir-&, he shall or will receive.

Recibir-emos, we shall or will receive.
Recibir-éis, you shall or wtil receive.
Recibir-dn, they shall or wil! recive.

Partir, to depart.

Partir-6, I shall or will depart.
Partir-48, thou shalt or wilt depart.
Partir-&, he shail or will depart.
Partir-emos, we shall or will depart.
Partir-éis, you shall or will depart.
Partir-dn, they shall or will depart.

Irregular Features,

1. Hacer, 2. to do, to make.
Haré, I shall or will do.
Hards, thou shalt or wilt do.
Hara, he shall or will do.
Haremos, we shall or will do.
Haris, you shall or will do.
Haran, they shall or will do.

2. Poder, 2. to be able.

Podré, I shall or will be able.
Podras, thou shalt or wilt be able.
Podra, he shall or wiil be able.
Podremos, we shall or will be able.
Podréis, you shall or will be able.
Podran, they shall or will be able.
THE FUTURE AND

8. Poner, 2. to put.

Pondré, I shall or will put.
Pondras, thow shalt or wilt put.
Pondra, he shall or will put.
Pondremos, we shall or will put.
Pondréis, you shall or will put.
Pondran, they shall or will put.

5. Saber, 2. to know.

Sabré, I shall or will know.
Sabras, thou shalt or wilt know.
Sabra, he shall or will know.
Sabremos, we shall or will know.
Sabréis, you shall or will know.
Sabran, they shall or will know.

7. Venir, 3. to come.

Vendré, I shall or will come.
Vendras, thow shalt or wilt come.
Vendra, he shall or will come.
Vendremos, we shall or will come.
Vendréis, you shall or will come.
Vendran, they shall or will come.

9. Salir, 3. to go out.

Saldré, I shall or will go out.
Saldras, thou shalt or wilt go out.
Saldra, he shall or will go out.
Saldremos, we shall or will go out.
Saldréis, you shall or will go out.
Saldran, they shall or will go out.

11. Tener, 2. to have.

Tendré, I shall or will have.
Tendras, thou shalt or wilt have.
Tendra, he shall or will have.
Tendremos, we shall or will have.
Tendréis, you shall or will have.
Tendr4n, they shall or will have.

FUTURE ANTERIOR. 219

4. Querer, 2. to wish, to be willing.
Querré, I shald or will wish,
Querras, thou shalt or wilt wish.
Querra, he shall or will wish.
Querremos, we shall or will wish.
Querréis, you shall or will wish.
Querran, they shail or will wish.

6. Valer, 2. to be worth.

Valdré, I shall or will be worth.
Valdras, thou shalt or wilt be worth.
Valdra, he shall or will be worth.
Valdremos, we shall or will be worth.
Valdréis, you shall or will be worth,
Valdran, they shall or will be worth.

8. Decir, 3. to say, to tell.
Diré, Z shail or will say.
Dirds, thow shalt or wilt say.
Diva, he shali or will say.
Diremos, we shall or will say.
Diréis, you shall or will say.
Diran, they shall or will say.

10. Caber, to be contained.

Cabré, I shall be contained.

Cabras, thou shalt or wilt be contained.
Cabra, he shall or will be contained.
Cabremos, we shall or will be contained.
Cabreéis, you shall or will be contained.
Cabran, they shall or will be contained.

12. Haber, 2. to have.

Habré, Z shall or will have.
Habras, thow shalt or wilt have.
Habra, he shall or will have.
Habremos, we shall or will have.
Habréis, you shall or will have.
Habran, they shall or will have.

 

Note. — The verb ir, 3. to go, although one of the most irregular verbs
in Spanish, forms its future regularly.
220 LESSON 40.

Vocabulario. Vocabulary.
El mérito, the merit. Pronto, soon. Pasar, 1. to pass.
El negocio, the business. Segin, according to. Pensar, 1. to think.
La procesién, the procession.) Siempre, always. Perdonar, 1. to forgive,
Asi que, so that. Acabar, 1. to finish. Prometer,2. to promise,
Junio, m., June. Asegurar, 1. to assure. | Tratar, 1. to treat.
Necesario, necessary. Enriquecer, 2. to enrich.| Vencer, 2. to conquer.

Exercise 79.

1. 4 Cuando vendré V. 4 vernos? 2. Iremos un dia de estos,
cuando no estemos tan ocupados. 3. 4Cémo lo sabr4 V.? 4. Mi
hermano me lo dird. 5. Veré muy pronto si V. sabra sus lecciones.
6. Le aseguro 4 V. que las sabré. 7. El panadero vino esta majiana
y dijo que no podré volver hoy. 8. ; Cuando tendra V. el dinero?
9. Lotendré esta tarde. 10. ; Aqué hora comeremos hoy? 11. Come-
remos muy temprano. 12. ; Cudndo habra acabado V. su trabajo?
13. Lo habré acabado majiana por la mafiana. 14. 4 Qué beberd V.?
15. Beberé agua si V. no tiene vino. 16. Hoy recibiremos todo lo
jue necesitamos. 17. ;Qué haran VV. si no tienen dinero?
18. Haremos lo que siempre hemos hecho. 19. 4 Vendrd su _her-
mano de V. hoy? 20. Vendré si tiene tiempo. 21. 4 Qué dira su
padre si sabe esto? 22. Dir& que V. ha hecho muy mal en no con-
sultarle. 23. 4 Cuando saldran los muchachos? 24. No saldran hoy,
pues el tiempo esté malisimo. 25. ; No ird V. al concierto de la
sefiorita Abel? 26. No podré ir, pues no estaré en laciudad. 27. Dios
nos trataré segin nuestros méritos. 28. V. no habra acabado su
trabajo mafiana, porque V. no trabaja bastante ; y yo habré acabado
el mio, porque trabajo sin perder (losing) un momento. 29. j Cree V.
que Juan hard lo quele hedicho? 30. Elno querr4hacerlo. 31. Mis
hermanas han ido al campo, pero volverdn la semana que viene.
32. Espero que mi amigo me perdonar4. 33. V. podrd salir tan pronto
como habra acabado lo que tiene que hacer. 34. ; Qué diran VV.
4 estos hombres? 35. No les hablaremos.

Exercise 80.

1. When will you receive letters from your family? 2. I shall re-
ceive one to-morrow. 3. This business will enrich us all. 4. Will
you write tome? 5. I will write to you every week. 6. When will
you go out with the children? 7. I will go out this afternoon
THE FUTURE AND FUTURE ANTERIOR. 221

8. They will conquer or die. 9. Will you be able to do it without me}
10. I don’t know if I shall be able to doit. 11. How much money
will you give to your brother? 12. I will give him enough for his
journey. 13. Will it be necessary to tell him anything? 14. It will
be better (valdré mds) not to say anything. 15. If we go to his house,
he will treat us well. 16. Do you think that I shall be able to speak
Spanish in two years? 17. You will speak pretty well, if you are will-
ing to study. 18. When will the procession pass? 19. It will pass
at three o’clock. 20. I will go and (é) see them as soon as I shall
have finished this work. 21. If we go out now, our teacher will see
us. 22. When will your cousin go to the country? 23. He will go in
the month of June. 24. When will you send me the book that you
promised me? 25. I will send it to you to-morrow morning.
26. Shall you be at home this afternoon? 27. Yes, sir, I shall be
(there), 28. My friend has not received any letter, so that he will
not be able to tell you anything. 29. Will it be necessary to go to
your house this evening? 30. It will not be necessary. 31. How
much money shall you receive? 32. I don’t know how much I shall
receive. 33. Have the boys finished their lessons? 34. They will
soon have done (finished). 35. I know what he has said, but I shall
not say a word.

Gramatica. Grammar.

1. The future of regular verbs is regularly formed by adding
to the present infinitive the following terminations:
6 -ds -4 -emos -éis -dn
The termination of the future is the same for all verbs,

whether regular or irregular, the stem alone being changed for
the latter.

2,.The verb satisfacer, 2. fo satisfy, is conjugated like
hacer, 2. to do, to make; the f being, however, preserved
through the conjugation: satisfago, J satisfy, satisfaré, I shall
or will satisfy, etc.

3. Caber, 2. to contain, to be contained, has the same irregu-
larity as poder, 2. to be able, and makes cabré, etc., in the
future.
222 LESSON 40.

4, All the other verbs which form their future irregularly,
have been given above. Their derivatives are conjugated in
the same way.

Thus : componer, 2. to mend, deponer, 2. to lay down, dis.
poner, 2. to dispose, oponer, 2. to oppose, etc., are conjugated
in the future like poner, 2. fo put.

Contener, 2. to contain, detener, 2. to detain, obtener, 2. te
obtain, etc., are conjugated like tener, 2. to have.

Equivaler, 2. to be equivalent, is conjugated like valer, 2. to
be worth.

OxssERVATION. — Valer mas, lit.: to be worth more, is often rendered in
English by to be better.

Avenir, 3. to happen, convenir, 3. to agree, intervenir, 3. to
interfere, etc., form their future like venir, 3. to come.

Predecir, 3. to foretell, contradecir, 3. to contradict, desdecir,
3. to deny, form their future like decir, 3. to say, to tell.

Bendecir, 3. ¢o bless, and maldecir, 3. to curse, of which the
past participle is bendecido (or bendito}, and also maldito,
form, however, their future regularly :

Bendeciré, J shall or will bless. Bendeciremos, we shail or will bicss.
Bendeciras, thou shalt or wilt bless. | Bendeciréis, you shall or will bless.
Bendecira, he shall or will bless. Bendeciran, they shall or will bless.

5. The future is often used in Spanish instead of the im-
perative:
Irds 4 la plaza y compraras un pollo, Go to the market and buy a chicken.

6, The future anterior is formed from the past participle of
the verb conjugated with the future of the auxiliary haber,
to have:

Habré acabado esta noche, = 1 shall have jinished to-night.
SUBJUNCTIVE MOOD. 223

Leccion XLI. Lesson XLI.

SUBJUNCTIVE MOOD.
Present.

1. The present subjunctive is formed by adding the follow:
ing endings to the stem of the first person present indicative :

For the 1st Conjugation. For the 2d and 3d Conjugations.
6 -emos a -amos
+08 -6i8 a8 -dis
6 “en a "an

Ist Conjugation.

Hablar, to speak.

Que yo habl-e,

Que ti habl-es,

Que él habl-e,

Que nosotros habl-emos,
Que vosotros habl-éis,
Que ellos habl-en,

that I may speak.

that thou mayest speak.
that he may speak.
that we may speak,
that you may speak.
that they may speak,

2d Conjugation.
Vender, éo sell.

Que yo vend-a,

Que ti vend-as,

Que é1 vend-a,

Que nosotros vend-amos,
Que vosotros vend-dis,
Que ellos vend-an,

that I may sell.

that thou mayest selk.
that he may sell.
that we may sell.
that you may sell.
that they may sell,

8d Conjugation.

Recibir, to receive.

Que yo recib-a,

Que tu recib-as,

Que él recib-a,

Que nosotros recib-amos,
Que vosotros recibedis,
Que ellos recib-an,

that I may receive.

that thou mayest recetve,
that he may receive.
that we may receive.
that you may receive.
that they may recewwe,
224 LESSON 41.

Exceptions.
Ser, 2. to be.

Que yo sea, that I may be.

etc, etc.

Estar, 1. ¢o be.

Que yo esté, that I may be.
ete. ete.
Haber, 2. (auxiliary) fo rave.
Que yo haya, that I may have.
etc. etc.
Dar, 1. ¢o give.
Que yo dé, that I may give.
ete. ete.
Saber, 2. to know.
Que yo sepa, that I may know.
etc. ete,
Ir, 3. to go.
Que yo vaya, that I may go.
etc. etc.
Vocabulario. Vocabulary.
El carbon, the coal. Hasta que, wniil. Esperar, 1. fo watt.

El ejéreito, the army. Listo, ready.

El empleo, the employment.) Menester, necessary.
El invierno, the winter. | Natural, natural.

El momento, the moment. | Por mas...que, however.
La lengua, the language. | Satisfecho, satisfied.

Marchar, 1. to march
Preferir, 3. to prefer.
Preparar, 1. to prepare
Pretender, 2.to pretend.
Querer, 2. to grant.

La leiia, the wood. Sorprendido, surprised. | Sentir, 3. to regret.

A menos que, wnless, Tonto, foolish. Suplicar, 1. to entreat
Aunque, although. Buscar, 1. to look for. Temer, 2. to fear.
Con tal que, provided. Convenir, 3. to be proper.| Ver, 2. to see.
Contrario, contrary. Convidar, 1. to invite.

Desgraciado, wnfortunate.| Desear, 1. to desire.

Exercise 81.

1. ¢ Qué quiere V. que yo haga? 2. Quiero que V. escriba & su
amigo y que le diga que venga. 3. Mealegro (I am glad) que V. esté
satisfecho de mi trabajo. 4. Estoy sorprendido de que V. no sepa
SUBJUNCTIVE MOOD. 225

nada de eso. 5. Hs necesario que salgamos temprano, pues debemos
llegar & la ciudad antes de la noche. 6. Siento que V. no tenga el
dinero que V. me prometié. 7. Es posible que las cartas leguen hoy.
8. Es de desear que acabemos hoy. 9. Es mejor que V. no le diga
nada, 10. No conviene que V. hable tanto. 11. Deseo que V. vaya
en seguida 4su casa. 12. Dios quiera que no leguemos demasiado
tarde. 13. 4 Cree V. que él pueda venir la semana que viene? 14. No
creo que lo pueda. 15. Es tiempo que acabe el invierno, pues ya no
tenemos carbén ni lefia. 16. Si es verdad (true) que su padre legue
mafiana, ser&4 menester prepararle un cuarto. 17. Déme V. una
leccién que sea mas facil. 18. ; Cuando quiere V. que yo le devuelva
el dinero? 19. Devuélvamelo tan pronto como V. pueda. 20. He
suplicado 4 mi amigo que venga 4 mi casa, pero él prefiere ir 4 la
fonda, 21. Este hombre pretende que le den un empleo. 22. Que
venga si quiere. 23. Queremos que VV. trabajen mas. 24. El
maestro desea que aprendamos la lengua inglesa. 25. Tememos que
este hombre sea nuestro enemigo. 26. No apruebo que V. salga todas
las noches. 27. Puede ser que él vaya 4 Paris. 28. Quiero que V.
me diga lo que sea la verdad. 29. Quiero un maestro que no sea
demasiado joven. 30. Nuestro padre no quiere que durmamos tan
tarde. 31. No encuentro 4 ninguno que pueda prestarme el dinero que
necesito. 32. Don Juan Morales es el mejor hombre que conozca.
33. Este es el mejor vino que haya bebido. 34. El me dard dinero
hasta que yo haya encontrado un buen empleo. 35. Lo haré aunque
ng sepa muy bien hacerlo.

Exercise 82.

1, Captain Henry is the bravest officer I know in the army. 2. It
is the best bread we have had this year. 3. Here is, I think, the last
book he has written. 4. I am surprised that your brother should
come at (en) this moment. 5. He wishes me to return to-morrow, but
I don’t think that [ shall be able to doit. 6. It is unfortunate that
you should have lost all your money. 7. It is better for you to
arrive inthe morning. 8. Isit true that he has saidthat? 9. I don’t
think he has said it. 10. At what time do you think he will be
here? 11. T don’t think he can be here before eleven. 12. It is im-
possible for me to go out so early. 13. Although he is poor he has
more friends than you. 14. Do you think that I am foolish enough
to believe that ? 15. Is it possible that you should have spent so much

15
226 LESSON 41.

money? 16. My father wishes me to go to the country with him.
17. We wish you to study your lessons. 18. The general wishes that
every soldier be ready to march. 19. God grant that he may live
long (muchos aiios)! 20. I wish him to come and to bring the money.
21. It is very natural that he should think that I am his friend.
22. It is well (bueno) that he should know it. 23. Tam looking fora
man who may be willing to lend me some money. 24. See that
everything is ready. 25. I do not believe it, although he may say
the (lo) contrary, 26. Wait till he comes. 27. I shall go out unless
it rains. 28. We will wait for you, provided you do not come too
late. 29, However rich he may be, he is unhappy. 30. Uuless he
invites me, I shall not go to his house. 31. I will buy that house
when I have money enough. 32. He says he will come, provided
they send him a carriage. 33. I do not wish you to speak so.

Gramatica. Grammar.

1, The subjunctive mood in Spanish is usually found in a
dependent clause, and expresses doubt or uncertainty as to the
facts or the result. The necessity for its use is oftenest indicated
by the idea in the principal clause, but this is not always the
case. The principal cases of the use of the subjunctive are:
after words expressing —

a. Command, request, ete. :

Mando que venga, I order him to come.
Le pido 4 V. que salga, I beg you to go out,
Quiero que VV. trabajen, I wish that you should work.

6. Suggestion, permission, approval, prohibition :

Propongo que V. venga, I suggest that you come.
Permito que é] se vaya, LI allow him to go away.
Tengo 4 bien que V. permanezca, I approve of your staying.
Prohibo que lo hagan, I forbid their doing it.

ec. Emotion (such as desire, joy, surprise, fear, etc.) :
Deseo que V. venga, I want you to come.
Temo que él caiga, Lam afraid he will fall.
Me alegro que haga sol, Iam glad that the sun is shining.

Sienten que V. haya venido, They are sorry that you came.
SUBJUNCTIVE MOOD. 227

d. Doubt, denial, ete. :

Dudo que sea él, I doubt if tt be he.
Negamos que sepan, We deny that they know.

§ Cree V. que élesté malo? Do you think that he ts ill?
No pienso que sea verdad, J don’t think tt is true.

2. The subjunctive is also used in Spanish after an imper-
sonal verb expressing an idea of volition, doubt, necessity, contin-
gency, uncertainty, etc. (See Rule I.), as:

Es propio (conveniente or 4 proposito), It is proper.
Hs de desear que venga, It ts desirable for him to come.
Conviene, Lt becomes.
Es bueno, It is proper or well.
Es malo, It is wrong.
Es necesario, dit dpinscciaciey
Es menester, 7
Es lastima, It is a pity.
Es sorprendente, It is surprising.
Es facil, It is easy or possible.
Es imposible que él no sepa, It is impossible that he does not
know.
Es tiempo, tt is time.
Es suficiente. Basta, It is sufficient.
Ks natural, It is natural.
etc. etc.

3. The subjunctive is also used when the verb of the second
proposition expresses some contingent or future effect :

Lo compraré cuando tenga dinero, J will buy tt when I have money.
Le hablaré asi que le vea, I will speak to him when I see him.

Lo haré antes que él venga, Iwill do tt before he comes.

4, A relative pronoun, either used alone or preceded by a
noun, and any of the words solo, alone, ninguno, no, none, no
one, pocos, few, cualquiera, whatever, quienquiera, whoever,
nadie, nobody, no one, inico, only thing, primero, jirst, ultimo,
last, mas, more, mejor, best, requires the subjunctive when there
is an idea of uncertainty:
228 LESSON 41.

Busco & un hombre que quiera pres- = Iam looking for a man willing to
tarme dinero, lend me money.

Esto es, creo, lo unico que le per- This is, I think, the only thing 5e-
tenezca, longing to him.

Hay pocos que lo sepan, There are few who know tt.

Quienquiera que lo vea, pensard Whoever sees tt will think as I do,
como yo,

Cualquiera que sea su fortuna, él Whatever be his fortune, he wiil
morira pobre, die poor.

5, A few conjunctive expressions require the subjunctive
mood when they express a doubt or uncertainty. Such are:

A fin que, in order that. Hasta que, until.

A menos que, unless. Lejos de que, far from.
Antes que, before. Por poco que, however little.
Aunque, although. Por mucho que,

Aun cuando, although. Por mas que, f however.
Bien que, though. Para que, in order that.

En caso que, in case that. Siempre que, whenever,

Con tal que, provided that. Supuesto que, supposing that.
Dado que, granting. {Ojala ! would to God!

6. The perfect of the subjunctive is formed from the pres
ent of the subjunctive of the auxiliary haber, 2. to have, and
the past participle of the verb :

Que yo haya hablado, That I may have spoken.
Que hayamos salido, That we may have gone out.

OBsERVATION. — All the general rules given on the use of the present
subjunctive apply to the perfect of the subjunctive.

7. The present subjunctive is generally used when the
preceding verb is in the present or future indicative, and in the
imperative.

Le ruego que venga, I beg him to come.
Le rogaré que venga, I wilt beg him to come.
Ruégale V. que venga, Beg him to come.

Quiero que VV. trabajen, I wish that you should work.
Es posible que yo vaya, I may possibly go.
IMPERATIVE MOOD. 2293

Leceién XLII. Lesson XLII.

IMPERATIVE MOOD.

I. The imperative is formed by adding the following ter-
minations to the stem of the verbs:

1st Conjugation. 2d Conjugation. 3d Conjugation.
“a -6 -e
ead eed -id
1st Conjugation. 2d Conjugation.
Habl-a, speak (thou). Com-e, eat (thou).
Habl-ad, speak (ye). Com-ed, eat (ye).

3d Conjugation.

Recib-e, receive (thou).
Recib-id, receive (ye).

2. The present subjunctive is used for the imperative in the
first and third persons (for the formation of these forms see
Lesson XLI.):

Ist Conjugation.
Hablar, 1. to speak. Comprar, 1. to buy. Cantar, 1. to sing.

Habl-e V. (sing.) or habl-en VV. (pl.), speak (you).

ROBNEN <2 Le i Habl-emos, Jet us speak.

Compr-e V. (sing.) or compr-en VV. (pl.), buy (yor).

Yo compr-o, J buy ; j Compr-emos, Jet us buy.

Cant-e V. (sing.) or cant-en VV. (pl.), sing (you).

Yo panto, J sings j Cant-emos, let us sing.

2d and 3d Conjugations.
Comer, 2. éo eat. Beber, 2. to drink. Vender, 2. to sell.
Decir, 3. to say, to tell. Venir, 3. to come. Salir, 3. to go out.
; Com-a V. (sing.) or com-an VV. (pl.), eat (you).
Mio eanmieny 2 4082 { Com-amos, Jet us eat.

2 Beb-a V. (sing.) or beb-an VV. (pil.), drink (you).
Yo beb-o, J drink ; Beb-amos, Jet us drink.
230 LESSON 42.

Vend-a V. (sing.) or vend-an VV. (pl.), sell (you).

Yorvendeo, 2 sits Vend-amos, Jet us sell.

Dig-an VV. (pl.), say or tell (you).
Dig-amos, Jet us say or tell.

Yo dig-o, Isay, [tell ;

Veng-a V. (sing.) or veng-an VV. (pl.), come (you),

Veng-amos, Jet us come.

| Dig-a V. (sing.), say or tell (you).
Yo veng-o, J come ; |

vou ao,F ya oul i. V. (sing.) or salg-an VV. (pl.), go (you) out.
Salg-amos, et us go out.

Rutz. — The o of the Ist person of the present indicative is

changed into e and en for the lst conjugation, and into a and

an for the 2d and 3d conjugations.

Exceptions,

f Sea V. (sing.) or sean VV. (yi.), be (you).

Beh ie Seamos, det us be.

Estar, 1. to be; j Esté V. (sing.) or estén VV. (pl.) be (you).

Estemos, let us be.

Dé V. (sing.) or den VV. (pl.), give (you).
Demos, Jet us give.

Sepa V. (sing.) or sepan VV. (pl.), Enow (you),
Sepamos, let us know.

Dar, 1. to give ;

Saber, 2. to know ; j

I Vaya V. (sing.) or vayan VV. (pl.), go (you).
r, 3. to go; {

Vayamos, (contract. vamos), let us go,

Imperative with Pronouns.

Traigame V. esto, Bring me this.
No se lo dé V., Do not give it to him.
Véndanos V. su caballo, Sell us your horse.
Préstemelo V., Lend it to me.
Busquelos V., Look for them.
No lo corte V., Do not cut it.
Vengan VV. esta noche, Come this evening.
No salgan VV. ahora, Do not go out now.
Digamelo V., Tell it to me.
No se lo diga V. 4 nadie, Do not tell it to anybody.

Salgamos un rato, Let us go out for a moment,
Ven aqui, Juanito,
Vuelva V. esta noche,
No hablen VY. tanto,
Trabajemos,

No hagas eso,

Conférmate con tu suerte,
Ponga V. el libro sobre la mesa,
Digale V. 4 Juan que su padre ha

llegado,
Hablad & este hombre,

Vocabulario.

El asunto, the matter.

El boticario, the drug-
gist.

El coche, the coach.

El correo, the post, the
mail.

El estado, the condition.

El favor, the favor.

El ruido, the noise.

El temor, the fear.

La canci6n, the song.

La patria, the country.

1. No tenga V. miedo, el perro no muerde.
3. Amemos nuestra patria.

tiempo.

IMPERATIVE MOOD.

231

Come here, Johnny.
Return this evening.
Do not speak so much.
Let us work.

Do not do that.

Be satisfied with your lot.
Put the book on the table.
Tell John that his father has

arrived.
Speak to that man.

La verdad, the truth.
La virtud, the virtue.
Alto, Joud.
Enfadado, angry.
Ligero, quick.
Pronto, quickly.
Quieto, quiet.
Turbulento, boisterous.
Amar, 1. to love.
Abrir, 3, to open.
Cantar, 1. ¢o sing.
Correr, 2, to run.

Exercise 83.

Vocabulary.

Emplear, 1. to employ.
Encender, 2. to light.
Llevar, 1. tv take.
Obedecer, 2. to obey.
Ofr, 3. to hear.
Olvidar, 1. to forget.
Pagar, 1. to pay.
Practicar, 1. to practise.
Prestar, 1. ¢o lend.
Salir, 3. to leave.
Saltar, 1. to jump.
Tomar, 1. to take.

2. Emplee V. bien el

4. Sepa V. sus lecciones mafia-

na. 5. No digas todo lo que haces, pero hagas todo lo que dices.

6. Esté V. quieto.
8. Seamos amigos.

el Sefior Martinez esta en casa.
érrez y digale que le quiero ver.
13. Venga V. pronto, yo le necesito 4 V.
15. Hagame V. el favor de (to) decirme dénde vive el
17. Sepa V. que soy el
18, Tome V. este dinero y déselo 4 este

mas.
ha hecho esto.
médico.

mejor amigo que V. tiene.

16. Hay uno que vive en esta casa.

7. Mandeme V. mis libros por el muchacho.
9. Déme V. esto, lo necesito.
11. Vaya V. 4 casa del Sefior Guti-
12. Salga V. de aqui y no vuelva

10. Pregunte V. si

14. Digame V. quién

pobre. 19. Hable V. sin temor, y diga la verdad. 20. Muchachos,
232 LESSON 42.

no jueguen en la calle. 21. Corra V. prontoy tréigame mi paraguas,
92. Hable V.dese hombre, y preguntele lo que quiere. 23. Hablele V,
mismo, yo no hablo francés. 24. Tome V. un coche, si V. no quiere
ir 4 pie. 25. No hagas eso, amiguito. 26. Déme V. la mano; muy
bien, ahora salte V. 27, No me hable V., estoy enfadado con V.
28. Digamos siempre la verdad. 29. Piense V.en (of) mi. 30. Es.
cribame V. de Paris. 31. Créame, amigo, la cosa no es asi. 32. Sal-
gamos, ya es tarde. 33. Dénos V. nuestro dinero, lo necesitamos.
34. Lleve V. esa carta al correo; ya es tiempo. 35. Vdmonos tem-
prano. 36. No venga V. tan tarde mafiana, pues tengo que salir,

Exercise 84.

1. Take this key, open my room, and bring me my stick. 2. Let
us write our letters, the mail leaves to-night. 3. Come early to-mor
row morning, we have a great deal todo. 4. Do not go out without
me. 5. Write to us every week from Paris. 6. Give something ts
that poor man; he is hungry. 7. Be my friend. 8. Go out, I don’t
need you here. 9. Don’t speak to that man, he is not your friend.
10. Take this letter to your father, and tell him that I wish to see
him. 11. Speak louder, I cannot hear you. 12. Do me the favor to
(de) give me a piece of bread. 13. Call that gentleman, he has forgot-
ten something. 14. Give me something to (que) drink, I am very
thirsty. 15. Ask that woman if Mr. Zamora is at home. 16. Do not
run so fast, it is not late. 17. Do not believe what that man says, he
never tells the truth. 18. Light the gas; we don’t see anything here.
19. Shut the door; we do not wish to be seen. 20. Don’t buy that
house, it is in very poor (mal) condition. 21. Take this and give it
to your sister., 22. Do not make so much noise, your little brother is
sleeping. 23. Tell me all that you know about (de) this matter
24. Write to this merchant and tell him that we need blue cloth.
25. Go to the druggist’s, but return quickly. 26. If you do not need
your book, lend it to me. 27. I will tell you something, but do not
tell it to anybody. 28. Obey your masters. 29. Let us love and
practise virtue. 30. Let us see who is atthe door. 31. Here is a
dollar; take it and pay that man. 32. Do not be so boisterous, your
mother is not well. 33. Come here, I have something to tell you.
34. Do not give her that, she is too small yet. 35. Let us sing a
Spanish song.
IMPERATIVE MOOD. 233

Gramatica. Grammar.

1, The regular second person forms of the imperative are
very little used, since the polite form of address (almost uni-
versal) requires the use of the third person forms of the present
subjunctive. It will be noticed that the first person plural is
also from the present subjunctive, and is not a true imperative
form.

2, The second person singular of the imperative is the same
as the third person singular of the present indicative (see Les-
sons XXXII. to XXXV.).

Nore. — Exceptions to the above rule are: decir, haber, ir, poner,
salir, tener, venir.

8. The second person plural is made from the infinitive by
changing the final r tod. ‘There are no exceptions to this rule.

4, The subject pronoun may be expressed or omitted with
the true imperative forms. Usted or ustedes are, however,‘<en-
erally expressed. When used, the subject pronouns generally
follow the verb.

Note. — If two or more imperatives occur in the same sentence, it is
sufficient that the pronoun should accompany the first imperative :

Vaya V. a mi cuarto, y traigame mi Go to my room and bring me my
libro, book.

5, The negative imperative of the second person is expressed
by means of the subjunctive :

No hables, do not speak. No lo hagais, do not do it.
No vengas, do not come.

6. The second person singular is generally used in proverbs,
maxims, etc. :

Ama 4 tu prdjimo como 4 ti mismo, Love thy neighbor as thyself.

%. For rules referring to the place of the pronouns accom-
panying the imperative see L. 22, 30, 31. The student will
have to bear in mind, however, that the pronouns usted and
ustedes are always placed last in the imperative.
234

Leceioén XLIII.

LESSON 48.

Lesson XLIII.

IMPERFECT AND PLUPERFECT SUBJUNCTIVE.

RegulJar Verbs.

lst Conjugation.

Que yo habl-ara or habl-ase,

Que tui habl-aras or habl-ases,

Que él habl-ara or habl-ase,

Que nosotros habl-dramos or habl-
dsemos,

Que vosotros habl-arais or habl-
aseis,

Que ellos habl-aran or habl-asen,

that I might or should speak.

that thow mightest or shouldst speak.
that he might or should speak.

that we might or should speak,

that you might or should speak.

that they might or should speak.

2d Conjugation.

Vender, to sedi.

Que yo vend-iera or vend-iese,

Que tu vend-ieras or vend-ieses,

Que él vend-iera or vend-iese,

Que nosotros vend-iéramos or vend-
iésemos,

Que vosotros vend-ierais or vend-
ieseis,

Que ellos vend-ieran or vend-iesen,

that I might or should sell.

that thow mightest or shouldst sell.
that he might or should sell.

that we might or should sell.

that you might or should sell.

that they might or should sell.

3d Conjugation.

Recibir, to receive.

Que yo recib-iera or recib-iese,

Que ti recib-ieras or recib-ieses,

Que él recib-iera or recib-iese,

Que nosotros recib-iéramos or recib-
iésemos,

Que vosotros recib-ierais or recib-
ieseia,

Que ellos recib-ieran or recib-iesen,

that I might or should receive,

that thow mightest or shouldst reeeive,
that he might or should receive.

that we might or should receive.

that you might or should receive,

that they might or should receive,
IMPERFECT AND PLUPERFECT SUBJUNCTIVE.

235

Irregular Verbs.

Tener, 2. to have.

Que yo tuviera or tuviese,
Que tu tuvieras or tuvieses,
Que él tuviera or tuviese,

Que nosotros tuviéramos or tuvié-

semos,
Que vosotros tuvierais or tuvieseis,
Que ellos tuvieran or tuviesen,

that I might or should have.

that thow mightest or shouldst have,
that he might or should have.

that we might or should have.

that you might or should have.
that they might or should have.

Haber, 2. (auxiliary) to have.

Que yo hubiera or hubiese,

Que ti hubieras or hubieses,

Que él hubiera or hubiese,

Que nosotros hubiéramos or hubié-
semos,

Que vosotros hubierais or hubieseis,

Que ellos hubieran or hubiesen,

that I might or should have.

that thou mightest or shouldst have.
that he might or should have.

that we might or should have.

that you might or should have.
that they might or should have.

Estar, 1. ¢o be.

Que yo estuviera or estuviese,
Que tu estuvieras or estuvieses,
Que él estuviera or estuviese,

Que nosotros estuviéramos or estu-

viésemos,

Que vosotros estuvierais or estuvieseis,

Que ellos estuvieran or estuviesen,

that I might or should be.

that thou mightest or shouldst be.
that he might or should be.

that we might or should be.

that you might or should be.
that they might or should be,

Ser, 2. to be.

Que yo fuera or fuese,

Que tu fueras or fueses,

Que é1 fuera or fuese,

Que nosotros fuéramos or fuésemos,
Que vosotros fuerais or fueseis,

Que ellos fueran or fuesen,

that I might or should be,

that thou mightest or shouldst be,
that he might or should be.

that we might or should be.

that you might or should be.
that they might or should be.

Dar, 1. to give.

Que yo diera or diese,
etc.

that I might or should give.
ete,
236 LESSON 43.

Andar, 1. to walk.
Que yo anduviera or anduviese, that I might or should walk.
etc. etc.
Hacer, 2. to make, to do.

Que yo hiciera or hiciese, that I might or should do.
etc. etc.

Caer, 2. to fall.

Que yo cayera or cayese, that I might or should fall.
etc. ete.

Poder, 2. to be able.

Que yo pudiera or pudiese, that I might or should be able.
ete. ete.

Poner, 2. to put.

Que yo pusiera or pusiese, that I might or should put.
etc. etc.

Querer, 2. to be willing.

Que yo quisiera or quisiese, that I might or should be willing
etc. ete.

Saber, 2. to Know.

Que yo supiera or supiese, that I might or should know.
ete. etc.

Traer, 2. to bring.

Que yo trajera or trajese, that I might or should bring.
etc. etc.

Conducir, 3. to conduct, to take.

Que yo condujera or condujese, that I might or should conduct.
ete. ete.

Pedir, 3. to ask for.

Que yo pidiera or pidiese, that I might or should ask for.
ete. ete.
IMPERFECT AND PLUPERFECT SUBJUNCTIVE. 237

Venir, 3. to come.

Que yo viniera or viniese,
etc.

that I might or should come.

etc.

Decir, 3. to say, to tell.

Que yo dijera or dijese,
etc.

that I might or should say.

etc.

Ir, 3. to go.
Que yo fuera or fuese, that I might or should go.
etc. etc.
Vocabulario. Vocabulary.

El articulo, the article.
El asunto, the business.
El espejo, the mirror.
El gasto, the expense.

El idioma, the language.
El lugar, the spot.

El medio, the means, the way.

Aprobar, 1. to approve.
Arreglar, 1. to arrange.
Convidar, 1. to invite.
Dedicar, 1. to devote.
Devolver, 2. to give back.
Dudar, 1. to doubt.

Encontrar, 1. to meet.
Engafiar, 1. to deceive.
Fabricar, 1. to manufacture.
Llorar, 1. to weep, to cry.
Permitir, 3. to allow.
Recomendar, 1. to recommend.
Suplicar, 1. to entreat.
Suponer, 2, to suppose.

A crédito, on credit.

En seguida, immediately.

En tiempo pasado, formerly.
Por precisién, by necessity.
Teérico, theoretical.

Exercise 85.

1. Mi maestro queria que yo aprendiese una leccién més larga.
2. {Qué queria V. que él hiciera sin dinero? 3. Que comprase las
mercancias 4 crédito. 4. Estos dos caballeros querian que yo les
vendiese mi cabailo. 5. Yo no creia que fuese tan tarde. 6. ; Temia
V. que é] saliese sin nosotros? 7. Lo tinico que yo temf{a era que él
no nos esperase. 8. Era el unico almacén donde pudiéramos hallar
este articulo. 9. El queria que yo le dijera lo que yo debfa, antes
que me diera el dinero. 10. ; Dudaba V. que él viniera como lo
238 LESSON 43.

habfa prometido? 11. 4 Aprobaba V. que él me hablase asf?
42. Era menester que gastésemos muchisimo dinero para arreglar
nuestra casa. 13. Yo no crefa que V. engafiase 4 sus amigos.
14, Era el dnico medio que nos quedase, pues nuestros asuntos no
permitfan que hiciéramos nuevos gastos. 15. Cuando sali para
Francia, mi padre me recomenddé que viviese con personas que ne
hablasen otro idioma mds que el francés y con quienes tuviese que
hablarlo por precisién, bien 6 mal. 16. También que leyese algunos
buenos autores, y hecho todo esto por algun tiempo, me dedicase
entonces al estudio tedérico. 17. ; Quién hubiera pensado que nos
encontrariamos en un lugar como éste, después de tanto tiempo que
no nos hemos visto! 18. Yo le habia escrito 4 fin de que viniera.
19. He comido mucho, y mas de lo que hubiera debido. 20. Yo iba
todas las mafianas 4 su casa para que me diera una leccién de espaiiol.
21. Cantaban aunque tuviesen gana de Iorar. 22. Fl deseaba que
yo fuese en seguida 4 su casa. 23. Yo le habia suplicado que viniese
temprano, pero llegé el ultimo de todos. 24. Aquel hombre pretendia
que le pagasen mucho més de lo que habfa ganado. 25. El estaba
muy sorprendido de que no supiésemos nada de esto.

Exercise 86.

1. What did you wish me to do? 2. I wished that you should
write to your friend, and that you should tell him to return. 3. I
was surprised that he had not sent me the money. 4. It was to be
desired that they should finish in time. 5. When did he wish us to
return the money? 6. He wished that you should return it as soon
as possible. 7. I did not think that he was so ill. 8. Our teacher
wished that we would come earlier to school. 9. We were afraid
that it would rain the whole day. 10. He was looking for a man
who would lend him money. 11. I went to his house, although I
was very tired. 12. Our father did not wish that we should go out
so late. 13. He was the best friend I had in the city. 14. It was
the best wine that I had ever drunk. 15. It was very unfortunate
that he had lost all his money. 16, Although he was poor, he had
many friends. 17. It was very natural that he should speak so.
18. He could not spend so much money, however rich he might be.
19. I would not go to his house unless he invited me. 26. He said
he would come (vendria) provided you would send him a carriage.
IMPERFECT AND PLUPERFECT SUBJUNCTIVE. 239

21. The Venetians were formerly the only people who manufactured
and sold mirrors. 22. I was afraid he would come without his
brother. 23. I did not think that you were so foolish. 24. It was
necessary for us to go every evening to his house. 25. We did not
think that it was so late. 26. Mr. Martin did not wish me to go out
without him. 27. He was the only one who spoke Spanish. 28, We
did not suppose he would arrive in time. 29. My mother wished us
to sing for her.

Gramatica. Grammar.

1, The imperfect of the subjunctive has two forms:
The first ending in:

-ra -ras ra -ramos -rais -ran
and the second in:

-8e -808 -86 -semos -seis -Ben

While the true endings are -ara and -ase, -iera and -iese,
to facilitate the construction the forms may be made from the
3d person plural of the past definite by changing the termina-
tion ron into the terminations given above.

Examples.

i tuvie-ra, -ras, -ra, -ramos, -rais, -ran.
Tuvie-ron, they had ; Sy ote Wawa
tuvie-se, -ses, -se, -semos, -seis, -sen.

Hubie-ron, they had ; ‘ 3
2 2 hubie-se, -ses, -se, -semos, -seis, -sen.
estuvie-ra, -ras, -ra, -ramos, -rais, -ran.

{ hubie-ra, -ras, -ra, -ramos, -rais, -ran.
j estuvie-se, -Ses, -Se, -semos, -seis, -sen,

Estuvie-ron, they were ;

j fue-ra, -ras, -ra, -ramos, -rais, -ran.

Fue-ron, they were ; :
yey, ? fue-se, -ses, -8e, -semos, -seis, -sen.

( habla-ra, -ras, -ra, -ramos, -rais, -ran.

Habla-r ey spoke ; 3

on, they spoke ; i habla-se, -8e8, -8e, -8emos, -seis, -sen.

2 comie-ra, -ras, -ra, -ramos, -rais, -ran.
Comie-ron, they ate ;

comie-se, -8e8, -Se, -semos, -scis, -sen.
240 LESSON 43.

Recibi th wed recibie-ra, -ras, -ra, -ramos, -rais, -ran.
Peed ey eee recibie-se, -8e8, -se, -8emos, -8eis, -sen.
uidie-ra, -ras, -ra, -ramos, -rais, -ran.
ie-ron, they were able ; P i i
a ? pudie-se, -ses, -8e, -semos, -seis, -sen.
3 supie-ra, -ras, -ra, -ramos, -rais, -ran.
= knew ; ‘ ‘
Supe Ton Gey i supie-se, -Se8, -8e, -Semos, -seis, -sen.
ss : dije-ra, -ras, -ra, -ramos, -rais, -ran.
- said ; ae é
Dije-tony tay : } dije-se, -ses, -8e, -semos, -seis, -sen.
Vini th vinie-ra, -ras, -ra, -ramos, -rais, -ran.
inie-ron, they came ; a i
2 dz vinie-se, -ses, -8e, -semos, -seis, -sen.
ete. etc.

Nore. — The graphic accent must be inserted in these forms in accord.
ance with the usage on pp. 2384-235.

2, The imperfect subjunctive is used when the verb of the
lst proposition which requires a subjunctive after it, is in one
of the past tenses of the indicative:

Yo queria 1 wished

Yo deseé que él viniera LT desired that he would
Yo he solicitado 6 viniese. I have entreated come.

Yo habia solicitado I had entreated

OxsERVATION. — All the general rules given on the use of the present
subjunctive apply to the imperfect and pluperfect subjunctive.

3. The present subjunctive may, however, be used atter the
past indefinite, when the time of the action is not definitely
stated :

Le he suplicado que venga 4 mi I have entreated him to come to my
casa. - house.

4. The present or the imperfect subjunctive may be used
when the verb of the Ist proposition is in the futuro perfecto :
El habra pretendido que le dejen He will have pretended that they

(dejaran 6 dejasen) libre. should let him free.

5. The imperfect subjunctive is used instead of the present
when followed by a conditional clause:

, Cree V. que me lo diesen, si les Do you think they would give it to
pidiera ? me, Uf I should ask them.
CONDITIONAL MOOD.

241

6. The pluperfect subjunctive is formed from the imperfect
subjunctive of the auxiliary haber, to have; and the past parti-

ciple of the verb:

Que yo hubiera or hubiese hablado ;
Que él hubiera or hubiese salido ;

that I might have spoken.
that I might have gone out

 

Leccion XLIV.

Lesson XLIV.

CONDITIONAL MOOD.

Yo hablar-fa,

Tu hablar-ias,

¥] hablar-fa,

Nosotros hablar-famos,
Vosotros hablar-fais,
Ellos hablar-fan,

Yo comer-ia,

Tu comer-ias,

El comer-{a,

Nosotros comer-famos,
Vosotros comer-iais,
Ellos comer-fan,

Yo recibir-ia,

Tu recibir-ias,

El recibir-ia,

Nosotros recibir-famos,
Vosotros recibir-{fais,
Ellos recibir-fan,

Yo daria,
etc.

Yo tendria,

etc,
16

LI should or would speak.

Thou shouldst or wouldst speak
He should or would speak,

We should or would speak.

You should or would speak.
They should or would speak.

I should or would eat.

Thou shouldst or wouldst eat.
He should or would eat.

We should or would eat.

You should or would eat,
They should or would eat.

T should or would receive.

Thou shouldst or wouldst recetwve,
He should or would receive.

We should or would receive.

You should or would receive.
They should or would receive,

I should or would give.
etc.

I should or would have.
ete.
242

Yo habria,
etc.

Yo estaria,
ete.

Yo seria,
ete.

Yo hartia,
etc.

Yo sabria,
etc.

Yo pondria,
etc.

Yo podria,
ete.

Yo querria,
etc.

Yo valdria,
ete.

Yo diria,
etc.

Yo saldria,
etc.

Yo vendria,
etc.

Ejemplos.

UQuién dirla que este hombre es tan
rico ?
i Que haria V. si V. fuese rico ?

Yo compraria una casa grande.
Si yo supiera hacerlo, lo haria.

Yo escribiria en inglés si pudiera,

LESSON 44.

I should or would have.
ete,

I should or would be.
etc.

I should or would be,
ete.

I should or would make (or do).
etc.

I should or would know.
ete.

I should or would put.
etc.

I should or would be able.
ete.

I should or would be wilting,
ete.

I should or would be worth.
ete,

I should or would say.
ete.

I should or would go out.
ete.

LI should or would come.
etc.

Examples.

Who would say that that man is
so rich ?

What would you do if you were
rich ?

I would buy a large house.

If I knew how to do it, I would
do it.

I would write in English if 1 could
CONDITIONAL MOOD. 243

Yo daria mucho para saber la ver-
dad.

4 Qué le escribiria V. ?

Yo le escribiria todo lo que he ofdo.

jCuanto dinero necesitaria V.?

Yo necesitaria 4 lo menos cien duros,

j Estaria V. aqui si V. pudiera salir ?

Yo saldria en seguida.

V. deberta venir conmigo.

Yo quisiera saber dénde esta mi
hermano.

Debertamos haber salido mas tem-
prano.

Vocabulario.
El concepto, the opinion.
El motivo, the motive.
El precio, the price.
El socorro, the assistance.
El viento, the wind.
La clase, the class.
La cosa, the matier of importance.
La deuda, the debt.
La fresa, the strawberry.
La mentira, the falsehood.
La recompensa, the recompense.
Las seiias, the direction.
Cansado, tired.
Hasta, until, as far as.
Haragan, lazy.

 

I would give much to know the
truth.

What would you write to him ?

I would write all I have heard.

How much money would you need ?

I would need at least one hundred
dollars.

Would you be here if you could
go out ?

I would go out immediately.

You ought to come with me.

I should like to know where my
brother is.

We ought to have gone out sooner.

Vocabulary.

jOjald! would to God!
Por cierto, certainly.
Adelantar, 1. to be fast.
Cambiar 1, to exchange.
Descubrir, 3. to discover.
Dirigir, 3. to direct.
Examinar, 1. to examine.
Formar, 1. to form.
Jugar, 1. to play.
Marchar, 1. to go.
Molestar, |. to trouble.
Obligar, 1. to oblige.
Pagar, 1. to pay.
Pegar, 1. to strike.
Repetir, 3. to repeat.

Exercise 87.

1. Yo aprenderia el francés si tuviera tiempo de estudiar. 2. Colén
prometié una recompensa al primero que descubriera la tierra. 3. Si
V. fuera al campo este afio, yo irla también. 4. Los muchachos ha-
brian comido todas las fresas del jardin si no hubieran temido ser casti-
gados. 5. V. podria saber la verdad si V. quisiera. 6. Yo le habria
mandado su carta si hubiera sabido donde V. vivia. 7. ; Querria V.
hacerme un favor? 8. Con mucho gusto; jque desea V.? 9. Quisiera
244 LESSON 44.

que V. me Ilevase esta carta al correo, 10. Nada més facil, déme V.
la carta. 11. ; Podria V. hacer eso sin mi? 12, Podria hacerlo si no
estuviese tan cansado. 13. Lioverfa si no hiciera tanto viento.
14. Seria bueno que V. fuese 4 verle. 15. Si hubieramos recibido el
dinero que esper4bamos, habriamos salido con el vapor francés, 16. Si
V. supiera lo que él ha dicho de su amigo, V. no estaria satisfecho.
17. ; Cree V. que si él no viniese, irfa yo 4 verle? 18. j Ojala no
hubiera yo perdido mi dinero! 19. Si lloviese esta tarde, y no pu-
diéramos ir al campo, irfamos al teatro esta noche. 20. Este hombre
tendrfa m4s dinero, si lo hubiese querido. 21. Aunque fuésemos
ricos, no pagarfamos el precio que nos pide. 22. Beberiamos si
tuviésemos mejor agua. 23. El S. D. Pedro Molina me dijo que
dejaria 4 V. sus sefias para dirigirle sus cartas en Paris, y con este
motivo me he tomado la libertad de molestar 4 V. 24. Yo no cam-
biarfa micaballo por elsuyo. 25. Quisiera que V. examinase mi reloj,
pues no marcha bien. 26. 4 Marchaba bien, antes? 27. Adelantaba
vn poco, pero no era cosa; cinco minutos cada veinticuatro horas.
28. ; Porqué no me escribid V. cuando estaba en Paris? 29. Yo le
habria escrito, si no hubiese pensado que V. habia salido de la
ciudad. 30. Si tuviéramos tiempo, iriamos con V. hasta la ciudad.

Exercise 88.

1. What would you do, if you were invited to that ball? 2. I
should certainly not go. 3. I should tell a falsehood if I said that.
4, Would you like to go with me? 5. I would go, if I had time.
6. That poor man would have died without assistance, if I had not
come in time. 7. Would you have received my letter in time, if I
had written to you? 8. No, your letter would have arrived too late.
9. What would you have done, if he had struck you? 10. He never
would have struck me; he is afraid of me. 11. Would you repeat
what he said? 12. I would repeat it, if you wished. 13. We would
buy that house, if it were not too small for us. 14. Would you buy
mine? 15. I would buy it, if you sold it. 16. You would be now in
the first class, if you had not been so lazy. 17. I should like to see
your brother; where is he now? 18. He must be in his room, if he
has not gone out. 19. You ought to have spoken to that man when
he was here: 20. Were you not afraid that he would go out without
you? 2]. Yes, I was afraid he would forget me. 22, I should wish

ae
CONDITIONAL MOOD. 247
them to be here to-morrow morning early. 23. It would be necess@F
for him to give me at least two hundred dollars. 24. I wish that
had never known him. 25. Had I seen the new comedy, I would
have told you how it was. 26. If you always worked as much as
to-day, you would soon be rich. 27. What opinion would you have
formed of me, if I had done what they wished me todo? 28. That
young man would not pay his debts, if he were not obliged. 29. If
I had thought that you were sick, I would not have gone out. 30, I
would not speak to that man, although he were rich.

Gramatica. Grammar.

1, The conditional tense is regularly formed by adding the
endings:
-ia, -fas, -fa, -famos, ‘fais,  -fan,

to the whole infinitive, taken as stem:

Hablaria, I should or would speak.

Comeria, I should or would eat.

Recibiria, I should or would receive.
ete. etc.

This conditional has therefore all the irregularities of the
future.

2, The conditional is used after a past tense to express an
idea which would be in the future, if the principal verb were
present ;

Dijo que lo compraria, he said he would buy tt.

(Dice que lo comprara, he says he will buy it.)

Pensaba que vendria, I used to think that he would come.
(Pienso que vendra, I think he will come.)

3, It is used to express a conclusion after a condition with
implied negation :

Si tuviese (tuviera) dinero, compraria If he had money, he would buy the
la casa, house.
Me irla, si viniera, Tf he should come, I should go away.

Norse. — The condition may be replaced by some equivalent expression,
or omitted altogether.
244 \ LESSON 44.

y
qu, = : ’
2, ‘@ razon, In doing that, you would be right
oo 2 i.e., of you did that, etc.

I would n't say that (if I thought as
a you do).
8t form of the imperfect subjunctive (-ra) may be
conditional sentences instead of the conditional. Thus
@ may say:

 
 
   

Si tuviese dinero, comprarta la casa,

Si tuviera dinero, compraria la casa, SPP iad wnonsin, Fm buy Viehanas,
Si tuviese dinero, comprara la casa,

Si tuviera dinero, comprara la casa,

Norr, — The second form of the imperfect subjunctive (-se) can only
be used in the condition.

5. The conditional may be used to express past probability:

Tendria V. frio, you must have been cold.

6, The past conditional is formed from the conditional of
haber, and the past participle of the verb.
El habria hablado, he would have spoken.

4. Potential Mood.

1. May and can may be translated either by the present in-
dicative or by the present subjunctive of the verb poder, 2. to be
able; and also by the present subjunctive of the verb used in the
sentence:

Puedo venir, I can come.

Se puede que venga, I may come.

Déme V. el dinero para que pueda Give me the money, that I may
pagar lo que debo or Déme V. el pay what I owe.

dinero para que pague lo que debo,

2. Could, might, should, would.
Could is rendered by the conditional of the verb poder, when
a condition is implied, and by the ¢mperfect or preterit of the
same verb when it implies power:
Yo podria ir si quisiera, LI could go if I wished.
Yo no podia ir solo, i

"Yo. tie guile ir solo, I could not (was not able to) go alone,
CONDITIONAL MOOD. 247

3. Might is translated by the conditional of the verb poder
when power is implied :

El podria venir si quisiera, He might come Uf he wished.

When implying possibility it is expressed in the same way as
may:

Se puede que venga, He may or might come.

4. Should, implying duty, or meaning ought to, is rendered
by the conditional of the verb deber :

V. deberia venir conmigo, You ought to come with me.
Deberian obedecer, They should obey.

5. Should like to is rendered by the imperfect subjunctive
or conditional of the verb querer:

Quisiera or querria verle, I should like to see him.

6. Would, implying willingness, is rendered by the imper-
fect indicative or preterit of the verb querer:

No queria (or no quiso) hablar, He would not speak.

7. Might have and should have are in most cases translated
by the conditional of the verbs poder and deber with the
‘infinitive of haber :

El podria haber venido, He might have come.
El deberia haber venido, He should have come.
The imperfect subjunctive may be used in exclamations:
j Quién me diera a conocer ! I should like to know!
248 LESSON 465.

Leccion XLV.

Lesson XLY.

SUBJUNCTIVE FUTURE AND FUTURE PERFECT.

1. Haber, 2. — 2. Tener, 2. to have.

Hubiere — tuviere,
Hubieres — tuvieres,
Hubiere — tuviere,
Hubiéremos — tuviéremos,
Hubiereis — tuviereis,
Hubieren — tuvieren,

8. Estar, 1. —4

Estuviere — fuere,
Estuvieres — fueres,
Estuviere — fuere,
Estuviéremos — fuéremos,
Estuviereis — fuereis,
Estuvieren — fueren,

I shall or will have.
thou shalt or wilt have.
he shall or will have.
we shall or will have.
you shall or will have.
they shall or will have.

Ser, 2. to be.

I shall or will be.
thow shalt or wilt be.
he shall or wiil be.
we shall or will be.
you shall or will be.
they shall or will be.

5. Hablar, 1. to speak. 6. Comer, 2. to eat. 7. Recibir, 3. to receive.

Hablare — comiere — recibiere, I shall or will speak — eat — receive.
Hablares — comieres—revibieres, thou shalt or wilt speak — eat — receive.
Hablare — comiere — recibiere, he shall or will speak — eat — receive.
Hablaremos — comiéremos — re- we shall or will speak — eat — receive.
cibiéremos,
Hablareis — comiereis — recibie- you shall or will speak — eat — receive.
reis,
Hablaren — comieren — recibie- they shall or will speak — eat — re-
ren, cetve.
Vocabulario. Vocabulary.

El alojamiento, the lodging.
El invierno, the winter.

El lugar, the place.

La amistad, the friendship.
La noticia, the news.

Frio, cold.

Acabar, 1. to finish,

Aconsejar, 1. to advise.
Acontecer, 2. to happen.
Encontrar, 1. ¢o find, to meet.
Mandar, 1. to order.

Olvidar, 1. to forget.

Padecer, 2. to suffer.
Preseribir, 3. to prescribe,
SUBJUNCTIVE FUTURE AND FUTURE PERFECT. 249

Exercise 89.

1. Si el prdximo invierno fuere tan frio como el ultimo, los pobres
padecerin muchisimo. 2. ; Ira V. 4 pasar el domingo conmigo en el
campo? 3. Si yo hubiere acabado lo que tengo que hacer, iré con
mucho gusto. 4. Tu padre me ha dicho que si tu estudiares bien, te
daré un bonito reloj. 5. No saldré mafiana, si el tiempo fuere tan
malo como hoy. 6. Si viere V.asu padre mafana, no olvide lo que le
he dicho. 7. Llevaremos 4 su hermano con nosotros, si fuere posible.
8. Compraré la casa en que vivo, cuando tuviere dinero. 9. Si al-
morzare temprano mafiana, iré 4 ver 4 miamigo. 10. No olvidare-
mos nada de lo que la amistad prescribiere.

Exercise 90.

1. They have promised to tell me all that shall happen while I shall
be (am) absent. 2. Tell your friend when you (shall) meet him, that
I have good news for him. 3. If you breakfast to-morrow at (en) the
same place, bring me the umbrella which I forgot there. 4. You
must do, my friend, all that your father (shall) commands you.
5. The physician has advised my brother to go to the country, if the
weather is not any better. 6. If you are unwell in the country, come
back to the city. 7. If we should have money next month, we will
send you some. 8. When I find a good teacher, I will learn Spanish.
9. We will write to you if we should be satisfied with (de) our new
lodging. 10. We will go out, when we have dined.

Gramatica. Grammar.

1, The future of the subjunctive, of which the termina-
tions are
“re, Tes, -re, + -remos, = -reis, ~—-ren,

expresses a positive future conditional action, and is therefore
used in conditional phrases with si, if, to denote a future time.
It is also used with cuando, when, and other relatives, when
future time is expressed.

The rules given for the use of the present of the subjunctive
are applicable to the future of the subjunctive when the sense
is conditional or future. The future of the subjunctive is not,
250 LESSON 46.

of frequent use, and occurs in the sentence to give more energy
and precision to the idea expressed.

The future perfect of the subjunctive is formed from the
future of the subjunctive of the auxiliary haber, to have; and

the past participle of the verb.

Leccion XLVI.

Lesson XLVI.

INFINITIVE MOOD.

1, Government of the infinitive without preposition :

Some of the principal verbs requiring no preposition before the
following infinitive :

Aconsejar, 1. to advise.
Acostumbrar, 1. to accustom.
Afirmar, 1. to affirm.
Concebir, 3. to conceive.
Confesar, 1. to confess.
Contar, 1. to relate.
Creer, 2. to believe.
Debor, 2. to owe, must.
Declarar, 1. to declare.
Dejar, 1. to let, to leave.
Desear, 1. to desire,
Esperar, 1. to hope.
Gustar, to please, to like.
Hacer, 2. to make, to do.
Imaginar, 1. to imagine.
Intentar, 1. to intend.
Mandar, 1. to order.
Manifestar, 1. to manifest.
etc. etc,

Ejemplos.
Deseo tener dinero.
El afirma haber dicho la verdad.
Temo ver 4 mi amigo,
Veo venir mucha gente.
Osé decirle la verdad.
Oigo lamar 4 la puerta,

Necesitar, 1. to need.
Negar, 1. to deny.

Oir, 3. to hear.

Parecer, 2. to appear.
Pensar, 1. to think, to intend.
Poder, 2. to be able.
Preferir, 3. to prefer.
Presumir, 3. to preswme.
Pretender, 2. to pretend,
Prohibir, 3. to forbid.
Prometer, 2. to promise.
Protestar, 1. to protest.
Querer, 2. to be willing.
Sentir, 3. to feel, to regret.
Soler, 2. to be accustomed.
Temer, 2. to fear.

Ver, 2. to see.

etc. ele.

Examples.
I wish to have money.
He affirms that he has told the truth.
I fear to see my friend.
I see many people coming.
I dared to tell him the truth.

I hear (some one) knocking at the
door.
INFINITIVE MOOD. 251

2, Government of the infinitive with the preposition 4:

Some of the principal verbs requiring the preposition & before the follow-
ing infinitive :

Animar, 1. to encourage.
Aprender, 2. to learn.
Aspirar, 1. to aspire.
Ayudar, 1. to help.
Comenzar, 1. to commence.
Condenar, 1. to condemn.
Consentir, 3. to consent.
Convidar, 1. to invite.
Echar, 1. to begin.
Empezar, 1. to begin.
Enseiiar, 1. to teach.

Ejemplos.
Autorizo 4 V. @ hablar.
El viuo ¢ visitarme.
Sali @ ver los soldados.
Fil me ensefia 4 cantar.
Nos convidé @ comer con él.

Habituar, 1. to accustom.
Inclinar, 1. to incline.
Invitar, 1. to invite.
Obligar, 1. to oblige.
Pasar, 1. to pass.
Principiar, 1. to begin.
Salir, 3. to go out.
Tender, 2. ¢o aim.
Venir, 3. to come.
Volver, 2. to return.

Examples.
I authorize you to speak.
He came to visit me.
I went out to see the soldiers,
He teaches me to sing.
He invited us to dine with him,

3. Government of the infinitive with the preposition de:

Some of the verbs requiring the preposition Ge before the following
infinitive :

Cesar, 1. fo cease.
Dejar, 1. to leave.
Disuadir, 3. to dissuade.

Eximir, 3. to free.
Jurar, 1. to swear.
Rabiar, 1. to rage.

Encargar, 1. to commission. Tratar, 1. to try.

Excusar, 1. to excuse.

Hjemplos.
Cesé de venir aqui.

Me encargé de darle 4 V. esta carta.

Examples.
He ceased coming here.
He requested me to give you this
letter.

4, Government of the infinitive with the preposition para:
Lo hago para complacerle 4 V. I do it to please you.

Trabajo para ganar dinero.

I work to earn money.

5, Government of the infinitive with the preposition en:

Le ocupo en escribir una carta.
Persiste en querer salir.

I employ him to write a letter.
He insists on going out.
252

LESSON 46.

6. Government of the infinitive with the preposition con;

Le entretengo con leerle algo in-
teresante.

I amuse him by reading something
interesting to him,

4, The infinitive used with the artiele-

Mucho temo el verle venir.

El perfecto tocar de este musico
me encanta.

No es tan facil el eseribir un buen
poema.

Al verle, me fui.

Al salir, recibié una carta.

Enfermé del mucho beber.

Al ir 4 verle, le encontré.

Vocabulario.

El centavo, the cent.

El paseo, the walk.

El viaje, the journey.

La autorizaci6n, the authorization.
La dificultad, the difficulty.
La intencién, the intention.
La pagina, the page.

La traduccion, the translation.
Bajo, low.

Dispuesto, disposed.

Inocente, innocent.

Seguro, swre.

Tal, such as.

Acostumbrar, 1. to accustom.
Acusar, 1. to accuse.
Autorizar, 1. to authorize.
Ayudar 1. to help.

Complacer, 2. to please.
Consistir, 3. to consist,

Copiar, 1. to copy.

I much fear to see him come.

The perfect playing of this musician
delights me.

It is not so easy to write a good
poem.

On seeing him I went away.

On going out, he received a letter.

He became sick from much drinking.

In going to see him, I met him,

Vocabulary.

Dar (1.) un paseo, to take a walk.
Deber, 2. must.

Descansar, 1. to rest.

Dibujar, 1. to draw.

Encargar, 1. to charge.

Entender, 2. to understand,
Excusar, 1. to excuse.

Esperar, 1. to expect.

Gobernar, 1. to manage, to govern,
Gritar, 1. to cry.

Inducir, 3. to induce.

Obligar, 1. to compel.

Osar, 1. to dare.

Partir, 3. to leave,

Pensar, 1. to intend.

Resolver, 2. to resolve.

Soler 2. to be in the habit.
Visitar, 1. to visit.

Volver (2.) 4 hacer, 2. to do again.

 

Exercise 91.

i. Creo haber visto 4 su hermano en el concierto, pero no estoy
seguro siera él. 2. ; Me promete V. venir mafiana? 3. Yose lo pro-
meto 4 V. 4. Acostumbro comer y dormir poco. 5. V. no me deja
INFINITIVE MOOD. 253

trabajar con su mucho hablar. 6. No podremos salir hoy, porque
tenemos imchisimo que hacer. 7. Su amigo de V. debe saber 4 que
hora llega el correo. 8. § Quién le ha autorizado 4 V. 4 hacer eso?
9. Nadie me ha autorizado, pero yo creia poder hacerlo sin autoriza-
cidn. 10. No estoy acostumbrado comer tanto. 11. Mi amigo vino
avisitarme ayer, pero no estabamos en casa. 12. El comenzé hablando
bajo y acabéd gritando. 13. Mi padre me ha encargado de decirle 4 V.
que sentia mucho no poder mandarle el dinero hoy. 14. Nunca le
excusaré (le haber hablado asi. 15. Vengo 4 ver si ha llegado de la
Habana el sefior Alvarez. 16. No puedo decirselo, porque no lo sé.
17. ; Porqué trabaja V. tan tarde? 18. Lo hago para complacerle 4 mi
padre. 19. Este hombre no entiende gobernar su casa. 20. He
tesuelto no salir de la ciudad este verano, 21. ; A dénde va V.ahora]
22. Voy 4 visitar 4 algunos amigos que han llegado de Francia.
23. La dificultad consiste en saber donde hallar al sefior Romero.
24. Anduve todo el dia para ver si encontraba una casa bastante
grande para mi familia. 25. Preste dos libros 4 su amigo de V., pero
4l no ha vuelto 4 traérmelos. 26. Acabo de ver al Sefior Juliano
an la calle. 27. Me dijo que acababa de llegar de Europa. 28. Mis
hijas aprenden 4 dibujar con el Sefior Rondel. 29. El banquero
nos convidé 4 comer, pero no pudimos ir. 30. Aquel profesor fué el
que me enseBé 4 hablar inglés.

Exercise 92.

1. We went out this morning to see the procession, but we did not
see anything; for we arrived too late. 2. My brother begins to speak
Spanish 3. I went to see your brother last, Sunday, but they told
me that he was not in (the) town. 4. I am working now to rest this
evening. 5. Tintend to leave at the end of this week. 6. What have
you resolved todo? 7. I have resolved to sell my house, and to buy
alarger one. 8. When are you going to bring me my books? 9. I -
am going to bring them to-morrow. 10. The physician has advised
me not to go out to-day. 11. He continued to sing and I to write.
12. Iam in the habit of writing every week to my family. 13. If
you will help me to finish my translation, I will help you to copy
these pages. 14. You cannot compel me to do this. 15. I am dis-
posed to pay what is right, but not one cent more. 16. Nothing will
induce me to visit him. 17. He thought that he could do it without
me, but he very soon saw that it was impossible. 18. I dared to tell
254 LESSON 46.

him the truth, and he forgave me. 19. We were invited to go to the
country, but we could not leave our work. 20. If I do it, it is only
to please you. 21. We wish to have money to go to the theater.
22. He protests that he never had such an intention. 23. I fear not
to have money enough for my journey. 24. Will you promise me
never to do that again? 25. I cannot promise that. 26. Will you
tell your brother that we expect him to-morrow? 27. We are going
to take a walk this evening, will you come with us? 28. We cannot
go, we have too much to do. 29. Do you know how to speak French ?
30. No, sir, I only speak English. 31. He accuses me of having done
that, but I assure you that I am innocent.

Gramatica. Grammar.

1, Some Spanish verbs require no prepositicn before another
verb in the infinitive mood. Such are principally the verbs
which indicate desire, wish, fear, doubt, need, duty, and also
those which express a thought or speech, command, advice,
prohibition, and a few others as given above. Many of these
verbs may also be used with the present indicative and the con-
junction que:

El cuenta que ha ganado mucho He says that he has earned much
dinero, money.

2, Although according to the Spanish Academy the verb
decir, 3. to say, to tell, must never be followed by an infinitive,
many writers do not adhere to this rule :

Afiadian el perjuicio que decian They added the prejudice which
recibir, — QUINTANA. they said they were receiving.

Nore. — The verb decir requires the preposition & before a person.

Dije 4 mi hermano que viniese, I told my brother to come.

8. Other verbs require in Spanish the preposition 4 before
another verb in the infinitive mood.

Such are principally those which express a destination, en»
couragement, habit, propriety, etc., and others given above,
INFINITIVE MOOD. 255

Verbs which indicate motion, as venir, 3. to come ; salir, 3.
to go out; belong to the same category.

4, The verb comenzar, 1. empezar, 1. and acabar, 1. require
the preposition por in the sense of to begin with, and to end by:

La diversién comenzo por cantar, y The amusement began with singing
acabé por llorar, and ended with crying.

Nore. — In cases like the above, the gerwnd is more generally used :
Comenzé hablando bajo y acabé He began speaking low and ended

gritando, by shouting.

5. Those verbs which govern the infinitive with the prepo-
sition de are principally those which express distance, cessation,
accusation, discussion, and a few others :

6, The preposition para is used before the infinitive to ex-
press more forcibly an ¢tntention, and whenever the English
preposition to may be rendered by in order to:

Trabajo ahora para descansar luego, LI am working now to rest later.

7. Those verbs which express occupation or insistence require
the preposition en before the infinitive:
Me ocupa en leer, He occupies me in reading.
Persiste en decirlo, He persists in saying so,
8. The preposition con governs in the infinitive those verbs
which indicate entertainment, diversion, amusement, etc. :
Le entretengo con contarle cuentos, I amuse him by telling him stories.
Nort. — The gerund is oftener used, however, in such cases :

Le divierto tocando el piano, I amuse him by playing on the piano.

9. Some verbs may take or omit either of the prepositions
according to their meaning :
Este hombre no entiende hacer eso, That man does not understand how

to do that.
No entiendo de meterme en negocios I don't mean to meddle with other
ajenos, people’s business,
Acerté 4 verle al ir 4 su casa, I succeeded in seeing hin on going

to his house.
256 LESSON 46.

He acertado en hablar con él, I have done right in speaking to
him.

Nots. — There are even verbs which have different meanings with the
same preposition :

Dejé de escribir cuando entré, He ceased writing when I entered,
‘No deje V. de escribirme, Do not neglect writing to me,
10. The following rules for the guidance of the student in
the use of prepositions require special attention :

1. When the infinitive occurs in the sentence as subject or
object of the determining verb, it is used without a preposition
when the question who? or what? may be asked:

He resuelto salir hoy, I have resolved (what ?) to go out to-day.
El ofrecié ayudarme, He offered (what ?) to help me.

2. When the question to what? or where to? may ba
asked, the preposition 4 must be used :

Yo le animaré 4 hacerle, I will encourage him (to what?) to do it.

Voy 4 visitar mi tio, I am going (where to ?) to visit my unele,

3. The preposition de is used in answer to the questions of
what? from what? at what? from where?

Se espanto de verle tan palido, He was alarmed (at what’) at seeing
him so pale.

Su pobreza proviene de su gastar, His poverty is the result (of what ?) of
his expenses.

4. The preposition en is used in answer to the questions in
what? on what?
La dificultad consiste en hallarle, The difficulty consists (in what?) in
Jjinding him.
£1 insiste en salir, He insists (on what 2) on going out.

5. The preposition con is used in answer to the questions
with what? by what?
Este hombre ha destruido su salud This man has destroyed his health
con mucho beber, (by what ?) by much drinking.

Nore. — Although there are many cases in which the right use of the
preposition cannot be indicated, the rules given above may be followed in
most cases.
INFINITIVE MOOD. 257

Il, The verb acabar, 1. to end, to finish, followed by the
preposition de and an infinitive, expresses an action which has
just taken place :

Acabo de verle, LT have just seen him.
Acababa de comer cuando yo entré, He had just dined when I entered.

12, The verbs mandar, 1. to send, to order, and hacer, 2. to
make, to do, followed by an infinitive, have the meaning of the
English verbs to cause, to let, to have:

Hago hacer un sombrero, LT have a hat made,
Mando lavar mi ropa, LT have my clothes washed.
Hace teftir el pafio, He has the cloth dyed.

Nors. — In such eases the Spanish active infinitive is often rendered
in English by the passive.

13. The infinitive may be used in Spanish as a substantive
and as the subject or object of the verb. It may, therefore, be
preceded in this case by the article or by any other part of
speech :

No he olvidado el insoportable I have not forgotten the insupport-

hablar de este hombre, able talking of that man.
Al avanzar nuestro ejército se re- Our army having advanced, the
tiraron los enemigos, enemy retired.

No ganara V. nada con ese hablar, You will gain nothing by this talk.

14, There are cases where the infinitive may be used with or
without the article :

Es injusto acusar (or el acusar) este It is unjust to accuse this man of
hombre de este crimen, this crime.

W
258

Lececion XLVII.

LESSON 47.

Lesson XLVII.

THE INFINITIVE GOVERNED BY PREPOSITIONS.

A més de,
Ademas de,
Sobre,

Tras de,

A menos de,

A pesar de,

Sin embargo de,
No obstante de,

Unless.

Besides, although.

Notwithstanding, however.

Después de, After.
Antes de, Before.
Sin, Without.
En cuanto 4, As for.
Por,

En consecuencia de,

EHjemplos.

A mas de )haberle visto, le he
Ademas de } hablado,

A pesar de haberle yo pagado
Sin embargo de no estuvo satisfe-
No obstante de 7 cho,

Antes de salir, comid,

Después de haber comido, sali,
Sali sin nadie verme.

No fué admitido por ser estrangero,

Tras de no pagarme, me insulta,

Sobre ser Inglés, quiere pasar por
Americano.

En cuanto 4 dar dinero, no lo haré.

No sé cémo acabar eso.

On account of, for, instead of.
In consequence of.

Examples.

Besides seeing him, I spoke to
him,

Notwithstanding that I paid him,
he was not pleased.

He dined before going out.

He went out after having dined.

I went out without anybody see-
ing me.

He was not admitted (on account
of his) being a stranger.

Besides not paying me, he in-
sults me.

Althongh he is an Englishman, he
wishes to pass for an American,

As for giving money, I shall not
do it.

I don’t know how to finish that.
THE INFINITIVE GOVERNED BY PREPOSITIONS. 259

Vocabulario. Vocabulary.
E) gasto, the expense. Atacar, 1. to attack. Invocar, 1. to invoke.
El obrero, the workman. Castigar, 1. to punish. | Obedecer, 2. to obey.
El vestido, the dress. Consultar, 1. to consult. | Obtener, 2. to obtain,

La colocacién, the sitwation. | Contestar, 1. to answer. | Ofender, 3. to offend.
La divinidad, the divinity. | Continuar, 1. to continue.| Pagar, 1. to pay.

La pregunta, the question. | Descansar, 1. éo rest. Seguir, 3. to follow.
Generoso, generous. Entrar, 1. to enter. Trabajar, 1. to work.
Tal, such as. | Examinar, 1. to examine. | Volver, 2. to return

Exercise 93.

1. Después de haber yo leido el libro, se lo presté 4 mi amigo.
2. A pesar de no bien trabajar, quiere que le paguen bien. 3. Ademé4a
de ser haragin, gasta mucho, 4. Sin embargo de ser muy pobre, quiere
pasar por rico. 5. Antes de consentir yo a lo que él quiere, debo
examinar si él tiene razén. 6. Perdondéd 4 sus enemigos, antes de
morir. 7. En consecuencia de haberle yo dicho que viniera, vino.
8. En cuanto 4 tener yo que hacer todos los gastos, lo veremos.
9. 4 Qué contestar 4 tal pregunta? 10. ; Como saber si mi amigo esta
en laciudad? 11, ; A dénde ir para encontrarle? 12. Este hombre
me ha ofendido demasiado por poder perdonarle yo. 13, El muchacho
tomé el libro sin dérselo yo. 14. Sin verme nadie, entré en mi
cuarto. 15. No haga V. nada antes de consultarme. 16. j Porqué
hizo V. eso? 17. Lo hize sin saber lo que estaba haciendo. 18. Ade-
mas de ser 6] mi amigo, lo es también de V. 19. Quiero hacerlo sin
decirselo 4 nadie. 20. Le di la carta por creer que era para él.

Exercise 94.

1. After having written his letters, he went out. 2. You cannot
obtain that situation, unless you speak Spanish and English. 3. De
not go out without seeing me. 4. Michael (Miguel) is punished foi
having spoken. 5. Do not speak without knowing. 6. Besides being
very rich, he is also very generous. 7. Notwithstanding that I told
him not to do it, he would not obey me. 8. How shall I do that?
9. Where shall I look for my books? 10. He could not follow us
(on account of his) being too old. 11. Before going away, he said that
be would not return. 12. Although he works badly (mal), he wishes
to be paid like a good workman. 13. After he had rested, he con-
260 LESSON 47.

tinued his journey. 14, Besides his not reading the letter, he tore it
to pieces (la hizo pedazos). 15. Besides receiving him in my house,
I gave him money and clothes. 16. They invoked their divinities
before attacking the enemy. 17. He took the money without my
giving it to him. 18. He is sick on account of having eaten too
much. 19. Besides not paying us, he says that we owe him money.
20. 1 wish you to do it without saying a word to him.

Gramatica. Grammar.

1, Some of the prepositions given above which govern the
infinitive have different meanings.

Por, for instance, has the meaning of on account of or because
in the following sentence:
No fué admitido por ser estrangero, He was not admitted on account of
his being a stranger,
while in the next sentence it is to be rendered by instead of :

Le di mi libro por darle el suyo, I gave him my book instead of giving
him his own.

2, The infinitive is often governed also by the conjunctions
como, how, and que, that, by the adverb donde, where, and by
the interrogative pronouns:

No sé cémo acabar esto, I don't know how to finish that.

Le traigo que comer, I bring you to eat.

; Como decir lo que siento ! How shall I say what I feel !

i No sabe V. 4 quién vender su Do you not know to whom you could
caballo ? sell your horse ?

Nore. — The above examples can only be explained by an ellipsis, by
which the natural object of the infinitive is omitted:

No sé cémo (puedo) acabar esto, I don’t know how (I can) finish that.
j Cémo (podré) decir lo que siento ! How (shall Ibe able) to say what I
feel!

Le traigo (algo que V. pueda) co. J bring yow (something that you
mer, can) eat,
THE GERUND AND PRESENT PARTICIPLE.

261

8. The infinitive sentences may also be rendered in Spanish
by the present indicative or by the subjunctive mood, by

adopting a different

Después de haberle dado el dinero sa-
lié or Después que le hube dado el

dinero, salié,

Tras de no pagarme, no me saluda or {
Tras de que no me paga no me saluda,

Sali sin verme él or

Sali sin que él me viera, §

Leceion XLVIII.

construction :

’

After I had given him the money, he
went out.

Besides not paying me, he does not
salute me.

I went out without his seeing me,

Lesson XLVIII.

THE GERUND AND PRESENT PARTICIPLE,

1, Amar, 1. to love ;
Causar, 1. to cause ;
Habitar, 1. to inhabit ;

Participar,1. to participate ;

Tocar, 1. to touch ;
Obedecer, 2. to obey ;

Pertenecer, 2. to belong ;

Seguir, 3. to follow ;

amando, amante, loving.
causando, causante, causing.
habitando, habitante, inhabiting.

participando, participante, participating.

tocando, tocante, touching.
obedeciendo, obediente, obeying.

perteneciendo, perteneciente, belonging.

siguiendo, siguiente, following.

Vocabulario.

El almirante, the admi-
ral,

El capitén, the captain.

El colegio, the college.

El enemigo, the enemy.

El estudio, the study.

El habitante, the inhab-
tant.

El lado, the side.

El ojo, the eye.

El palacio, the palace.

El precepto, the precept.

El puente, the bridge.

 

El reino, the kingdom.

La capital, the capital.

La equivocacién, the’mis-
take.

La escuadra, the squad-
ron.

La guerra, the war.

La hora, the time.

La imprenta, the press.

La posada, the inn.

La posesién, the posses-
sion.

La Tartaria, Tartary.

La victoria, the victory.

Dentro de, within.

 

Vocabulary.

Por, through.

Atravesar, 1. fo cross
over.

Construir, 3. to construct.

Desobedecer, 2. to disobey.

Explicar, 1. to explain.

Licenciar, 1. to disband.

Montar, 1. to mount.

Reir, 3. to laugh.

Sacar, 1. to draw.

Salir (2) de, to leave.

Sublevar, 1. to revolt.

Suspender, 2. to suspend.
‘262 LESSON 48.

Exercise 95.

1. Los muchachos Megaron llorando de la escuela, pues hab{fan
sido castigados. 2. Hablando de otra cosa, cémo esta su padre de V.?
3. Esté muy bien hoy, gracias, 4, Pasando el otro dia por la calle
nueva, vid su amigo de V. 5. Saliendo yo de la iglesia, entraba él.
6. No sabiendo que hacer, dormi todo el dia. 7. Los estudiantes de
nuestro colegio acabardn sus estudios dentro de pocos dias. 8. El
entré riendo, pero salié llorando. 9. Diciendo esto, salié del cuarto.
10. Estando el padre en Francia, murié el hijo en Nueva York.
11. Habiendo el general ganado la victoria, tomdé la fortaleza.
12. Temiendo el emperador que volviese 4 empezar la guerra, licencid
sélo una parte de su ejército. 13. Habiendo el rey mandado que
suspendiesen la libertad de imprenta, se sublevd el pais. 14. Habi-
endo sabido que su hermano no habfa venido, mandé per él. 15. Los
hombres habiendo de temer 4 Dios, desobedecen sus preceptos.
16. Los habitantes de esta ciudad son muy industriosos. 17. Creyendo
yo encontrar 4 mi amigo, fui muy temprano 4 su casa. 18. Los hijos
de este pobre hombre son muy obedientes. 19. Habiendo el general
hecho construir un puente, pasé todo el ejército al otro lado del rio.
20. Cuando entré, estaba él durmiendo. 21. ; Qué estaban haciendo
los muchachos en el cuarto? 22, Algunos estaban jugando, y otros
estudiando. 23. Queriendo sacar su reloj, vid que se lo habian robado.
24, Siendo capitan el almirante Blake, fué mandado con una pequefia
escuadra contra las posesiones espafiolas. 25. Viajando un extranjero
por la Tartaria legé 4 la capital del reino y por equivocacidn tom el
palacio del rey por una posada publica.

Exercise 96.

1. To whom were you writing this morning? 2. I was writing to
my brother in Paris. 3. My father having heard that you were in
town, has sent me to invite you to his house. 4. As we were passing
through your street, we met Miss Mary. 5. While we were in Paris,
we heard that your father was very sick. 6. Not knowing what to
do, we wrote to our friends. 7, When he opened his eyes he saw his
brother near his bed. 8. I have been reading the whole morning.
9. [saw the boys stealing the apples in the garden. 10. If you ex-
plain our lesson to us, we shallunderstand it. 11. To-morrow at this
time, we shall be travelling. 12. If I have time, I will do it.
THE GERUND AND PRESENT PARTICIPLE. 263

13. The general, having defeated the enemy, was received by the
king. 14, The captain having mounted his horse, left the city.
15. When he saw the soldiers coming, he called me. 16. Hannibal
having crossed the Alps, defeated the Romans. 17. Having studied
the English language for several years, I speak it well now. 18. My
brother is a student in that college. 19. When my father gave me the
money, I paid all my debts. 20. As he was traveling through Eng-
land, he met all our friends. 21. Those children are very disobedi-
ent. 22. He has annoyed us by talking too much. 23. AsI was not
able to do it alone, I told my brother to help me. 24, Why are
these little girls crying? 25. Because they have lost their mother.

Gramatica. * Grammar.

1. In Spanish the gerund is clearly distinguished both in
form and usage from the present participle. The latter may
now be considered as forming no part of the verb, and the
forms which remain are either adjectives or nouns.

The present participle was formed by the addition of -ante
or -ente to the verb stem :

Diferente, different. (Diferir, to differ.)
Obediente, obedient. (Obedecer, to obey.)
El amante, the lover. (Amar, to love.)

El presidente, the president. (Presidir, to preside.)
Norz. — This form may be found taking the place of other parts of
speech, or even of the gerund itself. Such are, however, rather rare.
2. We refer the student to Lesson 19 for the formation of
the gerund and for some of the rules relating to this tense.

3. There are cases when the gerund and the infinitive may
be used alike :

Le vi cazando or cazar, I saw him hunting or hunt.

4, When a motion is expressed, either the gerund of the
verb ir, 3. to go, or that of andar, 1. ¢o walk, may precede the
other verbs :

Yendo or Andandome paseando, le Going to take a walk, I met him.
encontré,
264 LESSON 48.

5, The gerund is also used :

1st. When it indicates the state of the subject:
Habla durmiendo, He speaks while he sleeps.

2d. When the verb expresses the cause of an action:

Temiendo él que le atacasen, tomd Fearing that they would attack him,
sus pistolas, he took his pistols.

Nore. —In sentences like the above, the gerund may be replaced by
the infinitive with por: Por temer el que le atacasen, etc.

3d. When the verb expresses means or instrumentality:
Estudiando se aprende, One learns by studying.

Norz. — The infinitive preceded by con, with, may be used in the above
sentence : Con estudiar se aprende.

6. The compound gerund or participio de preterito is of
the same nature as the gerund and is used in the same way:

Habiendo el hijo perdido 4 su padre, The son, having lost his father,
volvid 4 su pais, returned to his country.

7. The gerund is often used in Spanish in cases where the
English use the Conjunctions as, since, if, and the adverbs
when, while, whilst:

Siendo asi, no saldré, Since it is so, I shall not go out.

No teniendo dinero, no puedo ir al As I have no money, I cannot go te
teatro, the theater.

Viéndome tan triste, se puso a When he saw me so sad, he began
llorar, to cry.

Habiendo él de venir aca, se fué al While he was to come here, he went
teatro, to the theater.

Norr. — Many sentences rendered in Spanish by the gerund might,
however, be used as in English with the tenses of the indicative or of the
subjunctive with such words as como, as ; luego que, ws soon as, cuando,
asi que, when, etc.

Viéndome or Asi que me vid, When he saw me.
THE GERUND AND PRESENT PARTICIPLE. 265

8, The gerund (simple or compound) is most elegantly used
in Spanish at the beginning of the sentence, especially in short
narrations, the subject being sometimes separated from its verb:

Paseando un dia por la calle el As President Jefferson was one

Presidente Jéfferson, con un co- day walking through the street
merciante, contestéd al saludo de with a merchant, he answered
un negro que pasaba. —j Porqué, the salutation of a passing ne-
Je preguntd el comerciante, se presta gro. — Why does your Excet-
V. & saludar 4 un esclavo ?— lency deign to salute a slave?
Sentiria mucho, contesté el Presi- asked the merchant. — I should
dente, que un esclavo me excediese be very sorry, answered the Presi-
en urbanidad. dent, that a slave should surpass

me in politeness.

9. Verbs of the 3d conjugation ending in -chir, -llir and
“fiir form their gerund in endo and not in ¢enao, as the diph-
thong ie very seldom stands after ch, ll and i. We must there-
fore say: Cifiendo, from cefiir, 3. to gird; hinchendo, from
henchir, 3. ¢o jill; riendo, from reir, 3. to laugh.

The z is also omitted for the same reason in the 3d persons of
the preterit of the indicative and in all the persons of the
subjunctive of the same verbs: rifié, from reflir, 3. to quarrel ;
engulleres, from engullir, 3. to ingulf; etc.

The verb volver, 2. followed by the preposition 4 before an
infinitive, expresses the repetition of the action indicated by the
infinitive:

Vuelvo d salir, Igo out again.
266

Lecciér. XLIX.

LESSON 49,

Lesson XLIX.

THE PAST PARTICIPLE.

Bjemplos.

Este libro esta bien escrito.

Estos libros estan bien escritos,

La casa esta acabada.

Las casas estan acabadas.

He recibido una carta de Paris.

Hemos visto el teatro nuevo,

Los muchachos han comido las
manzanas.

Nuestros soldados han derrotado
al enemigo.

La leecién que V. nos ha dado, es
muy dificil.

El enemigo atacado por todas
partes, se retird.

Bien sabido es, que este hombre
es rico.

Llamado un cirujano, examind la
herida.

Examples.

This book is well written.

These books are well written.

The house is finished.

The houses are finished.

I have received a letter from Paris.
We have seen the new theater.
The boys have eaten the apples.

Our soldiers have defeated the enemy.

The lesson which you have given us
is very difficult.

The enemy, being attacked on all
sides, retired.

It is well known that this man is
rich.

A surgeon having been called, he
examined the wound.

Irregular Participles.

Abrir, 3. to open ;
Cubrir, 3. to cover ;

Decir, 3. to say, to tell ;

Escribir, 3. to write ;

Hacer, 2. to make, to do;

Imprimir, 3. to print ;
Morir, 3. to die;
Foner, 2. to put ;

Resolver, 2. to resolve;

Ver, 2. to see;
Volver, fo return ;

abierto, opened.
cubierto, covered.
dicho, said, told.
escrito, written.
hecho, made, done.
impreso, printed.
muerto, died.
puesto, put.
resuelto, resolved.
visto, seen.
vuelto, returned,

Participles having often an active meaning,

Acostumbrado, accustomed.

Agradecido, grateful.

Atrevido, bold.
Bien hablado, welZ Spoken.
THE PAST PARTICIPLE. 267

Callado, reserved.
Cansado, tiresome.

Comedido, well behaved.
Desesperado, despairing.
Disimulado, dissimulated.

Entendido, experienced.
Esforzado, bold.

Leido, well read.
Medido, prudent.
Mirado, considerate.
Moderado, moderate.
Osado, bold.

Parado, slow.

Voeabulario.

El Congreso, the Congress.
El cuadro, the pictwre.

El desuso, the deswetude.

El dia festivo, the holiday.
El grande, the grandee.

El Moro, the Aloor.

El mundo, the world.

El refresco, the refreshment.
La atencién, the attention.
La cena, the supper.

La comida, the eating, the dinner.

La discordia, the discord.
La inocencia, the innocence.
La ley, the law.

La memoria, the memory.
La ociosidad, the idleness,
La palabra, the word.

La pérdida, the loss,

La prerogativa, the prerogative.

La salida, the exit.

 

Parecido, resembling.
Partido, Jiberal.
Pausado, cautious.
Porfiado, obstinate.
Precavido, cautious.
Preciado, vain.
Presumido, conceited.
Recatado, wise.
Sabido, learned.
Sentido, sensible.
Sufrido, patient.
Trascendido, acute.
Valido, influential.

Vocabulary.

Agradable, agreeable.
Cierto, certain.

Enorme, enormous.
Fernando, Ferdinand.
Isabel, Jsabella.

Por desgracia, unfortunately.
Porfiado, obstinate.
Presumido, conceited.
Atrasar, 1. to delay.
Casar, 1. to marry.
Coneluir, 3. to conclude.
Convencer, 2. to convince.
Defender, 2. to defend.
Establecer, 2. to establish.
Ofrecer, 2. 4o offer.
Pintar, 1. to depict.
Reinar, 1. to reign.
Reparar, 1. to compensate.
Sufocar, 1. to suffocate.
Volver, 2. toturn. .

Exercise 97.

1. Concluida la cena, todo el mundo salid. 2. Salf de la casa
resuelto 4 verle. 3. Derrotados los enemigos, volvieron 4 pasar el rio.
4. ; Ha recibido V. la carta que yo le he escrito? 5. La he recibido
esta mafiana. 6. Vi4su amigo de V. 4 la salida del teatro. 7. La
268 LESSON 49.

comida es muy buena en esta fonda, 8. Debemos considerar como
perdidos los dias que pasamos en la ociosidad. 9. La discordia ha
siempre reinado en el universo. 10. Las puertas estaban abiertas y
entraban todos los que querian. 11. 4 Ha ofdo V. cantar aquella
sefiora? 12. La of cantar el domingo pasado en nuestra iglesia.
13. 4 Ha visto V. los cuadros que mi hermano ha comprado? 14. To-
davia no los he visto. 15. Esta ley ha sido establecida por el Con-
greso. 16. Le hemos mandado 4 V. todos los libros que V. nos ha
pedido, 17. Las cartas estaban tan mal escritas que no pudimos
leerlas. 18. Este hombre es muy henrado, siempre me ha devuelto
el dinero que le he prestado. 19. 4 Es verdad que ha muerto Pedro?
20. Por desgracia es cierto. 21. 4 Ha padecido mucho? 22. No
puede V. imaginar lo que ha padecido. 23. Es V., amigo Pablo, el
hombre mas porfiado del mundo. 24. No podremos comprar hoy lo
que necesitamos, pues los dias festivos estan cerrados los almacenes,
25. Tengo una hermana casada en Madrid, con un médico espaiiol ; y
como la visité el afio pasado, he aprendido 4 hablar un poco espaiiol,
26. Me habian pintado el viaje como bastante desagradable ; pero
fué al contrario muy agradable, menos el habernos atrasado unas ocho
horas en el camino. 27. Don Juan ha dado el brazo 4 mi madre hasta
el coche. 28. No sé como reparar la enorme pérdida que he hecho.
29. Las prerogativas de los grandes de Espafia han sido muchas, pero
todas han caido en desuso. 30, Estamos sofocados con el calor que
tenemos aqui desde que principid el verano.

Exercise 98.

1, These things have passed from my memory. 2. We have read
all the books you have lent us; have you received any others?
3. We can lend you those we bought the other day, 4. Where have
you been? 5. I have been to the ball. 6. Why have not the chil-
dren gone to school to-day? 7. Because one of their teachers has
died. 8. I-don’t know where I have put my gloves; will you do me
the favor to look for them for me? 9. I believe that you have left
them in your room, 10. Do you know what your father has re-
solved? 11. He has not resolved anything yet. 12. Whom have
you seen in that house? 13. I have not seen anybody. 14. You
must not leave your windows open during the night. 15. John is
loved by no one, because he is too conceited. 16. My friend will
come after (the) dinner. 17 The war with Portugal being concluded,
THE PAST PARTICIPLE. 269

Ferdinand and Isabella turned their attention to the Moors of Gran-
ada. 18. I have lost one of my books, I don’t know how. 19. That
soldier has lost his arm while defending his country. 20. Have you
heard what that man has said? 21. I have heard every word.
22. Have you offered anything to those ladies? 23. Yes, sir, I have
offered them refreshments. 24. Have you seen our new theater?
25. I have not seen anything yet, I have not been out for (desde) three
days. 26. How were your sisters dressed for the ball? 27. They
were dressed in (de) white. 28. I have been so busy this morning,
that I have not been able to write to your father. 29. Our friends
arrived this morning, but we have not seen them yet. 30. Being
convinced of his innocence, I defended him.

Gramatica. Grammar.

1, The past participle of the verbs of the lst conjugation, as
has been already said (L. 17, R. 5), ends in ado; and those of
the 2d and 3d conjugations end in ido, the irregular participles
being given above.

2. The past participle as well as the gerund is at the same
time an adjective, being derived from the verb, as in this sen-
tence:

Una carta bien escrita, A well written letter.

8. The past participle is not limited to a certain definite
time, but may refer to any past time, according to the tense
with which it is combined. It loses its passive signification
when connected with the verb haber, 2. to have; to form the
tenses of the verbo activo, active verb.

With intransitive, unipersonal, and reflexive verbs, it can
only have an active signification, as these verbs do not admit
the passive form.

4, It has already been observed (L. 18, R. 1), that the past
participle joined to the verb haber, 2. to have, is invariable,
although it had formerly a feminine termination, and agreed
with its object.
270 LESSON 49.

Joined with the verbs ser, 2. to be, and estar, 1. to be; the
past participle is considered as an adjective, and agrees in gen-
der and number with its subject :

La casa esta acabada, The house is finished.
Los buenos muchachos son amados, Good boys are loved.

5. The past participle often occurs in Spanish in an absolute
construction, and corresponds then to the Latin ablative absolute.
In such cases it is generally placed before the noun, with which
it agrees in gender and number:

Aprovechadas estas ventajas se fa- Through profiting by these advan-
cilita el aprender, tages, learning is made easier.
Norts. — The subject may, however, precede the participle, when both

sentences have the same subject :

El enemigo atacado de todas partes, The enemy, being attacked on all
se retird, sides, retired.

6. A preposition may sometimes precede the past participle :
Después de restablecida la paz flo- After peace is reéstablished the arts

receran las artes, will flourish,

Nore. — As seen by the above examples, the participle is in one case in
an absolute construction, while in the other the auxiliary verb is omitted :
Siendo aprovechadas estas ventajas, etc., después de ser restablecida la
paz, etc.

7. Past participles used as adjectives may govern the prepo-
sition de or por, the preference being generally given to de:
Es un hombre despreciado de todos, He is a man despised by all.

8. Those participles which have an active meaning, have also
a passive one:

Active sense. / Passive sense.
Hombre leido, a well read man. Libro leido, a book read.
Mujer leida, a well read woman. Carta leida, a letter read.

9. Many past participles are used as nouns in the feminine
form: bebida, drink, beverage ; entrada, entrance, salida, exit,
departure ; llegada, arrival ; comida, dinner, eating ; medida,
measure ; corrida, race; mirada, look ; vista, sight ; etc.
THE PAST PARTICIPLE. 271

Leccion L.

Lesson L.

THE PAST PARTICIPLE (Continued).

Principal Spanish Verbs having two Participles.

Abstraer, 2. fo abstract;
Aceptar, 1. to accept ;
Astringir, 3. to contract ;
Atender, 2. to heed ;
Bendecir, 3. to bless ;
Compeler, 2. to compel ;
Completar, 1. to complete ;

Comprender, 2. to wnderstand ;

Comprimir, 3. o compress ;
Concluir, 3. fo conclude ;
Confesar, 1. to confess ;
Confundir, 3. to confound ;
Contentar, 1. ¢o content ;
Contraer, 2. to contract ;
Convencer, 2. to convince ;
Convertir, 3. to convert ;
Corregir, 3. ¢o correct ;
Corromper, 2. fo corrupt ;
Cultivar, 1. to cultivate ;
Desertar, 1. to desert ;
Desnudar, 1. to lay bare;
Despertar, 1. to awake ;
Difundir, 3. to diffuse ;
Dirigir, 3. to direct ;
Dispersar, 1. ¢o disperse ;
Distinguir, 3. to distinguish ;
Dividir, 3. to divide ;
Eligir, 3. to elect ;
Enjugar, 1. to wipe;
Erigir, 3. to erect ;
Exceptuar, 1. to except ;
Excluir, 3, to exclude ;
Exentar, 1, to exempt ;
Expeler, 2. to expel ;
Expresar, 1. to express ;
Extender, 2. to extend;

abstraido, abstracto, abstracted.
aceptado, acepto, accepted.
astringido, astricto, contracted.
atendido, atento, heeded.
bendecido, bendito, diessed.
compelido, compulso, compelled.
completado, completo, completed.
comprendido, comprenso, understood.
comprimido, compreso, compressed.
concluido, concluso, concluded,
confesado, confeso, confessed.
confundido, confuso, confounded.
contentado, contento, contented.
contraido, contracto, contracted.
convencido, convicto, convinced.
convertido, converso, converted.
corregido, correcto, corrected.
corrompido, corrupto, corrupted,
cultivado, culto, cultivated.
desertado, deserto, deserted.
desnudado, desnudo, Zaid bare.
despertado, despierto, awaked.
difundido, difuso, diffused.
dirigido, directo, directed.
dispersado, disperso, dispersed.
distinguido, distinto, distinguished.
dividido, diviso, divided.
elegido, electo, elected.
enjugado, enjuto, wiped.
erigido, erecto, erected.
exceptuado, excepto, excepted.
excluido, excluso, excluded.
exentado, exento, exempted.
expelido, expulso, expelled.
expresado, expreso, expressed.
extendido, extenso, extended,
272

Extinguir, 3. to extinguish ;
Extraer, 2. to extract ;
Favorecer, 2. to favor ;

Fijar, 1. to fix:

Fingir, 3. to feign ;

Freir, 3. to fry ;

Hartar, 1. to satiate ;

Imprimir, 3. to impress; to print;
Improvisar, 1. to extemporize ;
Incluir, 3. to include ;

Infectar, 1. to infect ;

Inscribir, 3. to inscribe ;

Inserir, 3.
Insertar, 1.
Invertir, 3. to invert ;
Juntar, 1. to join;
Limpiar, 1. to clear ;
Maldecir, 3. to curse ;
Manifestar, 1. to manifest ;
Marchitar, 1. to fade ;
Nacer, 2. to be born ;
Ocultar, 1. to conceal ;
Omitir, 3. 40 omit ;
Oprimir, 3. to oppress ;
Perfeccionar, 1. to perfect;
Pervertir, 3. to pervert ;
Poseer, 2. to possess ;
Prender, 2. to catch ;
Prescribir, 3. to prescribe ;
Presumir, 3. to preswme ;
Pretender, 2. to pretend ;
Profesar, 1. to profess ;
Proseribir, 3. to proscribe ;
Proveer, 2. to provide ;
Repletar, 1. to fill ;
Romper, 2. to break ;
Salvar, 1. ¢o save;

Secar, 1. to dry ;

Sepultar, 1. to bury ;
Situar, 1. to place ;

Soltar, 1. to let loose ;
Sujetar, 1. to subject ;

to insert ;

LESSON 50.

extinguido, extinto, eatingutshed.
extraido, extracto, extracted.
favorecido, favorito, favored.

fijado, fijo, fixed.

fingido, ficto, feigned.

freido, frito, fried.

hartado, harto, satiated.

imprimido, impreso, impressed, printed.
improvisado, improviso, extemporized.
incluido, incluso, included.

infectado, infecto, infected.
inscribido, inscrito, inscribed.

inserido, inserto, inserted.

invertido, inverto, inverted.
juntado, junto, joined.

limpiado, limpio, cleared.
maldecido, maldito, cursed.
manifestado, manifesto, manifested.
marchitado, marchito, faded.
nacido, nato, been born.
ocultado, oculto, concealed.
omitido, omiso, omitted.
oprimido, opreso, oppressed.
perfeccionado, perfecto, perfected.
pervertido, perverso, perverted.
poseido, poseso, possessed.
prendido, preso, caught.
prescribido, preserito, prescribed.
presumido, presunto, presumed.
pretendido, pretenso, pretended.
profesado, profeso, professed.
proscribido, proscrito, proscribed.
proveido, provisto, provided,
repletado, repleto, jidled.
rompido, roto, broken.

salvado, salvo, saved.

secado, seco, dried.

sepultado, sepulto, buried.
situado, sito, placed.

soltado, suelto, Zet loose.
sujetado, sujeto, subjected.
THE PAST PARTICIPLE. 273

suprimido, supreso, suppressed.
suspendido, suspenso, suspended.
sustituido, sustituto, substituted.
tendido, tenso, spread.

tefiido, tinto, dyed.

torcido, tuerto, twisted.

vaciado, vacio, emptied.

Suprimir, 3. to suppress ;
Suspender, 2. fo suspend ;
Sustituir, 3. to substitute ;
Tender, 2. to spread ;
Teiiir, 3. to dye ;

Torcer, 2. to twist ;
Vaciar, 1. to empty ;

Vocabulario.

El accidente, the accident.
El cielo, the heaven.

El célera, the cholera.

El monte, the mountain.

El monumento, the monument.

El muro, the wail.

Vocabulary.

La liberalidad, the liberality.
La lista, the list.

La maxima, the maxim.

La opinién, the opinion.

La obra, the work.

La ruina, the ruin.

La silla, the chair.
Bajo, under.
Delante, before.
Junto, together.
Liberal, liberal.
Militar, military.
Vacio, empty.

El pescuezo, the neck.

El populacho, the mob.

El servicio, the service.

La bagatela, the trifle.

La carcel, the prison.

La cuenta, the account.

La estatua, the statue.

La invitacién, the invitation.

 

Exercise 99.

1. ¢Quién ha abierto la puerta y ha puesto una silla delante?
2. { No le he dicho yo 4 V. que habia visto 4 su hermana en el teatro?
3. He escrito todo lo que V. me ha prescrito. 4. Estoy convencido
que mi amigo llegaraé hoy mismo. 5. El cdlera ha infectado 4
mucha gente, y todavia hay muchos que estan infectos. 6. El cocinero
ha torcido el pescuezo de la gallina. 7. El buque esta provisto de todo
lo necesario. 8. Los ladrones estaban ocultos en el monte, pero han
sido prendidos por los soldados. 9. Aunque estuviese yo despierto,
él pretende que me ha despertado. 10, El cielo ha bendecido sus
obras. 11. Estoy tan confuso que no sé lo que estoy haciendo.
12. No me han permitido salir todavia. 13. Este cuadro no esté
todavia completo. 14. Todavia no hemos comprendido lo que 6]
queria decir. 15. Hemos corregido todos los ejercicios, y ahora estén
correctos. 16. Son los hombres mas corruptos que hemos conocidu,
%7. No comprendo lo que est4 inscrito en (on) este monumento.
274 LESSON 50.

18. Fué un accidente imprevisto, y 4 nadie podemos culpar. 19. Tox
das las mesas en.la casa estén rotas. 20. Estos libros han sido
impresos en Paris.

Exercise 100.

1. My friend invited me to dine with him, but I could not accept
his invitation. 2. I was awake when your friends arrived in the
night. 3. These two friends are always together. 4. The flowers
you bought for your sister are already faded. 5. The roads are not
dry yet, and we will have to take a carriage. 6. Fill the empty
glasses with (de) wine. 7. More than fifty men were buried under
the ruins of the old church. 8. The thieves were caught and taken
to (the) prison. 9. The mob has been dispersed by the soldiers.
10. We have included all our expenses in the account we gave you.
11. Do you know if the fire has been extinguished ? 12. It was ex-
tinguished when I passed through the street. 13. This young man
has been exempted from military service. 14. He has confessed that
he has spent all his money in buying trifles. 15. The inhabitants of
the city have erected a statue to that great man. 16. I have been
obliged to sell my favorite horse. 17. All these maxims were in-
scribed on the walls of ourschool. 18. These men have been expelled
from their country for their liberal opinions,

Gramatica. Grammar.

1. Many verbs have in Spanish two past participles, a regu-
lar and an irregular one. The regular participle of such verbs
must be used in compound tenses with the verb haber, 2. to
have ; or when the sentence is passive :

Le hemos convencido de su error, We have convinced him of his error.
Fué expulsado del pais, He was expelled from the country.

The irregular participle is used as an adjective and can never
be accompanied by the auxiliary haber, 2. to have.

2. The irregular past participles of the following verbs are
perhaps oftener used with haber than are the regular:

Freir, to fry, freido, frito. Proveer, to provide, provetdo, provisto,
Prender, to take, prendido, preso, © Romper, ¢o break, rompido, roto,
THE PASSIVE VERB. 275

Leccién LI. Lesson LI.

InFINIT. PRES. :
Pret. PERF. :
Futuro :

Part. PAS. :
GERUNDIO:
PART. PRET. :
Part. FUTURO:
INDIC. PRES. :

PRET. IMPERF. :

PRET. DEFINIDO:
PRET. INDEFIN. :
PRET. ANTERIOR:
PRET. PLUSCUAMP,:
Foururo IMPERF. :
Futoro PErr.:

ConD. SIMP.:
IMPERATIVE :
SuBJ. PRES. :
Susy. IMPERF.:

PRET. PERF. :

PLUSCUAMPERF. :

THE PASSIVE VERB (¥OZ PASIVA).

Ser alabado, to be praised.

Ser alabad-o, -a, -os, -as, to be praised.
haber sido alabad-o, -a, -os, -as, to have been praised.
haber de ser alabad-o, -a, -os,

-as, to have to be praised.
alabad-o, -a, -os -as, praised,
siendo alabado, being praised.
habiendo sido alabado, having been praised.
habiendo de ser alabado, having to be praised.
yo soy alabado (a), LI am praised.

nosotros (as) somosalabados (as), we are praised.
yo era alabado,

yo fui alabado,
yo he sido alabado, L hawe been praised.

I was praised.

yo hube sido alabado, :

yo habia sido alabado, } Jp teamonieed:

yo seré alabado, I shall or will be praised.

yo habré sido alabado, I shall or will have been
praised,

yo seria alabado, I should or would be
praised.

sé alabado, be praised.

que yo sea alabado, that I may be praised.

que yo fuere or fuese alabado, that I might be praised.

que yo haya sido alabado, that I may have been
praised.

que yo hubiera si davutdiwia, that I might have been

que yo hubiese praised.
Conp. comp. : yo habria sido alabado, I should or would have
been praised.
FurTuro IMP.: yo fuere alabado, I shail be praised.
Futuro comp.: yo hubiere sido alabado, Ishall have been praised.
Hjemplos. Examples.
La casa del general esta vendida. The general’s house is sold,

Los enemigos han sido derrotados. The enemy has been defeated.
276

El puente esté construido.

Mi conducta ha sido aprobada.

La carta ha sido escrita por él.

Los muchachos han sido castigados.
Mi sombrero esta perdido.

Hemos sido engafiados.

£1 es estimado y amado.

Queremos ser obedecidos.

LESSUN 51.

The bridge is built.

My conduct has been approved.
The letter has been written by him,
The boys have been punished,

My hat is lost.

We have been deceived.

He is esteemed and loved.

We wish to be obeyed.

Examples with the pronoun se:

Esto se ve 4 menudo.

El café se vende bien.

Se ama al hombre de bien.

Se admira la sabiduria de Sdcrates.

Esto no se puede hacer ast.

Aqui se habla espaiol.

No se puede ver cosa mas mara-
villosa,

Vocabulario.

El diputado, the deputy.

El gobierno, the government.
El objeto, the object.

El retrato, the picture.

El terremoto, the earthquake.
La cantatriz, the singer.

La ciencia, the science.

La comedia, the comedy.

La conjuracién, the conspiracy.
La juventud, the youth.

La licencia, the license.

La muerte, the death.

La necesidad. the necessity.
La obra, the work.

La sentencia, the maxim.

 

That is often seen.

Coffee sells well.

The honest man is loved.

The wisdom of Socrates is admired.
That cannot be done so.

Spanish is spoken here.

Nothing more wonderful can be seen.

Vocabulary.

La tienda, the shop.
Barato, cheap.
Escipién, Scipio.
Alabar, 1. to praise.
Alquilar, 1. to let.
Arruinar, 1. to rwin.
Componer, 2. to compose.
Destruir, 3. to destroy.
Escoger, 2. to select.
Eligir, 3. to elect.
Favorecer, 2. to favor.
Reconocer, 2. to know.
Representar, 1. to play.
Reprimir, 3. to repress.
Restablecer, 2. to reéstablish.

Exercise 101.

1, Este paiio se vende en la tienda del Sefior Palma.
admirado mucho las sentencias de Séneca.

2. Se han
3. Las ciencias han

siempre sido favorecidas por los buenos gobiernos. 4. Este principe
no seré alabado después de su muerte. 6. La cantatriz ha sido muy
THE PASSIVE VERB. 277

aplaudida anoche. 6. Mi amigo ha sido eligido diputado de su
ciudad. 7. 4 Qué se dice en laciudad? 8. Se dice que el azticar se
venderé muy bien este aio. 9. Este retrato ha sido hecho por uno
de nuestros mejores pintores. 10. Esta sefiora es amada y estimada
de todos los que la conocen. 11. Se ve que V. esta contento hoy.
12. No engafiamos 4 nadie, pero somos engafiados muy 4 menudo.
13. Estos muchachos han sido alabados por sus maestros. 14. No
hemos sido convidados por su hermano, y asi no hemos ido 4 su casa.
15. ; Se hubiera descubierto la conjuracién de Catilina, si Cicerdn no
hubiese sido consul? 16. Se reconoce al verdadero amigo en la necesi-
dad. 17. 4 Sabe V. si se vende esa casa? 18. No, sefior, se alquila.
19. Esta obra ha sido compuesta por mi amigo. 20. La hacienda ha
sido vendida después de la muerte del duefio. 21. La licencia fué
reprimida y la paz restablecida en el pais. 22. Estas cosas han sido
escogidas por mi hermano cuando estaba en Paris. 23. No se puede
saber como le fué posible al ladrén entrar en la casa. 24, Estoy seguro
que esta carta no ha sido escrita por él. 25. Se cree que el Presidente
Negara esta mafiana.

Exercise 102.

1. These goods have been received from England. 2. Where have
these objects been found? 3. They have been found in a carriage.
4, Those glasses have been broken by the children. 5. Those houses
have been sold very cheap. 6. The general had been wounded sev-
eral times in his youth. 7. This letter has been written by one of
our friends. 8. What would you have done if you had known that ?
9. I would have done the same thing that I have done. 10. If you
go to his house, you will be very well received. 11. This comedy
has been played twice at (en) the large theater. 12. Have the thieves
been caught? 13. Two of them have been caught. 14. If I had
been invited to the ball, I would have gone with my sister. 15. It
is said that there has been a great fire in the city. 16. It was saia
yesterday that the general had died. 17. That city has been de-
stroyed by an earthquake. 18. I think that coffee will sell very wel?
this year. 19. Such things are often seen. 20. French goods are
sold in that store. 21. Hannibal was conquered by Scipio. 22. The
beautiful house of the banker will be sold this week. 23. Your
nrother is seen every afternoon in the park. 24. They speak only
French in that school. 25. Our friends have been ruined by the war
278 LESSON 51.

26. All the sugar has been bought by that merchant. 27. I have
been deceived several times by that man. 28. That child is loved by
everybody.

Gramatica. Grammar.

1, Passive verbs are cunjugated in all their tenses with the
auxiliary verb ser, 2. to be. ‘To this auxiliary the past participle
of active or transitive verbs is added, the same agreeing in gen-
der and number with the subject:

El muchacho es amado, The boy is loved.
La muchacha es amada, The girl 7s loved.
Los muchachos son amados, The boys are loved.
Las muchachas son amadas, The girls are loved.

2, Active verbs are often used passively with the pronoun se
in the third person singular or plural (Cf. Lesson LIT.):

Estos libros se venden en aquella Those books are sold in that book-

libreria, store.
No se puede ver nada, Nothing can be seen.
El café se vende bien, Coffee sells well.

3. It is to be noticed, however, that when a passive sentence
is formed with the pronoun se, this sentence may preserve the
construction of the active:

Se ama al hombre de bien, The honest man is loved.

4, The verb remains invariable in the singular when the
passive subject is a person, and the acting ablative is not
expressed :

Es dolor el ver como se aprecia mas It ts painful to see that infamous

4 los infames aduladores que 4 Jflatterers are more esteemed than

los hombres honrados, honorable men.

5. The past participle remains invariable with the compound
tense of the verb:

Se ha amado 4 Maria por sus vir- Mary has been loved for her virtues,
tudes,
REFLEXIVE VERBS. 279

6G. When the object of the sentence is a thing, or when the
acting ablative is expressed, the verb agrees with the object,
although the past participle remains invariable :

; Oh siglo miserable, en el cual se O miserable century, in which virtue
estiman las virtudes por bicocas, ts considered as nothing when ac-
cuando las acompafia la pobreza ! companied by poverty !

Se han admirado mucho las senten- The maxims of Seneca have been
cias de Séneca por sus proprios much admired, even by his ene-
enemigos, mies.

%. The verbs quedar, 1. to remain, and ir, 3. to go, may
sometimes be used instead of ser to give more expression to the
sentence ;

Ha quedado verificado que eso no It has been proved that this is not

es verdad, true.
Va demostrado que la tierra rotura Jt is proved that the carth revolves
alrededor del sol, around the sun.
Leccion LI. Lesson LII.

REFLEXIVE VERBS.

Pronouns accompanying the Reflexive Verbs.
Me, = myself.
Te, thyself.
Se, himself, herself, itself, themselves, yourself, yourselves,
Nos, ourselves.
Os, yourselves.
Alabarse, to praise one’s self.

Infinitive.
Alabarse, to praise one’s self.
Past.
Haberse alabado, to have praised one’s self,

Past Participle.
Alabadose, praised one’s self.
280

LESSON 52.
Gerund.
Alabandose, praising one’s self.
Habiéndose alabado, having praised one’s self.
Indicative Present.

Me alabo, I praise myself.
Te alabas, thou praisest thyself.

he praises himself.
Senlae; ' she praises herself.
Nos alabamos, we praise ourselves.
Os alabais, you praise yourselves.
Se alaban, they praise themselves.
V. se alaba (sing.), you praise yourself.
VV. se alaban (pi.), you praise yourselves.

etc. etc.
Past Indefinite.

Me he alabado, LT have praised myself.
Te has alabado, thou hast praised thyself.

he has praised himself.
Be ualabade, i she has praised herself.
V. se ha (sing.) alabado, you have praised yourself,
Nos hemos alabado, we have praised ourselves.
Os habéis alabado, you have praised yourselves.
Se han alabado, they have praised themselves.
VV. se han (pl.) alabado, you have praised yourselves.

etc. ele.
Imperative.
Alabate, praise thyself.
Alabaos, praise yourselves,
Present Subjunctive.

Me alabe, I may praise myself.
Te alabes, thou mayest praise thyself.
Se alabe, he may praise himself.
Nos alabemos, we may praise ourselves,
Os alabéis, you may praise yourselves,

Se alaben, they may praise themselves.
REFLEXIVE VERBS.

281

Refleaive verb conjugated with another verb.

Yo quiero alabar-me,

Tu quieres alabar-te,

El quiere alabar-se,

Ella quiere alabar-se,

V. quiere (sing.) alabar-se,
Nosotros queremos alabar-nos,
Vosotros queréis alabar-os,
Ellos (m.)
Ellas (f.)
VV. quieren (pl.) alabar-se,

} quieren alabar-se,

Ejemplos.

Llamarse, 1. Como se llama V.?
— Me llamo José.

Equivocarse, 1. V. se equivoca.

Sentarse, 1. Siéntese V., sefiora.

Levantarse, 1. ; A qué hora se le-
vanta V. ?— Me levanto 4 las seis.

Acostarse, 1. j Porqué no se acues-
tan los muchachos ? —Se acostaran
pronto.

Pasearse, 1. jQuiere V. pasearse
conmigo ?—No tengo tiempo de
pasearme.

Divertirse, 3. Me divierto mucho
aqui.

Enfadarse, 1.

Cortarse, 1.

No se enfade V.
Los muchachos se han

cortado.

Vestirse, 3. Nos vestiremos mas
tarde.

Calentarse, 1. Caliéntese V.

Verse, 2. No puedo verme en el

espejo.

Arrepentirse, 8. El se arrepintié
antes de morir.

Dirigirse, 3. A quién debo diri-
girme ?— V. puede dirigirse 4 mi.

Ellas se han escrito.
No nos hemos hablado,

L will praise myself.

thou wilt praise thyself.
he will praise himself.

she will praise herself.
you will praise yourself.
we will praise ourselves,
you will praise yourselves,

they will praise themselves,

you will praise yourselves,

Examples.

What is your name ?— My name
is Joseph.

You are mistaken.

Sit down, madam.

At what time do you rise ?— I rise
at six o'clock.

Why do not the boys go to bed?
— They will soon go to bed,

Will you take a walk with me t—
I have no time to walk.

I amuse myself very much here,

Do not get angry.
The boys have cut themselves,

We will dress later,

Warm yourself.

I cannot see myself in the looking-
glass.

He repented before dying.

To whom must I apply ?— You
may apply to me.

They have written to each other.
We have not spoken to each other.
282 LESSON 52.

Vocabulario. Vocabulary.
El mercader, the merchant. Defender, 2. to defend.
La colocacién, the situation. Desmayarse, 1. ¢o faint.
La cuenta, the account. Despertarse, 1. to awake.
La miseria, the misery. Divertirse, 3. to amuse one’s self.
Ligero, quick. Dormirse, 3. to fall asleep.
Parado, standing. Enfadarse, 1. to get angry.
Acordarse, 1. to remember. Equivocarse, 1. to make a mistake.
Acostarse, 1. to go to bed. Llamarse, 1. to be called.
Apoderarse, 1. to take possession. Levantarse, 1. to rise.
Baiiarse, 1. to bathe. Pasearse, 1. to take a walk.
Burlarse, 1. to laugh at. Quedarse, 1. to remain.
Caerse, 2. to fall. Quejarse, 1. fo complain.
Calentar, 1. to warm. Quemar, 1. to burn.
Casarse, 1. to marry. Rendirse, 3. to surrender.
Comportarse, 1. to behave. Sentarse, 1. to sit down.

 

Exercise 103.

1. 4 Porqué no se sienta V.? 2. No estoy cansado, prefiero que-
darme parado. 3. 4 Se divierten VV. enel campo? 4. Nos diverti-
mos muchisimo ahi. 5. ; No se equivoca V. cuando V. dice eso?
6. No me equivoco. 7. 4 Porqué no se pasea V. todas las mafianas ?
8. Me paseo cuando el tiempo esté bueno. 9. 4 Se levanta V. tem-
prano? 10. Me levanto tan pronto como me despierto. 11. Si V.
tiene frio, caliéntese. 12. Nose queme V.; el plato est4é muy ca-
liente. 13. No sé lo que tengo, pero no puedo dormir cuando me
acuesto por la noche. 14. Es porque V. se acuesta demasiado tem-
prano, y se levanta demasiado tarde. 15. ; Cémo se llama su amigo
de V.? 16. Se llama Juan, y su hermana se llama Maria. 17. 3 Porqué
no va V.al jardin 4 divertirse con los muchachos? 18. No me siento
bien, quiero ir 4 acostarme. 19. Los enemigos se apoderaron de una
de nuestras fortalezas. 20. Toda la familia esté en el campo; yo me
he quedado solo en la ciudad. 21. Se acuerda V. de lo que dijo este
hombre? 22. Me acuerdo de todo lo que dijo. 23, Digale V. al
mercader que se equivocé en la cuenta que nos mandd. 24. 4 Porqué
se queja V. de mi? 25. Yo no me quejode nadie. 26. Se han
hablado estas sefioras? 27. Creo que nose han hablado. 28. ; Donde
ha conocido V. 4 este caballero? 29. Nos hemos conocido en Madrid.
30. ; Porqué se burlan VV. de este hombre? 31. Porque es muy
ridiculo. 32. El hijo de Juan se esta muriendo. 33. La pobre madre
REFLEXIVE VERBS. 283

se desmayé cuando le hablaron de la muerte de su hijo. 34. Mi her-
mano se casara cuando tenga una buena colocacién. 35. Si V. no
hubiese corrido tan ligero, no se habria cafdo.

Exercise 104.

1. Why do not the children go to bed? 2. They will not go to
bed. 3. How is that said in Spanish? 4. I don’t know how it is
said. 5. What is your name, my friend? 6. My name is Edward.
7. Why does not your brother get up; is hesick? 8. He is not sick,
but he always gets up late. 9. Sitdown; I will be ready in a moment.
10. Will you take a walk with us? 11. With pleasure; where do you
wish togo? 12. Let us gotothe park. 13. Why do you get angry so
quickly? 14, You are mistaken ; I never get angry. 15. Will you not
go to the concert with us? 16. I am so tired that I am afraid to fall
asleep. 17. When I was in the country I rose very early, but since I
have been (am) in town I rise very late. 18. Have the children
taken a walk? 19. Yes, sir, they take a walk every morning early.
20. What did you say when he complained to you? 21. I did not say
anything. 22. He believed himself rich, but he was far from being so.
23. These soldiers defended themselves with the greatest courage.
24, That officer covered himself with glory. 25. Where have you
known each other? 26. We have known each other in France.
27. The enemy has surrendered. 28. The children have taken a bath
in the river. 29. Don’t laugh at that man, because he is poor and old.
30. [ have never laughed at him. 31. That boy has behaved very
badly. 32. She fainted on hearing that. 33. You have made a mis-
take in saying that. 34. After having lost his fortune, he saw him-
self in the greatest misery. 35. My sister will be married next week.

Gramatica. Grammar.

1. Reflexive or pronominal verbs are conjugated in Spanish
with two personal pronouns of the same person, the first (ex-
pressed or understood) being the subject, and the second,
according to the active or neuter meaning of the verb, the
direct or indirect object :

Yo me divierto or me divierto, T amuse myself.
El se alaba or se alaba, He pratses himself.
284 LESSON 52.

Nots. — The indirect pronoun may also be placed after the verb and
form but one word with the same:

Divertimonos muchisimo, We amuse ourselves much.

2. Reflexive verbs are either essentially reflexive, that is,
they cannot be used without the two personal pronouns, as arre-
pentirse, 3. to repent ; acordarse, 1. to remember, etc., or acci-
dentally reflexive, that is, they may be formed as in English,
from active or neuter verbs: quemarse, 1. to burn one’s self,
from quemar, 1. fo burn; calentarse, 1. ¢o warm one’s self,
from calentar, 1. to warm, etc.

The number of verbs essentially reflexive is limited, but
accidentally reflexive verbs are unlimited, since in Spanish, as
well as in English, almost any verb may be used reflexively.

3. Muny verbs which are reflexive in Spanish are not so in
English. Such are, among others, the verbs:

Quejarse, 1. to complain, Arrepentirse, 3. to repent.
Acordarse, 1. to remember. Apoderarse, 1. to take possession.
etc. ete,

4, A reflexive verh, conjugated with another verb, takes the
corresponding personal pronoun with the infinitive :

Quiero divertirme, I wish to amuse myself.
Vamos 4 bafiarnos, We are going to take a bath.

Nore. — It is to be observed that in this case also the indirect pronoun
may precede the first verb: Me quiero divertir, [ wish to amuse myself ;
nos vamos 4 bailar, we are going to take a bath, etc. This is not the better
usage.

5. In compound tenses, the ohject pronoun is placed before
the auxiliary :

Me he cortado, L have cut myself.
Se han burlado de V., They have made fun of you.
El se ha comprado una casa, He has bought himself a house.

6. Reflexive verbs, when used with plural persons, also ex-
press in Spanish a reciprocal or mutual action. When the
reciprocal form is not plainly indicated by the simple reflexive,
el uno... el otro, or uno. . . otro must be added to the verb:
REFLEXIVE VERBS.

Nos alabamos,
Nos alabamos el uno al otro,
Se vieron, pero no se hablaron,

Se han escrito muchas cartas,

7%. The d of the second person

of reflexive verbs :
Amaos instead of amados,

285

We praise ourselves.

We praise each other.

They saw each other, but they did
not speak to cach other.

They have written many letters to
each other.

is dropped in the imperative

Love each other.

8. When the present subjunctive forms are used for the im-
perative, the object pronoun follows and is united to the vurb.
In the first person plural the final s is then dropped:

Alabese,
Alabese V.,
Alabense,
Alabense VV.,
Alabémonos,
Amémonos,

let him praise himself.
praise yourself.

let them praise themselvey
praise yourselves,

let us praise ourselve

let us love each othe ,

Nore. — For further details, ¢f. Lesson XLII.

9, Accidentally reflexive verbs have often a different mean-
ing from that of the primitive verb, as for instance :

Burlarse de uno,

Burlar las esperanzas de uno,
Dormirse, 3. to fall asleep.
Desmayarse, 1. to faint,
Caerse, 2. to fall.

To make fun of some one.

To destroy the hopes of some one.

Dormir, 3. to sleep.

Desmayar, 1. to lose cowrage.

Caer en una falta, to commit a
fault.

10, There are many Spanish verbs which may be used either

Fiarse or fiar de alguno,
Chancearse or chancear con alguno,
Reirse or reir de alguno,

Se ha muerto or Ha muerte,

reflexively or not, without altering their meaning:

Lo trust somebody.

To joke with some one.
To laugh at some ovr,
He has dient.
286 LESSON 53.

Leccién LIII.

Lesson LIII.

REFLEXIVE VERBS (Continued).

Irse, 3. to go away.

Yo me voy,

Ti te vas,

El se va,

Ella se va,

V. (sing.) se va,
Nosotros nos vamos,
Vosotros os vais,
Ellos (m.) se van,
Ellas (7.) se van,
VV. (pl.) se van,

I am going away.
Thou art going away.
He is going away.
She is going away.
You are going away.
We are going away.
You are going away.

They are going away.

You are going away.

Reflexive Verbs referring to parts of the Body.

Cortarse Za mano,

Yo me corto la mano

Tu te cortas la mano,

El se corta la mano,

Ella se corta la mano,

V. (sing.) se corta la mano,
Nosotros nos cortamos la mano,
Vosotros os cortais la mano,
Ellos (m.) se cortan la mano,
Ellas (f.) se cortan la mano, {
VV. (pl.) se cortan la mano,

Ponerse eZ sombrero,

Yo me pongo el sombrero,

Ta te pones el sombrero,

El se pone el sombrero,

Ella se pone el sombrero,

V. (sing.) se pone el sombrero,
Nosotros nos ponemos el sombrero,
Vosotros os ponéis el sombrero,
Ellos (m.) se ponen el sombrero,
Ellas (7) se ponen el sombrero, t
VV. (pl.) se ponen el sombrero,

To cut one’s hand.

I cut my hand.

Thou cuttest thy hand,
He cuts his hand.

She cuts her hand.
You cut your hand.
We cut our hand.

You cut your hand.

They cut their hand,
You cut your hand.

To put on one’s hat.

I put on my hat.

Thou puttest on thy hat.
He puts on his hat.
She puts on her hat.
You put on your hat,
We put on our hat.
You put on your hat.

They put on their hat.
You put on your hat.
REFLEXIVE VERBS.

Ponerselo,

Yo me lo pongo,

Tu te lo pones,

El se lo pone,

Ella se lo pone,

Y. (sing.) se lo pone,
Nosotros nos lo ponemos,
Vosotros os lo ponéis,
Ellos (m.) se lo ponen,
Ellas (f.) se lo ponen, '
VY. (pl.) se lo ponen,

287

To put it on,

L put it on.

Thou puttest it on.
He puts it on.

She puts it on.
You put it on.

We put it on.
You put it on.

They put it on.
You put it on.

Compound Tenges.

Yo me he cortado la mano,

Tu te has cortadv la mano,

El se ha cortado la mano,

Ella se ha cortado la mano,

V. (sing.) se ha cortado la mano,

Nosotros nos hemos cortado la mano,

Vosotros os habéis cortado la mano,
Ellos (m.) se han cortado la mano,
Ellas (f.) se han cortado la mano, }
VV. (pil.) se han cortado la mano,

Yo me he puesto el sombrero,
ete.

Yo me lo he puesto,
ete.

Hjemplos.

Mateo se ensncid los dedos,

Nos hemos quemado la mano.

i Se ha quitado V. los zapatos ?

No me los he quitado,

i Se pondra V. el sombrero nuevo ?
Me pondré el viejo.

i Quién le corta 4 V. las ufias ?

Mi madre me las corta.

i Cuando se va V. ?

Me voy ahora.

LT have cut my hand.
Thow hast cut thy hand,
He has cut his hand.
She has cut her hand.
You have cut your hand.
We have cut our hand.
You have cut your hand.

They have cut their hand.
You have cut your hand,

I hawe put on my hat.
etc,

L have put it on.
ete.

Examples.

Matthew soiled his fingers,

We have burned our hand.
Have you taken off your shoes {
I have not taken them off.
Will you put on your new hat?
I will put on the old one.

Who cuts your nails ?

My mother cuts them for me
When are you going away ?

I am going away now.
288 LESSON 53.

Vocabulario. Vocabulary.
El dedo, the finger. \ Afuera, out.
El guante, the glove. Hinchado, swollen.
La bota, the boot. Pues, well,
La cama, the bed. Afeitar, 1. to shave.
La camisa, the shirt. Lavar, 1. to wash.
La cara, the face. Marcharse, 1. to depart.
La casaca, the coat. Ponerse, 2. to put on.
La media, the stocking. Quitarse, 1. to take of.
La pierna, the leg. Seguir, 3. to continue,
La ufia, the nazi. Sentar, 1. to become,

Adiés, good-by.

Exercise 105.

1. Vayase V. de aqui, V. hace demasiado ruido. 2. Me iré en un
momento. 3. ;Se ha lavado V. las manos? 4. Me he lavado las
manos y la cara. 5. ; Cudndo se marcha su hermano de V.? 6. Se
marchara esta noche 4 las ocho. 7. 4 Porqué no se corta V. las ufias ?
8. Me las corto todas las semanas. 9. Los hombres quieren irse.
10. Pues, que se vayan. 11. 4 Porqué no se quita V. las medias antes
de acostarse? 12. Yo me las quito en la cama. 13. Quitese V. el
sombrero cuando V. entraen el cuarto. 14. Yo siempre me lo quito.
15. Vamonos, ya es tarde. 16. No puedo irme ahora; tengo todavia
demasiado que hacer. 17. No puedo ponerme los zapatos, tengo los
pies hinchados. 18. Ese muchacho se va 4 cortar los dedos si sigue
jugando con el cuchillo. 19. Pdngase V. otra camisa, la que V. tiene
no esta limpia. 20. El pobre Juan se rompio la pierna, cuando cayéd
de su caballo, 21. ; Cudntas veces se afeita V.?2 22. Me afeito todos
los dias. 23. 4 Porqué no se quita V. las botas? 24. No puedo
quitérmelas. 25. Adids, amigo, me vov.

Exercise 106.

1. Why do you go away so soon? 2. I have to go away, it is
already late. 3. Johnny is a bad boy, he would not take off his hat
in Mrs. Riera’s house. 4. Wash that child’s face and take him out.
5. I cannot write, I must first warm my hands. 6. Do not go away
yet, I need you. 7. When can I go away? 8. You may go away in
halfan hour. 9. Would you go away if you could remain longer ?
10. I would not go away if I had not so much to do. 11. Wash your
REFLEXIVE VERBS. 2389

hands and come with me. 12. Do not take off your hat, you have to
go out yet. 13. I cannot put on these gloves, they are too small for
me. 14. Poor Mr. Castro broke his arm the other day. 15. Which
coat will you put on? 16. I will put my blue coat on. 17. Let us
go away, my father is waiting for us. 18. Which of your brothers is
going away next week? 19. They are both going away. 20. Take
off that hat, it does not become you. 21. Good-by, sir, we are going
away. 22. If you fall down, you will break your head. 23. I have
burned my hand, and I cannot work to-day. 24. He put on his
hat and coat, and went away without saying a word. 25. Felipe
will not put on his shoes; he says that he has sore feet. 25. Our
friends are going away to-morrow. 27. Why do you not go with
them? 28. You know very well that I am obliged to remain in
town.

Gramiatica. Grammar.

1, The reflexive pronoun is used in Spanish when the object
of the verb is a part of the body, and in such cases the article
takes the place of the possessive adjective before the noun:

Yo me corto el dedo, I cut my finger.
El se lava la cara, He washes his face.

Norse. —Se is the pronoun which refers to the subject. If le were
used the reference would be to some person other than the subject:

Ella le lava la cara, She washes his face.

2. The verbs ponerse, 2. to put on, and quitarse, 1. to take
off, follow the same rule as above when referring to articles of
clothing :

Me pongo el sombrero, I put on my hat.
Me quito 103 guantes, I take off my gloves.

iv
290 LESSON 64.

Leccién LIV. Lesson LIV.
PERIPHRASTIC VERBS.
Hacerse, Haber de,
Meterse 4, Tener que,
Ponerse, Haber menester de, must, shall,
Volverse, Tener menester de
Llegar 4 ser, to become. Deber de,
Venir 4 ser
Irse haciendo, Placer, 2.
Venir 4 ser, Gustar, 1. to like, to please,
Venir 4 parar, Agradar, 1.
Conjugation.

Hacerse, 2. meterse, 2. ponerse, 2. volverse, 2. to become.

Present Indicative.

Yo me hago,

Ti te haces,

El se hace,

Ella se hace,

V. (sing.) se hace,
Nosotros nos hacemos,
Vosotros os hacéis,
Ellos (m.) se hacen,
Ellas (f.) se hacen, }
VV. (pl.) se hacen,

I become.
thou becomest,
he becomes.
she becomes.
you become.
we become.
you become,

they become.

you become.

Preterit Indefinite.

Me he hecho,

Te has hecho,

Fl se ha hecho,

Ella se ha hecho,

V. (sing.) se ha hecho,

I have become.
thou hast become.
he has become.
she has become.
you have become.

Nosotros nos hemos hecho,
Vosotros os habéis hecho,
Ellos (m.) se han hecho,
Ellas (7.) se han hecho, }
VV. ( pl.) se han hecho,

we have become.
you have become.

they have become.

you have become.
PERIPHRASTIC VERBS. 291

Llegar, 1. venir 4 ser.

Present Indicative.

Yo llego 4 ser, !
Yo vengo 4 ser,
etc.

I become.

ete.

Preterit Indefinite.

He llegado 4 ser, t
Ba venido 4 ser,

I have become.

Irse haciendo.

Present Indicative.

Yo me voy haciendo,

Ta te vas haciendo,

El se va haciendo,

Ella se va haciendo,

V. (sing.) se va haciendo,
Nosotros nos vamos haciendo,
Vosotros os vais haciendo,
Ellos (m.) se van haciendo,
Ellas (7.) se van haciendo,
VV. (pil.) se van haciendo,

I am becoming.
thou art becoming.
he is becoming.
she is becoming.
you are becoming.
we are becoming.
you are becoming.

they are becoming.

you are becoming.

Preterit Indefinite.

Me he ido haciendo,

Te has ido haciendo,

Se ha ido haciendo,

V. (sing.) se ha ido haciendo,
Nos hemos ido haciendo,

Os habéis ido haciendo,

Se han ido haciendo,

VV. (pl.) se han ido haciendo,

I have become.

thou hast become.

he or she has become.
you have become.

we have become.

you have become.
they have become.
you have become.

Haber, 2. tener menester de, haber de, deber de.

Present Indicative.

Yo he menester de salir,
etc,

I must go out.
etc,

Preterit. Indefinite.

He habido menester de salir,
etc.

I have been obliged to go out,
ete,
292

LESSON 54.

Gustar, 1. placer, 2. agradar, 1. to like, to please.

Present Indicative (afirmatively).

Me gusta or gustan,
Te gusta or gustan,
Le gusta or gustan,

A V. le gusta or gustan (sing.),

Nos gusta or gustan,
Os gusta or gustan,
Les gusta or gustan,

A VV. les gusta or gustan ( pl.)

I like or like to.

thou likest or likest to.
he or she ltkes or likes to.
you like or like to.

we like or like to.

you like or like to.

they like or like to,

you like or like to.

Present Indicative (interrogatively).

i Me gusta (or gustan) 4 mi?

4 Te gusta (or gustan) a ti?

4 Le gusta (or gustan) 4 él?

i Le gusta (or gustan) 4 ella?

4 Le gusta (or gustan, a V. (sing.) ?
i Nos gusta (or gustan) 4 nosotros?
4 Os gusta (or gustan) 4 vosotros ?

; Les gusta (or gustan) 4 ellos (m.) ?

i Les gusta (or gustan) 4 ellas (/.) ?

i Les gusta (or gustan) 4 VV. (pl.) ?

Vocabulario.

El chaleco, the vest.

El precio, the price.

El prisionero, the prisoner.
El sastre, the tailor.
La lluvia, the rain.

Los padres, the parents,
Dédil, weak.

De repente, suddenly.
Despacio, slowly.
Honrado, honest.

Loco, insane.
Orgulloso, proud.

do I like (or do I like to) ?
dost thou like (or like to) ?
does he like (or like to) ?
does she like (or like to) ?
do you like (or like to) ?
do we like (or like to) ?

do you like (or like to) ?

do they like (or like to) ?
do you like (or like to) ?

Vocabulary.

Otra cosa, something else.
Sobre, about.

Fusilar, 1. to shoot.
Concluirse, 3. to end.
Construir, 3. to build.
Correr, 2. to run.
Echarse, 1. to begin.
Gritar, 1. fo scream.
Llamar, 1. to cail.
Odiar, 1. to hate.
Respetar, 1. to respect,
Seguir, 3. to continue.

Exercise 107.

1. Mi hermano se ha hecho negociante.

Z

2. Este hombre no sabe

nada, y se ha metido 4 médico. 3. Por sus talentos Negé aquel
PERIPHRASTIC VERBS, 293

oficial 4 ser general. 4. El tiempo se ha puesto tan malo, que no
hemos podido marcharnos. 5. Juan se puso tan malo, que creiamos
que se iba 4 morir. 6. Yo no sé en qué vendra 4 parar esta disputa.
7. Me es preciso salir mafiana muy temprano. 8. Si el enfermo
sigue malo, habra que Hamar al médico. 9. El hijo debe y ha de
respetar 4sus padres. 10. El general mandé fusilar 4 los prisioneros.
11. Sobre eso, hay mucho que decir. 12. El muchacho se eché 4
correr después de haber robado las manzanas. 13. 4 Le gusta 4 V. la
cerveza? 14. No me gusta mucho. 15. ;Qué se hard de nosotros si
no recibimos dinero! 16. Hemos menester de salir antes de las tres.
17. Nuestro amigo Felipe trabaja mucho, y se va haciendo rico.
18. Estando en la calle, se puso 4 gritar. 19. Muchos de mis amigos
se han hecho ricos en América. 20. No me gustan estos libros, y as/
no los leo. 21. Se dice que el padre de Enrique se ha vuelto loco.
22. Aquel hombre se volvié tan orgulloso que era odiado de todos.
23. Tendremos que pagarle 4 este hombre el precio que pide.
24. Mejor quiero ser pobre que robar. 25. El ajio que viene me
haré construir una casa mds grande. 26. No me agrada la conducta
de este hombre. 27. Vamos mas despacio, 4 mi no me gusta andar
tan ligero. 28. ;A qué ha venido 4 parar aquello? 29. Todavia no
se sabe. 30. No nos place que VV. hagan eso. 31. Deje V. entrar
a este hombre.

Exercise 108.

1. My brother would have become a general if the war had not
ended. 2. What will become of those two men? 3. A bad prince
seldom becomes a good king. 4. Being in the street, he became very
sick. 5. The poor man became so weak that he could not walk.
6. John is getting richer every day. 7. Ido not like this man, I
don’t believe he is honest. 8. You will have to give him all the
money heasks. 9. The thief began to run when hesawus. 10. What
will become of those poor children? 11. You will get sick if you are
not more prudent. 12. When iron is exposed to rain it becomes rusty.
13, What would you like to eat? 14. I should like to eat some
chicken. 15. I believe that man has become insane. 16. He has
become a physician after having studied several years in Paris.
17. You will have to speak to him, if he comes again. 18. I am
’ having a new vest made by my tailor. 19. If you don’t like this
wine, I will give you something else. 20. The weather has suddenly
294 LESSON 54.

become very cold. 21. I don’t know what will become of that man.
22, Napoleon the First became great by his victories. 23. I have to
stay at home until my brother returns. 24. He began to laugh when
T told him that. 25. Are we going to read or to write? 26. You
are to read first. 27. If I call you, come immediately, and don’t keep
me waiting (make me wait). 28. Next year we are going to havea
house built. 29. Henry has become rich in a few years. 30. My
sister says that she does not like her new house.

Gramatica. Grammar.

1, There are verbs besides the auxiliary verbs already men-
tioned which may be called periphrastic verbs, because they
are used not only to form the compound tenses of other verbs,
but also to cireumscribe the sentence. The verbs haber, 2. and
tener, 2. followed by the preposition de, belong to this category,
and so do certain active and neuter verbs taken reflexively or
followed by the preposition 4, as will be seen by the list above.

2, The verb to become, when expressing a change of condi-
tion or profession by the subject, is rendered in Spanish by
hacerse, 2. ponerse, 2. and meterse, 2. :

Se ha hecho medico,
Se ha puesto medico, He has become a physician.
Se ha metido 4 médico,

3. When the change of condition is not performed by the
subject, but is a consequence of its merits, llegar 4 ser, venir
& ser, or ser hecho are then used :

Por sus talentos llegd 4ser(vinodser By his talents he became physician
or fué hecho) médico de camara, of the court.

Norz. — Irse haciendo, irse poniendo, and ir siendo, are used to express
a progressing action.

4. To become or to get is translated by ponerse, 2. to ex-
press a change in health, and by the same verb and by vol-
verse, 2. or hacerse, 2. if we express a change in the physical
or moral condition of a person, animal, or thing :

Se ha puesto enfermo, He has become sick.
Se volvid loco, He became insane.
IMPERSONAL VERBS. 295

5. To result is best translated by ser, salir de, or venir
4 parar:

Yo no sé en que vendra 4 parar (que I don’t know what the result of this
saldra or que sera) de esta disputa, dispute will be.

6. To commence, when governing an infinitive and express-
ing a motion, or the feeling of joy and sadness, is rendered by
empezar, 1. ponerse, 2. and echarse, 1. with the preposition 4:

Empezé a correr, He began to run.
Se puso 4 reir, He began to laugh.
Se eché 4 llorar, He began to cry.

Leccion LY. Lesson LV.

IMPERSONAL VERBS.

Liover, 2. to rain.

Llueve, It rains.

Llovia, Jt was raining.

Llovid, It did rain.

Llovera, It will rain.

Lloveria, It should or would ram.
Que Ilueva, That it may rain.

Que lloviese or Iloviera, That it might rain.

Ha llovido, It has rained.

Habia lovido, It had been raining.

Hubo llovido, It had rained.

Habra llovido, It will have rained.
Habria llovido, It should or would have rained.
Que haya llovido, That it may have rained.
oe hubtess t Novido, That it might have rained.
Que hubiera

Habiendo llovido, Having rained.

Helar, 1. to freeze ; hiela, zt freezes.

Granizar, 1. to hail ; graniza, it hails,
Deshelar, 1. to thaw; deshiela, ¢¢ thaws,

Noevar, 1. to snow; nieva, if snows,
296

LESSON 56.

Tronar, 1. to thunder ; truena, tt thunders.
Lloviznar, 1. to drizzle ; llovizna, it drizzles.
Relampaguear 1. to lighten; relampaguea, it lightens,
Ventear, 1. to blow ; ventea, zt blows.
Amanecer, 2. l amanece, “

vs t i
Alborear, 1. ) pe: alborea, § “ sida

Anochecer, 2. to growdark; anochece, it grows dark,

Hacer, 2. and Haber, 2. impersonally.

§ Qué tiempo hace ? How ts the weather ?
Hace buen tiempo,

Z Lt i: ather,
Hace hermoso tiempo, ee fie elsihey,

Hace mal tiempo, It is bad weather.

Hace calor, It is warm.

Hace frio, It ts cold.

Hace viento, It is windy,

ae Bek, ' The sun shines.

ay sol, :

Hay luna, The moon shines.

Hace lodo, It is muddy.

Hay polvo, It is dusty.

Hace dia, It is daylight.

Hace noche, It is night.

Acaecer, 2. Importar, 1. to be important.

Acontecer, 2, to happen. Parecer, 2. to appear, to seem.

Suceder, 2. Convenir, 3. to be proper.
etc. etc.
Vocabulario. Vocabulary.

El invierno, the winter.

‘EI lodo, the mud.

El puerto, the port.

El quitasol, the sunshade.
El sobretodo, the overcoat.
El trineo, the sleigh.

El trueno, the thunder.
La carreta, the cart.

La estacién, the season.
La luna, the moon.

La milla, the mile.

La sociedad, the society.
La ventana, the window.
Algo, rather.

A menudo, often.
Comedido, polite.
Himedo, damp.
Oscuro, dark.

Preciso, necessary.
Singular, singular.
Alegrarse, 1. to rejoice,
Vestirse, 3. to dress,
IMPERSONAL VERBS. 297

Exercise 109.

1. ; Qué hermoso tiempo hace hoy! ;no es verdad? 2. Sf, hace un
tiempo de primavera. 3. ; Hace calor en su pais de V.? 4. No hace
tanto calor como aqui. 5. Hoy llueve demasiado, los muchachos no
podran salir, 6. Esta noche habra luna, podremos dar un paseo en el
parque. 7. Si sigue la Muvia, habréd mucho lodo en las calles.
8. ; Qué tiempo hard mafiana? V. puedo estar seguro que hard mal
tiempo. 9. Hay mucho sol; tome V. su quitasol. 10. Ayer hizo
bastante frio. 11. No hizo demasiado frio. 12. ; Qué fué lo que
sucedid? 13. Sucedid que nadie tenia dinero, cuando fué preciso
pagar. 14. Si hace frio, péngase V. el sobretodo. 15. Nunca hace
demasiado frio para mi. 16. Ni para mi tampoco. 17, Ha nevado
muy 4 menudo este invierno. 18. Abra V. la ventana, y vea V. que
tiempo hace. 19. Estdé helando, 20. Relampagued muchisimo
anoche. 21. Conviene ser comedido en la sociedad. 22. Importa
que salgamos temprano mafiana. 23. Acaece muchas veces que
lueve y hiela al mismo tiempo. 24. Es verdad que su hermano me
ha dicho esto, pero yo no lo creo. 25. Yo amaneci en Toledo y
anochecf en Madrid. 26. Me acaecieron muchas cosas en el viaje
27. Anochece muy temprano ahora. 28. Esta tronando j oye V. el
trueno? 29. No es el trueno, es una carreta que esta pasando en la
calle. 30. Si hace buen viento, llegaremos mafana temprano al
puerto.

Exercise 110.

1. It is important to know who was the last person who entered
the room. 2. A singular thing has occurred. 3. It seems as if you
had nothing to say. 4. As soon as it dawns we will dress and leave
the house, 5. If I had known that it was so cold, I should not have
gone out. 6. It was so hot here last summer that we all went to
the country. 7. It hailed last night, and I thought that it would also
hail to-day. 8. It thundered and lightened the whole day, but it did
not rain. 9. Did it snow this morning? 10. No, but it will either
show or rain in a moment. 11. It dawns very early in this season.
12. I wish it would snow every day, that we might go in a sleigh.
13. How many miles are there from here to B.? 14. It is too late to
go there to-day. 15. Dear friend, how glad Tam to see you again!
16. It is too damp to-day to go out. 17. It is very dark here, open
the windows. 18. It is not daylight yet. 19. It was very fine
298 LESSON 55.

weather yesterday. 20. It was rather cold. 21. Was it cold when
you were in the country? 22. It was colder there than last year at
the same time. 23. I think that it will be very warm this summer.
24. Do you know what happened to my brother? 25. Yes, John
told me what happened to him. 26. It is very muddy, put on your
other shoes. 27. If it rains, I will lend you my umbrella. 28. It
was raining, but it does not rain now. 29. It is very windy.
30. They say that it is just as warm in the country as in the city.

Gramatica. Grammar.

1. Impersonal verbs can only be used in the infinitive or in

the third person singular without any pronoun :
Llueve, zd rains ; graniza, it hails.

2, Impersonal verbs are either essentially impersonal, that
is, cannot be used otherwise, as lover, 2. to rain; nevar, 1. to
snow; etc., or they are accidentally impersonal, that is, they
may be formed from any active or neuter verb.

3. The verbs amanecer, 1. to dawn, and anochecer, 2. to
grow dark, when used as neuter verbs, may be conjugated with
all persons. We may therefore say:

Amanecimos en Toledo, y anocheci- It was daylight when we reached To-
mos en Madrid. ledo, and night when we reached
Madrid.

4. The impersonal verbs acaecer, 2. acontecer, 2. convenir,
3. importar, 1. parecer, 2. suceder, 2. admit a subject and
agree with the same when accompanied by the pronouns me,
te, le, etc.:

Me acaecieron muchas cosas, Many things happened to me.

Le sucedieron varias desgracias, Several misfortunes happened to him
GOVERNMENT OF VERBS. 299

Leccion LVI.

Lesson LVI.

GOVERNMENT OF VERBS.

Verbs requiring Prepositions after them.

Ejemplos.

V. abusa de nuestra amistad.
El se acerca de (4) la ventana,
Yo me acuerdo de él.

Me alegro de ver 4 V.

El se aleja de nosotros,

El se inclina al vicio.
Yo adhiero 4 mi opinidn.

El esté acostumbrado 4 la limpieza.

Ha sido condenado 4 la prisién.

El pais abunda en hierro.
El ha caido en error.

Yo confid en V.

Hemos convenido en esto.
Yo no creo en eso,

Se casé con mi hermana.
Cumplo con mi obligacién.
Me he excusado con él.

Me molesta con sus visitas.

El calla por miedo.
Me doy por vencido.
Estoy por él.
Pecamos gor orgullo.

Examples.

You abuse our friendship.
He approaches the window.
I remember him.

I am glad to see you.

He goes away from us.

He inclines towards vice.

T adhere to my opinion.

He is accustomed to cleanliness,
He has been sentenced to prison,

The country is abundant in iron.
He has fallen into a mistake.

I trust to you.

We have agreed to that.

I do not believe in that.

He married my sister.

Ido my duty.

I have apologized to him.

He annoys me with his visits.

He is silent through fear.

I consider myself as conquered,
I abide by him.

We sin through pride.
300

Vocabulario.

El avaro, the miser.

El beneficio, the benefit.
El consejo, the advice.
El pleito, the lawswit.
El reo, the culprit.

La costa, the expense.
La fiebre, the fever.

La friolera. the trifle.
La lagrima, the tear.

LESSON 56.

Vocabulary.

Adherir, 3. to adhere.
Alejarse, 1. to leave.
Apartar, 1. to remove,
Apelar, 1. to appeal.
Censurar, 1. to censure.
Colmar, 1. to overwhelm.
Condenar, 1. zo condemn.
Dedicar, 1. to devote.
Desconfiar, 1. to distrust.

Embarcar, 1. to engage.
Entender, 2. to understand.
Formalizarse, 1. to get verea.
Habituarse, 1. fo accustom one’s self,
Interesarse, 1. to take interest,
Jactarse, 1. to boast.

La sentencia, the judgment.
La yerba, the grass.
Acostumbrado, accustomed.
Agradecido, thankful.
Bordado, trimmed.
Acercarse, 1. to approach.

 

Exercise 111.

1. Si V. adhiere 4 mi opinidn, adheriré yo 4 la suya. 2. El reo ha
sido condenado 4 muerte. 3. Acuérdese V.demi. 4. El rey colmd
4 su ministro de beneficios. 5. Este hombre padece de fiebres.
6, Censuran 4 este ricode avaro. 7. Con mis consejos le he apartado
de malas compafifas. 8. Mi hermano ha sido condenado en las costas
del pleito. 9. No se acerque V. de la ventana, pues hace frio.
10. Estoy acostumbrado 4 estos trabajos. 11. V.no tiene razén de
acusarme de esto. 12. Estoy agradecido 4 los beneficios que he
recibido. 13. Mealejé de aquella tierra con las l4grimas en los ojos.
14. Me alegro de verle 4 V. bueno. 15. El negociante ha apelado de
la sentencia. 16. El traje de la reina estaba bordado de oro. 17. V.
no deberia burlarse de este hombre. 18. Yo no me burlo de nadie.
19. He cambiado mi caballo por otro. 20. Nos hemos cansado del
viaje. 21. Else casar4 con aquella sefiora tan rica. 22. Aquel joven
dedica todo su tiempo al estudio. 23. Desconffo de este hombre sin
conocerle. 24. Temo que V.se embarque en malos negocios 25, No
entendemos nada de eso. 26. VV. se han formalizado por una frio-
lera. 27. No tiene V. razén de gloriarse de esa accién. 28. No
hemos podido habituarnos 4 ese pais. 29. Nos hemos interesado en
este joven, pero él nos ha engafiado. 30. El pobre hombre se man-
tenfa de frutas y de yerbas.
GOVERNMENT OF VERBS. 301

Exercise 112.

1. If you make fun of me, I will tell it to your father. 2. Has the
soldier been sentenced to death? 3. He has been sentenced to (the)
prison. 4. He boasts of a thing of which he ought to be ashamed.
5. Our teacher takes great interest in our studies. 6. Do you remem-
ber my brother? 7. I remember him very well, but I don’t remem-
ber your cousin. 8. I am doing something now to which I am not
accustomed. 9. Why do you not come near the fire? 10. I am not
cold, I am very well here. 11. I am very glad to know that you
have not lost your money in that business. 12. We have exchanged
our coffee for tea. 13. I do not understand anything about this mat-
ter. 14. You are wrong to distrust that man, he is your friend.
15. He accuses me of having deceived him, but he does not tell the
truth. 16. I adhere to what I have said. 17. If you engage in that
business you will lose all your money. 18. That young man sup-
ports his family with his work. 19. Remember what I told you
when you see your brother. 20. We are thankful for the benefits we
have received. 21. Do not go away from the window. 22. He is
very glad to see that his brother studies so much. 23. If you appeal
from the judgment, you will be condemned a second time. 24. I
have become tired of that house. 25. Do you think that Mr. Mar-
tinez will marry Miss Ruiz? 26. I think he will marry her next
month.

Gramatica. Grammar.

I. Many verbs which sometimes in English are not followed
by any preposition, govern in Spanish either the genitive, the
dative, or the ablative, with the prepositions de, 4 con, por,
para, sobre, etc. Some of these verbs may even, withont
changing their meaning, govern different prepositions, as:

Instruir 4 alguno de, en or sobre algo, To inform some one of something.
Other verbs change their meaning according to the prepo-
sition which follows them:

Creo en él, T believe in him.
Me creo de esta cosa, Iam convinced of that thing.
302

LESSON 57.

2 Most reflexive verbs, and those which express the move-
ments of the soul or mind, want, fulness, separation, accusation,
blame, etc., generally govern the preposition de.

OBSERVATION. — It would be difficult to give definite rules for the gov-

ernment of the other prepositions.

The Grammar of the Spanish Academy

contains a long list of verbs with their corresponding prepositions. We
have omitted the same, as we consider that the student will have to de-
pend principally on practice and reading to master these as well as other

difficulties.

Leceion LVII.

Lesson LVII.

GOVERNMENT OF ADJECTIVES.

Ejemplos.

Este hombre es digno de su posicién.

Estoy deseoso de verle.

Mi hermano es alto de cuerpo.

Aquella sefiora es palida de color.

Nuestra casa esta cercana de la
ciudad.

Estoy cierto de su venida.

Este vino es agrio al gusto.
El es amable 4 todos.

Esto es benéfico 4 la salud.
El es fiel 4 sus amigos.

El esta triste por la muerte de su
hermano.

Estoy alegre con la llegada de mi
hermano,

Examples.

This man is worthy of his position.
I am anxious to see him.

My brother is tall in size.

That lady has a pale complexion.
Our house is near the city.

T am sure of his coming.

This wine is sour to the taste.
He is amiable towards everybody.
This is good for the health.

He is faithful to his friends.

He is sad about the death of his
brother.

I am glad at the arrival of my
brother,
GOVERNMENT OF ADJECTIVES. 303

Vocabulario.

El compaiiero, the companion.

E} héroe, the hero.

El pesar, the grief.

El poder, the power.

El principio, the principle.
El temor, the fear.

La alabanza, the praise.
La botella, the bottle.

La costumbre, the manner.
La mina, the mine.

La naranja, the orange,
Ta raz6n, the reason.

La ruina, the ruin.

La stplica, the entreaty.
Aceptable, acceptable,
Ansioso, eager.

Codicioso, greedy.
Conforme, conformably.

 

Vocabulary.
Despreciado, despised,
Digno, worthy.
Encendido, red,
Exento, exempted.
Favorable, favorable.
Incapaz, incapable.
Indigno, wnworthy.
Inmé6vil, immovable,
Leno, full.

Maduro, ripe.

Penoso, hard, painful,
Poderoso, powerful.
Propenso, inclined.
Propicio, propitious.
Sorprendido, surprised,
Descascarar, 1. to peel,
Obrar, 1. ¢o act.

Exercise 113.

1. Este hombre es muy codicioso de dinero. 2. V. est& Ileno de
soberbia, y V. no tiene motivo para ello. 3. Mi hermano ha sido
exento del servicio militar. 4. Es una cosa facil de hacer, y sin
embargo V. la hace muy mal. 5. Los habitantes de aquella isla son
puros de costumbres. 6. Es penoso de ver 4 ese hombre correr 4 la
tuina. 7. Hemos obrado conforme 4 la razén. 8. Don Pedro es un
hombre despreciado de todos é indigno del empleo que ocupa. 9. Esta
fruta no es buena para comer. 10. V. es incapaz de comprender
nuestras ideas. 11. Estoy contento con lo que tengo, y no deseo nada
més. 12. La proposicién que V. nos hace es aceptable para todos.
13. La pobre mujer se quedé inmévil de temor. 14, La accién de
ese hombre es digna de alabanza. 15. La vida humana esta llena de
pesares. 16. El héroe est& siempre ansioso de gloria; y el avaro,
codicioso de dinero. 17. Este muchacho es muy bonito de cara.
18. Esta lengua es facil de aprender. 19. Aquel pais es rico en
granos, pero pobre en minas. 20. Estoy cierto de mi asercién.
21, El hombre verdaderamente liberal es fiel 4 sus principios. 22. La
libertad es propicia 4 las ciencias y 4 las artes. 23. 4 Porqué estd V.
tan encendido de cara? 24. Porque acabo de correr, y tengo mucho
calor. 25. La naranja madura es facil de descascarar.
304 LESSON 57.

Exercise 114.

1. That fruit is not good to eat, it is not ripe yet. 2. If you act in
(de) that way you will be despised by everybody. 3. You ought to
be satisfied with what you have. 4. 1 am anxious to see your brother ;
when does he arrive? 5. He will be here to-morrow. 6. That action
is unworthy of an honest man. 7. The mighty are inclined to abuse
their power. 8. It is easy to say that, but it is not so easy to do as
you think. 9. I am certain of what I say. 10. The weather is very
favorable for our journey. 11. That bottle is full of wine. 12. That
country is very rich in gold mines. 13. We are most anxious to
know the truth. 14. I knew that you were incapable of acting thus.
15. That child is beloved by all his companions. 16. They have
acted according to (the) reason. 17. Life is full of misery. 18. I am
tired of the conduct of this man. 19. We are not accustomed to see
so many people in our small town. 20. I am surprised at what that
man has told us. 21. He is deaf to all our entreaties. 22. Those
men are poor in means, but rich in credit. 238. They are very sad
about the death of their father. 24. Your father’s proposition is
acceptable to everybody. 25. The poor servant was all his life faith-
ful to his master.

Gramatica. Grammar.

1, Many adjectives have in Spanish a meaning by them-
selves, while others require a complement to their meaning, as
digno, worthy ; propenso, inclined; comparable, comparable ;
ete. :

Es una accién digna (of what ?) de It is an action worthy of praise.
elogio,

Los poderosos son propensos (to The mighty are inclined to abuse
what ?) 4 abusar de su poder, their power.

2, An adjective may govern a noun, an infinitive, or a sen-
tence in the subjunctive mood:

Fiel 4 sus amigos, Fatthful to his friends.
Diestro en saltar, Skillful in jumping.
El es indigno de que lecompadezean, He is unworthy of being pitied.

3. Those adjectives which express worthiness, unworthiness,
facility, difficulty, fullness, want, scarcity, eagerness, anxiety, de
GOVERNMENT OF ADJECTIVES. 305

sire, exception, moral or physical qualities, moral or physical
separation, distance, proximity, certainty, uncertainty, danger,
etc., are generally followed by the preposition de:

Digno de recompensa, Worthy of reward,
Indigno de perdon, Unworthy of pardon.
Facil de hacer, Easy to do.
Penoso de hacer, Difficult to do.
Lleno de soberbia, Full of pride.
Escaso de conceptos, Poor in ideas,
Deseoso de trabajar, Desirous of working.
Codicioso de dinero, Eager for money.
Gordo de talle, Stout in body.
Blando de corazén, Soft in heart.
Inseparable de sus amigos, Inseparable from his friends.
Cercano de la ciudad, Near the city.
Lejano de la ciudad, Far from the city.
Cierto de su venida, Certain of his arrival.
Seguro de peligro, Sure of danger.

etc. ete.

4, Adjectives expressing the feelings of the soul or mind
take the prepositions de, por, or con:

Jamévil de temor, Immovable with fear.
Triste por su muerte, Sad at his death.
Alegre con su llegada, Pleased at his arrival.

Note. — When the adjective precedes a verb in the Infinitive mood, the
preposition de may always be used :

Contento de ver, Glad to see you.

5. In most other cases the adjectives require the same prep-
ositions as in English.

6. Past participles used as adjectives may be followed by de
or por:
Es un hombre despreciado de (por) He is a man despised by ail.

todos,

7, There are also adjectives which vary in meaning, accord-
ing to the preposition which follows them :

Esta fruta es buena para comer, This fruit ts good to eat.

Esta naranja es bueng de descascarar, This orange is easy to peel.
an
306

LESSON 58.

Leecion LVIII. Lesson LVIII.

THE ADVERB.

Adverbs of Place.

Ahi, there. Dentro (de), in.
Aqui, aca, here. Fuera (de), out.
Alli, there. Arriba, up.
Alla, yonder. Abajo, down.
Cerca (de), near. Adelante, forward.
Lejos (de), far. Atras, back.
Donde, where. Delante (de), before.
Adonde, whereto. Detras (de), behind.
Dedonde, wherefrom. Encima (de), upon.
Adentro, within.

etc. etc,

Adverbs of Time.

Hoy, to-day. Pronto, soon.
Mafiana, to-morrow. Siempre, always,
Ahora, now. Nunca,
Luego, afterwards, Jamas, { never.
Tarde, Zate. Ya, already.
Temprano, early. Mientras, whiist.
Presto, quick. Aun, yet, still.
etc. ete.

Adverbs of Manner.

Bien, wel. Recio, loud.
Mal, badly. Despacio, slowly.
Asi, so, thus. De prisa, quickly.
Bajo, low. Alto, Zoud.

ete, ete.

Adverbs of Quantity.

Mucho, much. Muy, very.

Poco, little. Tan, so, as.

Sobrado, Tanto, so much, as much.
Harto, bus Cuanto, how much.
Bastante, Demasiado, too much,

etc. ete.
THE ADVERB. 307

Adverbs of Comparison.

Mas, more. Mejor, better.
Menos, Jess. Peor, worse.
etc. etc.

Adverbs of Order.

Primeramente, jirst. Sucesivamente, szccessively.
Ultimamente, lastly. Antes (de), before.
Después (de), after.

Adverbs of Affirmation.

Si, yes. Verdaderamente, verily.
Ciertamente, certainly. Indudablemente, undoubtedly.
etc. ete.

Adverbs of Negation.

No, no. Nada, nothing, not anything.
Tampoco, netther, not either. De ninguna manera, nowitse.
etc. etc.

Adverbs of Uncertainty.

Tal vez,

Boas, erhaps (in interro-

Quiza, perhaps Por ventura, {> si
Quizas, Por fortuna, g :

etc. etc.

Adverbial Expressions.

Sobre poco mas 6 menos, About, more or less.
A lo menos, al menos, At least.
A diestra y siniestra, Right and left.
A duras penas, With great trouble.
De aqui para alli,
De aca para alla, Perecind there:

Aqui y alli,
Acd y alla, aculla,

Formation of Adverbs with mente (ly),

Facil, facilmente, Easy, easily.
Constante, constantemente, Constant, constantly.
Triste, tristemente, Sad, sadly.

Alegre, alegremente, Joyful, joyfully.
Elegante, elegantemente, Elegant, elegantly,

Sabio, sabiamente, Wise, wisely.
308 LESSON 58.

Delicate, delicately.
Clear, clearly.

Delicado, delicadamente,
Claro, claramente,

Verdadero, verdaderamente, True, truly.
Vocabulario. Vocabulary.
E] bastén, the cane. Cruel, cruel.
La desgracia, the misfortune. Después, after, afterward.
La fuerza, the strength. Probable, probable.

La groseria, the rudeness.
La tarde, the afternoon.
Acaso, perhaps.

Afuera, without.
Amargo, bitter.

Bajo, dow.

Callado, silent.

Ciego, blind.

Tal vez, perhaps.
Acompaiiar, 1. ¢o accompany.
Arrepentirse, 3. to repent.
Conseguir, 3. fo oblain.
Escuchar, 1. 40 listen to.
Faltar, 1. to fail.

Oir, 3. to hear.

Provenir, 3. to result.

Claro, clear.
Conciso, concise.
Cortés, polite.

Referir, 3. to relate.
Responder, 2. to answer.

 

Exercise 115.

1. ; Como me haengafiado este hombre! 2. Hemos siempre sabido
nuestra leccién desde que vamos 4 la escuela. 3. He venido acd tem-
prano para ver 4 su hermano de V. 4. Cicerén habld sabia y elo-
cuentemente. 5. César escribid clara, concisa y elegantemente. 6. Yo
le hablé cortésmente y él me respondio con groserfa. 7. Los mucha-
chos entraron calladitamente, pues la madre estaba muy mala.
8. Jamas vi tal cosa. 9. Si V. quiere, iremos majiana al teatro.
10. Le referiré & V. la historia, si ya no la sabe V. 11. Yo creo que
V. podré conseguir facilmente el dinero que V. necesita. 12. Esta
casa debe haber costado mucho dinero. 18. Vengo de afuera, y he
visto una cosa muy curiosa. 14. Aqui mataron 4 un hombre, segun
he ofdo. 15. Primero vino su hermano de V. y después los otros
amigos. 16. ; Acaso vendré su padre hoy? 17. Vendréa tal vez esta
noche 4 las diez. 18. El anda de aqui para all{ sin saber dénde sen-
tarse. 19. V. ha sido muy imprudente, y de ahi proviene su desgra-
cia. 20. ; A qué hora vendré el médico? 21. Ya viene. 22. Lo
haré si ya no me faltan las fuerzas. 23. No iré alld, pues estoy mejor
donde estoy. 24. ; Qué tristisimamente llora esta mujer! 25. Hable
V. claro, si V. quiere que yo le comprenda. 26. Nunca volveré 4 ver
A mi querido amigo.
THE ADVERB. 309

Exercise 116.

1. If you do not pay him, you will repent it bitterly. 2. These
two friends are constantly together. 3. You must act prudently if
you do not wish to lose your money. 4. Your friend has treated his
sister very cruelly. 5. Your exercise is not well done; you have
written it badly. 6. You would have acted more wisely if you had
not answered that man. 7. I could not listen politely to all he said
about you. 8. I have blindly followed your instructions. 9. Speak
low, my friend, there is somebody in the other room. 10. How do
you do to-day? 11. I am pretty well, thank you. 12. When will
your sister arrive? 13. She will probably arrive this afternoon.
14, Look for my cane, I wish to go out now. 15. Shall you accom-
pany your friends to Paris? 16. I shall perhaps accompany them.
17. If you come to-morrow, do not come too late. 18. I shall not be
able to come before nine o’clock. 19. Our house is already finished.
20. They walk the whole day here and there without doing anything.
21. Do not speak so loud, I havea headache. 22. I was near him
when he was wounded. 23. He was before me, and my brother was
behind me. 24. Come quick, I have something to tell you. 25. This
author writes very well. 26. We walked very slowly and arrived
too late.

Gramatica. Grammar.
1, Place of the Adverd.

1. The adverb is generally placed in Spanish after the verb.
In compound tenses it is placed after the participle, and never
between the same and the auxiliary:

El discipulo ha estudiado siempre The scholar has always studied his
su leccidn, lesson.

Although, according to the rules of syntax, we may deviate from
this rule, the student would do well to adhere to the same, and
thus avoid the mistakes which may result from any deviation.
2. A few adverbs must always stand before the verb, as no,
etc,, and the adverbs of exclamation: cudnto, cudn, cémo, etc. :

; Como me ha engafiado ! How he has deceived me !
310 LESSON 58.

The following adverbs also precede the verb : apenas, hardly ;
cuando, when; luego que, as soon as; asi que, so soon as;
mientras que, whilst; donde, where ; de donde, whence, and a
few others.

2, Formation of Adverbs.

1. Adverbs are formed from adjectives in two different
ways:

Adjectives having the same termination for both genders add
mente (corresponding to the English termination ly).

Facil, facilmente, Easy, easily.
Dulce, dulcemente, Sweet, sweetly.
Feliz, felizmente, Happy, happily.
Igual, igualmente, Equal, equally.

Nore. — If an adverb is formed from an adjective which has the written
accent, this accent is preserved, even though it does not indicate the
accented syllable of the adverb :

Facilmente. Cortésmente.

2. Adjectives having a different form for the masculine and
feminine add mente to the feminine form :

Sabio, sabiamente, Wise, wisely.
Claro, claramente, Clear, clearly.
Honrado, honradamente, Honest, honestly.
Rico, ricamente, Rich, richly.

3. Superlatives may be formed from all adverbs ending in

mente:
Tristisimamente, Most sadly.

Dulcisimamente, Most sweetly.

4. When several adverbs follow each other in the same sen-
tence, it is sufficient to add the termination mente to the last
adverb, while all the preceding adverbs take the form of the
feminine of the adjective:

El habla sabia y elocuentemente, He speaks wisely and eloquently.
E] escribe clara, concisa y elegan- He writes clearly, concisely, and
temente, elegantly.

The same rule is to be observed for the superlative.
THE ADVERB. 311

5. When different adverbs in mente occur in the same sen-
tence without modifying the same verb, it is preferable, for the
sake of euphony, to replace one of the adverbs by a noun con-
nected with the preposition con;

Hablé cortésmente y él respondid I spoke courteously and he an-
con groseria, swered rudely (with rudeness).

6. Adverbs ending in mente govern the same prepositions
as the adjectives from which they are formed :

Anteriormente 4, etc. Anterior to, etc.

7. Adverbs cannot be formed from all adjectives. Such are:
verde, green; azul, blue; enfermo, il; poco, little; mucho,
much, etc.

8. A few adverbs may be used diminutively or augmenta-
tively, but only in a familiar way :

Se entré calladitamente y la tomd He entered very quietly and took
suavitamente por la mano, her very gently by the hand.

9. Certain adjectives may be used in Spanish as adverbs, and
yemain then invariable. Such are the adjectives: elaro, clear,
clearly ; oscuro, obscure, obscurely ; derecho, straight ; torcido,
twisted ; fuerte, strong, strongly, etc.

10. The adverb ya, which is generally rendered by already,
is sometimes rendered by indeed, since, now, etc. :

Ya ha llegado, He has already arrived.
Ya de dia, ya de noche, Now in daytime, now at night.
Ya que V. lo sabe, Since you know tt.

Ya ae arrepentira V., You will indeed repent it.
312 LESSON 59.

Leceion LIX.

Lesson LIX.

THE PREPOSITION.

A, to, at.

Ante, before.

Con, with.

Contra, against.

De, of, from.

Desde, from, since.
En, in.

Entre, between, among.

Hacia, towards, to.

Hasta, as far as, until, till, even,
Para, for, in order to, to.

Por, by, through, for.

Segtin, according to, as.

Sin, without.

Sobre, on, upon, about, above.
Tras, behind, besides.

Prepositions and Prepositiona) Phrases requiring de after them.

Ademas, besides.
Alrededor, around.

Antes, before (ref. to time).

A pesar, notwithstanding.
Cerca, near.

Debajo, under.

Delante, before.

Dentro, in.
Después, after.
Detras, behind.
Encima, on, upon.
Enfrente, opposite.
Fuera, out.

‘Por medio, by means,

Prepositions followed by a.

En cuanto, as far.

Ejemplos.

Vendré 4 las ocho.
Comparecié ante el juez.
Estoy con mi padre.
Estamos contra V.

Se habla de V.

Saldré en el mes de Agosto.

Eran entre quinze 4 veinte hombres.

Mire V. hacia el norte.

Voy hasta mi casa.

Trabajo para ganar.

Va 4 Madrid por un afio.

Lo digo segzén me lo han dicho.

Junto, next.

Examples.

I will come at eight o’clock.

He appeared before the judge.

I am with my father.

We are against you.

They speak of you.

I shall leave in the month of
August.

There were between fifteen and
twenty men.

Look towards the north.

Tam going as far as my house.

I work to earn.

He goes to Madrid for a year.

I tell it as they told me
THE PREPOSITION. 313

Vive sin trabajar.

E] libro esta sobre la mesa.

Voy tras V.

Vendré después de las tres.

El esta detrds de mi.

El perro esta debajo de la mesa.

Vocabulario.

El empleo, the employment, situation.
El grito, the outery.

El marinero, the sailor.

El niimero, the number.

El principiante, the beginner.
La cadena, the chain.

La carcel, the prison.

La caridad, the charity.

La cera, the wax.

La comida, the dinner.

La gota, the drop.

La insolencia, the insolence.
La mascara, the mask.

La peseta, the shilling.

La prueba, the proof.

La vara, the yard.

La vela, the candle.
Abundante, abundant.
Borracho, intoxicated,

 

He lives without working.

The book is on the table.

I go behind you.
I will come after three o'clock.

He is behind me.

The dog is under the table.

Vocabulary.

Corto, short.

Culpado, guilty.

Derecho, right.

El reo, the culprit.

El sueiio, the dream.

El verso, the verse.

La bondad, the kindness.
Sentado, seated.

Cojear, 1. to limp, to be lame.
Comparecer, 2. to appear.
Contar, 1. to count.
Costar, 1. to cost.

Dirigir, 3. to direct.
Disputar, 1. to dispute.
Exceder, 2. to exceed.
Mover, 2. to move, to turn.
Pararse, 1. fo stand.
Preguntar, 1. to inquire.
Suministrar, 1. to offer.

Exercise 117.

1. Esta carta va dirigida 4 mi hermano. 2. Andamos de calle 4
calle sin saber dénde vamos. 3. Este pafio se vende 4 cinco pesetas la
vara. 4, He tomado el dinero 4 tres por ciento. 5. El vino se per-
dié gota a gota. 6. El reo comparecié ante el juez, y fué condenado 4
la cdrcel por veinte afios. 7. Con ensefiar también se aprende. 8. La
vida del hombre con ser tan corta, nos suministra abundantes pruebas
9. Esta casa esta cerca de la de mi hermano.
10. Esta vela es de cera. 11. Mi amigo cojea del pie derecho.
12. Nos vestimos de marineros para ir al baile de mascaras. 13. Yo
haré esto para V., pero no de balde. 14. Yo irla de buena gana al
campo con V, 15. Tengo un empleo y gano desde ayer. 16. Nadie
le excedia 4 este hombre en bondad. 17. Entre otras cosas he visto
un cuadro muy hermoso en la casa del médico. 18. Quintana cuenta

de que no es un suefio,
314 LESSON 59.

con razon 4 Herrera entre (or en) el numero de los primeros autores
espafioles. 19. Este hombre hasta tuvo la insolencia de venir bor-
racho 4 mi casa. 20. Para principiante, no ha hecho V. mal este
trabajo. 21. La caridad es sobre todas las virtudes. 22. Se disputa
sobre el sentido de este verso. 23. Movidse la conversacién sobre
vinos franceses. 24. Tras ser culpado, es 61 que més levanta el grito.
25. Este reloj me cuesta cien pesos sin la cadena. 26. Los hombres
estaban sentados alrededor de la mesa.

Exercise 118.

1. That lady comes from Europe. 2. She used to live at our house
before the death of her husband. 3. What were you doing under the
table? 4. Iwas looking formy pen. 5. We can do nothing without
money. 6. Will you go as far as the church for me? 7. I will
accompany you as far as that street, 8. You speak without knowing
what you say. 9. Here are some apples for you. 10. My sister lives
far from us. 11. Do you know the lady who lives opposite your
house? 12. Yes, she is an English lady. 13. Why do those boys
walk behindus? 14. They are going to the school next to our house.
15. My brother will come first, and I will go afterwards. 16. My
father is in his room and is writing to my mother. 17. Do nothing
without consulting me. 18. Come and (é) see us this evening with
your friends. 19. Do not stand before me, I cannot see anything.
20. His sons were seated around the table. 21. Those two ladies
live opposite the church. 22. Let us go as far as the park. 23. The
dog is under the table. 24. There is a garden behind the house, and
a church behind the garden. 25. I was seated next to my brother,
and my sister next to him. 26. Here is money for your dinner.
27. I received these goods by railroad. 28. Has anybody inquired
for me? 29. There came a man who inquired for you, and who
went away when he heard that you were not at home. 30. We
must stay here until to-morrow.

Gramatica. Grammar.

1. The preposition 4 is used in Spanish :

1. To express position at, or direction towards :

Esta 4 izquierda, He is ov the left.
Fué a bordo, He went on board.
Ira 4 Sevilla, He will go to Seville.
THE PREPOSITION. 315

2. In expressions of time:

A mediodia, At midday.
A las once de la mafiana, Al eleven o'clock in the morning.
Al llegar, Upon his arrival.
3. To express manner, means :
Va 4 pie, He goes on foot.
Le eché & palos, I drove him away with a stick.
Gota u gota, Drop by drop.
4, To express price or rate -
j A cudnto se vende ? What ts the price ?
A dos duros el metro, Two dollars a meter.
A toda fuerza de maquina, dé full speed.
A cuatro por ciento, Al four per cent,

5. To express resemblance:

A la inglesa, In the English style.
A lo matador, Like a bull-fighter.
6. After verbs requiring or implying the prepositions to or
from:
Did al nito un perro chico, He gave the child a cent.
Ofrecid al juez cien duros, He offered the judge a hundred dollars,
Robaran al ciego su dinero, They stole the blind man’s money.

7. To form a great number of adverbial locutiuns :

A la verdad, Truly.
A lo menos, At least,

2. The preposition ante, before, means in the presence of :
Ante el juez, Before the judge.

It often takes the place of antes que or antes de, and indi-
cates the preference of one thing or action over another:

Ante todo or antes de todo, Before everything.

3. The preposition con, with, may also mean although or by
when accompanied by the Infinitive :

Con enseiiar también se aprende, By teaching one also learns.
La vida del hombre, con ser tan The life of man, although short,
corta, etc. ete.
316 LESSON 59.

Con is also used to form certain locutions :
Con que V. ha llegado, So you have arrived.
4. The preposition de is used

1. To express time:

De dia, In daytime.
De noche, By night.
De sol 4 sol, From morning to night,

2. To express origin, derivation, separation :

Viene del almacén de su padre, He comes from his father’s store.
Bajé del tren, He got out of the train.
Don Quijote de la Mancha, Don Quixote of (the province of ) La

Mancha.
3. To express material and ownership : :
Un reloj de oro, A gold watch.
Una vela de cera, ~ A wax candle.
Los primos de la mujer de Juan, John's wife's cousins,
E] techo de la casa, The roof of the house.
4. To express use:
Un perro de caza, A hunting dog.
Una cafia de pescar, A fishing rod.
5. To express contents:
Un vaso de agua, A glass of water.
Una jicara de chocolate, A cup of chocolate.

6. In exclamations of sorrow and pity :

j Pobre de mi padre ! My poor father t
7. To express characteristic, cause, manner:

La moza de los cabellos rubios, The red-headed girl.
Morir de hambre, To die of hunger.
8. When the word pedazo, piece, or another noun is under
stood :
Probé del asado,

I tasted (a piece of) the roast meat.
Dame de vestir,

Give me (clothes) to dress.
9. To form many adverbial locutions :
De balde, for nothing ;

de veras, truly ;
De modo que, so that ;

de buena gana, willingly.
THE PREPOSITION. 317

10. After a passive verb by is expressed by de, if the action
ye mental:

Es odiado de todos, He is hated by all.
Era amado de los nifios, He was loved by the children.

Nore. — If the action be physical, por is used :

Era castigado por el maestro, He was punished by the teacher.

5
1.

6.

The preposition en, 7m, is used

To express rest in, motion into, position :

Vivia en aquella casa, He used to live in that house.
La cena esta en la mesa, Supper is on the table.

Entré en el coche, He got into the carriage.

Se senté en la cama, He sat down on the bed.

To express ¢ime :

En todo el dia, During the whole day.
En diciendo eso, While saying this.
Lo hizo en cuatro horas, He did it in four hours.

The preposition para, for, to (in order to), also expresses

an act ready to be performed:

a

Estoy para partir, I am about leaving.

The preposition por, for, by, though, also expresses:
Means, ete. :

Casarse por procurador, To marry by proxy.

Motive, etc.:
Lo hace por fuerza, He does it by force.

Price, etc. +
Lo compré por poco dinero, He bought it for little money.

Time :
Se ausenté por ocho dias, He was away for a week.
Por mucho tiempo, For a long white,

What happens in favor of a person or thing:

Empeiarse por él, To occupy one’s self for him.
318 LESSON 60.
6. What is done in place of a person or thing:
Trabajo por él, I work in his place.
7. Exchange:

Le doy mi sombrero por el suyo, I give you my hat for yours.

8. The estimation in which a person or thing is held:
Esta tenido por bueno, He is considered as a good man,

 

Leceion LX. Lesson LX.

DEFECTIVE VERBS.

lst Conjugation.
Antojarse, to long for (only used in the third person).

2d Conjugation.
Pacer, to graze. Roer, to gnaw.
Placer, to please. Soler, to be accustomed.
Raer, to rub off. Yacer, to lie,

Reponer, éo reply.

Gramatica. Grammar.

1. Pacer is not used in the first person singular of the pres
ent indicative, or the whole of the present subjunctive.

2. Placer is seldom used except in exclamations:

j Plegue a Dios ! Please God !
i Pluguiera 4 Dios! Would to God!

\Nors. — In its other forms it is generally replaced by querer, gustar, etc.

3. Raer is generally replaced by borrar, to erase, or rayar,
to cross out:

Notz, — When used it is conjugated like caer.
DEFECTIVE VERBS. 319

4, Reponer, in the sense of to reply, is only used in the
Pretérito definido of the Indicative: repuse, repusiste, repuso,
etc.

5, Roer is generally found only in the following forms:

Pras, Inp. Roo, roigo or royo, roes, roe, roemos, roéis, roen.
Pres. Susy. Roa, etc., roiga, etc., roya, etc.

6. Soler is generally found only in the following tenses and
persons:

Suelo, J am accustomed to; sueles, suele, solemos, soléis,
suelen.

Solia, J was accustomed to ; solias, solia, soliamos, soliais,
solian.

Norr.—The present subjunctive is sometimes formed : suela, suelas,
auela, solamos, soldis, suelan.

7, Yacer, 2. to ie, is conjugated thus:

GERUNDIO: Yaciendo.

INDICATIVO PRESENTE : Yazgo, yazco, yago.
IMPERFECTO : Yacfa, etc.

Futuro: Yaceré6, etc.

ConDICIONAL: Yacoerfa, etc.

IMPERATIVO: Yace or yaz tu, yaced vosotros.
PRESENTE : Yazga, yazoa, ov yaga.
IMPERFECTO SUBJUNTIVO « Yaciera, etc.

Fururo DE SUBJUNTIVO; Yaciere.
320

Leccion LXI.

LESSON 61.

Lesson LXI.

AGREEMENT OF THE VERB WITH ITS SUBJECT.

Vocabulario.
El creador, the creator.

El movimiento, the movement.

El padrino, the godfather.
El ratén, the mouse.

El sol, the swn.

La causa, the cause, the case.
La especie, the species.

La fiesta, the feast.

La grandeza, the greatness.

La humanidad, the humanity.

La marcha, the march.

La mayor parte, the most,
La mitad, the half.

La navegacién, navigation.
La necesidad, necessity.

La obra, the work.

 

Vocabulary.

La planta, the plant.
César, Cosar.

Pompeyo, Pompey.
Distinto, distinct.
Supremo, supreme.
Aguardar, 1. to expect, to await
Anuneiar, 1. to announce.
Arruinar, 1. fo ruin.
Conversar, 1. to converse,
Decidir, 3. to decide.
Divertir, 3. to amuse,
Escapar, 1. to escape.
Instruir, 3. ¢o instruct.
Interesar, 1. to interest.
Juzgar, to judge.

Sentir, 3. to feel.

Exercise 121.

1. Pedro, Juan y yo hemos estado aqui esta mafiana. 2. El padre
y el hijo han salido esta mafiana. 3. Ni el teatro ni la musica me
divierten. 4. El ejército de Francia é Inglaterra estaban en marcha.
5. El estudiar y conversar con los sabios instruye al hombre. 6. Dar
y saber dar son dos cosas muy distintas. 7. La justicia, la religién y
la humanidad quieren que V. obre de otro modo. 8. Los cielos y la
tierra, el sol y las estrellas, todo nos anuncia la grandeza del supremo
creador. 9. La mitad de los soldados se ha ido. 10. Es la obra y no
la persona que interesa la posteridad. 11. Juzgar y sentir no son la
misma cosa. 12. Seran VV., sefiores, quienes decidiran en esta
causa. 13. Son trenta duros que V. me debe. 14. El numero de las
especies de animales es mds grande, segun dicen, que el numero de las
especies de plantas. 15. Su padre de V. 6 su tfo serd el padrino de
mi hermanito. 16. El padre de Juan es uno de los que han sido
arruinados por la ultima guerra. 17. Ni V. ni éllo saben. 18. De
AGREEMENT OF THE VERB WITH ITS SUBJECT. 321

mis conocidos no todos serfan mis amigos, 19. La agricultura, las
artes, el comercio y la navegacién, todo estd perdido en aquel pobre
pais. 20. La mayor parte de mis amigos esté esta noche en el teatro.

Exercise 122.

1. My brother and I will leave to-morrow for the country. 2. Have
not most of your friends left for Paris? 3. Most of them intend to
remain in town this summer. 4. Neither Cassar nor Pompey was to
be an emperor. 5. John and Henry are very good friends. 6. Great,
rich, poor, little, no one escapes death. 7. Fear or necessity are the
cause of all the movements of the mouse. 8. One half of the chil-
dren of that school are Germans. 9. It is we who are responsible for
your conduct. 10. Your brother and I will go to the same school
next year. 11. I am sure that it is you who have said that. 12. A
great number of strangers were present at that feast. 13. He and I
are brothers. 14, Neither you nor your friend will arrive in time.
15. It was your father and not your mother who was here. 16. He
or she will have the book. 17. This gentleman and I have traveled
together. 18. It is not the son but the daughter who has died.
19. There are three gentlemen at the door. 20. It is they we are
expecting. 21. Charles and I are poor, but Peter and his brother are
rich.

Gramatica. Grammar.

1, When the subject is composed of two or more nouns
joined by a conjunction, the verb is put in the plural :
El padre y el hijo han estado aqui, The father and the sun have been here.

2. When the subjects are connected by ni, nevther, or by 6,
or, the verb must also be put in the plural. Usage and euphony
allow, however, the use of the singular, and we can say:

Ni la musica ni el teatro le divier- Neither music nor the theater amuse
ten or divierte, him.

This sentence may also have the subjects at the end of the sentence:
No le divierte ni la misica ni el teatro.

3. The verb must likewise be in the plural when one subject
alone is expressed and the other or others are understood :

El ejército de Valencia y Murcia The armies of Valencia and Mur-

estaban en marcha, cia were on their march.
21
322 LESSON 61.

4, If the subjects are not of the same person, the verbs
agree with the person which has the priority. The first person
has the priority of the second, and the second of the third :

V. y yo lo sabemos, You and I know tt.
V. y él lo saben, You and he know it.

5, The verb is put in the singular when the subject is com-
posed of two infinitives :

El estudiar y conversar con los Studying and conversing with wise
sabios instruye al hombre, men instruct man.

6, When a verb has several subjects not connected by any
conjunction, it is put in the singular, unless the sentence begins
with the verb. In this case the verb is put in the plural:

La justicia, la religién, la humani- Justice, religion, and humanity
dad, lo reclama, or Lo reclaman demand it.
la justicia, la religién y la hu-
manidad,

7. When a word occurs in the sentence which embraces all
the others, the verb must agree with this word:
Los cielos y la tierra, el sol y las The heavens and the earth, the sun

estrellas, todo nos anuncia la and the stars, all announce the
grandeza de Dios, greatness of God to us.

8. When the verb has for its subject a general collective
noun, it agrees with the latter :

El ejército esta bien organizado, The army is well organized.

If the collective is partitive, the verb may either agree with
the same, or with the noun which follows it, and which is
governed by the preposition de:

La mitad de los soldados se haido, One half of the soldiers have gone
or se han ido, away.
CONJUNCTIONS AND INTERJECTIONS. 323

Leceién LXII. Lesson LXII.

CONJUNCTIONS AND INTERJECTIONS.
Conjunctions.

The Conjunctions most generally used are:

Y, and. Porque, because.

Ni...ni, netther...nor. Ya que, since.

0, or. Respecto, regarding.

Ya...ya, now...now, Por consiguiente, consequently.

Sea...sea, etther...or. Por eso, therefore.

Pero, but. Sobre, therewpon.

Sin embargo, however. Algo, somewhat.

No obstante, notwithstanding. Pues, since.

A menos que, wniess. Mientras, whilst.

Si, if, whether, so. Con*orme, as.

Con tal que, provided. Antes que, before.

Para que, in order that. Aun, ever.

Porqué, why. Por miedo, for fear.

Interjections.
Of Joy.
Ah, ah! Ah, ah! Gracias 4 Dios! Thank God?
Ah, que alegria! ee Bendito sea Dios! t God be
Ay que gozo! ; a Alabado sea Dios!) praised /
Bueno! Good/ Vaya, vaya! Well, now/
Of Sadness.
Ah, ay! Ah, ay! Dios mio! Good heavens !
Ay qué pena! What a pain! Valgame Dios! May God help me!
Ay demi! Woeto me! Virgen santisima! Holy Virgin !
Ay demi! Poor me! Ave Maria! God forbid /
Of Approbation and Surprise.

Muy bien! Very well! C4spita !
Bien hecho! Well done/ Chispas !
Me alegro mucho! Jam very glad ! Céscaras ! ze
Grandemente! Splendid! Caracoles! cunds!
Excelente! Excellent / Fuego!

Ascuas!
Bravo! Bravo!

Es un pasmo !

Beautiful f
Es una maravilla! t eaaehipis
324 LESSON 62.

Esté muy bien! Jt is very well / Oiga! calle! You don’t suy so?
Es milagro! Wonderful ! Hola! Hallo!

Guapo! Magnificent ! Mire V.! Do you see!

Viva, viva! Hurrah, hurrah ! Saramba! Plague !

Otra vez! Another time! Encore! Toma! Indeed! (Ironically.}

Of Contempt, Blame, and Disgust.

Dios mio! Good heavens ! Guapa cosa! 4 fine thing !

Eso no vale nada! That is good for Qué vergiienza! What a shame?
nothing f

Eso es bueno! That ts good indeed ! Quita alla! Get away!

Vaya, vaya! Weill, now! Oxte! Shame!

Que asco! How disgusting / Calle, qué es bueno ! { That ts very

Grande hazaiia, 4 great feat ! Vaya en gracia! Jine / (Tron.)
Of Anger.

Voto 4! sime enfado! Don’t make Diantre! Hang it!
me mad !

Bi : j
Voto 4 chadpiro! J tell you, sir/ Anda enhoramala! t Geinways

Par diez ! Vaya V. 4 pasear!
q !
Caramba! The plague take you) Ascuas! That’s too bad!
Of Exhortation and Encouragement.
Vaya, vaya! Bravely ! Guarda, guarda! Look out /
Vamos, vamos! Come on / Aun ladito! Step aside!
Alerta! Wide awake ! Cuidado! Take care!
Ea, venga alguien! Somebody here! Fuera, fuerai Out with him!
Ea pues! Weill, now / Fuego, fuego! Fire!
Ea. dnimo! Courage ! Ay, que me matan! Murder!
Basta, basta! Hnough! Cégele, cigele! Hold him?
Quedo, quedo! Gently! Acabése! Jt is all over /
Of Silence.
Calla, calla! Be silent! Silencio! Silence /

Que callon! Quiet/ Chito, Chitén! Bush?
326

TABULA DE LAS TERMINACIONES

TABLE OF

DE LAS TRES CONJUGACIONES REGULARES

EN LOS TIEMPOS SIMPLES.

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

q Cy é td
e rb i : 1)
AY r [asr
z
2
5 PRESENT Past Present | ImpeRFEctT
o GERUND. PRETEBRIT.
5 INFINITIVE. PARTICIPLE.| INDICATIVE.| INDICATIVE.
S
°
am-o am-aba am-6
am-as am-abas am-aste
am-a am-aba am-6
1. an AM-AB am-ando am-ado
am-amos am-&bamos | am-amos
am-dis am-abais am-asteis
am-an am-aban am-aron
c6m-o com-fa com-i
com-es com-fas com-iste
m-8 “1 oil
2. EB COM-ER | com-lendo| com-ido £2 coui-ts com-i6
2 com-emos com-famos com-imos
com-éls com-iais com-istels
com-en com-fan com-leron
recib-o recib-fa recib-f
recib-es Tecibeias recib-iste
. {i ib-e recib-fa recib-i6
8. 1B | RECIB-IR |recib-tendo| recib-ido Pe at
recib-imos | recib-famos| recib-imos
recib-4s recib-fais recib-isteis
recib-en Tecib-fan recib-ieron

 

 
TERMINATIONS.

TABLE OF TERMINATIONS

327

OF THE THREE REGULAR CONJUGATIONS

; IN THEIR SIMPLE TENSES.
Bho TL * vad on 0 “Le

 

aes
a
tar te.

 

 

 

 

 

 

jf “ ae

g fl x =

3 5 % & | Imrerrecr Sussunc-| Porure
Fururr. EB 4 a 2 TIVE.

a a a 2 SuBJUNCTIVE,

z 3 Ay a TERMINATION

° cl n .
amar-6 amar-ia am-6 am-ara -ase am-are
amar-és amar-{as am-a am-es am-aras ages am-ares
amar-& amar-fa am-e am-ara ase am-are
amar-emos | amar-famos & é am-&
amar-éis amar-iais am-ad am-éis am-arais -ascis am-areia
amar-dn amar-fan am-en am-aran ~asen am-aren
comere-é comer-ia com-a& com-fera -lese com-iere
comer-4s comer-{as com-e com-as com-feras -leses com-ieres
comer-& comer-fa com-a com-iera -lese com-iere
comer-emos | comer-iamos com-amog | com-idramos -idsemos | com-iéremos
comer-éia comer-fais | com-ed | com-dis com-lerais -leseia com-iereis
comer-dn comer-ian com-an com-ieran -lesen com-ieren
recibir-6 recibir-ia recib-a recib-lera -lese recib-iere
recibir-ds | recibir-fas | recib-e | recib-as recib-ieras = -leaes recib-leres
recibir-& recibir-ia recib-a recib-iera -lese recib-iere
recibir-emoa| recibir-iamos| recib recib-ié 16, recib-1é
recibir-éis | recibir-fais | recib-id | recib-dis | recib-lerais = -ieseis recib-iereis
recibir-én | recibir-fan recib-an | recib-ieran -tesen recib-leren

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 
328

Shenae TABLE OF THE PRINCIPAL

TABULA ALFABETICA DE LOS
PRINCIPALES VERBOS IRREGULARES 6 DEFECTIVOS.

Nota. — El némero colocado después del Presente del Infinitivo de cada verbo indica ie
Conjugacién 4 la que pertenece este verbo.

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

PRESENT Past Present | IMPERFECT
GERUND. PRETERIT,
INFINITIVE. PaRrticiPLe.| INDICATIVE.| INDICATIVE.
Abolir, 3. aboliendo abolido abolia aboli
to abolish. labolias aboliste
abolia labolié
abolimos aboliamos _jabolimos
abolis laboliais labolisteis
labolian abolieron
Abrir, 3. Regularinall]  abierto
to open. the other
tenses.
Absolver, 2. conjugated | absuelto
to absolve. like Mover.
Abstraer, 2. conjugated
to abstract. like Traer.
Acertar, 1. conjugated
to hit the mark. like
Acrecentar.
Acordar, 1. acordando | acordado {acuerdo acordaba acordé
to agree. - acuerdas acordabas _jacordaste
acuerda acordaba acordé
acordamos acorddébamos Jacordamos
acordais acordabais _|acordasteis
acuerdan acordaban acordaron
Acostar, 1. conjugated
to lay down, like Acordar,
Acrecentar, 1. |acrecentando/ acrecentado |acreciento jacrecentaba |acrecenté
to increase. acrecientas |acrecentabas |acrecentaste
acrecienta |acrecentaba |acrecenté
acrecent ecentaba- Jacrecentamos
mos
Jacrecentais jacrecentabais/acrecentas-
: teis
acrecientan jacrecentaban|acrecentaron
Adestrar, 1. conjugated
to guide. like
Acrecentar.
Adherir, 3. conjugated
to adhere, like Asentir.

 

 

 

 

 
IRREGULAR OR DEFECTIVE VERBS. 329

ALPHABETICAL TABLE OF THE
PRINCIPAL IRREGULAR OR DEFECTIVE VERBS.

Norz. — The nuuwber put after the Present Infinitive of each verb indicates the Conjugation
to which that verb belongs.

ae Present | 1MPERFECT SuBJUNC- Futur:
Cox- Iu- TIVE.
Furuge, Sus- Sus-

DITIONAL. | PERATIVE. JUNCTIVE. 1 TERMINATION, JUNCTIVE.

-iese
-ieses
-iese
-iésemos
-ieseis
-iesen

 
330 ALPHABETICAL TABLE OF THE PRINCIPAL

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

a
PRESENT a & PRESENT | IMPERFECT
GEEUND. 22 PRETERIT.
INFINITIVE. 4 & | Inprcarive.| INpIcaTIve.
a
Adquirir, 3. adquiriendo | adquirido | adquiero adquiria adquiri
to acquire. adquieres | adquirias adquiriste
adquiere adquiria adquirié6
adquirimos | adquiriamos| adquirimos
adquiris adquiriais | adquiristeis
adquieren | adquirian | adquirieron
Aducir, 3. See
to convey. Conducir.
Advertir, 3. See
to advise. Asentir.
Agorar, 1. See
to divine. Acordar.
Alentar, 1. See
to encourage. Acrecentar.
Almorzar, 1. See
to breakfast, Acordar,
Andar, 1. andando andado ando andaba anduve
to walk. andas andabas anduviste
anda andaba anduvo
andamos andébamos | anduvimos
anddis andabais anduvisteis
andan andaban anduvieron
Apacentar, 1. See
to graze. Acrecentar.
Apostar, 1. See
to bet. Acordar.
Aprobar, 1. See
to approve. Acordar.
Apretar, 1. See
to tighten, Acrecentar.
Argiir, 3. See The diwresis is kept in all
to argue. Instruir. | forms, except before y.
Arrecirse, 3. See
to be benumbed. Abolir.
Arrendar, 1. See

to rent. Acrecentar.

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 
IRREGULAR OR DEFECTIVE VERBS. 331

ConDITIONAL,

JMPERATIVE,
PRESENT

SUBJUNCTIVE

TERMINATION
1. 2.

SuBJUNCTIVE.

-iese
-ieses
-iese

-ieseis
-iesen

-uviese
-uvieses
-uviese
viéremos
-uvieseis
-uviesen

 
332 ALPHABETICAL TABLE OF THE PRINCIPAL

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

ra
ro)
PRESENT as Present | IMPERFECT
GERUND. < 0 PRevtexzit,
INFINITIVE. Pa gE InpIcaTIVE.| INDICATIVE.
<
Pa
Arrepentirse, 3. | See
to repent. Asentir.
Ascender, 2. See
to ascend, Atender,
Asentar, 1. See
to establish. Acrecentar.
Asentir, 3. asintiendo | asentido | asiento asentia asenti
to acquiesce. asientes asentias asentiste
asiente asentia asintié
asentimos | asentfamos | asentimos
asentis asentiais asentisteis
asienten asentian asintieron
Aserrar, 1, See
to saw, Acrecentar,
Asestar, 1. See
to aim. Acrecentar.
Asir, 3. asiendo asido asgo asia asi
to seize. ases asias asiste
This verb is used ase asia asié
only in a meta- asimos asfamos asimos
phorical sense, asig asfais asisteis
asen asian asieron
Asolar, 1. See
to devastate, Acordar. “
Atender, 2. atendiendo | atendido | atiendo atendia atend{
to mind, atiendes atendias atendiste
atiende atendia atendié
atendemos | atendiamos | atendimos
atendéis atendiais atendisteis
atienden atendian atendieron
Atentar, 1. See
to attempt. Acrecentar.
Aterrar, 1. See
to prostrate. Acrecentar.
Atestar, 1. See
to crowd. Acrecentar.
Atraer, 2. See
to attract, Traer.

 

 
IRREGULAR OR

DEFECTIVE VERBS.

333

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

4 5 = :

5 Ee | EE ne
Foruge. E a a x Imperrect Suysunctive.| 2 z

z & a a TERMINATION & a

o rt n 2 an
asentiré asentiria asienta asint-iera -iese asintiere
asentirds asentirias asiente | asientas | asint-ieras -ieses asintieres
asentiré asentiria asienta asint-iera -iese asintiere
asentiremos | asentirfamos asintamos | asint-iéramos -iésemos |asintiéremos
asentiréis asentiriais asentid| asintdis | asint-ierais -ieseis _|asintiereis
asentirén asentirian asientan | asint-ieran eiesen _jasintieren
asiré asiria asga asiera asiese asiere
asirds asirias ase asgas asieras asieses _—jasieres
asiré asiria asga asiera asiese asiere
asiremos asiriamos asgamos | asiéramos asiésemos fasiéremos
asiréis asiriais asid asgais asierais asieseig asiereis
asiran asirian asgan asieran asiesen _jasieren
atenderé atenderia atienda atend-iera -iese atendiere
atenderés | atenderias | atiende | atiendas | atend-ieras —-ieses atendieres
atenderd, atenderia atienda | atend-iera -iese atendiere
atenderemos| atenderiamos atendamos| atend-iéramos -iésemos |atendiéremos
atenderéis | atenderiais | atended{ atenddis | atend-ierais  -iescis atendiereis
atenderén | atenderian atiendan | atend-ieran = -iesen atendieren

 

 

 

 

 

 

 
334 ALPHABETICAL TABLE OF THE PRINCIPAL

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

PRESENT Past Present | IMPERFECT
GERUND. PRETERIT.
INFINITIVE. PaRriciPLe, | INDICATIVE.| INDICATIVE.
Atravesar, 1. See
to cross over. Acrecentar.
Aventar, 1. See
to fan. Acrecentar.
Avergonzar, 1.| Sce
to shame. Acordar.
Bendecir, 3. bendiciendo | bendit bendig. bend bendij
to bless, bendecido | bendices bendecias bendijiste
bendice bendecia bendijo
bendecimos | bendecfamos| bendijimos
bendecis bendeciais | bendijisteis
bendicen bendecian bendijeron
Caber, 2. cabiendo cabido quepo cabia cupe
to be contained, cabes cabfas cupiste
cabe cabia cupo
cabemos cabiamos cupimos
cabéis cabfais cupisteis
caben cabian cupieron
Caer, 2. cayendo caido caigo caia caf
to fall, caes caias caiste
cae caia cay6
caemos caiamos caimos
caéis cafais caisteis
caen caian cayeron
Calentar, 1. See
to warm. Acrecentar.
Cegar, 1. See
to blind. Acrecentar.
Ceixiir, 3. See
to gird. Pedir.
Cerner, 2. See
to sift. Atender.
Cerrar, 1. See
to close, to shut, | Acrecentar.
Cimentar, 1. See
to ground, found.| Acrecentar.

 

 
 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

IRREGULAR OR DEFECTIVE VERBS. 335
3 a Ze ae
Forvuze. § 4 a z Iupenrect Sunsuncrive.| = z
z & a a TERMINATION mB
38 o 4 1 A a
bend- bend- bend-
bendeciré -eciria bendiga -ijera eijese bendijere
bendecirds -ecirias |bendice |bendigas -ijeras -ijeses bendijeres
bendecird -eciria bendiga -ijera -ijese bendijere.
bendeciremos} -eciriamos| bendigamos| -ijéramos -ijésemos | bendijéremos|
bendeciréis -eciriais |bendecid|bendigdis -ijerais sijeseis | bendijereis
bendecirén -ecirian bendigan -ijeran -ijesen | bendijeren
cabré cabria quepa cupiera cupiese cupiere
cabrés cabrias cabe quepas cupieras cupieses cupieres
cabré cabria quepa cupiera cupiese cupiere
cabremos cabriamos quepamos | cupiéramos cupiésemos | cupiéremos
cabréis cabriais cabed {quepdis cupierais cupieseis | cupiereis
cabrén cabrian \quepan cupieran cupiesen cupieren
caeré caeria caiga cayera cayese cayere
caerds caerias cae caigas cayeras cayeses cayeres
caeré caerfa caiga cayera cayese cayere
caeremos caerfamoa caigamos |cayéramos cayésemos | cayéremos
caeréis caeriais caed —{caigdis cayerais cayeseis cayereis
caerén caerian caigan cayeran cayesen cayeren

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 
336 ALPHABETICAL TABLE OF THE PRINCIPAL

 

 

 

 

 

PRESENT Past Present | [MPERFECT
GEEUND. PReTeERIT,
INFINITIVE. PaxrriciPLe.| INDICATIVE.| INDICATIVE.
Cocer, 2. cociendo cocido cuezo cocia coct
to boil. cueces cocias cociste
cuece cocia cocié
cocemos cociamos cocimos
cocéis cociais cocisteis
cuecen cocian cocieron
Colar, 1. See
to strain, Acordar,
Colegir, 3. See
to collect. Pedir.
Colgar, 1. See
to hang. Acordar,

 

Comedirse, 3. | See
to governoneself.|  Pedir.

 

Comenzar, 1. See

 

 

 

to commence. Acrecentar.
Competir, 3. See

to compete, Pedir,
Concebir, 3. See

to conceive. Pedir.

 

Concernir, 3. See
to concern, Asentir.

 

Concertar, 1. | See
to concert. Acrecentar.

 

Concordar, 1. | Sce
to agree. Acordar.

 

Condescender, 2.) See
to condescend. Atender.

 

Condolerse, 2. | See

 

to condole, Mover.
Conducir, 3. conduciendo| conducido | conduzco conducia conduje
to conduct. conduces conducias | condujiste
conduce conducfa condujo
conducimos | conducfamos| condujimos
conducis conduciais | condujisteis

 

 

conducen conducfan | condujeron

 

 

 

 

 

 
IRREGULAR OR DEFECTIVE VERBS.

337

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

5 ee f
g é a & a §
Furure. & s ZR In peRFect SUBJUNCTIVE. ze
z ‘ a a TERMINATION & a
3S 4 Z ‘ . 3
coceré cocerfa cueza cociera cociese cociere
cocerds cocerfas cuece jcuezas cocieras cocieses _|cocieres
cocerd cocerfa cueza cociera cociese cociere
coceremos |cocerfamos cozamos cociéramos _—_cociésemos|cociéremos
| coceréia cocerfais coced —|cozais cocierais cocieseis {cociereis
coceréu cocerfan cuezan cocieran cociesen |cocieren
conduciré {conducirfa conduzca condu-jera -jese condujere
conducirdés |conducirfas j|conduce |conduzcas | condu-jeras -jeses = jcondujeres
conduciré |conducirfa conduzca condu-jera -jese condujere
duci ducirfamos d condu-jéramos  -jé: dujéremos'
conduciréis |{conducirfais |conducid duzedis | condu-jerais sjeseis {condujereis
conducirén |conducirfan conduzcan | condu-jeran -jesen |condujeren

 

 

 

22
838 ALPHABETICAL TABLE OF THE PRINCIPAL

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

PRESENT Past Present | ImPKRFECT
GxRunp. PRETERIT.
INFINITIVE, PanriciP.e.| INDICATIVE.| INDICATIVE.
Conferir, 3. See .
to confer. Asentir,
Confesar, 1. See
to confess, Acrecentar,
Conocer, 2. conociendo |] conocido | conozco conocia conocfi
to know, to be ac- conoces conocias conociste
quainted with, conoce conocfa , | conocié
conocemos | conocfamos | conocimos
conocéis conocfais conocisteis
conocen conocfan conocieron

 

 

Conseguir, 3. See

 

 

 

 

 

to obtain. Pedir.
Consentir, 3. | See

to consent. Asentir.
Consolar, 1. See

to comfort. Acordar.
Constreiiir, 3. See

to constrain, Pedir.
Contar, 1. See

to count, Acordar,
Contener, 2. See

to contain. Tener.

 

Contender, 2. See

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

to contend. Atender.
Contradecir, 3. | See

to contradict. Decir.
Controvertir, 3. | See

to controvert. Asentir.
Contraer, 2. See

to contract. Traer.
Convertir, 3. See

to convert. Asentir,
Corregir, 3. See

to correct. Pedir.

{ Cubrir, 3. cubierto | Regular in

 

 

to cover. all other
tenses,

 

 

 

 

 

 
‘IRREGULAR OR DEFECTIVE VEBBS. 339

Con-
DITIONAL, | ATIVE. TERMINATION
1. 2.

Furvre.

-iese
-ieses
~iese

-ieseis
-iesen

 
340 ALPHABETICAL TABLE OF THE PRINCIPAL

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

PRESENT Past PRESENT | IMPERFECT
GERUND. PRETERIT.
INFINITIVE. PaRticrPuy.| INDICATIVE.| INDICATIVE.
Dar, 1. dando dado doy daba af
to give. das dabas diste
da daba dié
damos ddbamos dimos
dais dabais disteis
dan daban dieron
Decaer, 2. See
to decay. Caer.
Decentar, 1. See
to commence with.| Acrecentar.
Decir, 3. diciendo dicho digo decia dije
to tell, to say. dices decfas dijiste
dice decia dijo
decimos decfamos dijimos
decis decfais dijisteis
dicen decian dijeron
Deducir, See ”
to deduct. Conducir.
Defender, 2. See
to defend. Atender.
Deferir, 3. See
to defer. Asentir.
Degollar, 1. See
to behead. Acordar.
Demoler, 2. See
to demolish. Mover.
Demostrar, 1. See
to demonstrate. Acordar.
Denegar, 1. See
to deny. Acrecentar.
Denostar, 1, See
to abuse. Acordar.
Derrengar, 1. See
to hate. Acrecentar.
Derretir, 3. See
to melt. Pedir.

 

 
IRREGULAR OR DEFECTIVE VERBS.

ws
=
~

 

 

 

 

 

 

a D .

a

z e a &

S & PRESENT a §

FUTURE, & a ImPeRrectT SUBJUNCTIVE| 2 A
a Fs SUBJUNCTIVE 5 2

z & TERMINATION m 8

°° a ‘ a

daré daria dé diera diese diere
dards darfas da des dieras dieses dieres
dard darfa dé diera diese diere
daremos darfamos demos diéramos diésemos diéremos
daréis darfais dad deis dierais dieseis diereis
dardn darian den dieran diesen dieren
diré dirfa diga dijera dijese dijere
dirds dirfas di digas dijeras dijeses dijeres
diré dirfa diga dijera dijese dijere
diremos dirfamos digamos dijéramos —dijésemos dijéremios
diréis dirfais decid digdis dijerais dijeseis dijereis
diréo dirfan digan dijeran dijesen dijeren

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 
842 ALPHABETICAL TABLE OF THE PRINCIPAL

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

P. ‘ECT
RESENT Givtuy. Past Present | IMPERF: Paerenie
INFINITIVE, PaRTicrPLe.| INDICATIVE.| INDICATIVE.
Desavenir, 3. See
to disagree. Venir.
Descender, 2. See
to descend. Atender,
Descollar, 1. See
to exceed, Acordar.
Descordar, 1. See
to uncord an in-| Acordar,
strument.
Descomedirse, 3.) See
to be rude, Pedir.
Describir, 3. descrito | Regular in
to describe. all the oth-
er tenses.
Desflocar, 1. See
to remove flakes. Acordar,
Deshacer, 2. See
to undo. Hacer.
Deshelar, 1. See
to thaw. Acrecentar.
Desleir, 3. See
to dilute. Refr.
Desolar, 1. See
to desolate. Acordar.
Desollar, 1. See
to flay. Acordar.
Desovar, 1. See
to spawn. Acordar.
Despedir, 3. See
to dismiss, Pedir.
Despernar, 1. See
to break or cut off | Acrecentar,
one’s legs.
Despertar, 1. See
to awake, Acrecentar,
Desterrar, 1. See
to banish. Acrecentar.

 

 
YRREGULAR OR DEFECTIVE VERBS.

343

 

Forure.

Con.
DITIONAL

IMPERATIVE.

PRESENT
SUBJUNCTIVE

IMPERFECT SUBJUNCTIVE.
‘ TERMINATION

 

Futons
SuBJUNCTIVE

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 
344 ALPHABETICAL TABLE OF THE PRINCIPAL

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

a
a
PRESENT es PRESENT | IMPERFECT
GeRuND. 2 2 PRETERIT.
INFINITIVE. aw 8 InpIcaTIVZ.| INDICATIVE,
a
Desplegar, 1. See
to unfold. Acrecentar.
Desvergonzarse, | See
2, to actimpudently.| Acordar.
Dezmar, 1. See
to tithe. Acrecentar.
Diferir, 3. See
to delay. Asentir.
Digerir, 3. See |
to digest. Asentir.
Discernir, 3. See |
to discern. Asentir.
Discordar, 1. See
to disagree. Acordar.
Disolver, 2. See
to dissolve. Mover.
Divertir, 3. See
to amuse. Asentir.
Doler, 2. See
to ache. Mover.
Dormir, 3. durmiendo | dormido duermo dormfia dormi
to sleep. duermes dormias dormiste
duerme dormfa durmié
dormimos | dormfamos | dormimos
dorm{fs dormfais dormisteis
duermen dormfian durmieron
Elegir, 3. See
to elect. Pedir.
Embestir, 3. See
to attack, to assail. Pedir.
Empedrar, 1. See
to pave. Acrecentar.
Empezar, 1. See
to begin. Acrecentar.
Emporcar, 1. See
to soil. Acordar.

 

 

 
IRREGULAR OR DEFECTIVE VERBS.

345

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

z F

Zz S

° 5 PRESENT Future
Future, & e IweeRrect ScBsuNCTIVE.

a &  [SuBsuNcTIvE SUBJUNCTIVE.

2 3 TERMINATION

1 °o

ii) _ . ~
dormiré dormirfa duerma durm-iera -iese durmiere
dormirds dormirfas |duerme | duermas durm-ieras -ieses durmieres
dormird dormiria duerma durm-iera -iese durmiere
dormiremos | dormiamos durmamos } durm-iéramos -iésemos |durmiéremos
dormiréis dormfais |dormid | durmdis durm-ierais -ieseis |durmiereis
dormiran dormfan duerman durm-ieran -iesen durmieren

 

 

 
346 ALPHABETICAL TABLE OF THE PRINCIPAL

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

5
PRESENT & B PRESENT | IMPERFECT
GERUND. S 2 PRETERIT.
INFINITIVE. e & [Inprcative.| INDICATIVE.
a
Encender, 2. See
to light. Atender.
Encensar, 1. See
to perfume (with in-] Acrecentar.
cense).
Encerrar, 1. See
to shut in, to inclose.| Acrecentar.
Encomendar, 1. | See
to recommend. Acrecentar.
Encontrar, 1. See
to meet. Acordar.
Encordar, 1. See
to put strings and| Acordar.
cords (to an in-
strument).
Engreirso, 3. See
to adorn one’s self. Reir.
Engrosar, 1. See
to fatten, Acordar.
Enmendar, 1. See
to correct. Acrecentar.
Enrodar, 1. See
tobreakon thewheel.| Acordar.
Ensangrentar, 1.| See
to stain with blood. | Acrecentar.
Entender, 2. See
to understand. Atender.
Enterrar, 1. See
to bury. Acrecentar.
Envestir, 3. See
to invest. Pedir.
Erguir, 3. irguiendo erguido yergo ergufa erguf
to hold up the head. yergues ergufas erguiste
yergue ergufa irguié
erguimos ergufamos | erguimos
erguis ergufais erguisteis
yerguen erguian irguieron

 

 

 
IRREGULAR OR DEFECTIVE VERBS.

347

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

a .

z E

S & PRESENT Fourore
Fururx. EB 4 IMPERFECT SUBJUNCTIVE.

a s |SUBJUNCTIVE’ SUBJUNCTIVE

& 5 TERMINATION

5 a .
erguiré erguirfa yerga irgu-iera -iese irguiere
erguirds erguirfas | yergue| yergas irgu-ieras -ieses irguieres

t erguird erguirfa yerga irgu-iera -iese irguiere

erguiremos | ergurfamos irgamos irgu-iéramos -iésemos irguiéremos
erguiréis | ergurfais | erguid | irgdis irgu-ierais -ieseis | irguiereis
erguirdn ergurfan yergan irgu-ieran -iesen irguieren

 
348 ALPHABETICAL TABLE OF THE PRINCIPAL

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

to govern.

 

 

 

 

é
a
PRESENT ae & Present | IMPERFECT
GeRUND, 36°8 PRETERIT.
INFINITIVE. f& & | Inpicattive.} INDICATIVE.
<
Aa
Errar, 1, errando errado yerro erraba erré
to err. yerras errabas erraste
yerra erraba errd
erramos erraébamos| erramos
erréis errabais errasteis
yerran erraban errarou
Escarmentar, 1. | See
to correct. Acrecentar.
Escocer, 2. See
to irritate, Cocer,
Escribir, 3. Regularinall] escrito
to write. the other
. tenses.
Esforzar, 1. See
to strengthen. Acordar.
Estar, 1.
to be.
(See Auxiliary Verbs,
p- 152).
Exeluir, 3. See
to exclude. Instruir,
Estrefiir, 3. See
to bind. Pedir.
Extender, 2. See
to extend. Atender.
Expedir, 3. See
to expedite. Pedir.
Forzar, 1. See
to force. Acordar.
Fregar, 1. See
to cleanse. Acrecentar.
Freir, 3. See frito
to fry. Refr. frefdo
Gemir, 3. See
to groan. Pedir.
Gobernar, 1. See
Acrecentar.

 

 

 
IRREGULAR OR DEFECTIVE VERBS.

349

 

 

: S a PRESENT Furury

Furure. S a IMPERFECT SUBJUNCTIVE.

a = [SussuncTivr, SUBJUNCTIVE

Zz TERMINATION

° a

° m .
erraré errarfa 5 yerre errara errase errare
erraras errarfas yerra yerres erraras errases errares
errard errarfa yerre errara errase errare
erraremos | errariamos erremos erréramos errasemos | errdremos
erraréis errarfais errad erréis errarais erraseis errareis
errarén errarian yerren erraran errasen erraren

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 
350 ALPHABETICAL TABLE OF THE PRINCIPAL

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

ai
a
PRESENT ae of Present | IMPERFECT
GERUND. 2 2 PRETERIT.
INFINITIVE. a & InDICATIVE.| INDICATIVE.
a
Haber, 2.
to have.
(See Auxiliary Verbs,
p. 136.)
Hacer, 2. haciendo hecho hago hacfa hice
to make, to do. haces hacfas hiciste
hace _ hacfa hizo"
hacemos hacfamos hicimos
hacéis hacfais hicisteis
hacen hacfan hicieron
Heder, 2. See
to stink, Atender.
Helar, 1. See
to freeze. Acrecentar,
Henchir, 3. See
to stuff. Pedir.
Hender, 2. See
to split, Atender.
Heiir, 3. See
to knead, Pedir.
Herir, 3. See
to wound. Asentir.
Herrar, 1. See
to shoe. Acrecentar.
Hervir, 3. See
to boil. Asentir.
Holgar, 1. See
to rest. Acordar,
Hollar, 1, See
to depress. Acordar,
Impedir, 3. See
to impede. Pedir.
Imprimir, 3. See impreso |Regularinall
to print. Instruir. | irr, part. | the other
tenses,
Incensar, 1. See
to incense. Acrecentar.
‘

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 
IRREGULAR OR DEFECTIVE VERBS.

351

 

 

 

2 [8

z _

2 & PRESENT Furune
Futur. & a Impenrect SUBJUNCTIVE.

a fa |SUBJUNCTIVE SuBsuNCTIVE

z s TERMINATION

oO = ‘
haré harfa haga hiciera hiciese hiciere
hardés harfas haz hagas hicieras hicieses hicieres'
hard harfa haga hiciera hiciese hiciere
haremos harfamos hagamos | hiciéramos hiciésemos | hiciéremos
haréis harfais baced | hagdis hicierais _hicieseis. hiciereis
haran harfan hagan hicieran _hiciesen hicieren

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 
352 ALPHABETICAL

TABLE OF THE PRINCIPAL

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

a
2
PRESENT gs & Paysent | IMPERFECT
Grrunp. 40S PReTesit.
INFINITIVE. & 8 |Inpicative.| LNpicaTivE.
a
Incluir, 3. See
to include. Instruir.
Indacir, 3. See
to induce. Conducir.
Inferir, 3. See
to infer. Asentir,
Tnquirir, 3. See
to inquire. Adquirir.
Instruir, 3. instruyendo | instruido | instruyo | instrufa instrof
to instruct. instruyes | mnstrufas instruiste
instruye instrufa instruyé
instruimos | instrufamos | instruimos
mstrufs instrufais | instruisteis
instruyen | instrufan instruyeron
Introducir, 3. See
to introduce. Conducir.
Invernar, 1. See
to winter. Acrecentar.
Invertir, 3. See
to invert. Asentir,
Investir, 3. See
to invest. Pedir.
Ingerir, 3. See
to intermeddle. Asentir.
Ir, 3. yendo ido voy tba ful
to go. vas ibas fuiste
va iba fué
vamos fbamos fuimos
vais ibais fuisteis
van iban fueron
Jugar, L jugando jugado juego jugaba jugué
to play. juegas jugabas jugaste
juega yugaba jugd
Jugamos jugdébamos | jugamos
jugais jugabais | jugasteis
Juegan jugaban jugaron
Llover, 2. See
to rain, Mover.

 

 
IRREGULAR OR DEFECTIVE VERBS.

353

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

4 2 Py

z E e 2

3 a e B Future

Furuse. & Ps 2 % |IMPERFECT SUBJUNCTIVE.

a a a Pe SuBJUNCTIVE.

az B AR TERMINATION

o a D>

oO Ll n le
instruiré instruiria instruya instru-yera -yese _finstruyere
instruirés finstruirfas instruyejinstruyas _|instru-yeras -yeses jinstruyeres
instruird, instruiria instruya instru-yera ~yese instruyere
instruiremo [instruiriamos instruyamoslinstru-yéramos -yésemos|instruyéremos
instruiréis |instruiriais jinstruid|jinstraydis |instru-yerais -yeseis |instruyereis
instruirdn finstruirian instruyan  |instru-yeran -yesen {instruyeren
iré irfa vaya fuera fuese fuere
irds irfas ve vayas fueras fueses fueres
ird irfa vaya fuera fuese fuere
iremos irfamos |vayamos fuéramos fuésemos |fuéremos
iréis irfais id vaydis fuerais fueseis _jfuereis
iran irfan vayan fueran fuesen fueren
jugaré jugarfa jjuege jugara jugase jugare
jugards jugarfas juega |juegues jugaras jugases = |jugares
jugara jugarfa juege jugura jugase jugare
jugaremos = |jugarfamos jjuguemos |jugdramos jugdsemos|jug4remos
jugaréis jugarfais jugad = |juguéis jugarais jugaseis |jugareis
jugarén jugarfan jueguen jugarap jugasen jjugaren

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 
354 ALPHABETICAL TABLE OF THE PRINCIPAL

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

7]
a
PRESENT e & Present | IMPERFECT
GrRunD. <8 PRETERIT.
INFINITIVE. 4 f= | LNDIcaTIve.| INDICATIVE.
a
Maldecir, 3. See
to detract. Bendecir.
Manifestar, 1. See
to manifest. Acrecentar.
Mantener, 2. See
to support. Tener.
Medir, 1. See
to measure. Pedir.
Mentar, 1. See
to mention. Acrecentar.
Mentir, 3. See
to lie. Asentir.
Merendar, 1. See
to take a collation, | Acrecentar.
Moler, 1. See
to grind, Mover.
Morder, 3. See
to bite. Mover.
Morir, 3. muriendo | muerto | muero morfa mori
to die, mueres morfas moriste
muere morfa murié
morimos morfamos morimos
morfs morfais moristeis
mueren morfan murieron
Mostrar, 1. See
to show. Acordar,
Mover, 2. moviendo movido | muevo movfa movi
to move. mueves movfas moviste
mueve movia movid
movemos moviamos | movimos
I movéis movfais movisteis
muever wovfan movieron
Negar, 1. See
to deny. Acrecentar,
Nevar, 1. See
$0 snow. Acrecentar,

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 
IRREGULAR OR DEFECTIVE VERBS.

855

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

‘ 3 r

o B PRESENT Futurs

Forunrg. g 3 ImpeRryct SUBJUNCTIVE.

a f = |SUBJUNCTIVE) SuBJUNCTIVE.

z | TERMINATION

5 a .
moriré morirfa muera mur-iera -iese muriere
morirds morirfas muere| mueras mur-ieras ~ieses murieres
moriré morirfa muera mur-iera -iese muriere
moriremos | morirfamos muramos mur-iéramos -iésemos | muriéremos
moriréis morirfais | morid | murdis mur-ierais -ieseis muriereis
morirén morirfan mueran mur-ieran -iesen murieren
moveré moverfa mueva mov-iera -iese moviere
moverds moverfas | muevej muevas mov-ieras -ieses movieres
moverd moverfa mueva mov-iera -iese moviere
moveremes | moverfamos movamos mov-iéramos -iésemos | moviéremos
movereis moverfais | moved| movdis mov-ierais -ieseis moviereis
moverdn moverfan muevan mov-ieran -iesen movieren

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 
 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

356 ALPHABETICAL TABLE OF THE PRINCIPAL
‘ 1
3 é
PRESENT ew & | Presenr | Iupxrrectr
Gerunno. | 2 2 PRETERIT,
INFINITIVE, A & |Inpicarive.| INDICATIVE.
&
Of, 3. oyendo ofdo oigo ofa of
to hear. oyes ofas oiste
oye ofa oyd
ofmos ofamos ofmos
ofs ofais ofsteis
oyen ofan oyeron
Oler, 2. oliendo olido huelo olfa olf
to smell. hueles olfas oliste
huele olfa olid
olemos olfamos olimos
oléis olfais olisteis
buelen olfan olieron
Pedir, 3. pidiendo pedido | pido pedfa pedi i
to ask for. pides pedfas pediste
pide pedfa pidid
pedimos pediamos pedimos
pedis pedfais pedisteis
piden pedian pidieron
Pensar, 1. See
to think. Acrecentar.
Perder, 2. See
to lose. Atender.
Pervertir, 3. See
to pervert. Asentir.
Placer, 2. place placta plugo 6 placid
imp., to please.
Plegar, 1. See
to plait or fold. Acrecentar.
Poblar, 1. See
to people. Acordar.

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 
IRREGULAR OR DEFECTIVE VERBS.

857

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

a <i

z E

S & PRESENT Foruns
Furure. E a IMPERFECT SUBJUNCTIVE,

a @  |SUBJUNCTIVE SeeRineriOn SUBJUNCTIVE

3° a

oO —
oiré oirfa oiga oyera oyese oyere
oirds oirfas oye oigas oyeras oyeses oyeres
oir oirfa oiga oyera oyese oyere
oiremos irfamos oigamos oyéramos oyésemos | oyéremos
oiréis oirfais ofd oigdis oyerais oyeseis oyereis
oirén oirfan oigan oyeran oyesen oyeren
oleré olerfa huela oliera oliese oliere
olerds olerfas huele huelas olieras olieses olieres
oleré olerfa huela oliera oliese oliere
oleremos | olerfamos olamos oliéramog  oliésemos | oliéremos
oleréis olerfais oled oldis olierais olieseis oliereis
oleran olerfan huelan olieran oliesen olieren
pediré pedirfa pida pidiera pidiese pidiere
pediras pedirfas pide pidas pidieras pidieses pidieres
pedira pedirfa pida pidiera pidiese pidiere
pediremos | pedirfamos pidamos pidiéramos pidiésemos | pidiéremos
pediréis pedirfais pedid | piddis pidierais _pidieseis pidiereis
pediran pedirfan pidan pidieran pidiesen pidieren
placeré, placerfa plegue| plega pluguiera pluguiese | pluguiere

plegue placiera Plasiese placiere
plazca

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 
358 ALPHABETICAL TABLE OF THE PRINCIPAL

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

PRESENT e 5 Present | IMPERFECT
GERUND. = & PRETERIT.
INFINITIVE. Ai & | Inpicarive.| INDICATIVE.
a
Poder, 2. pudiendo podido puedo podfa pude
to be able, puedes podfas pudiste
puede podfa pudo
podemos podfamos pudimos
podéis podfais pudisteis
pueden podfan pudieron
Podrir, 3. pudriendo podrido pudro podria podri
to rot. pudres podrfas podriste
pudre podria pudrid
podrimog | podrfamos | podrimos
podris podrfais podristeis
pudren podrfan pudrieron
Poner, 2. poniendo puesto | pongo ponta puse
to put. pones ponfas pusiste
pone ponfa puso
ponemos ponfamos | pusimos
ponéis ponfais pusisteis
ponen ponfan pusieron
Preferir, 3. See
to prefer. Asentir,
Prender, 2. Regular inall} prendido
to take. the other] preso
tenses.
Prescribir, 3. prescrito ee all
z i e other
to prescribe. irr, part. tonass.
Probar, 1, See
to try, Acordar,
Producir, 3. See
to produce, Conducir,
Proferir, 3. See
to proffer. Asentir.
Proseribir, 3. proscrito {Regular in all
to proscribe. irr. part, the other
tenses.
Quebrar, 1. See
to break, Acrecentar.

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 
IRREGULAR OR DEFECTIVE VERBS.

359

 

 

 

 

3 3

5 a PRESENT Future
Forvre. g a IMPERFECT SUBJUNCTIVE.

8 m  |SuByUNcTIVE ee euiavion SUBJUNCTIVE

° a 3

o .
podré podria pueda pudiera pudiese pudiere
podrds podrfas puedas pudieras pudieses pudieres
podré podria pueda pudiera pudiese pudiere
podremos | podrfamos podamos /pudiéramos pudiésemos| pudiéremos
podréis podrfais podais pudierais pudieseis | pudiereis
podrén podrfan puedan pudieran pudiesen | pudieren
podriré podrirfa pudra pudriera pudriese pudriere
podrirds podrirfas | pudre | pudras pudrieras  pudrieses | pudrieres
podrir& podrirfa pudra pudriera pudriese pudriere
podriremos | podrirfamos pudramos |pudriéramos pudriésemos| pudriéremos
podriréis podrirfais | podrid} pudrdis pudrierais pudrieseis | pudriereis
podriran podrirfan pudran pudrieran pudriesen | pudrieren
pondré pondrfa ponga pusiera pusiese pusiere
pondrds pondrfas pon pongas {pusieras pusieses pusieres
pondré pondria ponga pusiera pusiese pusiere
pondremos | pondrfamos pongamos |pusiéramos pusiésemos| pusiéremos
pondréis pondrfais poned | pongdis |pusierais pusieseis | pusiereis
pondrano pondrfan pongan pusieran pusiesen | pusieren

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 
360 ALPHABETICAL TABLE OF THE PRINCIPAL

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

a
|
PRESENT ey PRESENT | IMPERFECT
GeRunp. 238 PRETERIT.
INFINITIVE, a & | InpicaTive.| INDICATIVE.
< :
Aa
Querer, 2. queriendo querido quiero querfa quise
to will, quieres querfas quisiste
quiere queria quiso
queremos | querfamos | quisimos
queréis querfais quisisteis
quieren querfan quisieron
Raer, 2. See
to erase. Caer.
Recomendar, 1. | See
to recommend. Acrecentar.
Recordar, 1. See
to remind, Acordar,
Recostar, 1. See
to recline. Acordar.
Reducir, 3. See
to reduce. Conducir.
Referir, 3. See
to refer. Asentir.
Regar, 1. See
to water, Acrecentar.
Regir, 3. See
to rule. Pedir.
Regoldar, 1. See
to belch. Acordar,
Reir, 3. riendo Tefdo rfo refa ref
to laugh, ries refas reiste
rie Tefa tid
refmos Tefamos refmos
refs refais Tefsteis
Yfen Tefan rieron
Remendar, 1. See
to mend. Acrecentar.
Rendir, 3. See
to surrender. Pedir,
Renovar, 1. See
to renew. Acordar,

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 
IRREGULAR OR DEFECTIVE VERBS.

361

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

2 it

S & PRESENT Furure
Future. & a IMPERFECT SUBJUNCTIVE. |

a ss |SUBJUNCTIVE! SUBJUNCTIVE

z a TERMINATION

3 a 1 9

oO ~ # 2.
querré querria quiera quisiera quisiese quisiere
querr&s querrias quiere | quieras quisieras = quisieses quisieres
querr& querrfa quiera quisiera quisiese quisiere
querremos | querrfamos queramos | quisiéramos quisiésemos | quisiéremos
querréis querrfais { quered| querdis quisierais quisieseis quisiereis
querr4n queitian quieran quisieran quisiesen quisieren

—

reiré reirfa ria Tiera Tiese riere
reiras reirfas rfe rfas Tieras Tieses rieres
reiré Teirfa tia riera Tiese Tiere
Teiremos reirfamos riamos riéramos riésemos | riéremos
Teiréis reirfais refd Tiais rierais Ticseis riereis
reirén reirfan rfan Tieran Tiesen rieren

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 
3862 ALPHABETICAL TABLE OF THE PRINGIPAL

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

PRESENT Past Present | Imprerecr
GEEUND. PRETERIT.
INFINITIVE. ParriciP.E.| Inpicative,| INDICATIVE.
Reiir, 3. See
to wrangle, Pedir.
Repetir, 3. See
to repeat. Pedir.
Requebrar, 1. See
to court. Acrecentar,
Requerir, 3. See
to notify. Asentir,
Rescontrar, 1. See
to compensate. Acordar.
Resollar, 1. See
to respire, Acordar.
Reventar, 1. See
to burst. Acrecentar.
Revolear, 1. See
to wallow. Acordar.
Rodar, 1. See
to roll, Acordar.
ete
Boer, 2. See
to gnaw, Caer.
Rogar, 1. See i
to entreat, Acordar.
Romper, 2. Regularinall] rompido :
to | the other! jot
. tenses.
Saber, 2. sabiendo sabido 86 sabfa supe
to know. sabes sabfas supis‘o
sabe sabfa supo
sabemos sabfamos supimos
sabéis sabfais supisteis
saben sabfan supieron
Salir, 3. saliendo salido salgo salfa sali ai
to go out. sales salfas saliste
sale salfa salid
salimos salfamos salimos
salis salfais salisteis
salen salfan salieron
Satisfacer, 2. See But coe
to satisfy. Hacer. tor the

 

 

 
IRREGULAR OR DEFECTIVE VERBS.

363

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

Present | lurrerecr Sussunc- | Furuns
Forure. ae ~ Sus- TIVE. Sus-
DITIONAL, | PEBATIVE.| sy Nopryg, ‘ TERMINATION é junc:
sabré sabria sepa supiera supiese supiere
sabr4s sabrias sabe sepas supieras supieses supieres
sabra. sabria sepa suplera suplese supiere
sabremos | sabriamos sepamos | supiéramos supiésemos | supiéramos
sabréis sabriais sabed sepdis supierais = supieseis supiereis
sabran sabrian sepan supleran suplesen supieren
saldré saldrfa salga saliera saliese saliere
saldrds saldrfas sal salgas | salieras salieses salieres
saldr& saldrfa salga saliera saliese saliere
saldremos | saldrfamos salgamos saliéramos saliésemos saliéremos
saldréis saldrfais salid salgdis | salierais salieseis saliereis
saldran saldrfan salgan salieran saliesen salieren
satisface or
satisfaz (2d
pers. sing.)

 

 

 

 

 

 

 
364 ALPHABETICAL TABLE OF THE PRINCIPAL

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

PRESENT Past Present | IMPERFECT
= GrRuND. PRETERIT,
INFINITIVE. PARTICIPLE.} INDICATIVE.| INDICATIVE.
Segar, 1. See
to reap. Acrecentar.
Seguir, 3. See
to follow. Pedir.
Sembrar, 1. See
fo sow. Acrecentar.
Sentar, 1. See
to become. Acrecentar.
Sentir, 3 See
to feel. Asontir.
Ser, 2.
to be.
(See Auxiliary Verbs,
p. 136.)
Servir, 3. See
to serve. Pedir.
Serrar, 1. See
to saw. Acrecentar.
Soldar, 1. See
to solder. Acordar.
Soler, 2. suelo solfa
to be accustomed, sueles solfas
suele solfa
solemos solfamos
soléis solfais
suclen solian
Solver, 2. See suelto
to loosen. Mover, irr. part,
Soltar, 1. See suelto
to loosen. Acordar, irr, part.
Sonar, 1. See
to sound. Acordar.
Sofiar, 1. See
to dream. Acordar.
Sosegar, 1. See
to appease. Acrecentar.
Soterrar, 1. See
to bury. Acrecentar.
Sugerir, 3. See

 

 

 

 

 

 

to suggest. Asentir.

 

 
IRREGULAR OR DEFECTIVE VERBS. 365

 

Con- Present | lwperrect SUBJUNCTIVE.| Future
Future. IMPERATIVE.

DITIONAL Susyuncrive| 1 TERMINATION SuBsUNcTIVe

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

suela
suelas
suela
solamos
soldis
suelan

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 
366 ALPHABETICAL TABLE OF THE PRINCIPAL

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

to stumble.

 

 

 

 

 

 

PRESENT Past PRESENT | IMPERFECT
GERUND. PRETERIT.
INFINITIVE. PagticrPye.| InpIcativz.| INDICATIVE,
Temblar, 1. See
to tremble. Acrecentar.
Tender, 2. See
to expand. Atender,
Tener, 2.
to have.
(See Auxiliary Verbs,
p- 139.)
Tefiir, 3. See
to dye. Pedir.
Tentar, 1. See
to touch, Acrecentar.
Torcer, 2. See
to twist. Cocer.
Tostar, 1. See
to toast. Acordar.
Traducir, 3. See
to translate. Conducir.
Traer, 2. trayendo traido traigo trafa traje
to bring. traes trafas trajiste
trae trafa trajo
traemos trafamos trajimos
traéis traiais trajisteis
traen trafan trajeron
Trascender, 2. | See
to transcend. Atender.
Trascordarse, 1.| See
to forget. Acordar,
Trasegar, 1. See
to upset. Acrecentar,
Tronar, 1. See
to thunder. Acordar.
Tropezar, 1. See
Acrecentar.

 

 
IRREGULAR OR DEFECTIVE VERBS.

50T

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

2 [4

z

2 a PRESENT Forurs
Forurs. & 3 Impenrect SuBsUNCTIVE.

4a 2 |SUBJUNCTIVE! SuBJUNCTIVE|

& 3 TERMINATION

o = . 2.
traeré traerfa traiga trajera trajese trajere
traer&s traerfas trae traigas trajeras trajeses trajeres
traeré traerfa traiga trajera trajese trajere
traeremos | traerfamos traigamos | trajéramos trajésemos | trajéremos
traeréis traerfais traed| tragdis trajerais _trajeseis trajereis
traeran traerfan traigan trajeran trajesen trajeren

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 
368 ALPHABETICAL TABLE OF THE PRINCIPAL

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

a
w
PRESENT aw PREseNnT | IMPERFECT
GeRunD. aS PRETERIT.
INFINITIVE, Ae &  lInprcarive.| INpicative,
a
Valer, 2. valiendo valido valgo valfa vali
to be worth, vales valias valiste
vale valia valid
valemos valfamos valimos
valéis valfais valisteis
valen valfan valieron
Venir, 3. viniendo venido vengo venfa vine
to coms. vienes venfas veniste
viene venfa vino
venimos venfamos venimos
venfis venfais venisteis
vienen venfan vinierou
Ver, 2. viendo visto veo vefa vi
to see. ves velas viste
ve vefa vib
vemos vefamos vimos
veis vefais visteis
ven velan vieron
Verter, 2. See
to spill. Atender.
Vestir, 3. See
to dress. Pedir.
Volcar, 1. See
to overset. Acordar.
Volar, 1. See
to fly. Acordar.
Volver, 2. Regularinall) vuelto
to return. the other
tenses.
Yacer, 2.
to lie down.
(See Defective Verbs,
p. 320.)
Zaherir, 3. See
to censure. Asentir.

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 
IRREGULAR OR DEFECTIVE VERBS.

369

 

 

 

 

 

q 2i

z =

S e PRESENT Fururs
Furuse. & a IMPERFECT SUBJUNCTIVE.

a sa |SUBJUNCTIVE) SuBJUNCTIVE|

3 g TERMINATION

oD — .
valdré valdrfa valga valiera valiese valiere
valdras valdrfas vale valgas valieras valieses valieres
valdra, valdrfa yalga valiera valiese valiere
valdremos | valdrfamos valgamos | valiéramos valiésemos| valiéremos
valdréis valdrfais valed valgdis valierais valieseis valiereis
valdrén valdrian valgan valieran yaliesen valieren
vendré vendria venga viniera viniese viniere
vendras vendrias ven vengas vinieras vinieses vinleres
yendré vendria venga viniera ~iniese viniere
vendremos| vendrfamos vengamos | viniéramos viniésemos| ‘!"eremos
vendréis véndriais venid | vengdis vinierais vinieseis vinierels
vendran vendrian vengan vinieran viniesen vinieren
veré verfa vea viera viese viere
verds verfas ve veas vieras vieses vieres
vera verfa vea viera viese viere
veremos verfamos veamos viéramos viésemos viéremos
veréis verfais ved vedis vierais viescis viereis
veran verfan vean vieran viesen vieren

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

24
FORMACION DB LA LRNGUA
CASTBLLANA.

La lengua castellana consta de
palabras fenicias, griegas, gdticas,
arabes, y de otras lenguas de las
naciones que por dominacién 6 por
comercio habitaron 6 frecuentaron
estas partes. Pero principalmente
abunda de palabras latinas enteras
6 adulteradas.

Los Romanosestuvieron en Espafia
600 afios 4 lo menos, aunque no se
cuenten, sino desde el de 216 antes
de Cristo en que vinieron la primera
vez con ejército, hasta el 416 después
de Cristo en que fué la entrada de
los Godos ; y si esta cuenta se hace
hasta el afio 623 de Cristo, en que
los Romanos acabaron de perder lo
que tenian en Espafia, saldra que
estuvieron mas de 800 aiios.

En este tiempo introdujeron aqui
su lengua vulgar, que era la latina,
como lo hicieron en todas las demas
provincias que conquistaron.

Con la decadencia del imperio ro-
mano y venida de los Godos se fué
adulterando la lengua latina 6 ro-
mana porque como los vencidos
necesitaban acomodarse 4 la lengua
de los vencedores, y estos deseaban
y procuraban aprender la de los
vencidos, contribuyeron unos y
otros 4 estragar la lengua latina.

Los Godos hallaron dificultad en
la declinacién de los nombres latinos,

370

FORMATION OF THE SPANISH
LANGUAGE.

The Castilian (Spanish) language
is composed of words derived from
the Phenician, Greek, Gothic, and
Arabic, and also from the languages
of other nations which inhabited or
visited Spain, intent on conquest or
commerce. It abounds principally,
however, in Latin words, either pure
or adulterated.

The Romans occupied Spain for
at least 600 years, if we date their
occupation from the year 216 B.c.,
when their first army appeared there,
until 416 a.D., when the Goths in-
vaded the country. But if we ex-
tend our calculation to the year
623 a.D., when the Romans finally
lost what they still possessed in
Spain, the time of their occupation
exceeds 800 years.

They introduced their language in
the country, namely, the Latin lan-
guage, as they did in all the other
provinces which they conquered.

The Latin or Roman language be-
came adulterated at the fall of the
Roman empire and at the time of the
invasion of the Goths, as the con-
quered nation had to adapt itself to
the language of the conquerors, while
the latter desired and endeavored to
learn the language of the conquered.
These reasons contributed to the al-
teration of the Latin language.

The Goths found difficulty in the
declension of the Latin nouns, and
FORMATION OF THE SPANISH LANGUAGE.

y la dejaron enteramente, supliendo
los casos con preposiciones. En los
verbos siguieron en parte las conju-
gaciones latinas, pero dejaron del
todo la voz pasiva, y usaron para
suplirla, de los participios pasivos
con el verbo sustantivo ser.

Esta lengua latina, asi adulterada,
se empezdé 4 llamar romance por su
derivacién de la romana 6 latina,
para distinguirla de la gética.

Con la irrupcién de los Arabes en
el afio 714 padecié también alteracién
el romance ; pero como los Espaiioles
empezaron desde luego 4 sacudir el
nuevo yugo, 4 proporcidn de las
ventajas que iban consiguiendo, iba
también la lengua cobrando fuerza
y cultura.

El rey Don Alfonso el Sabio mandé
que cesase el uso de escribir en latin
los privilegios, donaciones reales y
escrituras publicas. Entre varias
obras que compuso, 6 hizo componer
en romance, merece singular aprecio
y elogio la de las Leyes de las Parti-
das, en la cual la lengua ostentd
toda la riqueza y majestad que habia
adquirido hasta entonces, y en que
llevé grandes ventajas, no sdlo 4
otras obras anteriores y contempora-
neas, sino aun 4 muchas posteriores.

Siguieron su ejemplo D. Juan
Manuel, hijo del infante D. Manuel,
y el rey D. Alfonso XI. EI pri-
mero compuso el libro del Conde
Lnucanor, el segundo el de monterta,
ambas dignamente estimados.

Escribiéronse también los Créni-
cas del Santo Rey Don Fernando, de

371

abandoned it, supplying the cases
with prepositions. They partly fol-
lowed the Latin conjugations of the
verbs, but entirely rejected the pas-
sive voice, which they replaced by
passive participles accompanied by
the substantive verb ser.

The Latin language, thus adulter-
ated, began then to be called the
Romance, from its derivation from
the Roman, and in order to dis-
tinguish it from the Gothic.

The Romance underwent some
alteration after the irruption of the
Arabs in the year 714, but as the
Spaniards soon began to shake off
the new yoke, their language ac-
quired strength and culture, the
latter keeping pace with the advan-
tages obtained in warfare.

King Don Alfonso the Wise or-
dered that the Latin language
should not be used any longer for
charters, royal grants, and public
deeds. Among different works
which he composed himself or
superintended in the Romance lan-
guage, special mention and praise is
due to the Laws of Castile, in which
the richness and majesty which the
language had acquired are shown to
greater advantage than in any pre-
vious or contemporaneous, or even
in many subsequent works.

D. Juan Manuel, son of the infante
D. Manuel, and king D. Alfonso XI.
followed his example. The former
wrote a work called Count Lucanor,
and the latter a treatise on Hunting;
both works are greatly esteemed.

At that time were also written the
Chronicles of the Holy King D. Fer-
372

Don Alfonso et Sabio,de Don Sancho
IV., de Don Fernando IV., y de
Don Alfonso XI.

Pedro Lopez de Ayala, ya con
estilo mas adornado, escribid las
Crénicas del rey Don Pedro, de
Don Enrique II., y de Don Juan I.
Alvar Garcia de Santa Maria, y Fer-
nan Pérez de Guzman, compusieron
la de Don Juan If. Juan de Mena,
la obra de las Trescientas, y la
Coronacién. El Bachiller Fernan
Gomez de Ciudad Real, el Centén
epistolario, que contiene unas ad-
mirables cartas sobre los principales
sucesos del reinado de D. Juan IJ.
D. Alonso Tostado, Obispo de Avila,
publicé varias obras en castellano ;
Hernando del Pulgar, su célebre
Cronica de los reyes catdlicos, y algo
mas adelante, el doctor Francisco
de Villalobos, en sus Problemas, y
otros tratados que compuso en ro-
mance, did & conocer la gravia y
primor de que la lengua castellana
es capaz.

La publicacién de estas y otras
obras semejantes, y la particular
atencién con que se dedicaron 4
cultivar la lengua castellana muchos
escritores insignes que han florecido
desde el reinado de los Reyes Caté-
licos, la fueron puliendo y perfec-
cionando, hasta ponerla en el estado
en que hoy se halla.

FORMATION OF THE SPANISH LANGUAGE.

nando, of D. Alfonso the Wise, of D.
Sancho IV., of D. Fernando IV.,
and of D. Alfonso XT.

Pedro Lopez de Ayala, in a more
ornate style, wrote the Chronicles of
king D. Pedro, of D. Enrique II,
and of D. Juan I. Alvar Garcia de
Santa Maria and Fernan Pérez de
Guzman composed the Chronicles of
D. Juan II.; Juan de Mena, a
work on the Three Hundred and
on The Coronation. Fernan Gomez
de Ciudad Real wrote the Epistole
Cento, which contains admirable let-
ters on the principal events of the
reign of D. Juan II. D. Alonzo
Tostado, Bishop of Avila, published
several works in the Castilian lan-
guage; also Hernando del Pulgar
his celebrated Chronicle of the
Catholic Monarchs, and somewhat
later, Dr. Francisco de Villalobos,
in his Problems and other treatises
which he composed in the Romance
language, showed the grace and ele-
gance of which the Castilian lan-
guage is susceptible.

The publication of these and
other works, and the special atten-
tion paid to the cultivation of the
Castilian language by many eminent
writers who have flourished since
the reigns of the Catholic Monarchs,
have polished and perfected the
language to the point at which it
has arrived in our day.
GENERAL VOCABULARY.

INCLUDING ALL THE WORDS CONTAINED IN THE PRECEDING VOCABULARIES.

I. Spanish-English.

A.

abajo, downstairs.
abanico, m. fan.
abierto, opened.
abogado, m. lawyer.
aborrecer, 2. to hate.
abrir, 3. to open.
abundante, abundant.
A caballo, on horsebach..
acabar, 1. to finish.
Acasa, to the house, home.
acaso, perhaps.
accidente, m. accident.
acci6n, f. action.
aceite, m. oil.
aceptable, acceptable.

acerearse, 1. to ap-
proach.
acompaiiar, 1. fo accom-
- pany.

aconsejar, 1. to advise.

acontecer, 2. to happen.

acordarse, 1. to remem-
Der.

acostarse, 1. togotobed.

acostumbrado, accus-
tomed.

acostumbrar, 1. to ac-
custom.

 

A crédito, on credit.

acusar, 1. to accuse.
adelantar, 1. to be fast.
adherir, 3. to adhere.
adiés, good-by.
admitido, admitted.
afable, affable.
afeitar, 1. to shave.
afuera, out, without.
agradable, agreeable.
agradecido, thankful.
agrio, sour.
agua, f. water.
aguardar, 1. to expect, to
wait.
ahora, now.
ah{, there.
aire, m, air.
alabanza, f. praise.
alabar, 1. io praise.
albafiil, m. mason.
al contrario, on the con-
trary.
aldea, f. village.
alegrarse, 1. to rejoice.
alegre, lively.
alejarse, 1. to leave.
Alemén, m. German.
Alemania, f. Germany.
algo, something, any-
thing, rather.
algod6n, m. cotton.

373

 

alguien, somebody, any-
body.

alguna parte,
where, anywhere.

algunas veces, some-
times.

alguno, some, any, some
one, any one, somebody,
anybody,

allf, there.

almacén, m. store.

almirante, m. admiral.

almorzar, 1. to break-
SJast.

almuerzo, ni. breakfast.

alojamiento, m. /odg-
ing.

alo menos, at least.

al punto que, as soon
as.

alquilar, 1. to /et.

alto, high, tall, loud.

amado, loved.

amar, 1. to love.

amargo, bitter.

&ama V.? do you love.

Amenos que, unless.

4 menudo, often.

Americano, in. Ameri-
can.

amigo, m. friend.

some-
374

amistad, f. friendship.
amistoso, friendly.
amo, J love.
amo, m. master.
amor, m. love.
andar, 1. to walk.
animal, m. animal,
anoche, last night.
ansioso, eager.
antes de, before.
anunciar, 1. to
nounce.
afiadir, 3. to add.
afio, m. year.
apartar, 1. to remove.
apelar, 1. to appeal.
apenas, hardly,
sooner.
A pie, on foot.
apoderarse, 1. to take
possession.
apostar, 1. to bet.
aprender, 1. to learn.
aprendido, learned.
aprobar, 1. to approve.
aquello, that, that thing.
aqui, here.
aqui tiene V., here is.
Arabe, m. Arab.
Arbol, m. tree.
arce, m. maple.
armario, m. closet.
articulo, m. article.
arreglar, 1. to arrange.
arrepentirse, 3. to re-
pent.
arriba, upstairs.
arruinar, 1. to ruin.
asegurar, 1. to assure.
asi, thus, so, therefore.
asi que, so that, as soon
as.
asolar, 1. to devastate.
asunto, m. matter, busi-
ness.

an-

no

atacar, 1. to attack.
atenci6n, f. attention.
atento, attentive.
atrasar, 1. to delay.
atravesar, 1. to cross
over.
aun, even, yet.
aunque, although.
ausente, absent.
autor, m. author.
autorizar, 1. to author-
ize.
autorizaci6n, f. author-
ization,
avaro, Mm. miser.
aventura, f. adventure.
ayer, yesterday.
ayudar, 1. to help.
azticar, m. sugar.
azul, blue.

B.

bagatela, f. trifle.
bailar, 1. to dance.
baile, m. ball.
bailo, Z dance.
bajar, 1. to come down.
bajo, low, under.
banco, m. bank.
banquero, m. banker.
bafiarse, 1. to bathe.
barato, cheap.
barco, m. vessel.
bastante, enough.
bastén, m. walkingstick,
cane.
bastonazo, m.
(with a stick).
batalla, f. battle.
batil, m. trunk.
bebo, ZI drink.
bendecir, 3. to bless.

blow

GENERAL VOCABULARY.

benéfico, benevolent.
piblioteca, f. library
bien, good, well.
billar, m. billiards.
blanco, white.
boca, f. mouth.
bocoy, m. hogshead.
bodega, f. cellar.
pollo, m. cake.
bondad, f. kindness.
bonito, pretty.
bordado, trimmed.
borracho, intoxicated.
bosque, m. wood.
bota, f. boot.
botella, f. bottle.
boticario, m. druggist.
botén, m. button.
buenas noches, good
night.
bueno, good, well.
buenos dias, good morn-
ing, good day.
buey, m. oz.
buque, m. ship, vessel.
burlarse, 1. to laugh at.
buscar, 1. to look for.

Cc.

caballerfa, f. cavalry.

caballeriza, f. stable.

caballero, m. gentle-
man.

caballo, m. horse.

eada, each.

cadena, f. chain.

caer, 2. to fall.

caerse, 2. to full.

café, m. coffee.

caja, f. safe, bor.

caj6n, m. drawer.

cealentar, 1. to warm.

 

 

beneficio, m. benefit.

caliente, warm.
eallado, silent.
calle, f. street.
callejuela, f. lane.
cama, f. bed.
cambiar, 1. to exchange.
camino, m. road.
camisa, f. shirt.
campo, m. country.
canci6én, f. song.
cansado, tired.
canta, sings.

cantar, 1. to sing.
cantatriz, f. singer.
canto, m. singing.
cafia, f. cane.

caoba, f. mahogany.
capital, f. capital.
capitan m. captain.
capitulo, m. chapter.
cara, f. face.
carbén, m. coal.
carcel, f. prison.
caridad, f. charity.
Carlos, Charles.

* carne, f. meat.
carne (f.) de vaca, f.

beef:
carnicero, m. butcher.
carpintero, m. car-
penter.
cartero, m. postman.
caro, dear.

Carolina, Caroline.
carta, f. letter.
carreta, f. cart.
casa, f. house.
casaca, f. coat.
cagar, 1. to marry.
casarse, 1. to marry.
castigar, 1. to punish.
causa, f. cause, case.
cazador, m. hunter.
célebre, celebrated.
cena, f. supper.
censurar, 1. to censure.

SPANISH—ENGLISH.

centavo, m. cent.
cerca, near.
cerca de, nearly.
cereza, f. cherry.
cerveza, f. beer.
cerrado, closed, shut.
cerrar, 1. to shut.
César, Cesar.
ciego, blind.
cielo, m. heaven.
ciencia, science.
cierto, certain.
ciudad, f. city.
claro, clear.
clase, f. class.
clavel, m. pink.
clima, m. climate.
cocina, f. kitchen.
cocinera, f. cook.
cocinero, m. cook.
coche, m. coach.
codicioso, greedy.
cojear, 1. to limp, to
balance.
colegio, m. college.
célera, m. cholera.
colmar, 1. to overwhelm.
colocacién, f. situation.
Colén, Columbus.
colorado, red.
comedia, f. comedy.
comedido, polite.
comedor, m. dining-
room,
comemos, we dine.
4come V.? do you dine?
comer, 2. to dine, to eat.
comerciante, m. mer-
chant.
comido, eaten.
comida, f.eating,dinner.
como, since, about.
cémo, how.
compafiero,

m. com-

 

panion.

375

comparecer, 2. to ap-
pear.

complacer, 2. to please.

componer, 2. to com-
pose.

comportamiento, m.
behavior.

comportarse, 1. to be-
have.

comprado, bought.

&compra V.? do you
buy ?

comprender, 2. to un-
derstand.

compro, J buy.

comuin, ordinary, low.

con, with.

concepto, m. opinion.

concierto, m. concert,

conciso, concise.

concluir, 3. to conclude,
to finish.

concluirse, 3. to end.

conde, m. count.

condenar, 1. to con-
demn.

condesa, f. countess.

condiscipulo, m. fél-
low-scholar.

conducir, 3. to conduct,
to take.

conducta, f. conduct.

confesar, 1. to confess.

conforme, conformably.

congreso, m. congress.

conjuraci6n, f. con-
spiracy.

conmigo, with me.

conocer, 2. to know.

4conoce V.? do you
know? are you ac-
quainted with ?

conocido, m. acquaint-
ance.

 

conocido, known.
2

376

conozco, J know, I am
acquainted with.

conseguir, 3. to obtain.

consejo, m. advice.

consistir, 3. to consist.

consolar, 1. to console,
to comfort.

construir, 3.
‘struct, to build.

consultado, consulted.

consultar, 1. to consult.

con tal que, provided.

contar, 1. to count.

contener, 2. to contain.

contento, pleased, sat-
isfied.

contestar, 1. to answer.

contiene, contains.

continuar, 1. to con-
tinue.

contornos, m. pl. the
suburbs.

contrario, contrary.

convencer, 2. to con-
vince.

convenir, 3. to be proper.

conversar, 1. to con-
verse.

convidar, 1. to invite.

copiar, 1. to copy.

coronel, m. colonel.

cortado, cut.

cortaplumas, m. pen-
knife.

cortar, 1. to cut.

cortés, polite.

corto, short.

correo, m. post, mail,
postoffice.

correr, 2. to run.

cosa, f. thing, matter of
importance.

costa, f. expense.

costar, 1. to cost.

costumbre, f. manner.

to con-

 

creador, m. creator.
crédito, m. credit.
creer, 2. to believe.
creo, I believe.
criada, f. servantgirl.
criado, m. servant.
crimen, m. crime.
cruel, cruel.

cruz, f. cross.
cuaderno, m. copybook.
cuadro, m. picture.
cuando, when.
cuanto, as much.
cuanto, how much.
cuarto, m. room.
cuatro, four.
cuenta, f. account.
cuento, m. tale.
cuchillo, m. knife.
culpado, guilty.

CH.

chaleco, m. vest.

champafia, f.
pagne.

chiquito, little.

cham-

D.

da, gives.

dado, given.

danza, f. dance.

dar, 1. to give.

dar (1.) un paseo, to
take a walk.

de, of.

debo, I owe.

debe, owes.

deber, 2. to owe, must.

débil, weak.

decidir, 3. to decide.

decir, 3. to tell, to say.

 

GENERAL VOCABULARY.

dedicar, 1. to devote.
dedo, m. finger.
de este modo, in this
way.
defender, 2. to defend.
dejar, 1. to leave.
delante, before.
demasiado, oo,
much, too many.
déme V., give me.
demolido, pulled down,
dentro de, within.
dependiente,»m. clerk.
éde quién? whose?
derecho, right.
de repente, suddenly.
derribar, 1. to upset.
derrotar, 1. to defeat.
descansar, 1. to rest.
descascarar, 1. to peel.
desconfiar, 1. to dis-
trust.
descubrir, 3. to dis-
cover.
desde, since, from.
desde que, since.
desea, wishes.
deseamos, we wish.
desear, 1. to desire.

too

desgracia, f.  r2sfor-
tune.
desgraciado, unfortu-
nate.

desmayarse, 1. to faint.

desobedecer, 2. to dis-
obey.

desobediente, disobe-
dient.

despacio, slowly.

despertarse, 1.
awake.

despreciado, despised.

después, afterwards,
then, after.

después de, after.

to
después que, after.
destruir, 3. to destroy.
desuso, m. desuetude.
deuda, f. debt.
dé V., give.
devolver, 2. to return,
give back.
dia, m. day.
dia festivo, holiday.
dibujar, 1. to draw.
dibujo, m. drawing.
dice, says, tells.
dicha, f. duck.
dicho, said.
dichoso, happy.
diente, m. tooth.
diferente, different.
dificil, difficult.
dificultad, f. difficulty.
diga V., say, tell.
digno, worthy.
dinero, m. money.
Dios, m. God.
diputado, m. deputy.
Girigir, 3. to direct.
discipulo, m. pupil,
scholar.
discordia, f. discord.
disponer, 2. to dispose.
dispuesto, disposed.
disputar, 1. to dispute.
distinto, distinct.
divertir, 3. to amuse.
divertirse, 3. to amuse
one’s self.
divinidad, f. divinity.
docena, f. dozen
dolor de cabeza, f.
headache.
donde, where.
dormir, 3. to sleep.
dormirse, 3. to fall
asleep.
dos, two.

 

doy, I give.

SP ANISH—ENGLISH.

dudar, 1 to doubt.
duefio, m. owner.
dulce, sweet.
durado, lasted.
durante, during.
duro, dollar.

BE.

echar 4 pique, to foun-
der.

'{echarse, 1. to begin.

edad, f. age.

Eduardo, Edward.

ejemplo, example.

ejército, m. army.

él, he.

elegancia, f. elegance.

eligir, 3. to elect.

ella, she.

ello, tt.

embajador, m. ambas-
sador.

embarcar, 1. to engage.

emperador, m.emperor.

emplear, 1. to employ.

empleo, m. employment,
situation.

en, in.

encargar, 1. to charge.

en casa, at home (at the
house of).

encender, 2. to light.

encendido, red.

encerrar, 1. to lock up.

encontrar, 1, to find, to
meet.

encontraré, will find.

enfadado, angry.

enfadarse, 1. to get
angry.

enemigo, m. enemy.

enfermo, m. patient.

enfermo, ill, sick.

 

377

engafiar, 1. to deceive.

enorme, enormous.

Enrique, Henry.

enriquecer, 2. to enrich.

en seguida, immedi-
ately.

ensefia, teaches.

entender, 2. to under-
stand.

enterrar, 1. to bury.

entrar, 1. to enter.

entre, between.

entregar, 1. to hand.

enviado, serit.

enviar, 1. to send.

equivocaci6n, f. mis-
take.

equivocarse, 1. to make
a mistake.

era, was.

es, is.

escapar, 1. to escape.

Escipi6n, Scipio.

escoger, 2. to select.

escribe, writes.

éescribe V.? do you
write 2

escribir, 3. to write.

escribo, I write.

escritura, f. writing.

escrito, written.

esctitorio, m. office.

escuadra, f. squadron.

escuchar, 1. to listen to.

escuela, f. school.

ese, that.

Espaiia, f. Spain.

Espafiol, Spanish,
Spaniard.

especie, f. species.

especulaci6n, f. specu-
lation.

espejo, m. mirror.

esperar, 1. to expect, to
wait, to hope.
378

esperanza, f. hope.
estaci6n, f. season.
establecer, 2. to estab-
lish.
estado, m. state, condi-
tion.
estar, 1. to be.
estatua, f. statue.
este, this.
estrangero,m. stranger.
estrella, f. star.
estudiado, studied.
estudiamos, we study.
estudiante, m. student.
gestudian VV.? do
you study.
estudiar, 1. to study.
estudio, m. study.
estudioso, studious.
eterno, eternal.
Europa, Europe.
examinar, 1. to exam-
ine.
exceder, 2. to exceed.
excepto, except.
excusar, 1. to excuse.
exento, exempted.
experiencia, f. experi-
ence.
explicar, 1. to explain.
extinguidor, m. eztin-
guisher.

P.

fabricante, m. manu-
facturer.

fabricar, 1. to manufac-
ture.

facil, easy.

faltar, 1. to fail.

familia, f. family.

favor, m. favor.

 

favorable, favorable.

favorecer, 2. to favor.

fe, f. faith.

Felipe, Philip.

feliz, happy.

femenil, effeminate.

feo, ugly, homely.

Fernando, Ferdinand.

ferrocarril, m.  rail-
road.

fiebre, f. fever.

fiel, faithful.

fiesta, f. feast, holy day.

filial, filial.

fin, m. end.

flor, f. flower.

fonda, f. hotel.

formalizarse, 1. to get
vered.

formar, 1. to form.

fortaleza, f. fortress.

fortuna, f. fortune.

Francés, m. French-
man.

Francia, f. France.

fresa, f. strawberry.

fresco, cool.

frio, cold.

friolera, f. trifle.

fruta, f. fruit.

fuego, m. fire.

fuerte, strong.

fuerza, f. strength.

funcién, f. ceremony.

fusil, m. gun.

fusilar, to shoot.

G.

Galileo, Galileo.
gallina, f. fowl, chicken.
gana, earns.

ganar, 1. to earn.

gas, m. gas.

gasta, spends,

 

GENERAL VOCABULARY.

gastar, 1. to spend.

gasto, m. expense.

generalmente, gener-
ally.

generoso, generous.

gente, f. people.

gloriosamente, glori-
ously.

gobernar, 1. to manage,
to govern.

gobierno, m. govern-
ment.

gota, i. drop.

gracias, thank you.

grande, m. grandee.

grandeza, f. greatness,

Griego, Greek.
gritar, 1. to cry, to
scream.

grito, m. outcry.
groseria, rudeness.
guante, m. glove.
guardar, 1. to keep.
guerra, f. war.
Guillermo, William.
dle gusta A V.? do you
like 2
me gusta, I like, I am
fond of.

gusto, m. pleasure.

H.

habil, skillful.
habitante, m.
tant.
habituarse, 1. to accus-
tom one’s self.
habla, speaks.
hablado, spoken.
hablan, they speak.
éhabla V.? do you
éhablan VV.? Leet
hablo, I speak.

inhabi-
hacer, 2. to make, to
do.

éhace V.? do you do.

hacienda, f. estate.

hallado, found.

hallar, 1. to find.

haragan, lazy.

hasta, till, until, as far
as.

hasta que, uniil.

hay, there is.

hecho, done.

helar, 1. to freeze.

heredar, 1. to inherit.

heredero, m. heir.

herido, wounded.

hermana, f. sister.

hermano, m. brother,

hermoso, handsome,
Jine.

héroe, m. hero.

hierro, m. iron.

hija, f. daughter.

hijo, m. son.

hinchado, swollen.

historia, f. history.

hombre, m. man.

honrado, honest.

hora, f. hour, time.

hormiga, f. ant.

hotel, m. hotel.

hoy, to-day.

huevo, m. egg.

humanidad, f. human-
ity.

htimedo, damp.

huracan, m. hurricane.

I.

idioma, m. language.
iglesia, f. church.

ignorancia, f. igno-

 

rance.

SP ANISH—ENGLISH.

ignorante, ignorant.
impaciente, impatient.
importante, important.
imposible, impossible.
imprenta, f. press, im-
print,
incapaz, incapable.
incendio, m. conflagra-
tion.

indiferente, indiffer-
ent.

indigno, unworthy.

indomable, indomi-
table.

inducir, 3. to induce.

industrioso, industri-
ous.

infeliz, unhappy.
ingenio, m. genius.
Inglaterra, England.
Inglés, m. Englishman.
inmévil, immovable.
inocencia, f. innocence.
inocente, innocent.
insolencia, f. insolence.
instante, m. instant.
instruir, 3. to instruct.
instrumento, m. instru-
ment.
inteligente, intelligent.
intenci6n, f. intention.
interesante,  interest-
ing.
interesar, 1. to interest.
interesarse, 1. to take
interest.
inttil, useless.
invierno, m. winter.
invitacion, f. invitation,
invocar, 1. to invoke.
ir, 3. to go.
irse, 3. to go away.
Isabel, Isabella.
isla, f. island.

 

Italia, f. Italy.

ow
to

J.

jactarse, 1, to boast.
jamas, ever, never.
jam6n, m. ham.
jardin, m. garden.
jardinero, m. gardener.
joven, young.
joyero, m. jeweler.
Juan, John.

jugar, 1. to play.
Julio, Julius.
Junio, m. June.
junto, together.
juventud, f. youth.
juzgar, 1. to judge.

L.

labrador, m. farmer.

lado, m. side.

ladrén, m. thief.

l4grima, f. tear,

lampara, f. lamp.

largo, long.

Latin, Latin.

lavandera, f. washer-
woman.

lapiz, m. pencil.

lavar, 1. to wash.

lecci6n, f. lesson.

leche, f. milk.

leer, 2. to read.

legua, f. league.

legumbre, f. vegetable.

leido, read.

lejos, far.

lengua, f. language.

lefia, f. wood.

le6dn, m. lion.

levantarse, 1. to rise.

ley, f. law.

liberal, liberal.
380

liberalidad, f. liberal-
ity.

libertad, f. liberty.

libra, f. pound.

libro, m. book

licencia, f. license.

licenciar, 1. to disband.

ligero, quick.

limonada, f. lemonade.

limpio, clean,

lista, f. list.

listo, ready.

loco, insane.

lodo, m. mud.

Londres, London.

luego que, as soon as.

lugar, m. place, spot.

Luisa, Louisa.

luna, f. moon.

luz, f. light.

LL.

llamar, 1. to call.
lamarse, 1. to be called.
llave, f. key.

llega, arrives.

llegar, 1. to arrive.
llegado, arrived.
lleno, full.

llevar, 1. to take.

llora, weeps.

llorar, 1. to cry, lo weep.
llover, 2. to rain,
lluvia, f. rain.

M.

madre, f. mother.
madrina, f. godmother.
maduro, ripe.
maestro, m. teacher.
magnifico, splendid.

 

malo, bad, ill, unwell.

mandar, 1. to send, to
order.

mande V., send.

mano, f. hand.

mantener, 2. to support.

manzana, f. apple.

mafiana, f. morning.

mafiana, to-morrow.

marcha, f. march.

marchar, 1. to go, to
march.

marcharse, 1. to depart.

marido, m. husband.

marinero, m. sailor.

mas, more.

mascara, f. mask.

matar, 1. to kill.

maxima, f. maxim.

la mayor parte, the
most.

media, f. stocking.

médico, m. physician.

medio, m. means, way.

medir, 3. to measure.

memoria, f. memory.

menester, necessary.

mentira, f. falsehood.

mercader, m. merchant.

mercancias, f. pl.
goods.

merecer, 2. to deserve.

mérito, m. merit.

mes, m. month.

mesa, f. table.

mi, my.

militar, military.

milla, f. mile.

mina, mine.

minuto, m. minute.

mirar, 1. to look at.

miseria, f. misery.

mismo, same, very, self.

mitad, f. half.

modo, m. way.

 

GENERAL VOCABULARY.

molestar, 1. to trouble,
momento, m. moment.
montar, 1. to mount.
monte, m. mountain.
monumento, m. monu-
ment.
morder, 2. to bite,
morir. 3. to die.
Moro, m. Moor.
mostrar, 1. to show,
motivo, m. motive.
mover, 2. to move, to
turn.
movimiento, m. move-
ment.
muchacha, f. giv.
muchacho, m. boy.
muchas gracias, / (or
we) thank you.
mucho, mucha, much.
muchos, muchas,
many.
mucho tiempo, long
time.
muerte, f. death.
muerto, died.
mujer, f. woman, wife.
mundo, m. world.
mufieca, f. doll.
muri6, died.
muro, m. wail.
musica, f. musie.
muy, very.

N.

nacer, 2. to be born.

naci6n, f. nation.

nada, nothing, ..0t any-
thing.

nadie, nobody, not any-
body, no one.

naranja, f. orange.

natural, natural.
navegacién, f. naviga-
tion,

necesidad, f. necessity.

necesita, needs.

gnecesita V.? do you
need ?

necesitar, 1. to need.

necesito, / need.

neceSario, necessury.

negocio, m. business.

negro, black.

ni, neither, nor.

nieve, f. snow.

ninguno, not any, none,
no.

nifio, m. child.

no, no.

noche, f. night.

no...mas, no...more.

nombre, m. nume.

norte, m. north.

nosotros, we, us.

noticia, f. news.

novela, f. novel.

nuevo, new.

nuez, f. nut.

numero, m. number.

nunca, never.

oO.

obedecer, 2. to obey.
obediente, obedient.
objeto, m. object.
obligar, 1. to oblige, to
compel.
obra, f. work.
obrar, 1. to act.
obrero, m. workman.
obtener, 2. to obtain.
ocasi6én, f. occasion.
ociosidad, f. idleness.
ocupado, busy.
ocupar, 1. to occupy.

SPANISH—ENGLISH.

odiar, 1. to hate.
ofender, 2. to offend.
oficial, m. officer.
ofrecer, 2. to offer.
ofr, 3. to hear.
j ojala ! would to God.
ojo, m. eye.
olor, m. smell.
olvidar, 1. to forget.
onza, f. ounce.
opinién, f. opinion.
orgulloso, proud.
oro, m. gold.
osar, 1. to dare.
oscuro, dark.
oso, m. bear.
otra cosa,
else.
otro, other, another.

something

P.

paciencia, f. patience.
padecer, 2. to suffer.
padre, m. father.
padres, m. pl. purents.
padrino, m. godfather.
pagar, 1. to pay.
pagina, f. page.
pais, m. country.
pajaro, m. bird.
palabra, f. word.
palacio, m. palace.
pan, m. bread.
panadero, m. baker.
pafio, m. cloth.
pafiuelo, m. handker-
chief.
papel, m. paper.
paquete, m. package.
para, for.
parado, standing.
paraguas, m. umbrella.
pararse, 1. to stand.

 

 

381

parecen, seem.
parque, m. park.
parte, f. part.
partir, 3. to leave.
pasado, past, last.
pasado mafiana, the
day after to-morrow.
pasar, 1. to pass.
pasearse, 1. to take a
walk.
paseo, m. walk.
paternal, paternal.
patio, m. yard.
patria, f. country.
pavo, m. turkey.
paz, f. peace.
pedazo, m. piece.
pedir, 3. to ask for.
Pedro, Peter.
pegar, 1. to strike.
pelea, f. ight.
pelear, 1. to fight.
peligroso, dangerous.
pelo, m. hair.
penoso, hard, painful.
pensar, 1. to think, to
peor, worse. [intend.
pequefio, small, little.
pera, f. pear.
perder, 2. to lose.
pérdida, f. loss.
perdido, lost.
perdonar, 1. to forgive.
periddico, m._ news-
paper.
permitir, 3. to allow.
pero, but.
persona, f. person,
pertenece, belongs.
perro, m. dog.
pesar, m. grief.
pescuezo, m. neck.
picaro, m, rogue.
pide, asks for.
pie, m. foot.
382

4 piensa V.? do you in-
tend?

pierna, f. leg.

pieza, f. piece.

pintar, 1. to depict.

pintura, f. painting.

pio, pious.

pizarra, f. slate.

planta, f. plant.

plata, f. silver.

pleito, m. lawsuit.

p:omo, m. lead.

poblar, 1. to people.

pobre, poor.

poco, adv. little.

pocos, few.

poder, m. power.

poderoso, powerful.

podrir, 3. to rot.

pollo, m. chicken.

Pompeyo, Pompey.

ponerse, 2. to put on.

populacho, m. mob.

por, through, by.

por cierto, certainly.

por desgracia, unfortu-
nately.

porfiado, obstinate.

por mas...que, how-
ever.

por precisi6én, by neces-
sity.

porque, because.

& porqué ? why?

por supuesto, ofcourse.

posada, f. inn.

posesio6n, f. possession.

posible, possible.

posteridad, posterity.

pozo, m. well.

practicar, 1. to practise.

precepto, m. precept.

precio, m. price.

preciso, necessary.

 

preferir, 3. to prefer.

pregunta, f. question.
preguntar, 1. to inquire,
to ask.
preparar, 1. to prepare.
prerogativa, f. preroga-
tive.
prescribir, 3.
scribe.
presentar, 1. to present,
to introduce.
prestar, 1. to lend.
presumido, conceited.
pretender, 2. to pretend.
prima, f. cousin.
primavera, f. spring.
primero, /irst.
primo, m. cousin.
principe, m. prince.
principiante, m. begin-
ner.
principio, m. principle.
prisionero, m. prisoner.
privilegio, m. privilege.
probable, probable.
probablemente, prob-
ably.
probar, 1. to prove.
procesi6n, f. proces-
sion.
profesor, m. professor.
profundo, deep.
prometer, 2. to promise.
pronto, soon, quickly.
pronunciar, 1. to pro-
nounce.
propenso, inclined.
propicio, propitious.
propiedad, f. property.
proponer, 2. to propose.
provenir, 3. to come
Jrom (to originate), to
result.
prdéximo, next.
prueba, f. proof.

to pre-

 

& puede V.? can you?

GENERAL VOCABULARY.

puedo, J can.
ptiblico, public.
pueblo, m. town, village,
puente, m. bridge.
puerta, f. door.
puerto, m. port.
pues, as, well, for.
puesto, put.
pulpero, m. grocer.
pufialada, f. stab (with
a poniard).

2.

que, that, which,

qué, which, what.

qué, how.

quedarse, 1. to remain.

quejarse, 1. to com-
plain.

quemar, 1. to burn.

querer, 2. to grant.

queso, m. cheese.

quien, who, whom.

quiere, wishes.

équiere V.? will you
have? do you wish?

quieren, wish.

quiero, Z wish, I will
have.

quieto, quiet.

quitarse, 1. to take off:

quitasol, m. sunshade.

R.

raro, rare,

ratén, m. mouse.

raz6n, f. reason.

recibido, received.

recibir, 3. to receive.

recomendar 1. to ree
ommend.
recompensa, f, recom-
pense.

reconocer, 2. to know.

referir, 3. to relate.

refresco, m._ refresh-
ment.
regimiento, m. regi-
ment,

reina, f. queen.

reinar, 1. to reign.

reino, m. kingdom.

refr, 3. to laugh.

rendirse, 3. to surren-
der,

reo, m. culprit.

reparar, 1. to compen-
sate.

repetir, 3. to repeat.

representar, 1. to play.

reprimir, 3. to repress.

residir, 3. to reside.

resolver, 2. to resolve.

respetar, 1. to respect.

responder, 2. to answer.

restablecer, 2. to reés-
tablish.

retrato, m. picture.

rey, m. king.

ricach6n, m. a very rich
man.

rico, rich.

rie, laughs.

rienda, f. bridle.

rinc6n, m. corner.

rio, m. river.

robar, 1. to steal.

Romano, m. Roman.

Rémulo, Romulus.

ropa, f. clothes.

rosa, f. rose.

rubio, fair, blond.

ruido, m. noise.

ruina, f. ruin.

Rusia, Russia.

Ruso, Russian.

SPANISH—ENGLISH.

sabana, f. sheet.

sabe, knows.

gsabe V.?
know ?

sabiamente, wisely.

sabio, wise.

sable, m. saber.

sacar, 1. to draw.

saco, m. bag.

sagrado, sacred.

sale, goes out, comes out,
leaves.

ésale V.? do you go
out ?

salida, f. exit.

salir, 3. to leave, to go
out.

salir de, to leave.

saltar, 1. to jump.

salubre, healthy.

sastre, m. tailor.

satisfecho, satisfied.

sé, I know.

seda, f. silk.

en seguida,
ately.

seguir, 3. to continue, to
follow.

segtin, according to.

seguro, sure.

semana, f. week.

la semana que viene,
next week.

sembrar, 1. to sow.

sentado, seated.

sentar, 1. to become.

sentarse, 1. to sit down.

sentencia, f. mazim,
judgment.

sentir, 3. to feel, to
regret,

do

you

immedi-

 

sefias, f. pl. direction.

 

388

sefior, sir, Mr.

sefiora, madam, Mrs.

ser, to be.

servicio, m. service.

servido, served.

si, if.

si, yes.

siempre, always.

lo siento, J am sorry
for it.

siguen, follow.

silla, f. chair, saddle.

sin, without.

sin embargo, however.

singular, singular.

sino, but.

soberbio, haughty.

sobre, on, upon, about.

sobretodo, m. overcoat.

sociedad, f. society.

SOCOTITO, mM. assistance.

sol, m. sun.

solamente, only.

soler, 2. to be in the
habit.

solo, alone.

s6lo, only.

sombrerero, m. natter.

sombrero, m. hat.

someter, 2. to subdue.

son, are.

soffar, 1. to dream.

sopa, f. soup.

sordo, deaf.

sorprendido, surprised.

su, his, her.

sublevar, 1. to revolt.

sucio, dirty.

suefio, m. dream.

suerte, f. fate.

sufocar, 1. to suffocate.

suministrar, 1. to of
fer.

stiplica, f. entreaty.

suplicar, 1. to entreat.
384

suponer, 2. to suppose.

supremo, supreme.

suspender, 2. to sus-
pend.

Tf.

tal, such as.

talento, m. talent.

tal vez, perhaps.

también, too, also.

tampoco, not either,
neither.

tan, so.

tan pronto como, as
soon as.

tarde, f. afternoon.

tarde, late.

Tartaria, f. Tartary.

té, m. tea.

teatro, m. theater.

Telémaco, Telemachus.

temblar, 1. to tremble.

temer, 2. to fear.

temor, m. fear.

temprano, early.

tener, 2. to hold, to have.

teologal, theological.

teérico, theoretical.

terremoto, earthquake.

tia, f. aunt.

tio, m. uncle.

tiempo, m. time.

en tiempo pasado, for-
merly.

tienda, f. shop,

tiene, has.

tienen, have.

tierra, f. earth.

tigre, m. tiger.

tijeras, f. pl. scissors.

timido, timid.

tintero, m. inkstand.

tocar, 1. to play on.

 

todavia, yet.

todo, all, everything.

todo el mundo, every-
body.

tomar, 1. to take.

tomo, m. volume.

tonto, foolish, silly.

torre, f. tower.

trabaja, works.

trabajar, 1. to work.

trabajo, m. work.

traducci6n, f. trans/a-
tion.

traducir, 3. to translate.

traer, 2. to bring.

traido, brought.

traiga V., bring.

traje, m. dress.

trasparente, transpar-
ent.

tratar, 1. to treat.

tres, three.

trineo, m. sleigh.

tripulacién, f. crew.

triste, sad.

trueno, m. thunder.

turbulento, boisterous.

U.

Ultimo, last.

unos pocos, a few.
ufia, f. nail.
urbanidad, f. urbanity.
Usted, you (sing.).
Ustedes, you (pl.).
Util, useful.

Vv.
V., see Usted.

va, goes.
vaca, f. cow.

 

GENERAL VOCABULARY.

vacio, empty.
valiente, brave.
valer, 2. to be worth,
valor, m. courage.
vapor, m._ steam,
steamer,
vara, f. yard.
varios, as, several.
vaso, m. glass (to drink
in).
éva V.? are you go
ing ?
Vd., see Usted.
Vds., see Ustedes.
ve, sees.
vencer, 2. to conquer.
vende, sells.
vender, 2. to sell.
évende V.? do you
sell 2
vendido, sold.
vendo, J sell.
veneno, m. poison.
veo, I see.
venir, 3. to come.
ventajoso, profitable.
ventana, f. window.
ver, 2. to see.
verdad, f. truth.
verde, green.
Verso, m. verse.
vestido, m. dress.
vestidos, m. pl. clothes
vestir, 3. to dress.
vestirse, 3. to dress.
&ve V.? do you see?
vez, f. time.
viajar, 1. to travel.
viaje, m. journey.
victoria, f. victory.
vida, f. life.
vidrio, m. glass.
viejo, old.
viene, comes.
viento, m. wind.
SPANISH-ENGLISH. 385

vigilante, watchful. volver A hacer, 2. to} ya no, no longer.
vino, m. wine. do again. yerba, f. grass.
virtud, f. virtue. voy, I am going. yo, I.

visitar, 1. to visit vuelva V., return.

visto, seen. VV., see Ustedes.

vive, lives. Zz.

vivir, 3. to live. Y.

volar, 1. to fly. zapatero, m. shoe
volver, 2. to turn, to re-| y, and. maker.

turn. ya, already. zapato, m. shoe.
386

GENERAL VOCABULARY.

If. English-Spanish.

A.

absent, ausente.

about, sobre, como.

abundant, abundante.

acceptable, aceptable.

accident, accidente, m.

to accompany, acom-
paiar, 1.

according to, segin.

account, cuenta, f.

to accuse, acusar, 1.

to accustom, acostum-
brar, 1.

accustomed, acostum-
brado, 1.

to accustom one’s
self, habituarse, 1.

acquaintance, conoci-
do, mm.

are you acquainted

with ? conoce V.?
am acquainted

with, conozco.

to act, obrar, 1.

action, accion, f.

to add, afiadir, 3.

to adhere, adherir, 3.

admiral, almirante, m.

admitted, admitido.

adventure, aventura, f.

advice, consejo, m.

to advise, aconsejar, 1.

affable, afable.

after, despues, después
de, después que.

I

 

afternoon, tarde, f.

afterward, despues.

afterwards, después.

age, edad, f.

agreeable, agradable.

air, aire, m.

all, todo.

to allow, permitir, 3.

alone, solo.

already, ya.

also, también.

although, aunque.

always, siempre.

ambassador, embaja-
dor, m.

American, Americano,
m.

to amuse, divertir, 3.

to amuse one’s self,
divertirse, 3.

and, y, é

angry, enfadado.

animal, animal, m.

to announce, anunciar,
1.

another, otro.

to answer, contestar, 1.
responder, 2.

ant, hormiga, f.

any, alguno.

anybody, alguien, ai-
guno.

any one, alguno.

anything, algo.

anvwhere, alguna
parte.

to appeal, apelar, 1.

to appear, comparecer,

 

apple, manzana, f.

to approach, acercarse,
1

to approve, aprotar,

Arab, Arabe, m.

are, son.

to arrange, arreglar, 1.

army, ejército, m.

to arrive, llegar, 1.

arrived, llegado.

arrives, llega.

article, articulo, m.

as, pues.

as far, hasta.

as far as, hasta.

to ask, preguntar, 1.

to ask for, pedir, 3.

asks for, pide.

assistance, socorro, m.

as 5000 as, tan pronto
como, luego que, ast
que, al punto que.

to assure, asegurar, 1.

at (the house of), en
casa.

at home, en casa.

to attack, atacar, 1.

attention, atencion, f.

attentive, atento.

aunt, tia, f.

author, autor, m.

authorization, autort-
zacton, f.

toauthorize, autorizar,
1.

to awake, despertarse-
1.
bad, malo.

bag, saco, m.

baker, panadero, m.

to balance, pesar, 1.

ball, baile, m.

bank, banco, m.

banker, banquero, my.

bark, barco, m.

to bathe, bafiarse, 1.

battle, batalla, f.

to be, estar, 1. ser, 2.

bear, oso, m.

because, porque.

to become, sentar, 1.

bed, cama, f.

beef, carne (f.) de vaca, f.

beer, cerveza, f.

before, delante, antes de.

to begin, echarse, 1.

beginner, principiante,
m.

to behave, comportarse,
2.

behavior, comporta-
miento, ™m.

to believe, creer, 2.

I believe, creo.

belongs, pertenece.

benefit, beneficio, m.

benevolent, benéfico.

to bet, apostar, 1.

between, entre.

billiard, billar, m.

bird, pdjaro, m.

to bite, morder, 2.

bitter, amargo.

black, negro.

to bless, bendecir, 3.

blind, ciego.

blond, rubio.

blow (with a stick), bas-
tonazo, M.

blue, azul.

 

ENGLISH-SPANISH.

to boast, jactarse, 1.

boisterous, turbulento.

book, /ibro, m.

boot, bota, f.

to be born, nacer, 2.

bottle, botella, f.

bought, comprado.

box, caja, f.

boy, muchacho, m.

brave, valiente.

bread, pan, m.

breakfast, almuerzo, m.

to breakfast, almorzar,
1.

bridge, puente, m.

bridle, rienda, f.

to bring, trae, 2.

bring, traiga V.

brother, hermano, m.

brought, tratdo.

to build, construir, 3.

to burn, quemar, 1.

to bury, enterrar, 1.

business, neyocio, m.
asunto, m.

busy, ocupado.

but, pero, sino.

butcher, carnicero, m.

button, botén, m.

do you buy ? gcompra
V.2

I buy, compro.

by, por.

c.

Caesar, César.

cake, bollo, m.

to call, llamar, 1.

to be called, llamarse,
1,

can you? ¢ puede V.?

I can, puedo.

cane, cana, f. bastén, m.

capital, capital, f.

captain, capitan, m.

 

387

Caroline, Carolina.
carpentex, carpintero,
m.
carriage, coche, m,
cart, carreta, f.
case, causa, f.
catch, prender, 2.
cause, causa, f.
cavalry, caballeréa, f.
celebrated, celebre.
cellar, bodega, f.
to censure, censurar, 1.
cent, centavo, m.
ceremony, funcion, f.
certain, cierto.
certainly, por cierto.
chain, cadena, f.
chair, sila, f.
champagne, champaia,

chapter, capitulo, m.

to charge, encaryar, 1.

charity, caridad, f.

Charles, Carlos.

cheap, barato.

cheese, queso, m.

cherry, cereza, f.

chicken, pollo, m. gal
lina, f.

child, nifio, m.

cholera, colera, m.

church, iglesia, f.

city, ciudad, f.

class, clase, f.

clean, limpio.

clear, claro.

clerk, dependiente, m.

climate, clima, m.

closed, cerrado.

closet, armario, m.

cloth, pajio, m.

clothes, ropa, f. vestidos,
m. pl.

coach, coche, m.

coal, carbén, m.
388

coat, casaca, f.

coffee, café, m.

cold, fréo.

college, colegio, m.

Columbus, Colén.

colonel, coronel, m.

to come, venir, 3.

to come down, bajar,
1

comedy, comedia, f.

to come from, (to ori-
ginate), provenir, 3.

comes, viene.

comes out, sale.

to comfort, consolar, 1.

companion, compajiero,
m.

to compare, comparar,
2.

to compel, obligar, 1.

to compensate, repa-
rar, 1.

to complain, quejarse,
1.

conceited, presumido.

concert, concierto, m.

concise, conciso.

to conclude, concluir,
3.

to condemn, condenar,
1.

condition, estado, m.

conduct, conducta, f.

to conduct, conducir, 3.

to confess, confesar, 1.

conflagration, incen-
dio, m.
conformably,  con-
forme.

congress, congreso, m.

to conquer, vencer, 2.

to consist, consistir, 3.

to console, consolar, 1.

conspiracy, conjura-
ction, f.

 

to construct, construir,
3.

to consult, consultar, 1.

consulted, consultado,

te contain, contener, 2.

contains, contiene.

to continue, seguir, 3.
continuar, 1.

contrary, contrario.

on the contrary, al
contrario.

to converse, conversar,
1.

to convince, convencer,
2.

cook, cocinero, m.

cook, cocinera, f.

cool, fresco.

to copy, copiar, 1.

copybook, cuaderno,
m.

corner, rincén, m.

to cost, costar, 1.

cotton, algodén, m.

count, conde, m.

to count, contar, 1.

countess, condesa, f.

country, patria,
campo, m. pats, m.

courage, valor, m.

of course, por supuesto.

cousin, primo, m.

cousin, prima, f.

cow, vaca, f.

creator, creador, m.

credit, crédito, m.

on credit, d@ crédito.

crew, tripulacién, f.

crime, crimen, m.

cross, cruz, f.

to cross over, atrave-
sar, 1.

cruel, cruel.

to ery, lorar, 1, gritar,
1.

f.

 

GENERAL VOCABULARY.

culprit, reo, m.
to cut, cortar, 1.
cut, cortado.

D.

damp, hiimedo.

to dance, bailar, 1.

I dance, bdailo.

dancing, danza, f.

dangerous, peligroso.

to dare, osar, 1.

dark, oscuro.

daughter, hija, f.

day, dia, m.

the day after to-mor-
row, pasado mafana.

deaf, sordo.

dear, caro.

death, muerte, f.

debt, deuda, f.

to deceive, engajar, 1.

to decide, decidir, 3.

deep, profundo.

to defeat, derrotar, 1.

to defend, defender, 2.

to delay, atrasar, 1.

to depart, marcharse, 1.

to depict, pintar, 1.

deputy, diputado, m.

to deserve, merecer, 2.

to desire, desear, 1.

despised, despreciado.

to destroy, destruir, 3.

desuetude, desuso, m.

to devastate, asolar, 1.

to devote, dedicar, 1.

to die, morir, 3.

died, muri6, muerto.

different, diferente.

difficult, dificil.

difficulty, dificultad, f.

to dine, comer, 2.

do you dine? gcome V.?
we dine, comemos.
dining-room, comedor,

m.

dinner, comida, f.

to direct, dirigir, 3.

direction, sejias, f. pl.

dirty, sucio.

to disband, licenciar,
1.

discord, discordia, f.

to discover, descubrir,
3.

disobedient, desobedi-
ente.

to disobey,
decer, 2.

to dispose, disponer, 2.

disposed, dispuesto.

to dispute, disputur, 1.

distinct, distinto.

to distrust, desconfiar,
1.

divinity, divinidad, f.

to do, hacer, 2.

do you do? ghace V.?

to do again, volver ¢
hacer.

dog, perro, m.

doll, mujieca, f.

dollar, duro, m.

done, hecho.

door, puerta, f.

to doubt, dudar, 1.

downstairs, abajo.

dozen, docena, f.

to draw, sacar, 1. dibu-
jar, 1.

drawer, cajon, m.

drawing, dibujo, m.

dream, suefio, m.

to dream, sofar, 1.

dress, traje, m. vestido,
m.

to dress, vestirse, 3.

I drink, bebo.

desobe-

 

ENGLISH—SP ANISH.

drop, gota, f.
druggist, boticario, m.
during, durante.

EB.

each, cada.

eager, ansioso.

early, temprano.

to earn, ganar, 1.

earns, gana.

earth, tierra, f.

earthquake, terremoto,
m.

easy, facil.

to eat, comer, 2.

eaten, comido.

eating, comida, f.

Edward, Eduardo.

effeminate, femenil.

egg, huevo, m.

elegance, elegancia, f.

to elect, eligir, 3.

emperor, emperador, m.

to employ, emplear, 1.

employment, empleo,
m.

empty, vacio,

end, fin, m.

to end, concluirse, 3.

enemy, enemigo, m.

to engage, embarcar, 1.

England, Inglaterra, f.

Englishman, Ingles, m.

enormous, enorme.

enough, bastante.

to enrich, enriquecer, 2.

to enter, entrar, 1.

to entreat, suplicar, 1.

entreaty, stiplica, f.

to escape, escapar, 1.

to establish, estadlecer,
2.

estate, hacienda, f.

389

eternal, eterno.

Europe, Europa, f.

even, aun.

ever, jamds,

everybody,
mundo,

everything, todo.

example, ejemplo, m.

to examine, exraminar,
1.

to exceed, exceder, 2.

excellent, excelente.

except, excepto.

to exchange, cambiar,
1.

to excuse, excusar, 1.

exempted, ezento.

exit, salida, f.

to expect, esperar, 1.
aguardar, 1.

expense, costa, f. gasto,
m.

experience,
encia, f.

to explain, explicar, 1.

extinguisher, extingui-
dor, m.

eye, ojo, m.

todo el

experi-

F.

face, cara, f.

to fail, faltar, 1.

to faint, desmayarse, 1,

fair, rubio.

faith, fe, f.

faithful, jiel.

to fall, caer, 2. caerse, 2.

to fallasleep, dormirse,
3.

falsehood, mentira, f.

family, familia, f.

fan, abanico, m.

far, lejos.

 

farmer, labrador, m.
390

fast, aprisa.

to be fast, adelantar, 1.
fate, suerte, f.

father, padre, m.
favor, favor, m.

to favor, favorecer, 2.
favorable, favorable.

fear, temor, m.

to fear, temer, 2.

feast, fiesta.

to feel, sentir, 3.

fellow-scholar, condi-
scipulo, m.

Ferdinand, Fernando.

fever, fiebre, f.

few, pocos.

a few, unos pocos.

fight, pelea, f.

to fight, pelear, 1.

filial, filial.

to find, hallar, 1. encon-
trar, 1.

fine, hermoso.

finger, dedo, m.

to finish, concluir, 3.
acabar, 1.

fire, fuego, m.

first, primero.

flower, flor, f.

to fly, volar, 1.

to follow, seguir, 3.

follow, siguen.

Iam fond of, me gusta.

foolish, tonto.

foot, pie, m.

on foot, d pie.

for, para, pues.

to forget, olvidar, 1.

to forgive, perdonar, 1.

to form, formar, 1.

formerly, en tiempo pa-
sado.

fortress, fortaleza, f.

fortune, fortuna, f.

found, hallado.

 

to founder, echar ¢
pique.

four, cuatro.

fowl, gallina, f.

Prance, Francia, f.

to freeze, helar, 1.

Frenchman, Francés,
m.

friend, amigo, m.

friendly, amistoso.

friendship, amistad, f.

fruit, fruta, f.

full, lleno.

G.

Galileo, Galileo.
garden, jardin, m.
gardener, jardinero, m.
gas, gas, m.
generally, generalmente.
generous, generoso.
genius, ingenio, m.
gentleman, caballero,
m.
German, Alemdn, m.
Germany, Alemania, f.
to getangry, enfadarse,
1

to get vexed, formali-
zarse, 1.

girl, muchacha, f.

to give, dar, 1.

I give, doy.

to give back, devolver,
2.

give, dé V.

give me, déme V.

given, dado.

gives, da.

glass, vidrio, m.

glass (to drink in), vaso,
m.

gloriously, gloriosa-
mente.

 

GENERAL VOCABULARY.

glove, guante, m.

to go, ir, 3. marchar, 1,

to go away, irse, 3.

God, Dios, m.

godfather, padrino, m.

godmother, madrina, f,

goes, va,

goes out, sale.

are you going? gvaV.?

I am going, voy.

gold, oro, m.

good, bueno, bien.

goad-by, adids.

good day, buenos dias.

good morning, buenos
dias.

good night, buenas
noches.

goods, mercanctas, f. pl.

to go out, salir, 3.

do you go out? sale
V.2

to go to bed, acostarse,
1.

to govern, gobernar, 1.

government, gobierno,
m.

to grant, querer, 2.

grandee, grande, m.

grass, yerba, f.

greatness, grandeza, f.

greedy, codicioso.

Greek, griego.

green, verde.

grief, pesar, m.

grocer, pulpero, m.

guilty, cu/pado.

gun, fusi/, m.

.

H.

to be in the habit,
soler, 2.
hair, pelo, m.
half, mitad, £

ham, jamon, m.

hand, mano, f,

to hand, entregar, i.

handkerchiet, pajiuelo,
m.

handsome, hermoso.

to happen, acontecer, 2.

happy, dichoso, feliz.

hard, peuoso.

hardly, apenas.

has, tiene.

hat, sombrero, m.

to hate, odiar, 1. abor-
recer, 2.

hatter, sombrerero, m.

haughty, sobderbio.

to have, tener, 2.

have, tienen.

beadache, el dolor de
cabeza.

healthy, salubre.

to hear, ofr, 3.

heaven, cielo, m.

heir, heredero, m.

to help, ayudar, 1.

Henry, Enrique.

her, su.

here, aqut.

here is, aguf tiene V.

hero, Aéroe, m.

high, alto.

his, su.

history, historia, f.

hogshead, bocoy, m.

to hold, tener, 2.

holiday, dia festivo.

holy day, fiesta, f.

home, ¢ casa.

at home, en casa.

homely, feo.

honest, honrado.

hope, esperanza, f.

to hope, esperar, 1.

horse, caballo, m.

 

ENGLISH-SPANISH.

on horseback, d caba-
Uo.

hotel, fonda, f.

hour, hora, f.

house, casa, f.

how, como.

how much, cuanto.

however, por mds...que,
sin embargo.

humanity, humanidad,
f.

hunter, cazador, m.

hurricane, huracdn, m.

husband, marido, m.

L

idleness, ociosidad, f.

if, si.

ignorance, ignorancia,
f.

ignorant, ignorante.

ill, enfermo, malo.

immediately, en segui-
da.

immovable, inmovil.

impatient, :mpaciente.

important, importante.

impossible, imposible.

in, en.

incapable, incapaz.

inclined, propenso.

indifferent, indiferente.
indomitable, indom-
able.

to induce, inducir, 3.

industrious, industri-
oso.

inhabitant, habditante,
m.

to inherit, heredar, 1.

inkstand, tintero, m.

inn, posada, f.

innocence, inocencia, f.

 

innocent, inocente.

391

to inquire, preguntar, 1.

insane, loco.

insolence, znsolencia, f.

instant, instante, m.

to instruct, instruir, 3.

instrument, instrumen-
to, m.

to intend, pensar, 1.

do you intend ? ¢ pien-
sa V.2

intelligent, inteligente.

intention, intencion, f.

interesting, interesante.

in this way, de este
modo.

to interest, znteresar, 1.

intoxicated, borracho.

to introduce, presentar,
1.

invitation, invitacion,
f.

to invite, convidar, 1.

to invoke, invocar, 1.

iron, hiervo, m.

is, es.

Isabella, Isabel.

island, isla, f.

Italy, Ztalia, f.

J.

jeweler, joyero, m.
John, Juan.

journey, viaje, m.
judgment, sentencia, f.
to judge, juzgar, 1.
Julius, Julio.

to jump, saltar, 1.
June, Junio, m.

K.

to keep, guardar, 1.
key, /lave, f.
to kill, matar, 1.
392

kindness, bondad, f.

king, rey, m.

kingdom, reino, m.

kitchen, cocina, f.

knife, cuchillo, m.

to know, conocer, 2. sa-
ber, 2. reconocer, 2.

do you know ? gsabe
V.? gconoce V.?

I know, conozco, yo sé.

known, conocido.

knows, sabe.

L.

lamp, /démpara, f.

language, idioma, m.
lengua, f.

lane, callejuela, f.

last, ultimo, pasado.

lasted, durado.

last night, anoche.

late, tarde.

Latin, Zatin.

to laugh, rer, 3.

to laugh at, burlarse, 1.

laughs, rie.

law, ley, f.

lawsuit, pleito, m.

lawyer, abogado, m.

lazy, haragdn.

lead, plomo, m.

league, legua, f.

to learn, aprender, 2.

learned, aprendido.

at least, d lo menos.

to leave, salir, 3. salir
de, dejar, 1. alejarse,
1. partir, 3.

leaves, sale.

leg, pierna, f.

lemonade, limonada, f.

to lend, prestar, 1.

lesson, leccion, f.

 

to let, alguilar, 1

letter, carta, f.

liberal, liberal.

liberality, liberalidad,
f.

liberty, libertad, f.

library, biblioteca, f.

license, licencia, f.

life, vida, f.

light, luz, f.

to light, encender, 2.

do youlike? gle gusta
a V.2

I like, me gusta.

to limp, cojear, 1.

lion, leén, m.

list, lista, f.

to listen to, escuchar, 1.

little, pequefio, chiquito.

little, poco, adv.

to live, vivir, 3.

lively, alegre.:

lives, vive.

to lock up, encerrar,
1.

lodging, alojamiento, m.

London, Londres.

long, largo.

long time, mucho tiem-
po.

to look at, mirar, 1.

to look for, buscar, 1.

to lose, perder, 2.

loss, pérdida, f.

lost, perdido.

loud, alto.

Louisa, Luisa

love, amor, m.

to love, amar, 1.

do you love? gama
V.2

TI love, amo.

loved, amado,

low, bajo, comin,

luck, dicha, f,

 

GENERAL VOCABULARY.

madam, sefiora.

mahogany, caoba, f.

mail, correo. m.

to make, hacer, 2.

to make a mistake,
equivocarse, 1.

man, hombre, m.

to manage, gobernar, 1.

manner, costumbre, f.

manufacturer, _fabri-
cante.

to manufacture, fabri-
car, 1.

many, muchos, muchas.

maple, arce, m.

march, marcha, f.

to march, marchar, 1.

to marry, casar, 1. ca-
sarse, 1.

mask, mdscara, f.

mason, albajiil, m.

master, amo, m.

matter, asunto, m.

matter of import-
ance, cosa, f.

maxim, mdzima, f. sen-
tencia, f.

means, medio, m.

to measure, medir, 3.

meat, carne, f.

to meet, encontrar, 1.

memory, memoria, f.

merchant, comerciante,
m. mercader, m.

merit, merito, m.

mile, milla, f.

military, militar.

milk, leche, f.

mine, mina, f.

minute, minuto, m.

mirror, espejo, m.

miser, avaro, m.
misery, miseria, f.

misfortune, desgracia,
f.

mistake, equivocacién,f.

mob, populacho, m.

moment, momento, m.

money, dinero, m.

month, mes, m.

monument, monumento,
m.

moon, luna, f.

Moor, moro, m.

more, mds.

morning, mafiana, f.

the most, la mayor
parte.

mother, madre, f.

motive, motivo, m.

to mount, montar, 1.

mountain, monte, m.

mouse, raidn, m.

mouth, boca, f.

to move, mover, 2.

movement, movimiento,
m.

Mr., Sefior.

Mrs., Sefora.

much, mucho, mucha.

mud, lodo, m.

music, misica, f.

must, deber, 2.

my, mi.

N.

nail, ufa, f.

name, nombre, m.

nation, nacidn, f.

natural, natural.

navigation, navegacion,
f.

near, cerca.

nearly, cerca de.

necessary, preciso, me-
nester, necesario.

ENGLISH-SPANISH.

necessity, necesidad, f.

by necessity, por pre-
cision,

neck, pescuezo, m.

to need, necesitar, 1.

do you need? gnece-
sita V2

I need, necesito.

needs, necesita.

neither, tampoco, ni.

never, nunca, jamds.

new, nuevo.

news, noticia, f.

newspaper, periddico,
m.

next, prdoximo.

next week, la semana
que viene.

night, noche, f.

NO, no, ninguno.

nobody, nadie.

noise, ruido, m.

no longer, ya no.

no...more, no...mds.

none, ninguno.

no one, nadie.

nor, ni.

north, norte, m.

no sooner, apenas.

not any, ninguno.

not anybody, nadie.

not anything, nada.

not either, tampoco.

nothing, nada.

novel, novela, f.

now, ahora.

number, nimero, m.

nut, nuez, f.

oO.
obedient, obediente.

to obey, obedecer, 2.
object, objeto, m.

 

 

393

to oblige, obligar, 1.

obstinate, porfiado,

to obtain, obtener, 2.
conseguir, 3.

occasion, ocasidn, f.

to occupy, ocupar, 1.

of, de.

to offend, ofender, 2.

to offer, ofrecer, 2. su-
ministrar, 1.

officer, oficial, m.

office, escritorio, m.

often, d menudo.

oil, aceite, m.

old, viejo.

on, sobre.

only, solamente.

to open, abrir, 3,

opened, abierto.

opinion, op/nidn, f. con-
cepto, m.

orange, naranja, f.

to order, mandar, 1.

ordinary, comin.

other, otro.

ounce, onza, f.

out, afuera.

outcry, grito, m.

overcoat, sobretodo, m.

to overwhelm, colmar,
1.

to owe, deber, 2.

I owe, debo.

owes, debe.

owner, duefio, m.

ox, buey, m.

P.

package, paquete, m.
page, pagina, f.
painful, penoso.
painting, pintura, f.
palace, palacio, m.
394

paper, papel, m.

parents, padres, m. pl.

park, parque, m.

part, parte, f.

to pass, pasar, 1.

past, pasado.

paternal, paternal.

patience, paciencia, f.

patient (sick person),
enfermo, mM.

to pay, pagar, 1.

peace, paz, f.

pear, pera, f.

to peel, descascarar, 1.

pencil, /dépiz, m.

penknife, cortaplumas,
m.

people, gente, f.

to people, poblar, 1.

perhaps, acaso, tal vez.

person, persona, f.

Peter, Pedro.

Philip, Felipe.

physician, médico, m.

picture, retrato, m. cua-
dro.

piece, pieza, f. pedazo,
mn.

pink, clavel, m.

pious, pfo.

place, lugar, m.

plant, planta, f.

to play, jugar, 1. repre-
sentar, 1.

to play on, tocar, 1.

to please, complacer, 2.

pleased, contento.

pleasure, gusto, m.

poison, veneno, m.

polite, cortés, comedido.

Pompey, Pompeyo.

poor, pobre.

port, puerto, m.

possession, posesion, f.

possible, posible.

 

post, correo, m.

posterity, posteridad,f.

postman, cartero, m.

postoffice, correo, m.

pound, libra, f.

power, poder, m.

powerful, poderoso.

to practise, practicar,
1.

praise, alabanza, f.

to praise, alabar, 1.

precept, precepto, m.

to prefer, preferir, 3.

to prepare, preparar, 1.

prerogative, preroga-
tiva, f.

to prescribe, prescribir,

to present, presentar, 1.
press, imprenta, f.
to pretend, pretender, 2.
pretty, bonito.
price, precio, m.
prince, principe, m.
principle, principio, m.
prison, carcel, f.
prisoner, prisionero, m.
privilege, privilegio, m.
probable, probable.
probably, probable-
mente.
procession, procesién,

professor, profesor.

profitable, ventajoso.

to promise, prometer, 2.

to pronounce, pronun-
ciar, 1.

proof, prueba, f.

to be proper, convenir,

property, propiedad, f.
propitious, propicio.
to propose, proponer, 2.
proud, orgulloso,

 

GENERAL VOCABULARY.

to prove, probar, 1.
provided, con tal que.
public, piiblico.
pulled down, demolido.
to punish, castigar, 1.
pupil, disctpulo, m.

to put on, ponerse, 2.
put, puesto.

Q.

queen, reina, f.
question, pregunta, f.
quick, ligero.
quickly, pronto.
quiet, quieto.

R.

railroad, ferrocarril,
m.

rain, lluvia, f.

to rain, lover, 2.

rare, raro.

rather, algo.

to read, leer, 2.

read, leédo.

ready, listo.

reason, razon, f.

to receive, recibir, 3.

received, recibido.

to recommend, reco-
mendar, 1.

recompense, recom-
pensa, f.

red, colorado, encendido.

to reéstablish, restable-
cer, 2.

refreshment, refresco,
m.

regiment,
In.

to regret, sentir, 3.

regimiento,
to reign, reinar, 1.

to rejoice, alegrarse, 1.

to relate, referir, 3.

to remain, guedarse, 1.

to remember, acor-
darse, 1.

to remove, apartar, 1.

to repeat, repetir, 3.

to repent, arrepenti7se,
3.

to repress, reprimir, 3.

to reside, residir, 3.

to resolve, resolver, 2.

to rest, descansar, 1.

to respect, respetar, 1.

to result, provenir, 3.

to return, volver, 2. de-
volver, 2.

return, vuelva V.

to revolt, sublevar, 1.

rich, rico.

a very rich man, rica-
chon, m.

right, derecho.

ripe, maduro.

to rise, levantarse, 1.

river, rio, m.

road, camino, m.

rogue, picaro, m.

Roman, Romano, m.

Romulus, Romulo.

room, cuarto, m.

rose, rosa, f.

to rot, podrir, 3.

rudeness, groseria, f.

ruin, ruina, f.

to ruin, arruinar, 1.

to run, correr, 2.

Russia, Rusia.

Russian, Ruso.

saber, sable, m.
sacred, sagrado.

 

ENGLISH-SPANISH.

sad, triste.

saddle, silla, f.

safe, caja, f.

said, dicho,

sailor, marinero, m.

same, mismo.

satisfied, satisfecho, con-
tento.

to say, decir, 3.

say, diga V.

says, dice.

scholar, discipulo, m.

school, escuela, f.

science, ciencia, f.

Scipio, Escipion.

to scream, gritar, 1.

season, estacion, f.

seated, sentado.

scissors, tijeras, f. pl.

to see, ver, 2.

do you see? gve V.2

I see, veo.

seem, parecen.

seen, visto.

sees, ve.

to select, escoger, 2.

self, mismo.

to sell, vender, 2.

do you sell? ¢gvende
V2

I sell, vendo.

sells, vende.

to send, mandar, 1. en-
viar, 1.

send, mande V.

sent, enviado.

servant, criado, m.

servantgirl, criada, f.

served, servido.

service, servicio, m.

several, varios, m. va-
rias, f.

to shave, afeitar, 1.

sheet, sdbana, f.

shilling, peseta, f.

 

395

ship, buque, m.

shirt, camisa, f.

shoe, zapato, m.

shoemaker, zapatero,
m.

to shoot, fusilar, 1.

shop, tienda, f.

short, corto.

to show, mostrar, 1.

to shut, cerrar, 1.

shut, cerrado.

sick, enfermo.

side, lado, m.

silent, callado.

silk, seda, f.

silly, tonto.

silver, plata, f.

since, desde, desde que.

to sing, cantar, 1.

singer, cantatriz, f.

singing, canto, m.

sings, canta.

singular, singular.

Sir, sejior.

sister, hermana, f.

to sit down, sentarse,
1.

situation, empleo, m.
colocacién, f.

skillful, habil.

slate, pizarra, f.

to sleep, dormir, 3.

sleigh, trineo, m.

slowly, despacio.

small, pequeno.

smell, olor, m.

snow, nieve, f.

80, ast, tan.

society, sociedad, f.

sold, vendido.

some, alguno.

somebody, alguien, ab
guno.

some one, alguno.

something, algo.
396

something else, otra
cosa.

sometimes, algunas
veces.

somewhere, alguna
parte.

son, hijo, m.

song, cancion, f.

soon, pronto.

I am sorry for it, lo
siento.

so that, asi que.

soup, sopa, f.

sour, agrio.

to sow, sembrar, 1.

Spain, Espajia, f.

Spaniard, Espafol, m.

Spanish, espajol.

do you speak?
éhabla V.? sing.
jhablan VV.? pl.

I speak, hablo.

they speak, hablan.

speaks, habla.

species, especie, f.

speculation, especula-
cion, f.

to spend, gastar, 1.

spends, gasta.

splendid, magnffico.

spoken, hablado.

spot, lugar, m.

spring, primavera, f.

squadron, escuadra, f.

stab (with a poniard),
puralada, f.

stable, caballeriza, f.

to stand, pararse, 1.

standing, parado.

star, estrella, f.

state, estado, m.

statue, estatua, f. .

to steal, robar, 1.

steam, vapor, m.

steamer, vapor, m.

 

stocking, media, f.
store, almacén, m.
stranger, estrangero, m.
strawberry, /resa, f.
street, calle, f.
strength, fuerza, f.
to strike, pegar, 1.
strong, fuerte.
student, estudiante, m.
studied, estudiado.
studious, estudioso.
study, estudio, m.
to study, estudiar, 1.
do you study ? ¢estu-
dian, VV.2
we study, estudiamos.
to subdue, someter, 2.
suburbs, contornos, m.
pl.
such as, tal.
suddenly, de repente.
to suffer, padecer, 2.
to suffocate, sufocar, 1.
sugar, azicar, m.
sun, sol, m.
sunshade, quitasol, m.
supper, cena, f.
to support, mantener, 2.
to suppose, suponer, 2.
supreme, supremo.
sure, seguro.
surprised, sorprendido,
to surrender, rendirse,
3.
to suspend, suspender,
2:
sweet, dulce.
swollen, hinchado,

T.

table, mesa, f.

tailor, sastre, m.

to take, tomar, 1. llevar,
1. conducir, 3.

 

GENERAL VOCABULARY.

to take a walk, dar
un paseo, pasearse, 1,

totake interest, intere-
sarse, 1.

to take off, quitarse, 1.

to take possession,
apoderarse, 1.

tale, cuento, m

talent, talento, m.

tall, alto,

Tartary, Tartaria, f.

tea, té, m.

teacher, maestro, m.

teaches, ensefia.

tear, ldgrima, f.

Telemachus,
maco.

to tell, decir, 3.

tell, diga V.

tells, dice.

thankful, agradectdo,

thank you, gracias.

I (or we) thank you,
muchas gracias.

that, aquello, ese.

that, que.

that thing, aquello, eso

theater, teatro, m.

then, despues.

theological, teologal.

theoretical, tedrico.

there, ahi, allé.

therefore, asf.

there is, hay.

thief, ladrén, m.

thing, cosa, f.

to think, pensar, 1.

this, esie.

this thing, esto.

three, tres.

through, por.

thunder, trueno, m.

thus, asi.

tiger, tigre, m.

till, Aasta.

Telé
time, tiempo, m. hora f.
vez, f.

timid, tfmido.

tired, cansado.,

to-day, hoy.

together, junto.

to-morrow, majiana.

too, demasiado, también.

too many, demasiados.

too much, demasiado.

tooth, diente, m.

tower, torre, f.

town, pueblo, m.

to translate, traducir,
3.

translation, traduccién,
f.

transparent, traspa-
rente.

to travel, viajar, 1.

to treat, tratar, 1.

tree, drbol, m.

to tremble, temblar, 1.

trifle, bagatela, f. frio-
lera, f.

trimmed bordado.

to trouble, molestar, 1.

trunk, dad, m.

truth, verdad, f.

turkey, pavo, m.

to turn, mover, 2. vol-
ver, 2.

two, dos.

Uv.

ugly, feo.

umbrella, paraguas, m.

uncle, tio, m.

under, bajo.

to understand, enten-
der, 2. comprender, 2.

unfortunate, desgra-
ciado.

 

ENGLISH-SPANISH.

unfortunately, por
desgracia.

unhappy, infeliz.

unless, d@ menos que.

until, hasta, hasta que.

unwell, malo.

unworthy, indigno.

upon, sobre.

to upset, derribar, 1.

upstairs, arriba.

urbanity, urbanidad,
f.

us, nosotros.

useful, dtil.

useless, indutil.

Vv.

vegetable, legumbre, f.

verse, verso, m.

very, muy, mismo.

vessel, buque, m. barco,
m.

vest, chaleco, m.

victory, victoria, f.

village, pueblo, m.aldea,

virtue, virtud, f.
to visit, visitar, 1.
volume, tomo, m.

w.

to wait, esperar, 1.
aguardar, 1.

walk, paseo, m.

to walk, andar, 1.

walkingstick, bastdén,
m.

wall, muro, m.

war, guerra, f.

warm, caliente.

to warm, calentar, 1.

 

397

was, era.

to wash, lavar, 1.

washerwonian, lavan-
dera, f.

watchful, wgilante.

water, agua, f.

way, modo, m. medio.

weak, dévil.

week, semana, f.

to weep, dlorar, 1,

weeps, llora.

well, pozo, m.

well, bien, pues, bueno,

what, qué.

when, cuando.

where, donde.

which, que.

white, blanco.

who, quien.

whom, d quien.

whose ? ¢ de qui€n?

why ? 4 porqué?

wife, mujer, f.

will find, encontrard.

I will have, quiero.

William, Guillermo.

will you have? gquiere
V.2

wind, viento, m.

.| window, ventana, f.

wine, vino, m.

winter, invierno, m.

wise, sabio.

wisely, sabiamente.

wish, quieren.

do you wish? ¢ quiere
Vi?

I wish, quiero.

we wish, deseamos.

wishes, quiere, desea.

with, con.

within, dentro de.

with me, conmigo.

without, afuera, sin.

woman, mujer, f.
398 GENERAL VOCABULARY.

wood, bosque, m. lefia, | worthy, digno.
; would to God! Ojala! Y.
word, palabra, f. wounded, herido.
work, trabajo, m. obra, |to write, escribir, 3. yard, patio, m. vara, f,
do youwrite? gescribe| year, a%o, m.

to work, trabajar, 1. V.2 yes, sf.
workman, obrero, m. |I write, escribo. yesterday, ayer.
works, trabaja. writes, escribe. yet, todavta, aun,
world, mundo, m. writing, escritura,f. | young, joven.

to be worth, valer, 2. | written, escrito. youth, juventud, f.
ini